TH E R O S I C R U OI A N

C O S M O CON CE P T I O N -

C H R I S T I A N O C C U LT
S C IE N C E

AN ELEMENT AR Y T REA T I S E U P ON

M AN S P AS T
’
EVOLU T ION P R E S E N T CO N S TITU
,

TION AN D FU TU R E DE VE LO P M E N T

BY

M A X H E I N DE L

P ROVE I
ALL TH NG S —P AU L

FIR ST E DITI O N

P R IC E ; ON E DO L LA R

R O SI C R U CIAN FELLO WS H IP
PO S T O FFI CE B OX 1 8 02 S E A TT L E WAS H
, , .

IND E P E ND E N T B OOK C O “
.

18 26
-
VA N B U R E N S T R E E T C H I C A G O
, ,
I LL .
 C O P YR I G H T 1 9 0 9
BY
M A X H E I N DE L

A ll r ig h ts i n c l u d i ng tr a n s l a ti on r es er v e d .

P er mi s s i on to cop y or t ra n s l a te w i l l b e ,
r e a d il y g i ve n u p on a p p l i cat i on

t o A u t h or .

M . DO N O H U E a co
A . .

P R I N T E R S , B I N DE E S ,
P U B L I S H E R S , C HI C A G O

"CIA2 5 1 7 5 4
.
To my l
v a ue d f rie nd . DR . R U DO LP H
STEIN ER in grate ful , i
re c o gn it on o f m uc h va l
ua h le in fo rma tion i
re c e v e d; an d to m y f rie n d .

DR ALM A V O N B RAN DIS

.
. in he a r tfe lt
a pp re c ia t o n i o f the ine s tim a b le in flue n ce fo r
sou l -
grow th s he h as i d
e x c e rc se in my li f
e.
 A WORD TO THE WI SE .

The f ou n d er b f the Chr i st i an Rel i gi on stated an occult

maxim when H e sa i d : Whosoe v er shall not receive the
“

”
kingdom of God as a little child shall not ente r therein
( Mark x : All occult i sts recogni z e the far reaching -

importance of th i s teaching of Christ and endeavor to

,

”
“
l ive i t day by day .

When a new ph i losophy is presented to th e worl d it is

met in different ways by d ifier en t people .

On e person w i ll grasp with avidity any new philosophical

eff ort in an e nd eavor to ascertain how far i t s up p or ts hi s
own i d eas . To such an one the ph i losophy itse l f is of
minor importance Its prime value w i ll be its vindication
.

of H I S ideas I f the work comes up to ex pectation in that

.

respect he will enthusiastically adopt it and cl ing to it

,

with a most unreasoning part i sanship ; if not he will prob ,

ab l y lay the book down in disgust and disappointment ,

feeling as if the author had done h i m an injury .

Another adopts an attitude of skepticism as soon as he

di scovers that it conta i ns something which H E has not
previously read heard or originated i n his own thought
, , :

H e would probably rese nt as extremely unjustified the

accusation that h i s mental attitude is the acme of se lf
satisfacti on and intolerance ; such is neverth eless the case ;
and thus he shuts his m i nd to any truth which m ay possibly
be hidden in that wh i ch h e off hand re j ects
-
.

Both these classes stand in their own light Set i deas

.

”
render them impervious to rays of truth . A l i ttle ch i ld
“

5
6 A WO RD T O TH E WISE

IS the very opposite of its elders i n that respect It is not .

imbu ed with an overwhelming sense of superior knowledge ,

n or does it fee l compelled to look W ise or to hide i ts

nesci ence of any subject by a sm ile or a sneer It is f rankly .

ignorant unfettered by precon ceivedfopin ion s an d therefore

,

em i n en tly teach ab le It takes everything with that beauti

.

ful attitude of trust which we have d e signated child like “

-

faith wherein there is not the shadow of a doubt There

,
.

the child holds the teaching it receives until proven or

disproven .

In all occult school s the pupil is fi rst taught to forget

all else when a new teaching is be i ng given to allow neither ,

p reference n or prejudice to govern but to kee p th e mind

,

in a state of calm, dignified wa i ti ng As sk ept i cism will

.

bl i nd us to truth in the most effective manner so this calm , ,

trustful attitude of the m i n d w i ll allow the intuition or ,

”
“
teach i ng from with i n to become aware of the truth con
,

tain ed i n the proposition Th at i s the only way to culti

.
'

v at e an absolutely certa i n perception of truth .

The pupil is not required to bel i eve Off hand that a -

given object which he has Obse rved to be white is rea lly ,

black when such a sta tement is made to him ; but he must

,
”
cult i vate an attitude of mind which believeth all th i ngs
“

as p ossi b l e That wi l l allow him to put by for the time

.

be i ng eve n What is generally considered establ i shed “

facts ,
and investigate if perchance there b e a noth er
viewpoint hitherto unobserved by him whence the object
referre d to would appe ar black Indeed he would not
.
,

allow h i mself to look upon anything as an es tab lish ed “

”
fac ,t for he realizes thoroughly the importance O f kee p i ng
h i s mind in the fiu i d al state of adap tabi li ty which charac
ter i zes the little child H e realizes in every fibre of his
‘

“ ”
being that now we see through a gl ass darkly and , ,
 A WO RD T O TH E W IS E 7

Aj ax l ike h e is ever on the alert yearning for Ligh t

-
,
“
,
”
more Ligh t .

The enorm ous advantage of such an attitude of mind

when investigating any given subject obj ect or ide a must ,

be apparent Statements which appear positively an d

.

une q uivoca l ly contradictory which have caused an immense

,

amoun t of fee ling among the advocate s of opposite sides ,

may nevertheless be capable of perfec t reconciliation a s ,

shown in one such instance mentione d in the present work .

Th e b on d f o con cor d is on ly discov ered by th e Op en m in d,

h owever and though the present work may be found to
,

diff er from others the writer would bespeak an impartia l

,

hearing as the basis of s u bs equ en t judgment If the book .

”
“
is weighed and found wanting the writer wi ll have no ,

complaint H e only fea r s a has ty judgment based upon

.

l ack of knowl edge of the system he advocate s—a hearing

” “
wherein th e judgment is wanting in con sequence of
” “
h aving been denied an impartia l w eighing H e would .

further submit that the only Opinion worthy of the one

,

who expresse s it m us t b e bas ed up on know ledg e .

As a further reason for care in judgment we sugges t

that to many it is exceedingly difficul t to retract a hastily
expre ssed opinion Therefore it is urged that the reader
.

withhold all expressions of either praise or bl ame unti l

study of the work h as reason ab ly satisfied h im of its merit
or demerit .

The Rosicrucian C osmo conception is not do gmatic -

,

neither does it appe al to any other authority than the

reason of the student It is not controversial but is sent
.
,

fort h in the hope that it may help to cle ar some of the

difficul ties wh ich have beset the minds of students of the
deeper ph ilosophies in the past In order to avoid serious .

mi su nderstanding it sh oul d be firmly impre ssed upon the

,
8 A WO R D TO TH E
.
WIS E

mmd of the student however that there is no infallible

, ,

revelat i on of thi s compl i cat ed subject which includes ,

everything under the sun and above it also .

An infalli ble exposition would predicate om m smen ce

upon the part of the writer and even the E l der Brothers
,

tell us that they are sometimes at fault in their j udgment ,

so a book which shall say the last word on the World .

Mystery 18 out of the question and the writer of the pre sent
,

work d oes not pretend to gi v e aught but the most e l e

mentary teachings of the Rosicrucians .

The Rosicrucian Brotherhood has the most far reach ing -

,

the most logical c onception of the World Mystery of which -

th e writer h as gained any knowledge dur i ng the many

years he has devoted e x clu sively to the study of this
subject So far as he has been able to i nvestigate their
.
,

teach i ngs have been found in accordance with facts as he

knows them Yet he is convinced that the R osicru s1an
.

Cosmo conception is far from being the last word on the

-

subject that as we adv ance greater vistas of truth will o en

,

to us and make clear many things which we now see p “

”
through a glass darkly ,
At the same time he firm ly be
.

l i ev es that all other philosophies of the future will follow

the same ma i n l ines for they a ppear to be absolutely true
, .

In vie w of the foregoing it will be plain that this book

is not considered by the wri ter as the Alph a and Omeg a ,

the ult imate of occult knowledge and even though it is ,

ent itled The Rosicrucian Cosmo conception the writer

“
-
,

d es i res to strongly emphasiz e that it is not to be under

”
stood as a faith once f Or all delivere d to the Rosicrucians
“

by the foun d er Of the Order or by any other individual .

It i s emphat i cally stated that th is wor k em b odi es on ly th e

w ri ter s u n d ers tan di n g of th e R osi cr u cia n tea ch i n gs con
’

cerni ng the World Mystery strengthened by his personal

-

,
 A W OR D To TH E WIS E 9

inve stiga tions of the inner Worl ds the ante nata l and post
,
-

mortem states of man etc Th e responsib i lity which de

, .

volves upon one who wittingly or unwittingly leads other s

astray is clea rly realized by the write r and he wishes to
,

guard himself as far as poss i ble aga i nst that contingency ,

and also to guard others against the possibi l ity of going

wrong inad vertentl y .

What is said i n this work is therefore to be accepted or

rejected by the reader according to h i s own discretion Al l .

diligence has b een used in trying to understand the teach

.

ing ; great p ains have been taken to put it into Words that
shall be most eas i ly understood For that reason only one
.

te rm has been use d throughout the work to convey each

idea The same word will ha v e the same meaning where
.

ever use d When any word descriptive of an i de a is fi rst

.

used the clearest definition poss ible to the writer is given

,
.

N one but English te rms and the simplest language have

been employed The writer has consta ntly en d eavore d to
.

give as exact and definite descriptions of the subject under

consideration as possible ; to eliminate all ambiguity and
to make everythin g cl ear H ow f arhe has succee ded must
.

be l eft to the student to judge ; but having diligently used

every possible endea v or to convey the teaching he fee l s ,

compelled to guard also against the possibility of this work

being taken as an au th oritative statement of the Rosi oru
eian teachings .N eglect of this precaution might give
undue weight to this work in the minds of some st udents .

That would not be fair to th e Brotherhood nor to the

reader It would have a tendency to throw the responsi
.

b il i ty upon the Brotherhood for the mistake s which must

occur in this as in al l other human works H ence the above
.

warning .

There is an Indi an story wh ich says that anyone who h as

10 A W O RD To T H E W IS E

two semi circul a r lines on the pal m side of the outer j oint
- -

”
of the thumb carries a gr ain of rice with him
“
.

They asse rt that such an one will a lways be well

received h ospitably treated and befriende d where v er he
,

goes The write r has the mark mentioned and the prog
.
,

n osti cati on has been marvel ously true in his case Friends .

have met him everywhere and have treated h im in such a

way that he has been lite rally overwhelmed with kindness
at every turn S O also in th e work upon this book
. Dr . .

von Brandis furnished th e means whereby he first came

in to contact with the Rosicrucian teachings K ingsmi ll .

Commander and Mrs J Brewster loyally helped him in a

. . .

liter ary sense Mrs M E Rath Merrill an d Miss Allene

,
‘

. . .

Merrill executed a numbe r of the drawings and Wm M , . .

Patterson has given to the writer not only personal services

but financial aid to en ab l e h i m to p u b lis h at cos t of prin t
in g an d h an d li n g This wor k has been pro duced for
.

l
’
Love s sake N O one con n ected with it from first to l ast
‘

has recei v ed or will recei v e a penny of recompense All .

ha v e given freely of time and money Therefore the writer .

wishes to express h i s heartfelt gratitude to them all and ,

the earnest hope that they may find other and greater
opportunities for the ex ermse of unse l fish service .

MAX H EIN DEL .

 LIS T O F C ON T E NT S .

P AR T I .

M AN S’
C ONS TI TU T I O N AN D P RE S EN T M E T H OD OF D EVELOP M EN T .

i ie
F ron t sp ce Di a gr am 1 6 T h e Lor d s P raye r
, ,
’
.

A Word to th e Wi se
In trod uc ti on

C H AP TE R I . Th e V i sibl e a n d I n v i sib l e Worl d s

C h em ical R egion of th e P h ysical Wor l d
E th er ic R egi on of th e P h ysi cal W or l d
T h e De sir e World
T h e Worl d of T h ou gh t
Di a gr am 1 T h e M a t er I a l W orl d a R ev e rs e R efl ection
.

of th e S p ir i tu al W o
Dia gram 2 T h e .

C H APTER I I T h e F our Ki n gd om s
.

Dia gr am 3 T h e V eh icl es of th e F our Ki n g d om s

.

Di a gram 4 Th e C onscious ness of th e F our Kin g d om s

. .

C HAPTER III M an an d th e M eth od of E v olu ti on

. .

A ctiv ities of Li f e ; M em ory a n d S oul gr ow th -

.

T h e C on sti tuti on of th e S ev en f ol d M an -

i g r
D a r am 5 T h e Th ee f ol d S p r t, th e T h r ee f ol d B o d y ii
‘

- -
.

a n d th e Th r ee f ol d S ou l -

Dea th an d P u at or y rg
i g
D a ra m T h e S lv er or d i C
Th e B or d er l a n d
T h e F s t H eav en ir
Th e S econ d H eav en .

Th e T h d H eav en ir
r
P r ep a a ti on s f or e rth R bi j

i
B r th of th e De n s e B od y .

i
B rt h of th e Vi
tal B od y a n d G r ow th
i i
B rth of th e Des r e B od y a n d P u er ty b
i
B rth of th e M n d an d M a j or ty i i .

Th e B l ood ; th e V
ehi cl e of th e E g o

CHAP TER IV . Re birth an d th e Law of C onse qu ence

Win e as a F actor i n E v ol u t on i .

A Remark b a l e S to y r
 CON TEN T S .

AR T I I P .

C OS M O GE NE SIS AN D A N T H ROP OGE N E SIS .

C HAPT ER V Th e R el ati on of M an to G od
.

Di a g ra m 6 T h e S u p r em e B ei g t h e Cosmi c
. n ,
P l an e s
an d G od .

C HA PTER VI . Th e S ch em e of E v ol u tion .

Th
T h e S ev e
T h e S ev e n P er i o d s
i g
D a r am 7 Th e S atu . rn P er i od
C HAPTER VII Th e P ath of E v ol u ti on
.

Rev olu ti on s a n d Cosm ic N ig h ts

Di a gr am 8 T h e S ev en W or l d s .
, S ev en Gl o b es an d
S ev en P eri od s

CHA PTER VIII Th e Wor . k of E v oluti on .

Ar i a d n e s T h r ead
T h e S a tu r n P e r o d i
R i
e c a p tu l a t on i
T h e M oon P e r od i
i g
D a r am of a L f e C y cl e i ( se e Ch ap te III ) r .

i g
D a r am 9 T h e T w el v e . C r ea t v e H i e ar ch ies
i r

C HA PTER I X S tra ggl ers an d N ew com er s

. .

Cl ass es of B ein gs a t th e B e g i nn in g of th e M oon P er i od

Di agra m 1 0 C l asses a t t h e B e gi n n i n g of E a r th
. P er i od
C HAPT ER X T h e E ar th P er iod
.

S atur n R ev ol u tion o f t h e E a r th P e ri od
S u n R ev ol u ti on of t h e E ar th P er i od
M oon R ev ol u tion of th e E a rth P er iod
R est P er iod s B etw een Rev olu tions
T h e F ou rth R ev ol u tion of th e E ar th P er i od

C HAPTER XI . G en es is a nd E vol u tion of Ou r S ol ar S ystem .

Ch a os
The B i r th
th e P l an ets of .

i
D a g r a m Th e F our K n g d oms ( s e e h a p te r
.
) i C II .

i g
D a r a m 1 2 M a n s P a st, P r es ent a n d F utur e F or m
’
. .

C HA PTER XII E v ol ut on on th e E ar th
. i .

Th e P ol a r i an E p och .

Th e H yp er or e an E p och b
The M oon ; th e E h th S p h er e ig
The L em u r an E p och i .
 C ON TE N T S .
13

i
B r th of th e I n d v d ua l i i
i
S ep ara t on of t h e S ex e s
fl
I n u en ce of M ar s
The R
a c e s a n d T h e r L ea d er s i
fl
I n u e n ce o f M er cu r y
T h e L em u r a n a ce i R
T h e F a l l of M a n .

i
T h e Lu c f er S p r ts ii .

Th e A tl a n tea n E p och
T h e A r y a n E p och .

i
T h e S x t ee n P a th s to Dest ru ct i on
C H APT ER XIII B ack t o th e B ib l e
‘

. .

C H APTER XIV O ccult An al y si s of Ge n esi s .

Li m i tatl on s of th e B ib l e
I n th e B egi n ni n g .

T h e N eb ul ar T h eor y .

Th e C r ea tiv e H i e r a r ch i e s
T h e S atu r n P er i od
T h e S u n P er i od , th e M oon P e r iod
T h e E art h P eri od
Jeh ov ah an d H i s M i ssi on
I n v ol u ti on , E v ol u ti on a n d E p ig en esis .

G u a r d ia n An gel s
M i x i n g B l ood i n M a r ri a g e
T h e F a ll of M a n
Begi nn i n g
“

Di agram 1 8 . Th e an d E nd of S ex

AR T III P .

M AN S F U TURE DEVELOP M EN T AN D I NI T IAT I O N

’
.

C HAP TE R X V .C h ri st and H i s M issi on .

Th e E v ol u tion o f R el ig ion .

J esu s a nd C h r is t Jesus
Di a gr am 1 4 T h e F a th er th e S on a n d t h e H oly S p i r it
.
,
N ot P e a ce b u t a S w ord
T h e S tar of B et hl eh em
T h e H ea r t an A n om aly
T h e M ys tery of G ol oth a g
C
Th e l ea n s n B l ood i g
CH AP TER XVI F u tu r e Dev el op m ent
. an d I n i ti ation .

Th e S ev en Da ys of r eat on C i
i g
D a r am 1 5 T h e S ym ol sm
. b i of t h e Ca d u ces
R i k
a d a t e s, M ol l u s s , A r t cul a te s i an d V
ert e r a tes b
14 CO N T EN T S .

Al ch e m y a n d S oul row th

Th e C rea t v e Wor
i
C HAPTER XVII T h e M eth od
. of A c q u i r i n g F ir s t H a n d -

Knowled ge .

T h e F irs t S teps
Western M eth od s f or W ester n P eop l e
T h e S cien ce o f N u trition
T ab l e of F ood Va l u es -

Th e L aw of A s si m il a ti on
Liv e a n d Le t Liv e
Th e L or d s P ray er
’

T h e V ow of C el ib a cy
Th e l P i tui tary B od y an d th e P in eal G l an d
Di ag r am 1 7 P a th of th e U n u s e d S ex C urre n ts
.

E soteri c T r ai nin g .

H ow th e I n n er V ehi cl e i s B uil t
C oncentrati on
o M ed i tation
O b servation
Di scri m i na ti on
Contemp lation
Ad or ation

C H APT ER XVI I I Th e C onstituti on of

. th e E a rth and V ol canic
E ru p ti ons
T h e N um b er of th e B east .

Diagram 1 8 T h e C on s ti tu ti on
. of th e E ar th .

C H APTER XIX Ch ri s tian Rosenkreuz

. and r r
th e O d e of th e
Ros y Cr oss
T h e M i ssi on of th e Rosi cr u cian i
F ellow sh p
I nd ex
18 R O SI CR UCIAN C OS M O C O N C E P T IO N
-

and mute unsatisfied l ongings gnawing at its tendrils as

,
’
the vulture at P rometheus liv er .

Is this nece s sary ? Is there n o common ground upon

Wh i ch he ad an d heart may meet each assisting the other
, ,

each by the he l p of the other becoming m ore effective i n

the Se arch for univer sal truth and each receiving equal
,

sat isfaction
As surely as the pre existing light created the eye whereby
-

the light i s seen ; as surely as the primord i al d es i re for

growth create d the d igestive and assimilative system for
the attainment of that end ; as surely as thought exi ste d
before the brain and built and still is bui l d ing the brain
f or its e x pr es sI On ; as surely as the min d is now forg i ng
ahead an d wr m g m g her se crets from na ture by the very
force of its audac i ty just so surely will the heart find a
,
“

way to burst its bonds an d gratify its longings At present .

it is shackled by the dominant bra i n Some day it wil l .

gather strength to burst its prl son bars and become a power
g reater than the mind .

It is equally certain that there can be no contradiction

in nature therefore the heart and the m i nd must be capa
,

ble of uniting To indicate this common ground is pre

.

ci sely the purpose of this book To show where and how

.

the mind helped by the intuition of the heart can probe

, ,

more deepl y into the mysteries of being than either could

do alone ; where the heart by union with the mind can be
, ,

kept from going astray ; where each can have full scope
“

for action, neither doing violence to the other and where

both mind and heart can be satisfied .

Only when that co operation is attained and perfected

-

wi ll man attain the higher truer u nderstanding of h i mself

,

and of the world of which he is a part ; only that can gi ve

~

h im a broad m i nd and a great heart .

 IN TR O D U C T IO N 19

At every birth wh at appears to be a new l ife comes

among us We see th e l ittle form as it lives and grows
.
,

b ecoming a f actor In our l ives f or days months or years , ,

.

At last there Comes a day when the form dies and go es to

decay The l i f e that came whence we know not has
.
, ,

passed to th e invisible beyond and i n sorrow we ask our ,

'

sel v es Wh ence ca me it ? Why was it here ? and Whither

,

has it gone ?
Across every thresh old the skeleton form of Death
throws his fearsome shadow Ol d or young well or ill .
, ,

rich or poor all all al i ke must pass out into that Shad ow
, ,

and throughout the ages has sounded the piteous Cry f or

a solution of the riddle of l ife—the riddle of death .

S o far as the v ast maj ority of people are conce rned the
three great questions Whence have we come ? Why are we
,

here ? Whither are we going ? remain unanswered to thi s

day It has unfortunately come to be the popularly ac
.

c epted opinion that nothing can be definitely k n own about

thes e matters of deepest interest to humanity N othing .

coul d be more erroneous than such an idea E ach and .

e v ery one without exception may become capable of obtain

, ,

ing first hand definite information upon this subject ; may

-
,

p ersonal l y i nvestiga te the state of the human spirit bot h ,

before birth an d afte r death There is n o favoritism nor .

,

are spe cial gifts required Each of us h as inherentl y the

faculty for knowing all of these matters ; but —Yes there
.

,
” ”
is a but and a B U T that must be written l arge Thes e
“ “
‘

, .

faculties are present in all though latent in most pe ople , .

It requires persistent efiort to awaken them and that seems

to be a powerful dete rrent If these faculties awake and .
,
”
aware could be had for a monetary consideration even if
, ,

the price were high many peopl e would pay it to gain such
,

immense advantage over their fe ll ow men b ut few indeed -

,
20 RO SI CR UCIAN CO SM O CO NCE P T I O N
-

are those Willing to live the l ife that is requi red to awaken
them That awakening comes only by patient pers i stent
.
,

e ff or t It cannot be bought ; there i s no royal roa d to it

. .

It is conceded that practice is nece ssary to learn to play

the piano and that i t is useless to th i nk of b eing a watch
,

maker wi thout be i ng w i ll i ng to serve an apprenticeship .

Yet when the matter of the soul of death an d the beyond , ,

of the great causes of being are the quest i ons at issue , ,

many th i nk they know as much as an yone and have an

equal right to express an Opinion though they may never ,

have given the Subj ect an h Ou r s study ’

.

As a matter of fact, no one unless qual ifie d by study

of the subject should expect serious consideration for an

opinion In legal cases where experts are called to testify

.
, ,

they are first examined as to their competency The weight .

O f their testimony wil l be n i l unless they are f ound to be

,
“

th oroughly proficient in the branch of knowledge regarding

wh i ch their testimony is sought
—
If however they are found to be q u al ified b y study
—
, ,

and practice to express an expert Opinion it is recei ved ,

with the utmost respect and deference ; and if the testi

'

mo ny of one expert is corroborated by others equal ly pro

fici en t the testimony of e ach additional man adds im
,

m en sely to the weight of the previous e v idence .

The irrefutable testimony of one such man easily coun

terb alan ces that of one o r a doze n or a mill ion men wh o
know nothing of that wh ereo f they speak for nothing , ,

ev en though multipl ied by a mill ion wi ll still remain ,

nothing This is as true of any other sub j ect as of mathe

.

m atics .

As previousl y said we recognize these f acts readily

,

enough in material aff airs but wh en things beyond th e

,

worl d Of sense wh en th e super physica l worl d is under

,
-
 I N T RO DU C T ION 21

discussion ; wh en the rel ations of God to man the inner ,

most mysteries of the immortal spark Of divin i ty l oose ly ,

termed the soul, are to be probed then each clamors for ,

as serious consideration of his opinions and ideas reg ard

ing spiritual matters as is given to the sage who by a l i f e ,

of patient an d toil some research h as ac q uired wisdom in

these higher things .

N ay more many w ill n ot e ven content them se l ves with

,

claiming equa l conside r ation for their Opl Il l OIl S but wil l ,

even jeer and scoff at the words Of the sage seek to impugn ,

his testimony as fraud an d with the supreme cOn fid en ce , ,

of d eepest i gnorance asse verate that a s th ey kno w nothing

,

of such matte rs it is absolutely impossible that anyon e

,

else can .

The man who realizes h is ignorance h as taken the fi rs t

step towar d knowledge .

Th e path to fir st hand knowledge is not easy

-
N oth ing .

worth hav i ng ever comes w i thout per sistent eff ort It can .

not be too often repeated that ther e are no such things as

”
special gi fts or luck A l l th at anyone is or has i s the
‘
“
.
,

result Of effort What one lacks in comp arison with an

.

other is latent in him self an d capable of development by

proper meth ods .

'
I f the reader havin g grasped this idea thorough l y
, ,

should ask what he must do to Obtain this fir st h and

,
-

knowledge the foll owing story may serve to impres s th e

,

i dea wh i ch is the centra l one in occultis m

,

A young man came to a sage one day and asked Sire ,

“
,
”
what must I do to become wi se ? The sage vouchsafed
no answer The youth after repeating h i s question a num
.

ber of times with a l i ke result at last left him to return

, , ,

the next day with the same que st i on Again no answer was .

g i ven and the youth returne d on th e third day stil l repe at ,

 92 RO S I C RUC I A N COS M o CONCEPTIO N -

”
mg his question Sire what must I do to become wise ?
,
“
,

Finally the sage turned and went down to a near b y -

r iver H e entered the water bidding the youth follow him

.
,
.

Upon arriving at a suff icient de pth the sage took the young
“

man by the shoulders an d held him under the wate r despite

-
,

his struggles to free h i mself At last ho wever he rele ased .

, ,

him and when the youth h ad regained h i s breath the sage

questioned him
Son when you were under the w ater wh at d i d you
“
,
”
most desire ?
The youth answered without hes i tation
“
Air a i r " , ,

I wante d air " ”

Would you not rather have h ad riches pleasure power

’ “
, ,
”
or l ove my son ? Did you not thi nk of any of these ?
,

queried the saga .

N o sire "I wanted air and thought only of air

“
,
came ,

the instant response .

Then said the sage to become wise you must desire

“ ”
, ,
“

wi sdom with as great intensity as you just now des i red air .

You m ust struggle for it to the exclusion of every othe r ,

aim i n l i fe It must be your one and only aspiration by

‘

.
,

day and by night If you seek wisdom with th at fervor

.
,

m y son you will sur ely become wise

,
.

That is the first and central requisite th e aspirant to

—
occult knowledge must posses s an u n swer vm g desire a ,

burning thirst for knowledge ; a ze al that allows no obstacle

to conquer it ; b ut the supreme motive for seeking this
‘

occult knowledge must be an ardent desire to benefit h u

manity entirel y disre garding se l f in order to work for
,

others U nless prompted by that motive occult knowledge

.
,

is dangerous .

Without possessing these qualification s—especiall y th e

—
l atter ih some measure any attempt to tread the arduous ,
 IN T R OD U C T IO N 23

path of occultism would be a hazardous undertaking An .

other prerequisite to this fir st hand knowledge however is

-
, ,

the study of occultism at second hand Certain occult pow -

.

ers are necessary for the fir st hand investigation of matters

-

connected with the pre natal and post morte m states of

- -

man but no one need despair of acqu i r 1n g Information

,

about these conditions be cause of undeveloped occu lt pow

ers As a man may know ab out Africa either by going
.

there personally or by reading descriptions written by tra v - a

e l ers who ha v e b een there so may he visit the super

-

physica l real ms if he will but qualify himself therefor or ,

he may learn what others who ha v e so qualified themsel ves

report as a result of the ir invest i gations .

Christ said The Truth shall make you free but Truth
,
“
,

I s not found once and forever Truth is eternal and the

.
,

quest for Truth must also be eternal Occulti sm knows .

”
of n o
“
faith once for all deliv ered There are certai n .

basic truths which remain but which may be looked at

,

from many s ide s each giving a d ifferent View which com

, ,

p l em en ts the previous ones ; therefore so far as we can ,

see at prese nt there is no such achievement possibl e as

,

arri v ing at the ultimate truth .

Wherein this work di ff ers from some phi losophica l works

the variations are caused by difference of v iewpoint and ,

all respe ct is paid to the conclusions reached and the ideas

se t forth by other in v estigators It is the earnest hope of
.

the write r that the study of the following pages may help
’
to make the student s ideas fuller and more rounded than
they were before .
 C H AP T E R I .

TH E VI S I B LE AN D I N VI S IB LE WO RLDS .

HE first step in Occultism is the study of the invisi

ble Worl d s These Worlds are invis i ble to the
.

majority of peopl e because of the dormancy of the

fila er and higher senses whereby they may be perce ived in ,

the s ame way that the P hysica l World about us is per

ce iv ed through the ph ysI cal senses The majority of peo .

ple are on a simi l ar footing in regard to the super physical -

Worlds as the man who is born bl ind is to ou r worl d of '

sen se ; although light and colo r are all about him he i s ,

unable to see them To him they are non existent and

.
-

incomprehensible simply because he lacks the sense of sight

,

wherewith to perce i ve them Ob j ects h e can fee l ; they

‘

seem real ; but light and color are beyond h i s ken .

_ S o with the greater part of human i ty They feel and .

,

see Objects and hear sounds in the P hysica l World but the ,

other realms wh i ch the clairv oyant calls the higher Worl ds

, ,

are as incomprehensible to them as light and color are to

the blind man Because the blind man can not see color
.
’

and light howeve r is no argument against their existence

, ,

and reality N either is it an argument that because most

.
,

people cannot see the super physical Worl ds no one can do

-

so If the blind man obtains his sight he will see light

.
,

and color If the higher senses of those blind to the super

.

physical Worl ds are awakened by proper methods they ,

24
26 RO SI CR UC IAN S
C O M O CO NCEP T
-
IO N

S ingle investigator can gr as p of al l the detail incident to

h is?investigations .

This also accounts for the varied versions which super ,

fici al people th ink is an argument against the existence of

the h i gher Worlds They contend that if th ese Worlds
.

exist i nvesti gators must necessar i ly bri ng back identical

,

descri pti ons If we take an illustration fr o

. m everyd ay
l i fe the fallacy of this b ecomes a pparent
,
.

Suppose a newspaper se nds twenty reporters to a city

with orders to wr i te it u p “
Reporters are or ought to
.
,

be trained observers It is their business to see e v ery

,
.

thi ng and they should be able to g i v e as goo d descript i on s

as can be expected from an y source Yet it is certain that .

of the twenty reports no two woul d be exactly alike It Is

,
.

much more likely that they would be totally d iff erent .

Although some of them might conta i n lead i ng features i n

common Others might be u n l qu e in qua l ity and quantity of
,
r

descri ption .

Is it an arg ument against the existence of the city that

these reports d iffer ? Certai nly not " It is easily accounted
for by the fact that each saw the city from his own par
ticul ar point of View and instead of these varying reports
being confusing and detrimental i t is safe to say that a ,

perusal of them all would g i ve a fuller be tter understand ,

ing and description of the city than if only one were read
and the others thrown in the waste basket Each report -
.

would roun d out an d complement the others .

The same i s true regarding accounts made by invest i

gators of the higher Worlds Each has his own peculiar .

wa y of look i ng at thi ngs and can d escr i be only what he

sees from h i s particular point of View The account he .

giv es may d iffer from tho se of others yet all be equally ,

truth fu l from e ach individua l o bserve r s viewpoint ’

.
 TH E VIS IBLE AND I NVI S I BLE WORL DS

It issometimes asked Why investigate th ese Worl ds ?

,

Wh y i s it not b est to take one World at a time ; to be con

‘

tent for the present with the lessons to be learned in the

P hysical Wor l d, and if there are invisible Worlds why not
,

wait until we reach them before investigating ? Sufficient “

unto the day is the evil thereof " Why borrow more ?
”

If we knew without doubt th at at some time sooner or ,

l ater each one of us mus t be transported to a far country

,

where under new and strange conditions we must live for

, ,

many years is it not reasonable to believe that i f we had

,

an opportunity to learn of that country in advance of our

remova l to it we would gl adly do so ? Knowled ge would

render it much eas ier for us to accommodate ourse l ve s to
-

new conditions .

-
There is only one certainty in l ife and that is— De ath "
As we pass into the be yond and are confronted by n ew
conditions knowledge of them is sure to be of the greate st
,

help .

But that is not al l To u nderstand the Physical World

.
,

which is the world of effects it is nece ss ary to understand ,

the super ph ysical World which is the world of cau ses

-
, .

We se e street car s in motion and we hear the clicking of

telegraph instruments but the mysterious force which
,

causes the phenomen a rema i ns I nvisible to us We say it .

is electricity but the name gives us no explanation We

, ,

learn noth ing of th e f o r ce its el f ; we see and hear only its

effects .

If a dish of co l d wate r be pl aced in an atmosphere of a

sufficiently low temperature ice crystal s immediately be gin
to form and we can see the process of their formation .

The lines along which the water crystal l fz es were in it all

the time as lines of force but they were inv is i ble until the
”
water congealed The beaut i ful frost flowers on a w i n
.
“
28 R O S I CR UC IAN CO S M O C O N CEP T IO N
-

dowpan e are visibl e m anifestations of currents of the high er

Worlds which operate upon us all the t i me unrecogn i zed by ,

most o f us but none the l ess potent

,
.

The h i gher Worlds are t hus the worlds of causes of ,

forces ; and we cannot real l y understand this lower World

unless we know the others and realize the forces and cause s
‘

of wh ich all material things are but the e ff ects

,
.

AS to the real i ty of these highe r Worlds comp ared with

that of the Phys i cal World strange as it may seem these , ,

h igher Worlds which to the maj or i ty appear a s mirages or

, ,

even less substant i al are in t r uth much more real and

, , ,

the objects in them more lasting and indestructible than

the obj ects in the P hysic al World
fi

If we take an example
'
-
.

we shall readily see th i s An arch itect does n ot start to

.

buil d a house by procuring the m aterial and setting the

workmen to layi ng stone upon stone in a haphazard way ,
”
w i thout thought or plan He thinks th e house out
.
“
.

Gradually it takes form in h i s m i nd and finally there

stands a clear idea of th e h ouse that is to be— a thought
form of a house .

This house is yet invisible to al l but the architect H e .

makes it objective on paper H e draws the plans and .

from this objective image of the thought form the work -

men construct the house of wood ir on or stone accuratel y , , ,

corresponding to the thought form ori ginated by the -

architect .

Thus th e thought form be comes a material real ity The

-
.

materialist would assert that it is much more real l asting

"
,

and substantial than the image in the architect s mind ’

.

But let u s see The house could not have been constru cted
.

with out the thought form The mater i al object can be de

-
.

stroye d by dynam i te earthquake fire or decay but th e

, , , ,

thought form will rema i n It will exist as long as the

-
.
 TH E VISIB L E AN D I NV ISIB L E W O RL DS 29

ar ch itect l ives and from it any number of houses S imil ar to

the one destroyed may be constructed N ot even th e archi .

tect himself can destroy i t Even after his death this

.

thought form can be recovered by those who are qualifie d to

-

re ad the memory of nature which will be dealt with later

, .

H aving thus seen the reasonableness of such Worlds

existing around and about us and havi ng s atisfied ourselve s
,

—
of their re ality their pe rmanency and of the utility of a
, ,

knowl edge con cern ing them we shall now examine them
,
‘

severa ll y and singly commencing with the Physic al Worl d

, .

CH E M I CAL REGI O N or TH E P H Y S I C AL WO RLD .

In the Ros i cru cI an teaching the uni verse is divided into

sev en diff erent Worlds or states of matter as fol l ows
, ,

—
7 World of God
6—World of V irgin Spirits
—
5 Wor1d of Di v ine Spirit
—
D

4 World of Life Spirit .

—
3 World of Thought fi
h ‘
t

2 — De sire World
l — Physical World .

This division is not arb i trary but necessary because the ,

substance of each of these Worlds is amenable to laws which

are practically inoperative in the others For instance in .
,

the P hysical World matter is subj ect to gra v ity contr ac

, ,

tion and exp ansion In the Desire World there is neithe r

.

heat nor cold a n d form s l evitate as easi ly as they gravitate

, .

Distance and time are also governing fac tors of existence in

the P hysical Worl d but are almost non existent in the
,
-

Desire Worl d .

The matte r of these worlds also varies in den sity, the

Phy si cal World being the densest of the seven
Each Worl d is subdivided into seven Regions or sub
 '

30 R O S I CR U C I AN C OS M O C-
O NC E P T I O N

of matter In th e P hys i cal World the solids,

d i v i s i ons .

li qu i d s and gases form the three d enser subdi v isions the ,

rema i ning f our being ethers of varying d ensities In th e .

other Worlds s im i lar subdi v i sions are necess ary because the ,

matter of which they are composed is n o t of uniform

density .

There are sti ll two further distinctions to be made The .

P —
three dense subdiv i s i ons of the hysical World the solids ,

—
liquids and gases constitute what i s termed the Chemical
Region The substance in this Region is the basis of al l
. .

dense Form .

The Ether is also physical matter It is not homogene .

ous as material science alleges but ex i sts in four difier ent

, ,

states It is the med i um of i ngress for the qu i cken i ng

.

spirit which imparts vi tality to the Forms in the Chemi cal

Region The four finer or etheric sud VI S i on S of the
.

P hysical World const i tute what is known as the Etheric

Reg i on .

In the World of Thought the three higher subdi v i sions

are the bas i s of abstract thought hence they collecti vely
, , ,

are called the Regi on of Abstract Thought The f our .

denser subdiv isions supply the min d stuff in which we -

embody and concrete our ideas and are therefore termed the
Region of Concrete Thought .

The careful cons ideration gi v en by the occultist to th e

characteristics of the P hys i cal World m i ght seem super
.

fl u ou s were it not that he regar d s al l things from a v ie w

point differing widely from that of the materialist Th e .

latter recognizes three states of matter sol i ds liquids -

, ,

and gases These are all chemic al because deriv ed from

.
,

the chemical consti tuents of the Earth From this chem .

ical matter all the for m s of mineral plant animal and , , ,

man have been bui l t hence they are as truly chemica l as

,
 THE VI S IB L E AN D INVI SI B L E WO R L DS 31

the substan ces which are commonl y so termed Thus .

whether we consider the mounta i n or the Cloud that en

vel ops its top the juice of the plant or the bloo d of the
,
’
animal the spider s thread the wing of the butterfly or
, ,

the bones of the elephant the air we breathe or the water

,

we drink— al l are composed of the s ame chemica l sub

What is it then which determines the conf ormation of

this basic substance into the mult i plex variety of Forms
which we see about us ? It i s the On e U niversal Sp iri t e x ,

pressing It se lf in th e vis i ble world as four great streams

of Life at varying stages of development This fourfold
,
.

spiritual im pulse molds the chemical matter of the Earth

into the variegated forms of the four K ingdoms—m ineral ,

plant animal and man When a form has served its

, ,
.

purpose as a vehicle of expression for the th ree higher

streams of life the chemical forces disinte grate that form
,

so that the matter may be returned to its pr i mordial state

‘

and thus made available for the building of new forms .

The spirit or l ife which molds the form into an expression

of itsel f is therefore as extraneous to the matter it use s
, ,

as a carpenter is apart from and personally independent

of the house he builds for his own occupancy .

As all the forms of minera l pl ant animal and man are

, , ,

chemical they must logically be a s dead and devo i d of

,

feeling as chemical matter in its primitive state and the ,

Rosicrucian asserts that they are .

S ome scientists contend that there is feel ing in al l tissue ,

l iving or dead to wh atever kingdom it be l ongs They in

, .

clu de even the substances ordinarily classed as mineral in

their cate gory of objects having feeling and to prove their ,

contentions they submit diagr ams with curves of energy

Obtained from tests Another c l ass of investigators teach
.
32 ROS I CR UOI A N C O SM O CO NC E P T IO N
-

that there is no feel i ng even in the human body except in ,

the bra i n which i s the s ea t of feeling They say it is the

,
.

brai n an d not the finger wh i ch feels the pain when the

‘

l atter i s i njure d Thus is the house of S cience divided

.

aga i nst i tself on this as on most other po i nts The pos i .

t i on taken by each i s partly right It depends upon what .

”
we mean by feeling “
If we mean s imply response to
.

impacts such as the rebound of a rubber ball that is

,

dropped to the groun d of course i t is correct to attr ibute

,

feel i ng to m iner al pl ant and an i mal t i ssue ; but if we

i

, ,

me an pleasure and pa i n love and h ate j oy and sorrow it , , ,

would be absurd to attri bute them to the lower forms of

‘
l ife to det ached tissue to m i nerals in the i r n at i ve s tate
, , ,

or even to the bra i n because such feel i ngs are expressions

,

of the self conscious immo rtal spi rit and the br ain i s only
-
,

the keyboard of the wonderful instrument upon wh i ch the

’

human sp i ri t p l ays i ts symphony of l i fe just as the musi ,

i

c i an expresses h i mself u pon h i s violin .

As there ar e people who are quite u nable to unde r stand

that there must be an d are higher Worlds so there are ,

some who ha v ing become sl i ghtl y acqua i nte d with the

,

hi gher realms acqu i r e the hab i t of undervaluing this P hy s

,

ical World Such an atti tude i s as incorrect as that of

.

the m atér i al i st The great and wise Be i ngs who carry

.

out the will and design of God placed us in this phys i cal
environment to l earn great an d important l essons wh i ch
coul d not be learned under other con di t i ons and i t i s our ,

duty to use our knowledge of the h i gher Worlds in learn

ing to the be st of our ab i lity the lessons w h i ch thi s mate
r i al world has to teach us .

In one sense the P hysical World is a sort of mode l school

or experi ment station to teach us to work cor rectly i n the .

others I t does this whether or not we know of th e e x

.
34 R O S I C RU C IA N COS M O C ON C E P T I ON o

expe ri ence in which we learn lessons of the utmost im

,

portance .

T H E E T H E RI C R EG I O N OF TH E P H Y S I C AL WO RLD .

AS soon as we enter this realm of nature we are in the

invisible i ntangi ble World where our ordinary senses fa i l
, ,

us hence th i s part of the Physica l World is practically

,

unexplore d by mater i al science .

Air is invis i ble yet modern sc ience knows that it e x

,

ist e By means of instruments its velocity as w i nd can be

.

measured ; by compres si on it can be ma de v is i ble as liquid

air With ether however that is not so easy Mate rial
.
, ,
.

science finds that it is nece ssa ry to account in some way

f or the tran Sm I S S IOn of electricity with or without wires ,
.

It is forced to postula te some substance of a finer k i nd

”
than it knows and it calls th at substance ether
,
It doe s “
.

not really know that ether ex i st s as the i ngenu ity of the ,

~

scient i st has not as yet been able to devise a vessel in

, ,

which it is possible to con fine th i s substance which is al to

i

gether too elus i ve for the comfort of the wi zard of the “

H e cannot measure weigh nor analyz e it

”
laboratory .
, ,

b y any apparatus now at his disposal .

Truly the ach i evements of modern science are marvel

,

ous The best way to learn the secrets of nature however

.
, ,

is not by invent i ng ins truments but by improving the i n ,

v estig ator h i mself Man has wi thin himself facult i es

.

which eliminate distance and compensate for lack of size

to a degree as much greater than the power of telesco pe
an d m i croscope as the i rs excee ds that of the naked eye .

These senses or faculties are the means of investigat i on

”
used by occul tists They are their open sesame in.
“

searching for t r uth .

To the traine d clairvoyant ether i s as tangibl e as are

th e Sol i ds liqu i ds an d gases of the Chemical Region to
, ,
 TH E VIS I B L E AN D I N VISIB L E W O R L DS 35

ordinary beings H e sees that the vi tal f orces wh ich give

.

life to th e m inera l forms of plant anim al and m an flo w ,

into these forms by means of the four state s of ether

,
.

Th e names and speci fi c f unction s of th ese f our oth ers ar e

as f oll ow

( )
1 Chemica l Et h er — T h is et h.e r is bot h positive and

negative in i ts manifestation The forces which cause as

.

s im il ati on and excretion work through it Assimi l ation .

is the process whereby the di fferent nutritive elements of

f ood are incorporated into the body of p l ant anim al and ,

man This is carried on by f orces with wh ich we shall

.

become acquainted later T h ey work a l ong the positive.

pole of the chemica l eth er an d attract the needed el ements ,

bui lding them into the f orms concerned These forces .

d o not act b l ind l y nor mechanically but in a se lective W , ay

( we ll-
k nown to scientists by its ef f ects ) thereby aecom
p li shi n g t h eir purpose w h ic h is
, the g rowth and m a int e

nance of the body .

Excretion is carri ed on by f orces of th e same kind but ,

working along the negative pole of the chemica l ether .

By means of this pol e they expel from the body the mate
rials in the food which are unfit for use or those which ,

have outlive d their useful ness in the body and should be

expurgated from th e system This l ik e a ll other proc .
,
’
esses independent of man s volition is a l so wise selecti v e , , ,

and not mere l y mech anica l in its operation as seen for , ,

instanc e in the case of the action of the kidneys wh ere

, ,

only the urine is filte red through when the organ s are in
health ; but it is known th at when the organs are not in
heal th the valuabl e albumen is a l lowed to escape with
,

the urine the proper se lection not being made because of

,

an abnormal condition .

( ) ife Ether As the chemica l ether is the avenue

2 L .
-
36 R O SI CR UC IAN C O SM O C O NC E P T I O N
-

for the operation of the forces the Object of which is the

mainte nance of th e individual form so the l i fe e ther is ,
"

the avenue for the operation of the forces which ha v e for

their object the maintenance of the species —th e forces Of
propagation .

Like the chemic al ether the l ife ether a l so has its posi
,

tive and negati v e pol e The forces whi ch work along the
.

positive pole are those wh i ch work in the female during

gestation They enable her to do the positive active work
.
,

of bringing forth a new being On the other hand th e .

f orces which work along the negative pole of the l if ee th er

enable the male to produce semen .

In the wOrk on the impregnated ovum of the anima l

and man, or upon the seed of the plant the forces working ,

a l ong the posit i ve pole of the life ether produce m ale

plants animals and men ; While the force s wh i ch express
,

themse l ve s through t h e nega tiv e pole generate femal es .

( )
3 L ight Ether — Th i s ether is both
. pos i tive and ne a
g
tiv e and the forces which play along its positive pole are
,

the forces wh ic h generate that blood heat in the high er

species of animal an d in man wh i ch makes them indi v i d ,

ual sources of heat The forces wh i ch work along the

.

negative pole of the light ether are those which operate

through the senses man i festing as the passi v e functions
,

of sight hear i ng feel i ng tasting and smelling They

, , , , .

a lso build and nourish the eye .

In th e cold blooded animals the positive pole of th e

-

light ether is the avenue of the force s wh i ch circulate the

bloo d and the negativ e force s ha ve the same functions
,

in regar d to the eye as in the case of the higher animals

and man Where eyes are lacking the forces working in
.
,

the negative pol e of the light ether are perhaps building

 TH E VIS IB L E AN D INV ISIB L E W O RL DS 37

or nourishing other sense organs as they do in all that ,

ha v e sense organs .

In plan ts the forces which work along the pos i tive pole
of the l ight ether cause the circulation of the ju i ces of the
plant Thus in winter when the light ether is not charged
.
,

with sunli ght as in summer the sap cea ses to flow unt il ,

the summer sun again invests the light ether force with
its force The f orces which work along the negative pole
.

of the light ether deposit the chlorophyl the green sub ,

stance of the plant and also color the flowers In fact al l .

,

color in a l l the kingdoms is deposi ted by means of the

,

negative pole of the light ether Therefore anima l s have .

the deepest co l or on the back and flowers are deepest col

ored on the side turned towards the l i ght In the polar .

regions of the earth where the rays of the sun are weak
, ,

al l co l or is l ighter an d in some cases is so sparingly de

posited that in winte r it is withdrawn altogether and the

anim al s become white .

( )
4 Reflecting Ether — I t h as heretofore been
. s tate d
that the idea of the house which has ex i sted i n t h e mind
can be r ecovered from the memory of nature even after the ,

death of the architect Everyth i ng that has ever hap

.

pened has left behind it an ineffaceable picture in this

reflecting ether AS the giant ferns of the ch i ldhood of
.

the Earth have left their pictures in the coal be ds and ,

as the progress of the glacier of a bygone day may be

traced by means of the trail it has left upon the rocks
along its path even so are the thoughts and acts of men
,

ineff aceab l y recorded by nature in this reflecting ether ,

where the trained seer may read their story with an ac

curacy commensurate with his ability .

Th e reflecting ether deserves its name for more than

one reason for the pictures i n it are but r eflecti on s of the
,
38 R O SI CR UC IAN C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

memory of nature The real memory of nature is found

.

in a much higher realm In th i s reflecting ether no thor

.

oughly trained cla i rvoyant cares to read as the pictures ,

are blurre d and vague compared to those found in th e

higher realm Those wh o read in the reflecting ether ar e
.

generally those who have no choice who in fact do not , , ,

know in what they are reading As a rule ordinary psy .

ch om etr i sts and mediums obtain their knowledge through

the reflecting ether To some slight extent the pupil of

.

the occul t school in the first stages of his training al so .

reads in the reflecting ether but he is warned by his

,

teacher of the in su fficien cie s p f this ether as a means of

acquiri ng accurate information, so that he does not easi ly
draw wrong conclusions .

This ether i s also the medium through which thought

m akes an impression upon the human brain
h
It is mos t .

intimately connected w i th t h e fourth subd ivision of the

-

World of Thought This is th e highest of the four sub

.

divisions contained in the Region of Concrete Thought

and is the homeworld of the human mind There a much .
.

clearer vers i on of the memory of nature is f ound than in

the reflecting ether .

T H E DE S I RE WO RLD .

Like the P hysical World and every other rea l m of

,

nature the Desire World has the seven subdivisions called

,
”
“
Regions b u t unlike the Physic al World it does not have
, ,

the great divisions corresponding to the Chemical and

Etheric Regions Desire s tuff in the Desire World pe r
.
-

sists through its se ven subdivisions or regions as material

f or the embodiment of desire As the Chemical Region
.

is the realm of form and as the Etheric Region is the

home of the forces carrying on life activities in those
 TH E VISIB L E AN D INVISIB L E W O R L DS 39

f orms , enabl ing them to l ive move and propagate so th e

, ,

forces in the Desire World working in th e quickened dense

,

bod y impel it to move in this or that direction

,
.

If there were only the activities of the Chemica l and

Etheric Regions of the Physica l Worl d there would be ,

forms h aving l ife able to move but wi th n o i n cen tive for

, ,

s o d oi n g
. This incentive is supplied by the cosmic f orce s -

active in the Desire Worl d and without this activity play

ing through every fibre of th e Vitali ze d body urging ,

action in this direction or that there would be no ex peri ,

ence and no moral growth The functions of the different

.

ethe rs would take care of the growth of the f orm b ut ,

mora l growth woul d be entirely l acking Evol ution woul d .

be an impossibility both as to form and l ife for it is only

, ,

in response to th e acquirements of spiritu al growth that

forms evo l ve to higher states Thus we at once see th e .

great importance of this rea lm of nature .

Desires wishes passions and feelings express them

, , ,

se l ves in the matte r of the di ff erent regions of the De

sire World as f orm and feature express thems el v es i n th e
Chemical Region of the Physica l Worl d They take fo rm s .

which l ast f or a l onger or shorter time according to the ,

inte nsity of th e desire wish or feel ing embodied in them

, , .

In th e Desire Worl d the distinction b etween the force s

an d the matter is not so definite and apparent as in the

Physical Worl d . On e might a l most say that here the

ide as of force and matter are identica l or interchange
ab l e It is not qui te so b ut we may say that to a certain
.
,

e xtent the Desire Worl d consists of f orce matter -

.

When spe aking of the matter of the Desire Worl d it is ,

true that it is one degree less dense than the matte r of

th e Physica l Wor l d but we entertain an enti rely wrong
,

idea if we ima gine it is fin er ph ysica l matter That idea, .

40 R O SI CR U CI AN C O SM O CO N C E P T I O N
-

though held by many who have studied occult philosophies ,

is entirely erroneous The wrong impression is c aused

.

pr i nc ipally by the difficulty of g i v i ng the full and accur ate

d escr i pt i on necessary for a thorough understan d ing of the
higher worl d s U nfortunately our language i s descript i ve
.
,

of mater i al th i ngs and therefore enti rely inadequate to

descr i be the conditions of the super phys i cal realms hence -
,

all that is sa i d about these realms must be taken tenta

tiv ely as s i miles rather than as accur ate d escriptions

, , .

Though the mountain and the daisy the man the horse , , ,

and a piece of iron are composed of one ult imate atomic

,

substance we do not say that the da i sy is a finer form of

,

iron Similarly it is impossible to explain in words th e

.

Change or difference in physical matter when it is broken

up into desire stuff If there wer e no di ff erence it would

-
.

be amenable to the law s of the Physical World which it ,

is not .

The law of matter of the Chem i cal Region is inerti a

the t en dency to remain i n s tatu q u o It takes a cert ain .

amount of force to o vercome th i s inertia and cause a body

which i s at rest to mov e or to stop a bo dy i nmot i on N ot
, .

so with the matter of the Des i re Worl d That matter itsel f .

is almost l i v i ng It is in unceasing mot i on flui d taking

.
, ,

all imaginable and unim aginable forms with inconceivable

facil i ty and rapidity at the same time corusc at i ng and
,

scintillat i ng in a thousand ever Changing shades o f col or

-
,

incomparable to anything we know i n this ph ysical state

,

of consci ousness Something very faintly resembling the

.

action and appearance of this matter will be seen in the

play of colors on an abalone shell when held in the sun
light and moved to and fro .

That is what the De si re World is— e ver changing light -

a d col or
n — ln wh ich th e forces of anim al an d m an inter
42 RO SI CR UCIAN CO S M O CON C EP T I ON -

the source of a vast amount of troubl e and perplexity .

Before he can understand he must become as a little ch i ld

, ,

wh i ch i mbibe d knowledge w i thout reference to any pre

v i ou s experience .

To arri v e at a correct understan d ing of the Desire

World i t is necessary t o realize that i t is the world of feel
i ngs des i res and emot i ons These are all under the dom i
, ,
.

f —
n at i on o two great forces Attracti on and Repulsion ,

wh i ch act i n a di fferen t w ay i n the three denser Reg i ons

of the Des i re World fr om that in wh i ch they act i n the
three finer or upper Reg i ons while the central Region ,

may be called neutral ground ,

.

Th i s central Regi on i s t h e Regi on of feeling H ere .

interes t in or i n di fference to a n object or an i d ea sways the

-

balance in fav or of one of the two previously ment i oned

forc es thereby relegating the Object or i dea to t h e three
,

higher or the three lower Regi ons of the Des i re World,

or else they will expel it We shall see presently h ow
.

th i s i s accompli shed .

In the finest and rarest substance of the three higher

Regi ons of the Des i re Worl d the force of Attraction alone
holds sway but it is al so pre sent in some degree in the
,

den se r m atte r of the three lower Regions where it works

’

against the force of Repulsion which is dominan t there , .

The disintegrating force of Repuls i on would soon destroy

e v ery form coming into these three lower Regions were it
not that it is thus counteracted In the densest or lowest .

Region where it is strongest it tears and shatters the

, ,

forms built there in a way dreadful to see yet it is not a ,

v andalistic force N othing i n nature is v an d alistic

. All .

th at appears SO is but working towards good So with .

th is f orce in its work in th e lowest Region of the Desire

 TH E VISIB L E AN D I NVISIB L E WORLDS 43

Worl d Th e f orms h ere are demoniac creations bui l t by

.
,

the coarsest passions and desires of man and beast .

The tendency of every form in the Desire World is to

attract to itsel f all it can of a like nature and grow thereby .

If this tendency to attraction were to predominate in the

l owest Re gions evi l would grow l ike a weed There would
,
.

be anarchy instead of order in the Cosmos This is pre .

vente d by the preponderating power of the force of Re

pulsion in this Regio n When a coarse desire fo rm is
.

being attracted to another of the same nature there is ,

a disharmony in their vibrations whereby one has a dis ,

*

integrating effect upon the oth er Thus instead of unit .

,

ing and amalgamating evil with evil they act with mutual ,

destru ctiveness and in that way the evil in the worl d is

kept within reasonable bounds Wh en we understan d the
.

working of the tw i n forces in this respect w e are in a posi

tion to understan d the occult maxim A l i e is both mur ,
“

”
der and suicide in the Desire Worl d .

Anything happening in the P hysical World is reflected

in all the other realms of nature and as we have seen , ,

builds its appropriate form in the Desire World When .

a true account of the occurrence is given another f orm is ,

buil t ex actly l ike the fi rst They are th en dr awn together

, .
*

and coalesce strengthening each other I f however an

, .
, ,

untrue account is given a form diff erent from and an tago

,

n i stic to the first or true one is created

,
As they deal with
,
.

the same occurrence they are drawn together but as their

, ,

vibrations are diff erent they act upon each oth er with
mutual destru ctiveness Therefore evil and malicious lies
.
,

can kill anything th at is good if they are strong enough,

an d repeated often enough But conversely, seeking f or

.
,

th e good in evi l w ill in time transmute the evil into g ood

, ,
.

If the f orm that is built to minimize the evil is weak it ,

44 ROS I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON C EPTION -

will have no efie ct and will be destroyed by the evil f orm .

,

but i f i t is strong and frequently repe ate d it will have the

effect of d isintegrati ng the ev i l an d substituting the good .

That e ffect be it dist i nctly understood i s not brought ab out

, ,

by ly i ng nor denying the evi l but by look ing for the

, ,

good . The occult scient i st practices very rigi dly this

pr i nci ple of l ook i ng for good in all things bec ause he ,

knows what a power it possesses i n keep i ng down evil ;

There is a story of Christ which illustrates th i s point .

Once when walk i ng w ith H i s d i sc i ple s they passed the

decay i ng and ill smelling carcass of a dog The disciples
-
.

turned in disgust commenti ng upon the nauseating nature

,

df the sight 5 but Chr i st looked at the dead body and said
" “

”
“
Pearls are not wh i ter than i ts teeth H e was d eter .

mined to find the good because H e knew the beneficial

,

eff ect Which would result in the Desire Worl d fr om giving

it ex pr essmn .

The lowest Re gion of the Desire World is called the “

”
Reg i on of P assion and Sensual Des ire The second sub .

d i vision is bes t de scribed b y th e name of Region of Im “

”
re ssi on ab il i t H ere the eff ect of the twin forces of
p y .

Attraction and Repulsion is evenly bal anced This i s a .

neutral Re gion hence all our impressions which are buil t

,

of the matter of th i s R egl on are neutral Only when the .

twin fee lings wh i ch we shall meet in the fourth Region

, ,

are brought to bear do the twin force s come i nto play

,
.

The mere i mpression of anything however in an d of itself , , ,

i s entirely separate from the feeling it engenders The .

impression is neutral an d is an activity of the second Re

gion of the Desire World where pictures are formed by
.

the forces of sense p ercept i on i n the v i tal bo dy of man

-
.

In the third Regi on of the Desire World the force of ,

Attraction the integrating upbuilding force—has already

— ,
 TH E VISIB L E AN D INV ISIB L E W O R L DS 45

gained the upper hand over the f orce of Repulsion with its ,

destructive tendency Wh en we unde rstand th at the

.

mai nspring in this force of Repulsion is se lf assertion a -

,

pushing away of all others th at it may have room w e ,

sha l l understand that it g 1v es way most easily to a desire

for other things so that the substance of the third Re g ion
,

of the Desire World is principally dominated by the force

of Attr action towards other things but in a selfish way
, ,
'

and therefore this is th e Region of Wishes .

The Region of Co arse Desires may be likened to the

so l ids in the P hysical World ; the Region of Impression
ability to the fluids ; and the fluctuating evanescent nature ,

of the Region of Wishes will make that compare with th e

gaseous portion of the Physical Worl d Th ese three R e .

gions give th e subs tance for the forms which m ake for
experience soul growth and evol ution purging the alto
,
-
,

gether destructive and retaining the materials which may

be used for progress .

“
The fourth Region of the Desire World is the Region
”
of Feeling . From it come s the feeli n g concern i ng the
already described forms and upon the feeling engendere d
by them depends the life which they have for us and also
their e ff ect upon us Whether the objects and ideas pre
.

sented are good or b ad in themselves is not important at

this stage . It is our Feeling whether of Interest or In
,

difference that is the determining factor as to the fate of

the object or idea .

If the feel ing with which we meet an impression of an

obj ect or an ide a is Interest it has the same efl ect upon
,

that impression as sunlight and air have upon a pl ant .

That idea wil l grow and flourish i n our l ives If on the "
.
,

other h and we meet an impression or idea with I n d iffer

,

ence it withers as doe s a p l ant when put in a dark ce ll ar

, .
46 R OS I CR U CI AN C OS M O C ON C EP T ION
-

Thus from thi s central Region of the Desire Worl d

come s the incentive to action or the decision to refrain
,

therefrom (t hough the latter is also action in th e eyes of

the occult scientist ) for at the prese nt stage of our de
,

v el o m en t the twin feelings Interest and Indifference

p ,

furni sh the incenti v e to action and are the springs that

move the world At a later stage these feelings will cease
.

to have any weight Then the determining f actor will be

.

du ty .

Interest starts th e forces of Attraction or Repulsion .

Indifference simply Withers the obj ect or ide a against

w hich it is directed so far as our,
connecti on with it is
conc erned
If our interest in an object or an idea generates Re
‘

pulsion that naturally cau ses us to expurg ate from our

,

l i ves any connection with th e obj ect or i de a which roused

it but there is a great diff e rence between the action of ‘

'

th e force of R epu l si on an d the mere feelin g of I n d ifier

ence P erhaps an i llustration will make more clear the
.

Operation of the twin Feelings and the twin Forces .

Three men are walking along a road They see a sick .

d og ; it is co v ered with sores and i s e v i dently suffering i n

tensely from pa i n and thirst This much is e v ident to
.

all three men— their senses tell them that N ow Feeling .

comes Two of them take an interest in the animal but

.
“
,
”
in the th i rd there is a feeling of in d ifference “
He .

passe s on lea v ing the dog to its fate The others remain ;
,
.

they are both interested but each man i fests it in a quite

,

di ff erent way The interest of one man is sympathetic and

.

helpful impelling him to c are for the poor beast to as

, ,

suage pains and nurse it back to health In him the fee l .

ing of interest has aroused the force of Attraction The .

other man s interest is of a different kind H e sees on ly

’
.
 T HE VIS IB LE AN D I N VI S I BLE WO RLDS 47

a l oathsome sight which is revolting to him and wishe s

to rid himse lf and the world of it as quickly as possible .

H e advis es killing the animal outright an d burying it In .

him the feeling of interest generates the destructive force

of Repul sion .

When the fee l ing of Interest arouse s the f orce of At

traction and it is directe d toward low objects and desires ,

these work t hemselves out in t h e lower Regions of the

Desire World where the counteracting force of Repulsion
,

operates as previously describe d From the battle of the

,
.

twin force s —Attraction and Repulsion— results all the

“

pain and su fier in g incident to Wrongdoing or misdirected

effort whether intent i onal or otherwi se
, .

Thus we may see how very important is the Feel ing we

have concerning anything for upon that depends the
l
,

nature of th e atm osph ere we create for ourse l ves If we .

l ove the good we shall keep and nourish as g uardi an

,

angels al l that is good about us ; if the reverse we shall ,

people our path with demons of our own breeding .

The names of the three upper Regi ons of the De sire

” ”
“
World are Re gion of Soul Li fe Region of Soul Light
-
,
“
-
,
”
and Region of Sou l Power
“
In these abide Art Al tru
-
.
,

ism Philanthropy and all the activities of the higher

, ,
‘

soul life
-
When we think of these Regions as radiating
.

the qualities indicate d by their names into the forms of ,

the three l ower Re gions we shal l understand correctl y the

,

higher and lower activities Soul power however may .

-

, ,

for a time be use d for evi l purposes as well as f or good ,

but eventually the force of Repulsion destroys vice and

the force of Attraction builds virtue upon its shattered
ruins Al l things in the ultimate work together for
.
, ,

G OO D .

Th e Physica l and the Desire Wor l ds are not separated

48 R OS I CR U C I AN C OS M O : C ON C E P T I ON

from each oth er by space They are closer th an h ands .

“

and feet It is not neces sary to move to get f rom one

.

to the other nor f rom one Re gi on to the next Just as

,
.

solids liqui ds an d gases are all together in our bodies

, , ,

inter penetrating one another so are the di fferent Re gions

-

of the Desire Worl d within us a l so We may again com .

pare th e line s of force along which ice crystal s form in -

w ater to the invisib l e cause s originating in the Desire

World wh ich appe ar in th e P hysical W orld an d give us
,

the incentive to action, in whatever direction it may be .

The Desire World with its m n u m er ab l e i n hab itants

, ,

permeates the P hys i cal World as the li nes of force do the ,

w ater i n v i sib le but e verywhere prese nt and potent as the

‘
h
,

cause of everyth i ng i n the P hys i cal Worl d .

TH E WORLD OF T H OU GH T .

Th e World of Thought a l so cons ists even Regions of s

of varying qu al i t i es and dens ities and like th e Physical , ,

Worl d the World of Thought is d i v i ded into two main

,

divisions—the Region of Concrete Th ought compris ing ,

the four densest Regions ; and th e Region of Abstract

Thought comprising the thre e Regions of finest substance
, .

This World of Thought is the central one of the five

Worlds from which man obtains h i s vehicles H ere spirit .

an d body meet It is also the h i ghest of the three Worlds

.

in which man s evolution is be i ng carr i ed forward at th e

’

present time the two higher Worlds being practical ly in

,

abeyance as yet so far as man is con cern ed

,
.

We know that the materials of the Chemical Region are

“

used in buildin g all physical forms These forms ar e given .

l ife and the power of motion b y the forces at work i n the

Ether i c Region and some of these l iving forms are stirred
,

into activity by means of the twin Feelings of the Desire

 50 RO S I CRU CI AN CosM o OON OE P T I O N
-

in which we speak of an object constructed l n m m i ature ,

or i n some mater i al other than that appropriate for i ts

prope r an d final use They are not merely likenesses nor
.

mo d els of the forms w e see about us but are cr ea ti v e arche

,

types ; that i s they fash i on the forms of the P hys i cal

,

Worl d i n thei r own l i kene ss or l i kene sses for often many ,

work togethe r to form one certain spec i es each archetype ,

g i v i ng part of itself to build th e requ i red form .

The second su b d1V1s10 n of the Reg i on of Concrete

”
Thought is called the Ocean i c Region “
It is best d e .

scribe d as flowi ng pulsat i ng Vi tality All the forces that

,
.

work through the four ethers which constitute the Etheric

.

Region ar e ther e see n as archetypes I t i s a stream of .

flow i ng l i fe, pulsat i ng through all forms as blood pulsates ,

through the body the same l i fe in all forms H ere the

,
.

”
traine d cla i rvoyant sees how true i t is that al l l i fe is one “
.

”
The Aer i al Regi on i s the th i rd d i v is ion of the R e
“

g io n of Concrete Tho ught H ere we find. the archety pe of

desire s passions w i shes feel i ngs and emot i ons such as we
, , , ,

exper i ence in the Desire World H ere all the acti v iti es of
.

the Des i re World appear as atmospheric conditions Like .

the k i ss of the summer breeze come the feel i ngs of pleas

ure and joy to the clairvoyant sense ; a s the sighing of
the w i n d i n the tree tops seem the longi ngs of the soul and
-

like flashes of light i ng the pass i ons of warring nations .

In th i s atmosphere of the Regi on of Concrete Thought are

also p i ctures of the emotions of m an and beast .

“ ”
The Region of Archetypal Forces is the fourth divi
sion of the Region Of Concrete Thought It i s the central .

and most important Regi on i n the five Worlds wherein

’
man s ent ire evolut i on i s carr i e d on On the one s i d e of .

th i s Regi on are the three higher Reg i ons of the World of

Thought the World of Life Spiri t and the Worl d of D i vine
,
 TH E V I S IB LE AN D I N V IS IB LE W ORLDS 51

Spirit On the other side of this Re gion of Archetypa l

.

Forces are the three lower Reg i ons of the World o f

Thought the Desire and the P hysical Worlds Thus this
,
.

”
Region becomes a sort of crux, bounded on one side b y “
'

the Realms of Spirit on the other by the Worlds of Form

,
.

It is a focusing point where Spirit reflects itself in

,

m atter .

As the name implies this Region is the home of the

,

Archetypal Forces which direct the activity of the arche

types in the Region of Concrete Thought From this .

Region Spirit Works on matter in a formative manner .

Diagram 1 shows the idea in a schematic way the f orms in ,

the lower World be i ng reflections of the Spirit in the

higher Worlds The fifth Reg i o n which is the one ne arest
.
,

to the focusing point on the Spirit side reflects itself in

‘

the third Regi on which is nearest the focusing point on

,

the Form side The sixth Region reflects itself in the

.

second and the seventh reflects itself in the first .

The whole of the Region of Abstract Thought is r e

fl ecte d in the lWorl d of Des i re ; the World of Li fe Spirit in
the Etheric Region of the P hysical World ; and the World
of Di v i ne Spirit in the Chemical Region of the P hysica l
World .

Diagram 2 will give a comprehensive idea of the seven

Worlds which are the sphere of our de v elopment but we ,

must carefully keep in mind that these Worlds are not

pl aced one abo v e another as shown in the diagram They, .

- —
inter penetrate that i s to say that as in the case where ,

the relation of the P hysical World and the Desire World

were compared where we likened the Desire World to the
,

l ines of force in freez i ng water and the water itself to the

P hysical Worl d in the same way we may think of the
,

lines of force as being any of the seven Worlds and the ,

Di agram l —Th e R el at i v e P erman ency of th e V isib l e and
I nv i si b l e W or l d s.

( Il lu strated b y comp ari s on w i th a p ticon )

s tereo .

52
 TH E V I S IB L E AN D IN VI S I B LE ~
WORLDS 53

water as in our i l lustration would correspond to the next

, ,

denser World in the scale Another illustration may per.

h aps make the subject clearer .

Let us u se a spherical sponge L represent the dense earth - o

—the Chemical Region Imagine that sand permeates

.

every part of the sponge and also forms a l ayer outside the
sponge Let the san d represent— the Etheric Region which
.
,

in a sim ilar manner pe rmeate s the dense earth and e x

te nds beyond its atmosphere .

Let us further imagine this sponge and sa n d immersed

'

in a spherical glass vessel filled with clear water and a ,

l ittle larger than the sponge and san d We place the .

sponge and sand i n the center of the ves sel as the yol k
is pl aced i n the center of an egg We have now a space .

of clear water between the sand and the vessel The water .

as a whole w ill represent the Des i re World for just as the ,

water percolates between the grains of sand through ev e ry ,

pore of the sponge and forms that clear layer so the

, ,

De sire World permeates both the dense Earth an d the

’

ether and exten d s beyon d both of these substances .

We know there is air in water an d i f we think Of the ,

air in the water ( i n our illustrat i on ) as representing ,

the World of Thought we shal l have a fair mental picture

,

of the way i n which the World of Thought being fin er and ,

more subtle inter penetrates the two denser Worlds

,
-
.

Finally i magine that the vessel con taining the sponge

, ,

sand and water is placed in the center of a larger spherical

vessel then the air in the space b etw een the two vessels
would represe nt that part of the World of Thought w hi ch
e x tends beyond the Desire World .

Each of the planets in our solar system has three such

inter penetr ating Worl ds and if we think of each of the
-
,

p l anets consisting of three Worl ds as be i ng i n d iv i d u al

ROS I CRU C I A N COS M O CO N C EP T ION
-

DIA G R A M Z
 TH E V I S IB LE A N D I N V I S I B LE WORLDS 55

sponges and of the fourth World the Worl d of Life Spirit

, , ,

as being the water in a large vessel where these threefold

separate sponges swim we shall un d erstand that as the
,

water In the vesse l fills the space between the sponges and
percolates through them so the World of Life Spirit per
,

vades inter planetary space and inter penetrates the indi

- -

vidual planets It forms a common bond between them

.
,

so that as it is necessary to h ave a boat and be able to

control it if we wish to sa i l from America to Africa so it
, ,

is necessary to have a vehicle correlated to the World of

Life Spirit under our conscious control in order to be ab le
'

to trave l from one planet to another .

In a similar manner as the World of Life Spirit corre

'

l ates us to the other planets in our own solar system does

the Worl d of Di v ine Sp i rit correlate us to the other sol ar
systems We may regar d the solar systems as separate
.

sponges swimming in a World of Divine Spirit and thus

, ,

it will be apparent that in order to trave l from one solar

system to another it would be necessary to be able to
fu nction consciously in the highest vehicle of man : the
Divine Spirit .
 C H APTER II .

TH E F OU R KI N GDOM S .

HE
three Worlds of our planet are at present the
field of evolution for a number of di fferent king
,

dom s of li fe at various stages of devel opment Onl y

, .

four of these need concern us at present Viz : the mineral ,

.
,

plant animal an d human k i ngdoms

, , .

These four kingdoms are related to the three Worl ds

in different ways according to the progres s these groups of
,

evolving life have made i n the school of experience S o .

”

far as f orm is concerne d the dense bodies of all th e king

do ms are composed of the same chemical substance s
’

th e solids l i qu i d s and gases of the Chemical Region

"

.
, ,

The consti tuents of the dense body of a man is as trul y

a chemical compound as the stone ensoul ed by minera l
life But e ven when speaking from the pure l y physica l
.

standpo i nt and lay i ng aside all other consideration s for the

,

tim e being there are several important differences when we

,

compare the dense body of th e human be i ng with the min

eral of the Earth Man mov es grows and propagates h is
.
, ,

s—
specie the mineral in its native state doe s none of thes e
, ,

things .

Comparing m an with the f orms of the pl ant kingdom ,

we find that both plant and man have a dense body capa ,

ble of growth and propagation But Man has faculties n ot .

possesse d by the plant H e feels has the power of motion,

. .
,

and th e faculty of perceiv i ng things exterior to h imself .

56
 58 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

th e rarest and most attenuated gas no two atoms touch ,

each other ; that there is an env elope of ether around each

atom ; that th e atoms in the universe float in an ocean of
ether .

The occul t scientist knows this to be true of the Chem

ical Region and that the mineral does not possess a separate
vital body of ether And as it is the planeta ry eth er alone
.

wh i ch en velops the atoms of the miner al that make s the ,

di ff erence described It is necessary as we have shown.

, ,

to h ave a separate vital body des i re b ody etc to express

, , , .
,

the qualities of a particular realm because the atoms of the ,

World of Desire of the World of Thought and even of the

,

Hi gh er Worl ds inter penetrate the Mineral as well as the

,
-

d ense human body and if the inte r penetration of the ,

-

planetary ether which i s the ether that envelops the atoms

,

of the mi ner al were enough to make it feel and propagat e

,
-

its inter penetrat i on by the planetary World of Thought

-

w ould also be su fficien t to make it think This it cannot .

do be cause it lacks a s epar a te veh i cle It is penetrated by

, .

the planetary ether only and is therefore incapabl e of indi ,

vidual growth Only the lowes t of the four states of

.

— —
ether th e chemi cal is act i v e 1n the mineral To that .

fact is d u e the chem i cal forces in minerals .

When we cons i d er plant an i mal and man in relation , ,

to the Etheric Region we note that each has a separate ,

v ital body in ad di tion to being penetrated by the planetary

,

ether which f orm s the Etheric Re gion There is a differ .

ence however between the vital bodies of the plants an d

, ,

the vital bodies of animal and man In the vital body .

of the plant only the chemical and the life ethers are fully
.

act i v e H ence the plant can grow by th e act i on of the

.

chem i cal ether and propagate its species through th e activ

ity of the li fe ether of the separate vital body which it ,
 TH E FOU R K I N GDOM S 59

posse sse s The light ether is present but is partially latent

.
,

or dormant an d reflecting ether i s lacking Therefore it .

is evident that the faculties of sense perception and mem -

ory which are the qualities o f these ethers cannot be

, ,

expresse d by the plant kingdom .

Turning our attention to the vit al bo dy of the animal

we find that in it the chemical l i fe and l i ght ethers are
-

d ynamically active H enc e the animal has the faculties

.

of assimi lation and growth c ause d by the act i v i ties of

,
.

the chemical ether ; and the faculty of propagat i on by

means of the l i fe ether— the se be i ng the same as in plants .

But in add i tion consequent upon the acti on of the third

,

or light ether it has the f acult ies of generat i ng internal

,

heat and of sense perception The fourth ether however

-
.
, ,

i s inact i ve i n the animal hence it has no thought nor mem

,

ory That wh i ch appe ars as such w i ll be shown later to

.

be of a d ifferent nature .

When we analyze the humanbeing we find that in him ,

all four ethers are dynamically act i ve in the highly organ

i ze d vital bo d y By means of the act i vities of th e c h em i cal
.

eth e t he is able to ass i milate food an d to grow ; the forces at

work in the life ether enable h i m to propagate h i s species ;

the forces in the l i ght ether supply the d ense body with
heat work on the nervous system and the muscles thus
, ,

open ing the doors of communicat i on w i th the outs i de world

by way of the sense s ; and the reflect i ng ether enables the
spi r i t to contro l its vehicle by means of thought This .

ethe r also stores past experience as memory .

The vital body of p l ant animal and man extends b e

, , ,

yond the per i phery of the dense body as the Etheri c

Reg i on wh i ch is the vital body of a planet extends beyon d
, ,

its dense part showing again the truth of the H ermeti c

,
”
axiom As above so below
“
,
The distance of th i s exten
.
60 R OS I CR U C IA N CO S M O -
C ON C EP T ION

sion of the vital body of man i s about an inch and a h al f

~

The part wh i ch is outs i de the dense body i s very luminous

an d ab ou t th e color of a new blown peach blossom
.
-
It i s -
.

often seen by persons hav ing very S l i ght involuntary clair

voyance The wr i ter h as found when speaking with such
.
,

persons that they frequently are not aware they see any
,

th i ng unusual and do not know what they see .

The dense body is built into the m atri x of this vi ta l

body du r l n g ante natal l i fe and w i th one except i on it is
-

, ,

an exact copy molecule for molecule of the vital body

, ,
.

As the l i nes of force i n free zing water are the avenues of

format i on for ice crystals so the l i nes of force in th e vital
,

body determ i ne the shape of the dense body Al l through .

life the Vital body is the builder and restorer of the dense
f orm Were it not for the ether i c heart the dense heart
‘

would break quickly under the constant strain we put upon

i t All the abuses to which "
. We subj ect the dense bo dy are
counteracted so f ar as lies i ni ts power by the vit al b o dy
, , ,

wh i ch is cont i nually fighting against the death of the “

dense body .

The exception mentioned above is that the vital body

of a man is female or negat i ve wh i le that of a woman is ,

male or positive In that fact we have the key to numer

.

ous puzzling problems of life That woman gives way t o .

her emotions is du e to the polarity noted for her positive , ,

vital bo d y generates an excess of blood and causes her to

labor under an enormous internal pressure that would
break the physical casement were not a safety valve pro -

v i d ed in the periodica l flow and another in the tears wh i ch

,

rel i eve the pressure on specia l occas i ons— for tears are .

”
“
white bleed i ng .

Man may have and has as strong emotions as woman ,

but he is usual ly ab le to suppress them w i thout tears b e ,

 T H E F OU R KIN GDO M S 61

cause h i s negati v e Vi tal body doe s not generate more blood

than he can comfortably control .

U nlike the higher veh i cles of humanity the Vital body ,

( except under cer tain circumstanc e s to be ex plained

,
when
”
the subject of Init i ation is dealt with ) d oe s not ordinar
“

ily leave the dense body until the death of the latter Then .

the chemica l force s of the dense body are no longer held

l n check by the evolving l i fe They proceed to rest ore the
.

matter to its primordial condition by dis i ntegration so that

it may be avai l able for the formation of other forms in
the economy of na ture Disintegration 1s thus due to the
.

activity of the pl anetary forces in the chemic al ether .

In texture the vital body may be crudely compared to

one of th ose picture frames made of hundreds of l ittle
pieces of wo od which interl ock and present innumerable
poin ts to the ob server The vital body presents millions
.

of points to the observer These points enter into the

.

'

hollow centers of the dense atoms imbu i ng them with Vital

,

force that sets them Vibrating at a rate h i gher than th at of

the earth which i s not thus accelerate d and
the m i ner
ensoul ed .
a
Whe n a per son is drowning or falling f rom a height
, ,

or f r eez in g the vita l body l eaves the dense body the atoms
’

, ,

of which be come temporarily ine r t in consequence but at ,

”
resuscitation it re enters the dense bo d y and the points
-
“

are again inse rted in the dense atoms The inertia of the .

atoms causes them to resist the resumption of Vibration

and that is the cause of the intense prickly pain and the
t i n ling sensation noted at such times but not or d i nar i ly
%
, ,

for 1 e same reason that we become conscious of the start

ing or stopping of a bl ock but are obl ivious to its tick
,

when it is running .

There are certain cases where the vita l body partly

62 R O S I CR U C I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

“
leaves the dense bo dy such as when a hand goes to ,
°
”
sleep . Then the etheri c hand of the v i tal body m ay b e
seen hanging below the dens e arm l i ke a glo ve and the
po i nts cause the peculiar pricking sensation felt when th e
etheric hand r e enters th e de nse hand
-
Sometimes in .

hypnos i s the head of the vit al body divides an d hangs out

s i de the dense head one half over e ach shoulder or l ies
, ,

around the neck like the collar of a sweater The absence .

of pr i ckly se nsat i on at awakening in cases l i ke this is b e

’
c ause d uring the hypnosis part of the hypnotist s vit al
“

body h ad been Substitu ted for that of th e Victim .

When anesthet i cs are used the Vital b ody is partially

d riven out along w i th the h i gher veh i cles and if the appli
, ,

cation is too strong and the l i fe ether i s d r iv en out d eath ~

ensues This Same phenomenon may also be observed in

.

the case of materiali z i ng me d i ums In fact the difference

. .

between a material i zing me dium and an ordi nary man

or woman is just th i s : In th e ord i nary man or woman
the vit al body and the d ense bo dy are at the present stage ,

of e v olut i on qu i te fi rmly i nterlocked wh i le i n the medium

, ,

they are loosely connecte d It h as not always bee n so an d .

,

the time w i ll aga i n come when the vital body may normally
lea v e the dense vehi cle but that 1 s not normally aecom
,

p l i sh e d at present When a medium

. allows hi s or her Vital
body to b e used b y entities from the Desire Worl d wh o
w i sh to materialize the Vital body generally oozes from
,

the left s i de —through the spleen wh i ch is its p articular ,

“ ”
gate . Then the vital forces cannot flow into the body
as they do normal ly the medium becomes greatly ex ,

h au ste d and some of them resort to stimulants to counter

,

act the e ff ects i n time becoming incurable drunkar d s

, .

The Vital force from the sun wh i ch surrounds us as a ,

colorless flu i d is absorbed by the Vital body th rough the

,
 T H E F OU R K IN G DO M S 63

etheric counterpart of the splee n , wherein i t undergoes a

curi ous transformat i on of color It becomes pal e rose .

hued and spreads along th e nerves all over the dens e bo d y .

It is to the ner v ous system what the force of electricity is

to a tel egraph system Though there be wir es instruments
.
, ,

and telegraph ope rators all i n order if the electri city i s ,

lacking no message can be sent The Ego the brain an d

,
.
, ,

the nervous syste m may be in se em i ngly perfect or der b u t ,

if the vital force be l ack i ng to carry the mess age of the

Ego through the nerves to the muscles the dense bodywill ,

rem ain inert This is ex actly what happens when part of

.

the den se body becomes paralyzed The vital body has be .

come diseased and the vital force can no longer flow In .

such cases as in most sickness the trouble i s with the

, ,

finer invisible vehicles and to tre at only the dense bo d y is

, ,

l ike taking a watch that is out of order to a watchmake r

”
an d asking him to polish up the c ase when the troubl e i s
in the hi d den works Of cour se there are times when
.

medical help is needed but such times are confined chiefly

,

to c ases of broken bone s etc ,

.

During health the vital body specializes a superabun d ance

of vital force which after passing through the dense bo d y
, , ,

radiates in straight lines in every direct i on from the per i

p h e r y thereof as th e radii
,
of a circle do from the center ;
but during ill health when the Vital bo dy becomes atten u
-

ate d it is not able to draw to itself the same amount of

,

force and i n a d d i t i on the dense body is fee d i ng upon it .

Then the lines of the Vital fluid wh i ch pass out fr om the

bo d y are crumpled and bent showing the lack of force ,

behind them In health the great force of these radiations

.

carri es with i t germs and m i crobes which are inimical to

the health of the dense bo dy but in sickness when th e vital
, ,

force is weak these emanations do not so readily eliminate

,
 RO S I CRU C I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

d i sease germs Therefore the danger of contr acti ng dis

.

ea se I s much greater when the v i tal f orces are low than

when one is in robust health .

In cas es where parts of the dense body are amputate d .

,

only the planetary ether accompan i es the separated part .

The separate vital body and the den se body d i s i ntegrate

synchronously after death S o with the etheric coun .

terp art of the amputated l imb It will gradual l y .

dis i ntegrate as the dense member decays but in th e ,

meantime the fact that the man sti ll po ssesses the etheric
limb accounts for his assertion that he can feel hi s fin
gers or suff ers pa i n in them There is also a connection .

w i th a buried member irrespective of di stanc e ,

A .

case is on record where a man felt a severe pa i n as if a ,

nail had bee n driven into the flesh of an amputate d l i mb ,

and he persisted until the l imb wa s exh umed when it was ,

found that a nail had been dr i ven into i t at the time it was
boxed for burial The nail wa s remov ed and the pain
.

i nstantly stopped It is a l so in accor d ance with the se

"

facts that people complain of pain in a l i mb for perhaps

two or three years after the amputat i on The pa i n w i ll .

then cease This i s bec au se the d i se ase remains in the s ti l l

.

undetached etheric limb but as the amputate d part di s

,

integrates the etheric limb follows sui t and thus the pa i n

,

ceases .

H aving noted the relations of the four k i ngdoms to the

Etheri c Regi on of the P hys i cal World we w ill next turn ,

our attenti on to the i r relat i on to the Desire World .

H ere we fin d that both m i nerals and plants lack the

separate d es i re body They are permeated only by the
.
’

planetary d esire body the Desire World Lacking the

, .

se parate vehicle they are incapable of feeling desire and

, , ,

emotion wh i ch are faculties pertain i ng to the Desire

,
66 R OS I CR U C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I O N
-

of the desire body The feelings of animals

.

an d the lowest human races are almost ent i rely concerne d

with the gr at i ficat i on of the lowest desires and pass i ons -

,

wh i ch fin d the i r express i on i n the matter of the lowe r

Reg i ons of the Desire World H ence in or d er that they
.
,

may have such emot i ons to e ducate them for someth i ng

higher i t i s necessary that they should have the corre
,

sp on di n g mater i als in the i r des i re bodies As man pro .

r esses in the school of l i fe his exper i ences teach h i m

g , , ,

and his des i res become purer and better Thus by d e gr ees .

the material of h i s d es i re bo dy undergoes a correspo ndi ng

b ange The purer an d br i ghter material of the h i gher
g .

Regions of the Desire World replaces the murky col ors

of the lower part The des i re body also grows in size so
.
,

that in a saint i t is truly a glor i ous object to behold the ,

pur i ty of i ts colors and its luminous transpar ency bei ng

_

beyond adequate sim i le It must be seen to be appreciated

‘

. .

—
At present the mater i als of both the lower and the .

higher Regions enter into th e compo sition of the desi re

bod i es of the great majority of mankind N one are so .

b ad that they have not some good trait This is expr essed
.

in the materi als of the higher Regions which we find in

their des i re bodies But on the other hand very very few
.
, , ,

are so good that they do not use some of the materials of

the lower Regi ons .

In the same way that the planetary vital and des i re

bodies i nter penetrate the dense mater i al of the Earth as
-
,

we saw i n the i llustrat i on of the sponge the sand and the ,

water so the vital an d des i re bodi es inter penetrate the

,
-

d ense body of plant an i mal and man

,
But duri ng the .

l i fe of man h i s d es i re body is not shaped l i ke h i s dense an d

vital bo d ies After death it assumes that shape Dur i ng
. .

l i fe it has the appearance of a luminous ovo i d which in ,

 T H E E OUR K I N GDOM S 67

waking h ours , compl e te l y surrounds the dense body as ,

t h e albumen does the yolk of an egg It extends from .

twelve to S ixteen inch es beyond the dense body In thi s .

desire body there are a number of sense centers b ut i n -

, ,

the great m ajority of people they are latent It is th e

, .

awakening of th ese centers of perception that corresponds

’
to the Opening o f the blind man s eyes in our form er illus
tr ati on. The matter in the human desire body is in i n
ce ssant motion of inconceivable rapidity There is i n it .

no settled pl ace f or any particle as in the dense body , .

The matter that is at the h ead one moment may be at the

fee t in the next and back again There are no organs in th e
.

desire body as in th e dense and vital bodies but there are

, ,

c enters of per cep tion which when active appe ar as vor

, , ,

tices a l way s remaining in the same rel ative position to the

,

dens e body most of them about the head In the maj ority
,
.

of peop l e they are mere eddies and are of no use as center s

of perception They may be awakened in a ll h owever
.
, ,

but d ifieren t methods produce di ff erent resul ts .

In the in volj m tary clairvoyant deve l ope d along imprope r ,

negative lines these vortices turn from right to l eft or

in the oppos ite di rection to the hands of a c l ock—counter
, ,

c l ockwise .

In the desire body of th e properly trained voluntary

clairvoyant they turn in the same di recti on as the hands
,

—
of a clock cl ockwise glowing with e x ceeding splendor far
, ,

surpas sing th e bri l liant luminos i ty of the ordinary desire

body These cente rs furnish hi m with means for the per
.

c eption of things in the Desire World and he sees and in ,

v esti ates as he wills while the person whos e centers turn

g ,

counter clock wi se i s like a mirror which reflects what

-
,

passe s before it Such a pe rson is incapab l e of reaching

.

out f or information The reason for this belongs to a l ater

.
68 ROS I CR U C I AN COS M O CON C E P T ION
-

chapte r but the above is one of the fundamental differences

,

between a medium and a properly trained clairvoyant . .

It is impossible for most people to d istinguish be tween

the two ; yet there is one infallible rule th at can be foll owed
by anyone : N o g enu ine ly d ev el op ed s eer wi ll ev er ex er cise
th is facu lty for m on ey or i ts eq u iv alen t ; n or wi ll h e us e i t
to gr atify cu r i osi ty; bu t on ly to h elp h u m an i ty .

N o one c apable of teaching the proper method f or th e

development of this faculty will ever charge so much a
lesson Those demanding money for th e exercise of or for
.
,

giving lessons in these things never have anything worth

pa ying for The
. above rule is a safe and sure guide , which
all may follow with absolute confidence .

In a far distant future man s desire body will becom e as

’

definite ly org anized as are th e vital and dense bodies .

When t hat stage is reached we shall al l have th e power to

fu nction in th e desire body as we now d o in the dense
,

body which is the oldest and best organ i zed of these bodies
,

—
of man the desire body being the youngest .

The desire body i s roote d in the l iver as th e v ital body

, ,

is in the spl ee n .

In all warm blooded creatures which are the high est

-
,

evolved and have fee lings passions and emotions which

, , ,

reach ou tw ar d into the world with desire which may be ,

sai d to really live in the fuller meaning of the term and not
merely vegetate—in all such creatures the currents of the
desire body flow outward from the l iver The desire stuff
.

is continually welling out in stream s or currents which

travel in curved lines to every p om t of the periphery of
the ovoid and then return to the l i ver through a number
of vorti ces much as boiling water is continually welling
,

outward f rom the source of h ea t and returning to it afte r

comp leting its cycle .
 TH E F O U R K I N GDOM S 69

The pl ants are devoid of th i s im pelling energizing ,

p rinciple hence,
they can not show life and motion as can

the more highly developed organisms .

Where there is vital i ty and motion but no r ed blood , ,

there is no separate desire bo dy The creature is s i mply .

in the transiti on stage from plant to an i mal an d therefore

it moves entirely in the strength of the group spirit -
.

In the col d bl oo d ed animals wh i ch have a liver and r ed

-

b l ood there is a separat e desire body and the group spirit

,
-

directs the currents i n wa r d because in their case the sepa

,

rate spirit ( of the indiv i dual fish or reptile for instance )

is entirely outs i de the dense veh i cle .

Wh en the organism has evolved so far that the separate

spirit can commence to draw into its vehicles then it ( the
ind i vidual spirit ) commences to direct the currents out
war d and we see the be gi nning of passionate existence and
,

W arm blood It is th e warm red blood in the liver of th e

.
,

organi sm sufficiently evolve d to have an i n dwelling Spirit

which energizes the outgoing currents of desir e stuff
that cause the anima l or the man to displ ay desire an d
p assion In the ca se of the animal the sp i r i t is not yet
.

entirely i n dwelling It doe s not become so unt i l the points

.

i n the vital body and the dense body come into co rrespond
ence a s explaine d in Chapter XII For this reason the
,
.

“
animal is not a liver that is he does not live as com
, ,

p l etel y as does man not being capable of as fin e desires and

,

emotions because not as fully conscious The mammalia of

,
.

today are on a h i gher plane than was man at the anim al

stage of his evolution because they have warm red blood
, , ,

wh i ch man d i d not ha v e at that stage Th i s diff erence in .

status is accounted for by the spiral path of evolution ,

which also accounts for the fact that man is a higher type
of humanity than the pre sent Angels were in their human
70 ROS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C E P T ION
-

stage The present mammalia which have in their ani mal

.
,

stage atta i ned to the possess i on of warm red bloo d and are , ,

th ere fore capable of exper ienc i ng des i re and emotion to

some extent will in the Jupi ter Per i od be a purer and
, , ,

better type of human i ty than we are now while from ,

among our present humanity there will be some even in ,

the Jup i ter P er i od, who w i ll be openly and avowe d ly

wi cke d Moreover they w i ll not then be able to conc eal
.
,

the i r pass i ons as i s now poss i ble but w i ll be unabashed ,

about the i r ev i l doing -

.

In the l i ght of th i s exposition of the connect i on between

th e l i ver and the life of the organ i sm i t i s noteworthy
. ,

tha t in sever al European languages ( Engl i sh German , ,

'

and the S candinavian tongues ) the same word signifie s

”
the organ of the body ( the l i ver ) and also one who lives “
.

When we turn our attenti on to the four ki ngdom s in

their relati on to the World of Th ou gh t we find that min
‘

er al s
plants
,
and an i mals lack a veh i cle corre l at i ng them to
that World Yet we know s ome an Im al s think but they
.
,

are the highest domesticated animals whi ch have c om e

i nto close touch with man for generations an d have thus
developed a faculty not possessed by other animals wh i ch ,

have not had that advantage Th i s is on the same princi .

”
ple that a highly charged wire will induce a weaker cur “

rent of electr i c ity in a w i re brought clos e to it ; or that a

man of strong morals w i ll arous e a like te ndency in a
weaker nature wh i le one morally we ak will be overthrown
,

if brought w i thin th e influence of e v i l characters All we .

do say or are reflects i tself in our surroundings This i s

, , ,
.

why the highest domesti c animals think They are the .

h i ghest of their k i nd almost on the point of indi vidualiza

,
”
tion and man s thought v i brations have induced in th em
,
’ “

a similar act i vity of a lower order With the except i ons .

 TH E F O U R K I N GDOM S 71

noted the a ni mal kingdom h as not acquired th e f acul ty of

,

thought They are not i n divi dua liz ed This is the great
. .

and cardinal difference between the human and other king

doms Man is an individual The animals plants and
. .
,

minerals are divided into species They are not individua l

.

i ze d in the same sense that man is .

It is true that we divide mankind into races tribes and ,

nations ; we note the di ff erence between the C au cassi an the ,

N egro the Indian etc ; but that is not to the po i nt

, ,
. If .

we wish to study the characteristics of the lion or the

elephant or any other spe cies of the lower animals all th at ,

is nece ss ary is to take any member of that species for that

purpose When we l earn the ch ar acteristics of one anim al
.
,

we know the characteristics of the spec i es to which it b e

l ongs All member s Of the same animal tribe ar e alike
. .

That is the point A lion or its father or its son all

.
, , ,

l ook al ike ; there is no di ff erence in the way they wil l act

under l ike conditions A l l have the sam e l ikes and dis
.

l ikes ; one is the same as another .

N ot so with hum an beings I f we want to know about

.

th e characteristics of N egroes it is not enough that we

,

e x amine one single individual It would be necessary to

.

examine each indi v idual ly and even then we will arrive at

,
”
no knowledge concerning N egroes a s a whole simpl y “
,

because that which w as a characteristic of the singl e indi

vidual does not apply to the race collectively .

If we desire to know the char acter of Abraham Lin

co ln it will avail us nothing to study his father his grand ,

father or his s on for they would diff er entirely E ach

, ,
.

w ould h ave his own peculiarit i es quite dist i nct from the
idiosyncracies of Abrah am Lincoln .

On the other h and mineral s plants and an i mals are

, , ,

described i f we devote our attention to the descr i pt i on of

72 R O S I CRU C I AN CO S M O C O N C E P T I O N -

one of each species while there are as many speci es among

human be i ngs as there are i ndi v i duals E ach i n divi du al .

person is a law unto h i mself altogether sep a ,

r ate and apart from any other individual as d ifferen t from ,

his fellow men as one spec i es in the lower kingdom is from

-

another We may write the b i ogr aph y of a man but an

.
‘

an i mal can have no biography Th i s is because there is in .

each man an in d iv i dual in dwellin g sp i r i t wh i ch dictates

,

the thoughts an d actions of each i ndi vi dual human be i ng

”
while there i s one group sp i r i t com m on to a ll the di ffer
“
-

ent ani mals or plants of th e same spec ies The group .

:

i r i t works on them all r om th e ou ts id e The tiger

pp f .

which roams in the wilds of the In d ian jungle an d th e

tiger penned up in the cage of a menagerie are both ex
press i ons of the same group spirit It influences both -
.

alike from the Des i re World distance being almost an ni ,

h il ated in the inner Worlds .

The group sp i rits of the three lower kingdoms are vari

-

ou sly located in the higher Worl d s as we shall see when ,

we investi gat e the consc i ousness of the d ifier en t k i ngdoms ;

'

but to prope rly comprehend the posit i ons of these group

sp i r i ts in the inner Worl d s it i s necessary to remembe r
and to clearly understand what has been sa i d about all the
forms that are i n the Vi sible worl d hav ing crystallized fr om
models and ideas in the inner Worlds as illustrate d by the ,

architect s house and the inventor s mach i ne As the juices

’ ’
.

of the soft body of the sna i l crystall i ze i nto the hard S hell
wh i ch i t carries upon its back so the Sp i rits in the higher
,

Worlds have in a S i m i lar manner crystallized out from

, ,

themsel ves the dense materi al bod ie s of the di fferent

,

king d oms .

Thus the so calle d hi gher bo d i es although so fin e and

-
“
,

cloudy as to be i nvi sible are not by any means emana

,
“
74 ROS I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

DIA G R A M 4
S h ow ing th e state o f con sciou sn e s s app erta n n g i i to e ac h kin g d om .

KI N G DO M
W OR LD
M i n er a l P l an t Ani m al M an

g
R e i on of
A bst T h ou h t
r ac t g
an d

g
R e i on of
Con c re te T h ou h t g

Des i re Worl d

Eg o
P h y s i c al Wor l d M i nd
i n cl u d e s t h e De s i r e De s i r e
b od y b od y W3 1 “?
Eth er i c R e i on g 9
VI tal V t al
i Vi t a l Con s ci ou s
an d t h e bod y b od y b od y n ess
Ch e mi c al R e i on g De n s e Den s e D sen e Den s e
"

b od y b od y
to the d i fferent Worlds and th e result i ng state of con
sci ou sn ess .

From d i agram 3 we learn that the s eparate Ego is

d efinitely segregate d w i th i n the U n i v ersal Sp i r i t i n th e
Region of Abstract Thought It shows that only man .

possesse s the complete cha i n of veh i cles correlati ng h im

to all d i v i s i ons of the three Worlds The ani mal lacks one .

l i nk of cha i n the m i n d ; the plant lacks two l i nks th e

-

min d and the des i re bod y ; and the m i neral lacks thr ee
l i nks i n the cha i n of veh i cles necessary to function in a
- —
self consci ous manner i n the P hysi cal World th e mind ,

the des i re and the v i tal bo d i es .

The reason f or the various d efic i encies is that the Min

eral Ki ngd om is the express i on of the latest stream of
evolv i ng l i fe ; the P lant K i ngdom i s ensoule d by a l i fe wave
that has been longer upon the path of evoluti on ; the life .
 T H E FOU R K I N GDOM S 75

wave of the animal Kingdom has a stil l l onger past wh i le

Man that is to say the l i fe now expressing itself in the
, ,

human form has beh i nd it the longest j ourney of all the

,

four kin gdoms and therefore leads In time the three

, .
,

l i fe waves which now an i mate the three lower k i ng d oms

-

will reach the human and we shall have passed to h i gher

,

stages of development .

To understand the degree of consci ousness which results

from the possession of the v eh i cle s use d by the l i fe e v ol v i ng
i n the four ki ng d oms we tu rn our attention to d i agram 4
, ,

which shows that man the Ego the Thinker has d e , , ,

scended into the Chemical Region of the Phys i cal World .

H ere he has marshaled all his vehicles th ereby atta i ning ,

the state of waking consc i ousness H e is learning to con .

trol his vehic les The organs of neither the des i re bod y
.

nor the m i nd are yet e v olved The latte r is not yet even .

a body At prese nt it is si mpl y a link a sheath for the

.
,

use of the Ego as a focusing point It is the l ast of the .

vehicles that have been built The spirit works gradually .

from finer into coarser substance th e vehicles also being ,

bui lt in fine substance first then in coarser and coar ser ,

substan ce The dense body was built first and has now
.

come into its fourth stage of density ; the Vital body is

in its third stage and the desire body in its second hence it ,

is still cloud like and the sheath of mind is film ier still
-
, .

As those vehicles have not as yet evolved any organs it i s , , ,

clear that they alon e would be useless as vehicles of con

sci ou sn ess Th e Ego however enters i n to the dense body
.
, ,

and connects these organless vehicles w i th the physical

se nse centers and thus attains the waking state of con
-

s ci ou sne ss in the Physical World .

The student shoul d particularly note that it is because

of their connection with the splendidl y organized mechan
 76 ROS I CR UC I AN OOS M o OON OE B T I ON
-

I sm of the dense body that these higher vehicles become of

value at present H e w i ll thus avoi d a mistake frequently
.

'

made by pe ople who when they come into the knowledge

,

that there are h i gher bodies grow to desp i se the den se ,

” ”—
vehicle ; to speak of it as low and vile turning their “ “

eyes to heaven and wishi ng that they might soo n be abl e

to leave this earthly lump of cl ay and fly about in their
”
.
“
higher vehicles .

These people gener ally do not realize the d i fferenc e hé

” ”
tween h i gher and perfect
“
Certa i nly the dense body
“
.
,

is the lowest vehicle in the sense that it is the most u n

w ieldy cor relat i ng man to the world of sens e with all the
,

limitat i ons thus impl i ed As stated it has an enormous .

,

period of evolution back of it ; I S in its fourth stage of

d evelopment and h as now reached a great and marvelous
’

degree of e fficiency It w i ll, In t i me r each per fection

.
, ,

but even at present i t is the hest organ i zed of man s vehi ’

cles The Vit al body is in its third stage of evolution and

.

‘
,

less completely organized than the dense body The desire .

body and the m i nd are as yet mere clouds— almost en , ,

tir el y unorganized In the very lowest human beings

.

these veh i cles are not e v en d efinite ovoids they are more
or less un d efined in form
’

The dense body is a wonderfully constructe d instrument

and should b e recognized as such by everyone preten di ng
to have any knowledge of the constitution of man Observe .

the femur for instance This bone carries the entir e

, .

we i ght of the body On the outs i de i t is built of a thin

.
"

layer of compact bone strengthened on the inside by beams

,

and cross beams of cancellated bone in such a marvelou s

-
,

manner that the most skilled bri dge or construct i on en

.

g in ee r could never accomplish the feat of building a pillar

of equal s trength with so l ittle weight The bones of the .
 TH E F O U R KIN GDOM S 77

skull are buil t in a similar manner always the least possible,

material is used and the maximum of strength obtaine d .

Consider th e wisdom manifes te d in the construction of the

heart and then question if this superb mechanism deserve s
to be desp i sed The wise man is grateful for his dense
.

body and takes the best p ossible care of it because he knows ,

that it is the most valuable of his present instruments .

The animal spirit has in its descent reached o nl y th e

Desire Worl d It h as not yet evolved to the point wh ere
.

“ ”
it can enter a dense body Therefore the anima l h as no
.

indivi dual in dwelling spirit but a group sp irit whi ch

'

-
, ,

directs it fr om wi th ou t The ani mal has the dense b ody

.
,

the vital body and the desire body hat the group spirit ,
-

which directs it is outside T h e vital body and the desire

.

body of an animal are not entirely within the dense body ,

especially where the head is concerned For instance the .

,

etheric head of a horse projects far beyond an d abov e th e

dense physical head When as in rar e cases it happe ns
.
, ,

the etheric head of a horse draws int o the head of th e

dense body that horse can l earn to read count and work
, ,

examples in elementary arithmetic To this peculiarity i s .

also due the fact that horse s dogs cats and other d om e sti
, ,

cated animals sense the Desire World though not al way s ,

realizing the difference between it and the Physical Worl d .

A horse wil l shy at the sight of a fi g ure invisible to the

dri v er ; a cat wil l go through the motions of rubbing itsel f
against invisible legs The cat sees the ghost however ,
.
,

without realizing that it has no dens e legs availab le f or

frictional purposes Th e dog wi ser than cat or horse wi ll
.
, ,

of te n sense that there i s something he does not under

stand about the appearance of a dead master whose hands it
cannot lick It wil l how l mournful ly and slink into a
.

corner with its tai l between its l egs The foll owing illus .
73 R O SI CR UC IAN COS M O -
C ON C E P T I O N

trati on may perhaps be of service to show the differenc e

between the man w i th h i s indwell i ng sp i r i t and the anima l
with its group spirit -
.

Let us i magi ne a room divided b y means of a curtain ,

one side of the curtain represent i ng the Des i re World and

the other the P hysi cal There are two men 111 the r oom
‘

.
,

one in each div i sion ; they cannot se e each other nor can ,

they get i nto the same d i vision There are however ten .
, ,

h oles i n the curt ai n and the man who is in the divi sion
repre sent ing the Desire World can put his ten fingers
through these holes int o the oth er division representing ,

«
th e P hysical World H e now furnishes an excellent rep
.

r esen tati on of the gr oup spirit which is in the Desire -

World The fingers represent the animals belonging to

.

one species H e is able to move them as he wills but he

.
,

cannot use them as freely nor as inte ll i gently as the man

who is walking about in the P hysical d i v i s i on u ses his body .

The l atter sees the fingers which are thrust through the
c urtain an d he observes that they all move but he does ,

not see the connection between them To him it appears .

as if th ey were all separate and dist i nct from one another .

H e cannot see that they are the fingers of the man behind
the veil and are governed in their mo v ements by his in
telligen ce If he hurts one of the fingers it is not onl y
.
,

the finger that he hurts but chiefly the m an on the oth er

,

side of the c urtain If an animal is hurt it suff ers but not

.
, ,

to the degree that the group spirit doe s T h e finger -

.

has no indi v idualized consciousness ; it moves as the man

a —
dict tes so do the animals move as the group spirit dic -

”“ ” “
tates We hear of animal instinct and blind instinct
. .

”
There is no such v agu e indefinite thing as blind in ,
“

”
sti n ct Th ere is noth i ng blind about the way the group “
.

—
spirit guide s its membe rs there is Wisdom spelled with ,
 T H E F OUR K IN GDOM S 79

capital s The trained cl airvoyant when f unctioning in the

.
,

De sire World can communicate with these spirits of the

,

anima l species and finds them much more intelligent than

a l arge percentage of human beings H e can see the mar .

ve l ons insight they display in marshal ing th e animal s

which are the i r physica l bodies .

It is the spirit of the gr oup whi ch gather s its flocks of

birds in the fal l and compe l s the mto migrate to the south ,

neither too early nor tool ate to escape the wi nter s ch i lly ’

blast ; that directs their return in the spring causing the m ,

to fly at just the proper al titude which differs for the ,

diff erent species .

The group spirit of th e beaver teache s it to build its

-

dam across a stream at exactly the proper angle It con .

siders the rapidi ty of the flow and all the circumstances

, ,

precise ly as a skilled engineer would do showing that i t i s ,

as u p to date in every particul ar of the craft a s the col

- -

l ege bred technically e ducated m an It is the wisdom of

-
,
-
.

the group spirit that d i rect s the building of the hexagon

-

ce ll of the be e with such geometrica l nicety ; that teach e s

the sna i l to fashion its house in an accurate beauti ful ,

spira l ; that teaches the ocean mollusk the art of decor at

ing its irides cent shel l Wisdom wisdom everywhere "so
.
,

grand so great that one who looks with an obse rv ant eye
,

is fil led wi th amazement and reverence .

At this point the thought wi ll naturally oc cur that if the

anima l group spirit is so wi se considering the short period
-
,

of evo l ution of the animal as compared with that of man ,

why does not the latter display wisdom to a much greater

degree and why must man be taught to build dams and
geometrize al l of which the group spirit does w i thout
,
-

being taught ?
The answer to that question has to do with th e descent of
 30 R O S I CRU C I A N CO S M O C O N C E P T I ON -

the U niversal Sp i r i t i nto matte r of ever i ncreasing density -

.

In the h i gher Worlds where i ts veh i cles are fewer and ,

finer it is in closer touch with cosm i c w i sdom wh i ch shines

,

out in a manner i nconceiv able in the dense P hysical

Worl d but as the sp i r i t descends the l i ght of wis d om
, ,

b ecomes temporarily more and more dimmed unt i l in th e ,

d ense st of all the Worl d s it is held almost ent i rely in ,

abeyance .

An illustration w ill make th i s clearer The hand is .

”

man s most valuable servant ; i ts dexte ri ty enables it to

’

respond to his sl i ghtest b i dding In some vocations such .

,

'as bank teller the del i ca te touch of the hand becomes so

,

sensitive that it is able to dist i ngu i sh a counterfeit coin

,

from a genuine in a way so mar v elo us that one would

almost think the hand were en d owe d w i th ind i v i dual in
tell i gen ce .

Its greatest e fficiency i s perhaps reache d in the pro duc

t i on of music It is c apable of p roducing the most beauti
.

ful soul stirring melod i es The delicate caress i ng touch

,
-
.
,

of the hand el i cits the tendere st strain s of soul speech f r om -

the i nstrument te ll i ng of the sorrows the j oys the hope s

, , , ,

the fears and the l ongi ngs of the soul i n a way that noth
1n g but music can do It is the l anguage of the he aven
.

world the spirit s true home and comes to the divine

,
’
,

spark i mprisoned in fie sh as a message from its native land .

Mus i c appeals to all regardless of race creed or other, , ,

worl dly d i st i nction The h i gher and more spir i tual the
.

in d i v i dual the pla i ner doe s it speak to h i m an d even the “

”
savage breast is not unmoved by it .

Let us now imagine a master music i an putting on thin -

glove s and trying to play his violin We note at once that .

the delicate touch i s less subtle ; the soul of the music i s

gone If he puts another and a heavier pair of glove s over
.
 82 ROS I C RU CI AN C OS M O C ON CE P T ION-

our body they ar e subjected to and dominated by cm '

consciousness An animal group spirit functions in a spiri t

.
-

u a l b ody which is its lowest vehicle

,
This vehicle consist s .

of a varying number of virgin spirits imbued for the t ime

be i ng with the consciousness of the group spirit T h e -
.

latter directs the vehicles built by the virgin spi rit s in i ts

charge caring f or them and helping them to evol ve their
,

vehicles As its wards evolve the group spir i t also evol ves
.
,
-
,

un dergoing a series of metamorphoses in a manner similar ,

to that in which we grow and gain experience by taking

into our bodies the cells of the food we eat thereby als o ,

f ra i si ng the i r con sciousness by enduing them with ours for

a t i me .

Thus while a sep arate self conscious Ego is within each

,
-

huma n body an d d omi nates the act i ons o f its particular

‘

veh i cle the spirit of the separate ani mal is n ot yet individ
,

u ali z ed and self conscious b ut forms part o

.

-
f the vehicle of
,

a self consc i ous entity b el on gm g to a diff e rent evolution

-

the group sp i rits -

.

This group Sp i rit dom i nates the action s of the anim als
-

i n harmony w i th cosmic l aw unti l th e virgin spirits in its

,

charge shall have ga i ned self consciousness an d become -

human Then they wi l l gradually manifest wills of thei r

.

own ga i n i ng more and more freedom from the group spirit

,
-

an d becoming responsible for their own actions The group .

sp i ri t wi ll influenc e them however ( although in a de

,

creas i ng degree ) as race tribe community or fam i ly

, , , ,

sp i ri t unti l each in d iv i dual has become capable of act i ng

i n full harmony with cosmic l aw Then and then only w i ll .

the Ego be ent i rely free and independent of the group

spirit . The latter will then enter a higher phase of
evoluti on .

The position occupied by the group spir i t i n the Desire -

 TH E F OUR KI N GDOM S 83

World gives to the animal a consciousn es s di ff erent fr om

that of man who has a clear defini te waking conscious
, ,

ne ss M an see s things ou tsi d e of hi mself in sharp dis

.
,

tinct outl ines Owing to the spiral path of evolution th e

.
,

higher domestic animals particularly the dog horse cat

, , ,

and elephant see objects in somewh at the s ame way though ,

perhaps not so clearly defined All other an i mals hav e .

“
an interna l picture consciousness similar to the dream
state in m an When such an animal is confronted by an
.

ob j ect a picture is immediatel y perceived wi th i n aecom

, ,

an i ed by a strong impression that the object is inimi ca l

p
or beneficial to its we l fare If the feeling is one of fe ar
.
,

it is a ssociated with a suggestion from the gr oup Spirit h ow -

to escape the threatened danger T hi s negative state of .

consciousness renders it e asy for the group spirit to g uid e -

the dense bodies of its charge s by suggestion as the ani mals ,

have no wil l of their own .

Man is not so easily managed from without either with ,

’
or without his consent As evolut i on progresses and man s
.

will deve l ops more and more he w i ll be come non amenab le

,
-

to outside suggestion and free to do as he pleases regard

less o f suggestions from others This is the chief differenc e .

between man and the other kingd oms They act accord .

ing to l aw and the dictate s of the group spirit ( which we -

cal l instinct ) while man is be coming more and more a

,

law unto himsel f We do not ask the minera l whether

.

or not it will crysta ll ize nor the flower whether it will or

,

will not bloom nor the lion whether it wil l or will not
,

cease to prey They are all in the smallest as in the gre at

.
,

est m atter, under th e absol ute domination of the group

sp i ri t
, being without free wil l and initiative whi ch in ,

some degr ee are posse ssed by every human being All

, .

animals of the same species l ook nearly alike because they ,

84 ROS I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON GE P T ION ~

emanate f rom the sam e group spirit while among the fif -

,

teen hundred millions of human be i ngs wh o people the

E arth no two look exactly alik e not even twins w hen ad o ,

l escen t because the stamp that is put upon each by th e

,

indwelling individual Ego makes the di ff erence in appear

ance as well as i n character .

That all oxen thrive on grass and all lions eat flesh
,
, ,
”
while one man s meat is another man s poison is an
“ ’

-
’

other i llustration of th e all inclusive influe nce of the -

group sp i rit as contrasted w i th the Eg o which m akes e ach

-

human being require a difl er en t proportion of food from

every other Doctors note with perp l ex i ty the s ame pecu
.
, ,

l i ari ty in administer i ng medici ne Its acts di ff ere ntly .

upon different indi viduals while the same medicine wil l ,

produce identical effects on two anim al s of the same Spe

cies owing to the fact th at an im al s all foll o wthe dictates
,

of the group spirit and Co smic Law— always ac

r

-
t simil arly
in identical circumstances M an alone is i n some measure.
, ,

able to follow his own desires within cert ain limits That .

his mistake s are many and grievous is granted and to , , ,

m any it might seem better if he were forced into the right

way but if this were done h e would never learn to do
, ,

right Lessons of discrimination between good and evi l

.

cannot be learne d unless he is free to choose his own course

and has learned to esche w the wr ong as a v eritable womb “

of pain If h e did right only because he had no choice

.
,

and ha d no chance to do otherwise he would b e but an ,

automaton and n ot an evolv i ng God As the builder .

l earns by his mistakes correcting past errors in future

,

buildings so man by means of his blunders an d th e pain

, , ,

they cau se him i s att ai ning to a higher ( bec au se self

,

conscious ) wisdom t h an th e animal wh ich acts wisely ,

becau se it is impe ll ed to action by the group spirit In -

.
 T H E F OU R K IN GDOM S 85

time the animal wil l become human have l iberty of choi ce ,

and will make mistakes and learn by them as we do now .

Diagr am 4 shows that the group spi rit of th e plant -

kingdom h as its lowest vehic l e in th e Re gion of C oncrete

Thought It i s two steps removed from its dense vehicle
.

and consequently the plan ts h ave a consciousness corre

spon d in g to th at of dr ea m less s l eep The group spirit of .
-

the m i neral h as its l owest vehi cle in the Region of Abstract

Thought and it is therefore three steps removed from its
, ,

dense vehicle ; hence it is in a state of deep unconsciousness

s imilar to the tr an ce condition .

We have now shown that man is an individua l indwe l l

ing spirit an Ego separate from all other entit ies direct ing
, ,

and working in one set of vehicles from wi th i n and th at ,

plants and ani mals are directe d from wi th ou t by a group

spirit having j urisdiction over a numbe r of animals or
plants in our Physica l Worl d They are separ ate only in.

appearance .

The relations of plant animal an d man to the l ife cur

,
’
rents in the Earth s atmosphere are symbolically r epr e
sente d by the cross The Mineral Kingdom is not r epre
.

sented because as we h ave seen it possesses no individua l

, ,

vital body hence cannot be the vehicle for currents bel ong
,

ing to the higher realms P l ato who was an Initi ate often
.
, ,

gave out occul t truths H e said . The Wor l d Sou l is “

-

”
crucified .

The lower l imb of the cross indicates the plant with its
root in the chemica l minera l soil The group spirits of .
-

plants are at the center of the Earth T h ey are ( i t will .

b eremembe red ) in the Re gion of Conc rete Thought which ,

inter penetrates the E arth as d o all th e other Worlds

-
, .

From these gr oup spirits fl ow stre ams or currents in a ll

-
86 R O S I CRU C I AN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON

directions to the periphery of the Earth p as sing outward ,

through the length of plant or tree .

Man is represente d by the upper limb ; he is th e i n v er ted

p l ant .The plant takes its food through the root Man .

takes his food through the head The plant stret ches i ts
.

generat i ve organs towar d s the sun M an th e inverted .

,

plant turns h i s towards the center of th e earth The plant

, .

is sustained by the sp1r 1tu al currents of the group spirit i n -

the center of the earth wh i ch enter i nto it by way of the

,

root Later it will be shown that the h i ghest Spiritual

.

i nfluence come s to man from the sun which se nds its rays ,

‘
throu gh man the i nverted plant from the h eaC downwards
, ,
.

The plant inhales th epo i sonous carbon dioxide exhaled by -

man and exhales th e li fe giv i ng oxygen used by him

-
.

The animal i s between the plant and the man Its spine .

is in a horizontal pos i tion an d through it pl ay the cur

rents of the an i mal group spirit wh i ch encircle the Earth
-

and thus represent the horizo ntal limb of the cro ss .

N o animal can be made to remain const antly upright ,

because in that c ase the currents of the group sp i rit could

,
-

not guide i t and i f it were not sufficiently ind i vi d ualized to

endure the sp i ritual currents wh i ch ente r the vertical
human spine it would die It is necessary that a veh i cle
, .

for the expression of an indivi dual Ego shall ha ve three

things—an upr ight walk that it may come into touch with
,

the currents just mentioned ; an upright larynx for only ,

such a larynx is capable of speech ( parrots and starlings

are examples of thi s effect of the upright larynx ) and ,

owing to the solar currents it must have warm blood The

,
.

latter is of the utmost impo rtance to the Ego which will be ,

logically explained and i llustrated later These requ i sites .

are simply menti oned here as the last words on the status
of the four kingdoms in relation to each other and to the
Worlds .
 C H APTER III .

M AN AN D T H E M E TH O D OF EVOLU TI ON .

Acti vi ti es o f Life; M em er y an d S ou l Gr owth

-
.

UR dy thus far of the seven Worl ds or states of

s tu

matter has shown us that each serves a definite

purpose in the economy of nature and that God , ,

the Great Spirit in Whom we actually and in fact liv e

,
“

”
and move and have our be ing is the P ower that per ,

m e ates an d susta ins the whole U niverse with Its Life ; but
while that Life flows into and is imm anent in every atom of
the six l ower Worlds and all containe d therein in th e ,

Seventh—the highest—the T riun e God alone I S .

Th e next highest or s ixth r ealm is the World of V irgin

“
Spirits H ere those sp arks from the divine Flam have
.

thei r being before th ey commence their long pilgrimage

through the five denser Worlds for the purpose of d e v elop
ing l atent potential i ties i nto dynamic powers As the seed .

unfolds its hidden possibilities by being buried in the soil ,

so these virg i n sp i rits will in time when they have passed

, ,

through matter ( the school of experience ) also become ,

d i v i ne Flames capable of bringing forth universes fro m

,

themselves .

’
The five Worlds constitut e the field of m an s evol ution ,

the three lower or denser being the scene of the present

pha se of his development We will now consider him as
.

relate d to these five Worlds by means of h i s appropr i ate

veh i cles remembering the two grand d i v isions into wh i ch
,

two of these Worlds are divided and that man has a vehicl e
,

for each o f th ese divisions .

 88 R O S I CRU CI AN C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON -

T H E S E V E N F OL DCO N S TI TU TI ON O F M AN .

Wor l d 0 7 136 9 730 71

'
. C or r esp on d i ng Veh i cle .

5 W or l d of Divi n e S p ir it Di vin e S p i r it
l Th iéef old
.

Th
4 Wor l d of Li f e S p ir i t
. . L i f e S p ir i t

Wo rl d of
R e gi on of Ab s tr a c t T h ou gh t F S Pi r it
H u m an S p ir it J
T h u gh t Region of C oncrete Th ough t
o . .
Mi n d .
( Th e M nd is i
th e m i r r o r
th r oug h w h ch i
t h e th r eef ol d
Sp r i it re flects
i ts el f i n t h e
t h r eef ol d
b od y ; th e t o
cu ss n i g p o n t . i
S e e Di a g r .

Desire world
‘
2 Desi r e B od y

1
l te q l e f l
fl
g t
od y
t
h
. .

g
0

P h ys
i cal
E th er ic R eg I On Vi tal B od y d i S do r f e

World Ch em ical Re gi on . Dense B od y

'

J
Th r eef d d S p r t ii

In
the waking state these vehicle s are all together They .

inter penetrate one another as the blood th e lymph and

-
,
, ,

other juices of the body inte rpenetr ate Thus i s the E g o -

.

enabled to act in the P hysical World

“

We ourselves as Egos function directl y in th e subtle

, ,

substance of the Region of Abstract Thought which we ,

have specialized within the periphery of our individual

aura Thence we view the impressions made by the outer
.

world upon the vital body through the se nses together w i th ,

the feelings and emotion s gener ate d by them in the desrr e

"
body and mirrored in the mind
, .

From these mental images we form our conclusions in ,

the substance of the Re gi on of Abstract Thought con ,

cerning the subjects with which they deal These con .

elusions are ideas By the power of will we project an

.

ide a through the mind where it takes concrete shape as

,

a thought form by drawing m i nd stuff around itself from

- -

the Region of Concrete Thought .

90 ROS I CRUC I AN COS M O C O N C E P T ION
-

sion and will be stored in the memory as are al l other

, ,

thought forms when they have expend ed their energy

-
.

( )
0 If the thought form meets the
-
witherin g feeling
of Indifference it d epends upon the spiritual energy con
taine d i n it whether it will be able to compel action or -

simply leave a weak impress upon the reflecting ether of

the vit al body after its k i netic energy has been exhausted .

( )
2 Where no immediate act i on is called f or by the
mental images of i m pacts from without these may be ,

projected directly upon the reflecting ether together with ,

the thoughts occasioned by them to be used at some future ,

ti me .The spirit working through the mind h as instant

, ,

access to the storehouse of consc i ous memory and may at

any ti me resurrect any of the pictures found there endue ,

them with new spiritual force and project them upon ,

the desire body to compel action Each time such a pic . ,

ture is thus used i t w i ll g al n\ I n v i v i dness strength and ,

effi ciency an d w i ll compel act i on along its particular line

,

more rea d i ly than on previou s occasions because i t cuts ,

“
groo v es and pro duces the phenomenon of thought gain
, ,
” ”
i n g or grow i ng upon u s by repetition
“
.

( )
3 A third way of using a thought form 1 s when the -

thinker projects i t toward another mind to act as a sug

gestion to carry i nform ation etc as i n thought trans
, ,
.
,
-

feren ce or i t may be d i rected aga i nst the desire body of

,

another person to compel action as in the case of a h ypn o,

ti st i nfluenc i ng a v i ctim at a distance It will then act .

in precisely the same manner as if i t were the victim s ’

own thought If in line with his procl i vit ies it will act
.

as per paragr aph l a If contrary to his nature as des

.
,

cr i be d in l b or l c .

When the work design ed for such a projecte d thought

f orm has been acc ompl i shed or its energy expended in
.
,
 M A N A N D T H E M E T H OD O E E V OLU T I ON 91

vain attempts to achie v e its object it gravitates back to,

i ts creator bearing with it the indelible record of the j our

,

ney Its success or fai l ure is imprinted on the negative

.

’
atoms of the reflecting ether of its creator s vital body ,

where it forms that part of the record of the thinker s ’

l i fe and action which is sometimes calle d the sub conscious -

mind .

Thi s reco rd is much m ere important than the memory

to which we have conscious access for the latt er is made
,

up from imperfect and illusive sense perceptions and i s -

the voluntary memory or conscious mind .

The invo luntary memory or sub conscious mind comes

-

into being in a di ff erent way altogether beyond our con

,

trol at present As the ether carrie s to the sensit i ve film

.

in the camer a an accurate im pr esi on of the surrounding

l andscape taking in the minute st detail regardless of
,

whether the ph otographer has obs erved it or not so the

’

ether contained in the air we inspire carries with it an

a ccurate and detailed picture of all our surroundings .

N ot onl y of material t hings but also the conditions e x

,
'

i stin g each moment within our aura The slightest .

thought fee l ing or emotion is transmitted to the lungs

, ,

where it is injected into the blood The blood is one of.

the highest products of the vital body as it is the carrie r

of nourishment to every part of the body and the direct ,

vehicle of the Ego The picture s it contai ns are impressed

.

upon the negative atoms of the vital body to serve as ,

’
arbiters of the man s destiny in the p os t m or tem state .

The memory ( or so called mind ) both conscious and

-
,

sub conscious re l ate s wh olly to the experiences of this

-

life It consists of impress i ons of events on th e vit al b ody

. .

These may be changed or even eradicated as note d in ,

the explanation concerning the forgiveness of sins which

 92 ROS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

is given a few pages further on which change or er adi ,

cat i on d epends upon the el i minati on of the se impress i ons

‘

from the ether of the v i tal bo d y .

There is also a superconscious m emory That i s the

‘

storehouse of all faculti es ac qu i re d and knowle dge ga i ned

l n previ ous lives though perhaps latent in the p resent
,

incarnation This record is indel i bly engraven on the

.

l i fe spirit It manifests ordinarily though not to the

.
,

full extent as consc ience an d character which en souls all

,

thought forms so met i mes as counsellor sometimes com

-
, ,

pelli ng act i on w i th resistless force even contrary to reason,

e il d desIr e .

In man y women in whom the v i tal b ody is pos i ti ve

, ,

and in advanc ed people of e i ther se x where the v i tal body

has been sensi ti ze d by a pure and holy l i fe by prayer and ,

concentration this supercons ci ous memory inherent in

,

the l i fe S pirit i s occasi on ally \ to some extent above the

, ,

ne cessity of cloth i ng itself I n m l n d stuff and desire mat

ter i n order to compel action It doe s not always nee d to
.

incur the danger of being subjected to and perhaps over w

rule d by a process of reasoning Sometimes i n the form .

,

of intu i tion or teaching from w i thin it impresses itself ,

directly upon the reflecting ether of the vital body The .

more rea d i ly we learn to recognize it and follow its dic

tates the oftener it w i ll speak to our etern al welfare
, ,
.

By their act i vit i es during waking h eurs the desire body

and th e mind are constantly destroying the dehse vehicle .

Every thought and m ovement breaks down tissue On the .

other h and the vital body faithfully endeavors to re store

,

harmony and build up what the other vehicles are tearing

down It is not able however to entirely withst and the
‘

.
, ,

powerful onslaughts of the impulses and thoughts It .

gradually loses groun d and at last there come s a time

 M A N AN D TH E M E TH OD OF E V OLUT ION 93
.

“
when it col l apses Its points shrivel u p so to say The
.
-
,
.

v i ta l fluid ce ases to flow along the nerves in sufficient

quan tity ; the body becomes drowsy the Think er is h am ,

pered by its drowsiness and forced to w i thdraw taking th e ,

desire body with him This withdrawal of the higher

.

vehicles leave s the dense body interpenetrate d by the vital

body in the senseless stat e we call sleep .

Sleep however is not by any means an inactive state

, , ,

as people generally suppose If it were the bo d y would

.
,

be no d i fferent on awakening in the morn i ng from its con

di tion when it went to sleep at night ; its fatigue would
be just as great On the contrary sleep i s a period o f
.
,

intense activity and the more intense it is the greater its

val ue for it eli mina tes the poisons resulting from tissue
,

destroyed by the menta l and physica l activities of the day .

The tissues are r e built and the rhythm of the body r e

-

stored The more thoroughly this work is done the greater

.

the benefit accrui ng from slee p .

The Desire World is an ocean of wisdom an d harmony .

Into this the Ego takes the mind an d the desire body
when the lower vehicles have been left in sleep There th e .

first care of the Ego is the restoration of the rhythm and

h armony of the mind and the desire body This res .

torati on is accomplishe d gradual ly as the harmonious

vibrations of the Desire World flow through them There .

is an essence in the Desire World corresponding to the

v ita l fluid which permea tes the dense body by means of

the v i tal body The higher vehicles as it were sl eep th c m

.
, ,

selves in this elixir of l i fe When strengthened they

.
,

commence work on the vital body which was left with ,

the slee ping dense body Then the Vital body begins to
.

special i ze the solar energy anew rebuilding the dense

,
94 R O S I CR U CI AN C OS M O C ON CEP T I ON -

body using particularl y the chemical ether as its medium

,

i n the process of restorat i on

.
.

It i s this act i vity of the diff erent vehicles dur1ug sleep

wh i ch forms the basi s for the acti vity of t h e following
d ay . Without that there would be no awakeni ng for the ,

Ego was forced to abandon h 1s vehicles becaus e their weari

n ess rendered them us eless If the work of removing that
.

fati gue were not done the bodies would remai n as lee p
, ,

as somet i m es happens in natural trance It is j ust b ecause .

of th i s harmonizing recuperativ e activity that sle ep 43

,

better than doctor or me d i c i ne i n preserving health Mer e .

rest i s nothi ng in comparison w i th sleep It is only whil e .

the h i gher vehicles are i n the Des i re World that there is

a total suspension of waste and an influx of r estoring

force It is t r ue that during rest the Vital body is not

.

hampered in its work by tissue being broken down by

activ e motion and tense m u sel es but st i ll it must contend ,

with the wast i ng energy of thought and it d oes not the n

recei v e the ou tsi d e recuperati ve force from the desire body
as during sleep .

It happens however that at time s the d es1re body doe s

, ,

not fully withdraw so that part of it remai ns conn ected

,

w i th the Vital bo dy the veh i cle for sense perception an d

,
-

memory The result is that restorat i on 1 s onl y partly ao

.

compl i shed and that the scenes and act i on s of th e Desire

Worl d are brought into the phys i cal con sc i ousnes s as
dreams Of cours e most dreams are confu sed as the axis
"

of percept i on is aske w because of the improper relation

‘

of one body to another The memory is also confused by.

th i s incongruous relation of the v eh i cles and as a result

of the restoring force dream fill ed sleep i s restless and th e
-

body feels tired on awaken i ng .

During life the threefold spirit the Ego works on an d , ,

 M AN A N D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OLU T I ON 95

in th e threefold body to which it is connected by the link

,

of mind This work brings the threefold soul into being

. .

The soul is the spiritua l i ze d product of th e b ody .

A s proper f ood feeds the body in a m ateri al sen se so ,

the activity of the spirit in the dense body which results

,

in r ig h t acti on promote s the growth of the C onscious

,

Soul As the forces from the sun play in the Vit al body
.
”

and nourish it that it may act on the den se body so the

, ,

m em ory of actions done in the dense body— the desires ,

feelings and emotions of the desire bo dy and the thoughts

an d ideas in the mind— cause the gr owth of th e Inte l
 96 R OS I CR C U I A N Oos M o OON OEP T I ON
-

lectual Soul In like manner the h ig h es t d esir es an d emo

.

ti on s of the desire body form the Emotional Soul .

This threefol d soul i n turn enhances the consciousness

of the threefol d sp i r i t .

Th e Emot i onal Soul which is the extract of the desire

,

body a d ds to the effic i ency of the H um an Spiri t which

, ,

i s the spir itual counte rpart of the des i re body

,

The Intellectual Soul give s added power to the Life

Sp i rit b ecause the I ntellectual Soul is extracted from the
,

vital body which i s the material counterpart of th e Li fe

,

Spirit .

The Consc i ous Soul increase s the cons ciou sness of the
Divine Sp i r i t because i t ( The Consci ous Soul ) 18 the
extr act of the dense body w hich latter i s th e counterpart
,

of the Divine Spir i t .

DEATH AN DP U RGAT ORY .

So man buil ds and sows until the moment of de ath ar

riv es Then the see d ti me and the per i o d s of growth an d
.
-

ripeni ng i s past The harve st t i me has come when th e

.
,

skeleton spectre of Death arrives with his scythe and

hour gl ass That i s a good symbol The skeleton symbol
-
. .

i zes the relatively perm anent part of the body The .

‘

scythe represents the fact that this permanent p art which ,

i s about to be harveste d by the spl r it is the fruitage of the ,

l i fe now drawing to a close The hour glass in h i s hand .

-

i n d i cates that the hour does not strike unti l the full course
has be en run i n harmony with unvary i ng laws When .

that moment arri v es a separation of the vehicles takes

place As h i s l i fe i n the P hys i cal World is ended for the
.

t i me being it i s not n ecessary for man to retain his dense

,

body The vital body which as we have explained al so

.
,
98 E OS I OEU OI AN Oos M o OON OE P T I ON
-

ba lm the body until at least three days after death f or ,

whi le the v ita l bo dy i s with the higher veh i cles and they
,

are still connected with the dense body by means of the

s i lver cord any pos t m or tem examination or oth er injury
,

to the den se body will be felt in a measure by the man

, , .

C remation S houl d be particularly avoided in the first three

days after d eath because i t ten d s to d i sintegrate the v ita l
,

body which shoul d be kept intact unt i l the panorama of

,

the past l i fe has been etche d into the d esire body .

The s i lver cord snaps at the point where the sixes unite ,

hal f r emaining with the dense body and the other hal f
 M A N A N D TH E M ET H OD OF E V OLUT I ON 99

with the higher vehicl es From the time the cord sn ap s

.

the dense body is quite dead .

In the beginni ng of 1 90 6 Dr M cDoug all made a series

.

of experiments in the Mas sachusetts Genera l H ospital ,

to determine if possible whether anything not ordin arily

, ,

Visible le f t the body at death For this purpose he con

.

structed a pair of scal es c apab l e of registering differences

-

of one tenth of an ounc e

-
.

The dying person and his bed were p l aced on one of

the p l atforms o f the scale which was then ba l ance d by
,

weights p l aced on the opposite p l atform In every in .

stance it was noted that at the precise moment when th e

dying pe rson drew the l ast breath the platfor m cont ain ,

ing the weights dropped with a startl ing suddenness l ift ,

ing the bed and the body thus S howing that someth i ng
,

invisible but having weight had left the body T h ere

, ,
.

upon the newspapers a ll over the country announced in

‘

glaring headlines that Dr M cDou g all had weighed the

.
“

”
soul.

Occultism hail s with joy the discoveries of modern

sc i ence as they invariably corroborate what occult science
,

h as long taught . The experiments of Dr M cDou gal l .

showed conclusi v ely that something invisible to ordinary

sight left the bo d y at death as trained clairvoyants had
,

seen and as h ad been stated in lectures and literatur e for

,
‘

many years prev i ous to Dr M cDou g al l s discovery

.
’
.

“ ”
But this inv isible somethin g is not the soul There .

is a great di fference The reporte rs j ump at conc l usions

.

when they state that the scientists have weighed th e “

”
soul. The soul belongs to higher realms and can never
be weighed on physical scales ev en though they r egistered
,

variations of one millionth part of a g rain inste ad of one

-

tenth of an ounce .
 100 ROS I CRU CI AN CO S M O C ON C EP TI ON -

I t was th e v i ta l b ody wh i ch th e s ci en tis ts w eig h ed It

.

is formed of the four ethers and they belong to the P hys

ical World .

As we ha ve seen a certain amount of this eth er is

,
'

”
superi mposed upon the ether which envelops the part i
cles of the human bo dy and is confined there during phys
ical life ad d ing i n a sli ght degree to the weight of the
,

dense bo dy of plant animal and man In de ath it escapes ;

,
.

hence the di m i nut i on in we i ght not i ced by Dr M cDou g all .

when the persons w i th whom he exp erimented exp i re d .

Dr M cDou g all also tr ied his scales i n weigh i ng dy i ng

.

’
anim als N o d i m i nution was found here though one of
‘

.
,

the anim als was a large St Bernard dog That was taken . .

to in d i cate that animals have no so ul s : A l ittle later ,

however P rofessor La V T win in g head of the Science

,
. .

Department of the Los Angeles P olytech nic School e x

‘

i d w i th m i ce and kittens which he enclose d in

‘

p e r m en t e ,

hermet i cally sealed glass flasks H i s scales were the most .

sensit i ve procur able and were enclosed i n a glass case

f rom wh i ch all mo i sture had been remove d It was found .

that all the ani mals obse rve d lost weight at death A .

good sized mouse w eigh l ng

-
,
grams suddenly l os t ,

mill i grams at death .

A kitten used i n another experiment lost one hundred

milligrams wh i le dyi ng and at i ts last gasp it suddenly
lost an ad d i t i onal s i xty m illi grams After that it lost .

weight slowly due to e v aporati on

,
.

Thus the teachi ng of occult s cience in regard to the

possess i on of v i tal bodies by animals was also vindicate d
when suffici ent ly fine sc ales were used and the case where ,

th e r ath er insensiti v e scales did not Show dim i nution in

the weight of the St Bernard dog shows that the vital.

bodies of animal s are proportio nately lighter than in man

,
.
102 ROS I CRU CIAN CO S M O -
CON C E P TI ON

The man stands as a spectator before this panorama of

h i s past l i fe H e sees the p i ctures as they pass an d the y
.

impress themsel v es upon his h i gher veh i cles but he has ,

no feel i ng about them at this time That is reser ved unt i l .

the time when he enters into the Des1r e World which i s ,

the world of feeling and emotion At present h e is only .

111 the E theric Region of the P hysica l World .

This panoram a l asts from a few hours to several days ,

depending upon the leng th of time the man could kee p

awake if necessary Some people can keep awak e only
,
.
“

twelve hours or even less ; others can do so upon occ asion

, , ,

for a numb er of days but as l ong as the man can remain

,

awake this panor ama lasts

, .

This f eatu r e of life after death i s similar to that which

'

takes place when one i s drown i ng or fall i ng from a height .

In such cases the Vital body als o lea ves the den se body and
the man sees his life in a flash , because he l ose s consc i ous
‘

”
ness at once Of course the s i lver cord i s not broken
.
“
,

or there could b e no resuscitation .

When the endurance of the Vital body has r each ed its

l imit it collapses in the way describe d when we were con
,

si d er in g the phenomenon of slee During physical life

p .
,

when the Ego controls its vehicles this collapse te rminates ,

the waking hours ; after death the collapse of the vital

body term i nates the panoram a an d forces th eman to with
draw into the Des i re Worl d The s i lver cord breaks at the
.

”
po i nt wher e the s i xes unite ( see d i agram 5
“
and the
same divisi on is made as during sleep but with this im ,

portant d i ff erence that though th e vital body returns to the

,

dense bo d y it no longer interpenetrates it but simply

, ,

hovers over it It rema i ns floating over the grave decaying

.
,

synchronously w i th th e dense vehicle H ence to the tra i ned .

,

cl ai r voy ant a graveyard is a nauseating S ight and if only

,
 M AN AN D TH E M E TH OD OF E V OLU T I O N 10 3

more people could see it as he does l ittle argument woul d ,

be necessary to induce them to change from the present

uns anitary method of disposing of the dead to the more
rational method of cremation whi ch restor es the elements
,

to their primordia l conditi on without the ob j ectionable

features incident to the process of slow decay .

In leaving the vital bo dy the process is much the same

a s when the dense body is discarded The life forces of one
.

atom are taken to be used as a nucl eus for th e Vital body

,

of a future incarnation Thus upon h i s entrance into

.
,

the Desire World the man has the seed atoms of the dense -

an d the Vita l b odies in addition to th e desir e body and

,

the mind .

If the dying man could leave all desires behind the de ,

sire body would very quickly fall away from him lea ving ,

h im free to proceed into the heaven worl d but that is not ,

general ly the cas e Most people especially if they die i n

.
,

the prime of l ife have many ties and much interest i n

,

life on earth They have not altered their de sires bec ause
.

they have l ost their physical bodies In fact often th eir .

desires are even augmented by a ve ry intense l onging to

return This acts in such a manner as to bind them to
.

the Desire World in a very unpleasant way although u n ,

fortunately they do not reali ze it On the othe r hand o l d

,
.
,

and decrepit persons and those who are weakene d by l ong

illness and are tired of life pass on very quickl y
,

The matter may be ill ustrated by the ease wi h which

t
the seed f al l s out of th e ripe fruit no particl e of the flesh
,

clinging to it while in the unripe fruit th e see d clings

,

to the flesh with the greate st tenaci ty Thu s it is espe .

ci al ly hard for people to die who were taken ou t of their

bod i es by accident while at the height of their physica l

h ea l th and strength engaged in numerous ways in th e
,
104 ROS I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

act i v i ties o f phys i cal life ; held by the t i es of wife family , ,

rel at i ves fr ien d s pursu i ts of bus i ness an d pleas ure

, ,
.

Th e suici de who tri es to get away from life only to

, ,

fin d that he is as much alive as ever is in the most piti

'

able pl i ght H e is able to watch thos e whom he has per

.

|
,

haps d i sgraced by h i s act an d worst of all he h as an u h

, ,

spe akable feel ing of be i ng hollowed out “

The part in .

the ovo i d aura where the dense body used to be is empty

an d although the desire body has t aken the form of the

d i scarded d ense body it feels l i ke an empty shell because

, ,

the creat i ve archetype of the body in the Regi on of Con

c rete T h ought persists as an empty mold so to s peak as
.
, ,

long as the dense body should properly have lived When .

a person meet s a natural death e v en in the prl m e of l ife , ,

the act i v i ty of the archetype cea ses and the d esire body ,

a djusts itself so as to occu pyfi th e whole of the form but ,

in the case of the su i c i de th at awful feeling of em pti “

”
ness remains until the t ime comes when in the natural
v
,
“

course of ev ents h i s death woul d hav e occurred

,
.

As long as th e man enterta i ns the desires connected

with e arth l i fe he must stay in h i s d es i re body and as th e
progress of the i n d ividual requires that he pass on to
h i gher Regions the ex i stence in the Des i re World must
,

necessarily become purgative ten di ng to purify him from ,

h i s b i n d i ng des i res H ow this i s done is be st seen by tak

.

i ng some ra d i cal i nstances .

The m i ser who lo v ed his gold in earth life love s it just

as dearly after death ; but in th e first place he cannot
acquire any more because he has no longer a dense body
,

wherewith to grasp it and worst of all he cannot even keep ,

wh at h e hoarde d d uring life H e w i ll perhaps g o and sit

.
, ,

by h i s safe an d watch the cherished gold or bonds ; but

the he i rs appear and with it may b e a stingi ng jeer at the
.
, ,
10 6 ROS I CR C U I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

In time however he learns the uselessness of longing f or

, ,

dr ink wh ich h e c annot obt ain As with so many of our

,
.

d es1r es I n the Earth life al l d esires in the Desire World

,

d ie for want of opportuni ty to gratify the m When the .

drunkard has been purged he is ready so far as this h abit , ,

”
i s concerned to leave this st ate of purgatory an d ascend
,
“

I nto the heaven world .

Thus we see that it is not an avenging Deity th at make s

pur gatory or hell for us but our own individu al evil habits
,

and acts Accord i ng to the intensity of our desires wil l

.

be the time and suffering entailed in their expurgation .

h i the cases m entioned it would have been no su ff ering

to the drunkard to l ose his world ly possessions If he had .

any he did not cling to them N either would it have

,
'

caused the miser any pain to have been deprived of in

toxicants It is safe to say that he would not have cared
.

if there were not a dro p of li quor in the world But he .

did care about his gold and the drunkard ca red about , j

h i s dri nk and so the unerring law ga v e to each that which

was needed to purge him of h is unhal l owed desires and
'

e v il habits .

This is the law that is symboliz ed in the scythe of the

“
reape r Death ; the law that says
,
whatsoe ver a man ,
”
sowet h th at shall he also reap
,
It is the law of caus e .

and effe ct which rules all things i n the three Worlds in

, ,

e v ery realm of natur e— physical moral and mental , .

E verywhere it works inexorably adjusting all things re , ,

storing the equ il ib rl u m wherever even the slighte st action

h as brought about a d i sturbance as al l action must The ,
.

result may be manifest immediately or it may be delayed

for ye ars or f or l ives but sometime somewhere just an d
, , ,

equal retribution will be made The student shoul d par-

'
.
r

ticul arly note th at its work is absol ute l y impersonal .

 M AN AN D TH E M E TH OD OF E VOLU TION 107

There is in the universe neither reward nor punishm ent .

All is the result of invari able law The action of this .

law wi ll be more fully elucidated in the next chapter ,

where we shall find it assoc i ate d with another Great Law

of the Cosmos which also operates in the evolution of man
,
.

The l aw we are now considering is called the law of

Consequence .

In the Desire World it operates in purging man of the

bas er des i res and the correct i on of the weaknesses and vices
which h i n der h i s progre ss by making him suff er 1n the
,

manner best adapted to that purpose If h e has m ade

'

others suff er or has dealt unjustly with them he will be

, ,

made to su ffer i n that i dentical way Be it noted however .

, ,

that if a person h as been subject to vices or h as done ,

wrong to others but has overcome his Vices or repente d

, ,

and as far as pos i ble made right the wrong done such
, , ,

r epentance ,
reform an d rest i tut i on has purge d h i m of
thos e specia l Vices and evil acts The equ i l i brium has
.

been restored and the lesson learned during that incarna

tion and therefore w i ll not be a cause of suff ering after
,

In the De sire World l i fe is l ived about three ti mes as

rapidly as in the P hys i cal World A man who has l ive d
.

to be fi f ty years of age in the P hysical World w ould live

t
through the same life events in the Desire World in about
sixteen years This i s of course only a general) gauge
.
, , .

There are persons who remain in the Desire World much

longer than their term of phys i cal life Others aga i n .
,

who have led lives with few gross des i res pass through ,

in a much shorter pe ri o d but the measure above given is

,

very nearly correct for the average man of the present

d ay.

It will be remembered that as the m an leaves the dense

10 8 R OS I CR UC I AN C O S M O C O N C E P T ION
-

body at death his past l i fe passes before h i m in pictur e s ;

,

but at that time he has no feel ing concerni ng the m .

During h i s l i fe in the Des i re Worl d also thes e life pic

tures roll backwards, as before ; but now th e man has all
the feel i ngs th at it is poss i ble for h i m to have as one by ,

one t h e scenes pass before him Every inc i dent in hi s

,
.

past life is now l i v ed over agai n When he comes to a.

point where he has injured someone he himself feels the ,

pa i n as the i njured p erson felt i t H e lives through all

.

the sorrow and suffering he has cause d to others a n d

learns j ust how pai nful is the hurt and how hard to bear
is the sorrow h e h as cause d In ad d i tion there is the f act
.

alrea d y menti one d that the su ffering is much keener b e

c ause he has n O d en se body to d ull th e pain P erhaps that
'
.

is why the S peed of l i fe there I S triple d —that the su ffer

ing may lose in duration what i t gains i n sharpness N at
'

ture s measures are wonderfully just and true

’
.

There is another character i sti c pecul i ar to this phase

of post mortem existence which i s inti mately connected
W1th the fact ( already mentioned ) that distance is almost
ann i h i late d in the Desire Wor ld When a man dies he
.
,

at once seems to swell out in his vital body ; he appears

to himself to grow into immense proportions This feel .

I n g 1 s due to the fact not that the body really grows but
, ,

that the perceptive f acu ltie s recei ve so m any impressions

‘

from v ar i ous S cu rce s al l seeming to be close at hand

,
.

The same is true of the desire body The man seems to

. .

be present with a ll the people with whom on earth h e

had relation s of a nature which requ i re correction If .

he has injured on e man in S an F rancisco and another in

N ew?York he will fee l as if part of him were in each
,

place This gives him a pecul iar f eel ing of being cut to
.

pieces .
1 10 R O S I CR U CI AN COS M O C ON C EP T ION -

future l i ves while our selfish hysterical lamentations may

, ,

depri v e i t of much of th e value of the l i fe it has j ust con

clu ded .

The mission of purgatory is to era di cate the injurious

hab its by making their gratificat i on impossible The l n .

d iv i dual suff ers exactly as he has ma de others suffer

through his d i shonesty cruelty intolerance or what not
, , ,
.

Bec ause of this sufferi ng he le arns to act kindly honestl y , ,

and with forbearance tow ard others in future Thus in .

,

consequence of the existe nce of this ben eficen t state, man

learns virtue and right action When he is reborn he is.

'
free from evil habits at least every evil act committed is
,

one of free will The tendencie s to repeat the evil of past

.

lives remain for we must learn to do r i ght consciously

,

and of our own will U pon occasion these t ende ncies

. ,

tempt us thereby affording us an opportunity of ranging

,

oursel ves on the side of m ercy and Virtue as against vice

an d cruelty But to I nd icate right action and to help us
.

resist the snares and wiles of te mptation we ha v e the feel , (

ing resulting from the expurgation of evil habits and the

expiation of the wrong acts of past l ives If we heed that .

f eeling and abstain from th e p articular ev i l involved the ,

temptation will ce ase We ha v e freed oursel v es from it

.

for all time If we yield we shall experience keener suff er

.

ing than before until at l ast we have learned to li ve by

the Golden Rule because the way of the transgres sor is
,

hard Even then we h ave not reache d the ultimate To

. .

do good to others b ecause we want them to do good to us

is essential ly sel fish In time we must learn to do good
.

r eg ar d l ess of h ow we are treate d by others ; as C h rist said ,

we must l ove even our enemies .

There is an inestimable benefit in knowing about the

method an d obj ect of this purgation because we are thus ,
 M A N AN D TH E M E T H OD OF E V OLU T I ON 11 1

enabl ed to f orestall it by l iving our purgatory here and

now day by day thus advancing much faster than would
,

otherwi se be possible An exerci se is given in the latter

.

part of this work the objec t of which 1 s pur ification as

,

aid to th e deve l opment of spi ri tua l sight It consi sts .

of thinking over the happe ni ngs of the day afte r retiring

at night We review e ach incident of the day in reverse
.
,

order taking particular n Ote of the moral aspect con sid

, ,

ering wh ether we acted rightl y or wrongly in each par

ticul ar c ase regarding actions ment al attitude and h abi ts
,
.

By thus j udging ourselves day by day endeavoring to cor ,

r ect mistakes and wrong actions we shall materi ally ,

shorten or perhaps even eliminate the necessity for pur

g at o r
y and b e able to pass to the fi rst hea en direct l y a f ter v

"
deat h. I f in th is manner we consciously overcome our
,

weaknesse s we al so m ake a very material advance in the

,

school of evo lution Even i f we f ai l to corr ect ou r actions

.
“ ,
“
we derive an immense b ene fit f rom judging ourse l ves fl
,

thereby generating aspirations toward good which in tim e ,

wi l l sure l y bear fruit in right action .

’
In reviewing the day s happenings and b l aming our
sel ves f or wrong we shou l d not forget to impe rsonal ly
,

approve of th e goo d we h ave done and dete rmine to do

still better In this way we enhance the g ood by approval
.

as much as we abjure th e evil by blame .

Repentance an d re f orm are also power f ul factors in

shortening th e purgatorial existence for nature never ,

wastes e ff ort in useless pr ocesses When we re al i ze the .

wr ong of c ertain habits or act s in ou r past l if e and ,

determin e to eradicate the habit and to r edre ss th e wrong

committed we are expunging the pictures of th em f rom
,

the sub conscious memory and they wi ll not be ther e to

-

j udge us afte r de ath Even th ough we are n ot ab le to

.
 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

make rest itution for a wrong the sincerity of ou r regr et

,

will suffice N ature do es not aim to get even or to

.
” “
,

take r evenge Recompense may b e given to our v ictim in

.

other ways .

Much progress ordinari l y r eserve d for future l ives wi ll

be made by the m an who thus takes t i me by the f Orel ock ,

j udgi ng himself and erad i cati ng Vice by reform i ng his

character This pract i ce 1s earnestly recommended It
. .

i s p erhaps the most i mportant te aching in the present

‘

work .

T H E B ORDE RLAN D .

P urgatory occupies the three l ower Regions of the De

s i re World The first heaven is i n the three upper Re
.

gi ons. The central Region is a sort of borderland

neither heave n nor hell In this Region we fi nd people
.

who are honest and uprigh t; wh o wronged no one but ,

were deeply immerse d in bu siness and though t nothing of

the higher l ife For them the Desire Wor ld is a state of
.

”
the most indescribable monotony There is no busine ss
-

.
“

in that world nor is there for a man of that kind any

, ,

thing that will t ake its place H e has a very hard time
.

u ntil he learns to think of higher things than l od g er s and

drafts The men who thought of the problem of life and

.

“
came to the conclusion that death ends it all who de
nied the existence of things outside th e ma terial sens e -

world—these men also feel thi s dreadful monotony They .

had expecte d annih i lation of consc iousness but instead of ,

that they find thems elves with an augmented perception

of persons and things about them They h ad bee n ao .

customed to denying these thin gs so vehementl y that they

often fancy the Desir e Worl d an hallucination and may , ,

fre quentl y be h eard exc laiming in the deepest despair ,

”
“
When will it end ? When wil l it end ?
1 14 R O S I CR C U I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I O N

su l ts of its suff erings are incorporated in the s ee d atom of -

the d esire bo dy thus i mpart i ng to it the quality of right

,

feel i ng wh i ch acts as an impulse to good and a deterrent

,

from evil i n the future H ere the panorama of the past

.

again unrolls i tself backwar d but th i s t i me it is the good

,

acts of life th at are the bas i s of feel i ng When we come .

to scenes where we helpe d others we r ealize anew all the

j oy of help i ng wh i ch was our s at the time an d i n a d dit i on ,
'

we f eel all the grat i tu d e poure d out to us by the recip i ent

of our help When we come to sce nes wh ere we were
.

helpe d by others we aga i n feel all the gratitude that we

,

then felt towar d our b enefactor Thus we see the impor .

tance of apprec i at i ng the favors shown us by others b e ,

cause grat i tu de makes for soul growth Ou r happiness in -

.

heaven depends upon the joy we gave other s and the ‘

‘

valuat i on we placed upon wha t oth ers d i d for us .

It should be ever borne in i m in d that the power of giv

i n g 1 s not vested ch i efly in the mon i ed man I n di scr im i .

nate g i ving of money m ay even be an ev i l It is well to .

giv e money for a purpose we are conv i nced i s good but

“

service i s a thousandfold better As Whi tman says .

,

B eh old " I d o n ot g 1v e l ectu res, or a i

l ttl e ch ari ty ;
Wh en I gi v e, I giv e m y sel f .

A kind look expressions of con fid en ce a sympathetic and

, ,

l oving h elpfulnes s —thes e can be given by all regard

l ess of wealth Moreover, we should particularly en deavor
.

to help the needy one to help himself whether physically , ,

financi ally morally or mentally and not caus e him to be

, , ,

come dependent upon us or others .

The ethics of giving with the eff ect on the giver as a

,

S piritual l esson are most beautifully Shown in Lowell s ’

,

”
“
The Vision of Sir Lau n f al The young and ambitious
.
 M AN A N D T H E M E T H OD OF E V OLU T I O N 1 15

knight Sir Laun f al clad in shining armor and astride a

, ,

splen d id charger is setting out from his c astle to s ee k

,

The H oly Grail On his sh i eld gleams the cross the sym
.
,

bol of the benignity and t enderness of Ou r S avior the ,

meek and lowly On e but the knight s h eart is filled with

,
’

pri de and haughty disdain for the poor and nee d y H e .

meets a leper asking alms and with a contemptuous frown

throws hi m a coin as one might cast a bone to a hungry
,

cu r but
,

i
T h e l e p er r a se d n ot th e old f r om th e d u st, g
“
B ett er to m e th e p oor m an s c u st,
’
r
r b
B ette th e l es s n of th e p oo , i g r
g
Th ou h I tu r n em p ty f om hi s d oo r r .

T h at i s n o t ru e a l m s wh ch th e h an d can h ol d ; i
He gi
v e s on l y th e w or th l e s s ol d g
Wh o v es f r om a s en s e of d u ty ;
gi
B u t h e wh o gi
v e s f r om a sl en d e mi te, r
An d gi
v e s to th a t w h ch i s ou t of s ht i ig
T h at th r e a d of al l su st a n n B eau ty
-
i i g
Whi ch ru n s th r ou gh al l a n d d oth al l u n te, i
'

T h e h an d ca n n ot cl a sp th e wh ol e of h i s al m s ,
Th e h e ar t ou ts tr e tch e s i t s e a e p al m s , gr
g i
F or a g od oes w th i t a n d m a es i t s tor e k
T o th e sou l th at w as s ta v n r i g
i n d a n ess e f or e rk b .

On hi s return S i r Lau n f al finds another in possession

of his castle and is dri v en from the gate
,
.

An old b en t m an w or n ou t an d f r ail
, ,

He ca m e b a ck f r om s e eki n g t h e H ol y G rai l ;
i ’
L ttl e h e r e ek e d of h i s e a r l d om s l os s ,
N o m or e on h i s s u r coa t w a s l a z on ed th e b c r oss,
B u t d ee p i n h i s h e a r t th e s n h e w e r e, ig
b
T h e a d g e of th e su ff e r n g a n d th e p oor i .

Again he meet s the leper who again asks a l ms , .

time the knight respon d s d ifferently .

A n d S i r L au n f a l s a d i
I eh ol d i n th ee b
An i m ag e of H i m W h o d e d on th e tr ee ; i
Th ou al so h as t h a d th y cr ow n of th or n s ,
Th ou al so h a s t h a d th e w o l d s b u fi ets a n d
’
r see m s,
11 6 RO S I CRU C I A N COS M O C ON C E P TI ON-

i
An d to th y l f e w er e n ot d eni e d
Th e w ou n d s i n th e h a n d s a n d f e et a n d s d e ; i
M il d M ary s S on , a c n owl e d g e m e ;
’
k
B eh ol d , th r ou g h h i m I g v e to T h e e " ”
i
A look i n the leper s eye brings remembrance and rec og
’

ni t i on and
,

i
T h e h ea r t wi th n h i m w a s a sh e s a n d d u st ;
i
H e p ar te d i n tw a n h i s s n g l e cr u s t, i
b k
H e r o e th e i ce on th e s tr e am l e t s r n ,
’
bi k
g
A n d av e th e l ep e r t o ea t a n d d r n i k .

A transformat i on takes place

Th e l ep er no l on g er cr ou ch e d b y hi s s ide ,

B u t s tood b ef or e h i m g l or fie d , i
A n d th e V oi ce
t h a t w a s s o f te r t h a n s l e n c e s a d , i i
“
L o, i t i s I , b e n ot a f r a d " i
I n m an y l an d s, w th ou t a v a l , i i
i
T h ou h a s t s p en t th y l f e f or th e H ol y G r a l ; i
B eh ol d , i t i s h e r e "—Th s cu p w h ch th ou i i
Di d s t fil l a t th e str eam l et f or m e b u t n ow
’

b
T hi s cr u st i s m y od y r o en f or th ee , b k
i b
T h s w a ter th e l ood I sh e d on th e tr ee ;
T h e H oly S u p p er i s ep t, n d ee d , k i
I n wh a ts o w e sh ar e w th a n oth er s n eed ;i
’
‘

i
N ot w h a t w e g v e, b u t w h a t w e s h a r e
F or th e gi i
f t w th ou t th e g i v er i s a r e ; b
Wh o g v es h im sel f w th h i s a l m s f e e d s th r ee
i i
i i
H m s el f , h i s h u n g er n g n e h or , a n d m e ”
ig b .

Th e first heaven i s a place of j oy without a s i ngle drop

of b i tterness The sp i r i t i s beyond the i nfluence of the
.

material earthly cond i ti ons and assimilates all the good

, ,

contained in the past li fe as it lives it over again H ere .

all ennobling pursuits to wh i ch the man aspired are realized

in fullest measure It is a place of rest and the har d er
.
,

has been the l i fe the mor e keenly w i ll the rest be enjoyed

,
.

Sickness sorrow and pa i n are unknown quant i ties This

, ,
.

is th e S u mmerl and of the S pi rtu ali sts There the thoughts .

of the devout Christi an ha v e built the N ew Jerusalem .

 ROS I CRU OI AN OO S M O OO N OE P TI ON -

quite regardless of age In the Desire Worl d it is easy

.

to giv e object lessons in the influence of good and e v i l

-

pass i ons on conduct and happiness Thes e lessons ar e .

i ndelibly impri nte d upon the child s sens i tive an d emo ’

tion al desire body and remain w i th it after rebirth so

, ,

that m any a one liv i ng a noble life owes much of it to the

,

fact that he was given th i s tra i n i ng Often when a weak .

.

spirit is born, the Compass i onate Ones ( the invisible Lead

ers who g ui de our evolut i on ) cau se it to die i n early life
that it may have this extra tra i ning to fit it for what m ay
b e perhaps a hard life This seems to be the case parti en
.

l arly where the etching on the d esire bo d y was weak in

consequence of a dyi ng person hav i ng been d i sturbed by
the lamentations of h i s relati ves or because he met death ,
“

by acci dent or on the battle fiel d H e d i d not under those

-
.

‘
circumstances experience the appropr i ate intens i ty of feel
in i n hi s o t m or tem existence th erefore when he i s
g p s , ,

born and dies in early life the loss is m ade up as above

, .

Often the duty of car i ng for such a ch i ld in the heaven life

f alls to those who were the cause o f the anomaly They .

are thus aff orde d a chance to make up for the fault and to
l earn b etter Or perhaps they bec ome the parents of the
.

one they harme d an d care for it dur i ng the few years it

l ives It does not matter then if they do lament hysteric
.

ally over its death be cause there would be no pictures of

,

any consequence in a ch i ld s vi tal body ’

.

This heaven is also a place of pr ogressmn for all who

have been studious art i stic or altrui stic The stu d ent
, ,
.

and the philosopher have instant access to all the l i brar ie s

of the world The pa i nter has endless delight in th e ever
.

changing color comb i nat i ons H e soon learns that h i s

“
.

thought blends an d shapes these colors at will H i s crea .

tions gl ow and sc i nt i llate w i th a life impossible of attain

 M AN AN D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OLU T I O N 1 19

ment to one who works with the dull pigments of Earth .

H e is as it were painting with living glowing materia l s

, , ,

and able to execute h i s designs with a facility which fil l s

his soul with delight The musician has n ot yet reache d
.

th e place where his art wil l express itself to th e ful l est

exte nt The P hysica l World is the world of F or m The
. .

Desire World where we find purgatory and the fi rst

,

heaven is particularly the world of C olor ; but the Worl d

,

of Thought where the second and third heavens are located

, ,

is the sphere of T on e Celesti al music is a fact and not a

.

m ere figur e of spe ech Pythagoras was not romancing

.

when h e spoke of the music of the spheres f or each one of ,

th e heavenly orb s has its definite tone and together they

s oun d the celestia l symphony which Goethe also mentions
” “
in the prolog to his Faust where the scene is l aid in ,

h e aven The Archangel Raph ae l says

.
,

i i
Th e S u n n ton es h i s a n c en t s on g
’
i
M i d r v a l ch a n t of b
r oth er s h e r es
p .

ib
Hi s p r e s cr e d cou r se h e sp ee d s al on g
’
r g
I n th u n d r ou s w ay th ou h ou t th e y e a rs .

Echoes of th at heavenl y music reach us even here i n

the P hysical World They are our most precious posses
.

’
sion even though they are as elusi v e as a will o the wisp
,
- - -
,

and cannot be perm ane ntly created as can other works ,

—
of art a statue a painting or a book In the P hysical
, ,
.

World tone di es and v anishes the moment after it is bo rn .

In the first heaven these echoes are of course much more , ,

beautiful and have more permanency hence there the mus 1 ,

ci an hears sweeter strains than ever he did during earth

The e x periences of the poet are aki n to th ose of the

’
m u s1c1an for poetr y i s the soul s expression of its inner
,
most feeli ngs l n words wh ich are ordered according to th e
12 0 R OS I CR U CI A N Oos M o OO N OE P T IO N
-

same l aws of h armony and rhythm t ha t govern the out

pouring of the spirit in music In add it i on the poet .
,

finds a wonderful i n spi ratibn in the picture s and colors

which are the chief characteristics of the Desire World .

Thence he will dra w the material for use in his next in

carnat i o n In like manne r does the author accumulate
.

mater i al and faculty The ph i lanthrop i st works out his

.

altrui stic plans for the upliftmen t of man If he failed in .

one l i fe he will see the reason for it in the first heave n

,

and wi ll there learn h ow to o vercome the obstacles and

avoid the errors that ma d e his plan impracticable .

In time a point is reached where the result of the p ai n

an d suffer i ng i nc i dent to purgat i on together wit h the j oy ,

extracted from the good act i ons of the past l i fe have been ,

built into the s ee d atom of the d esire body Together

-
.

these constitute what we call conscience that im pelling ,

force which warns us aga i nst e v il as productive of pain

and incl i nes us towar d good as productive of happiness and
joy Then man lea ves h i s des i re bo dy to disintegrate as
.
,

he left h i s dense bo dy and v ital body H e takes with him .

the for ces only of the seed atom which are to form the
-
,

nucleus of future d es i re bod i es as it wa s the persistent

,

part i cle of his pas t veh i cles of feel i ng .

9

As stated above the force s of the seed atom are with

,
-

drawn To the mater i alist f orce and matter are in separ a

.

ble The occult i st knows d i fferently To him they are

. .

not two entirely distinct an d separate concepts b ut the ,

two poles of the one spirit .

M a tter is crystall i zed spir i t .

F or ce i s the same sp i rit n ot ye t crystallized .

Th i s has been s ai d be fore but it cannot be too strongly

,

impres se d upo n the mind In th is connection the illustra

.

tion of t he snail is very helpful Matter wh i ch is crys .

,
 122 RO S I CRU C I A N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON -

N ot so however when the change i s m ad e from the first

, ,

heav en wh i ch i s i n the Des i re World to the second he ave n

, , ,

wh i ch is in the Reg i on of Concrete Thought Then the .

man leaves his d esi re body H e i s perfectly conscious H e . .

passes i nto a great st i llness For the time be i ng every .

th i ng seems to fade away H e ca nnot think N o f acu lty is

'

. .

al i ve yet he knows that he is H e has a feel i ng of stand

,
.

i ng in T h e Great Forever of standing utterly alone yet

“
,

unafra i d ; and his soul i s filled with a wonderful peace ,

”
“
wh i ch passeth all understand i ng .

In occult science th i s is called T h e Gr eat S i len ce .

Then comes the awake n ing The spirit is now i n i ts .

home Worl d—heav en H ere the first awakening brings to

-
.

”
the spirit the sound of the music of the spheres In“
.

s our Earth l i fe we are so i mmersed in the little noi ses and ”

sounds of our limited environment that we are incapable

of hearing the music of the marching Orbs but the occul t ,

sc ient i st hears it H e knows that the twelve signs of the

.

Zo di ac and the seven planets form the sounding board and -

“ ”
strings of Apollo s seven stri nge d lyre ’
H e knows that -

)
.

were a s i ngle di scor d to mar the celestial harmony from

“
that grand Instrument ther e would be a wreck of matter
”
an d a crash of worlds .

The power of rhythmi c Vibration is well known to all -

wh o have g i ven the s ubject e v en th e l east study For .

i nstance sold i ers are c omman d ed to break step when cross

,

i ng a bri d ge otherwise the i r rhythm i c tramp would shatter

,

the strongest structure The Bible story of the sounding .

of the ram s ho rn wh i le march i ng around the wall s of the

’
‘

c i ty of Jeri cho i s not nonsens i cal i n the eyes of the occult

i st In some cases sim ilar things h ave happened w ithout
.

th e world smil i ng in su perc il ious incredulity A few ye ars .

 M AN AN D T H E M E TH OD O F E V OL U T I O N 12 3

ago a band of musicians were practicing in a garden

,

close to the very solid wall of an old castle There oc .

curred at a certai n place in the mus i c a prolonged and very

pierc i ng tone When this note was soun d ed the wall of
.

the castle suddenly fell The m u s1c1an s had struck the key
.

note of the wall and it was sufficiently prolonged to

When it is said th at this is the world of tone it m ust ,

not be thought that there are no colors Many people .

know that there i s an intimate connection be tween color

and tone ; that when a certain note is struck a certa i n color ,

appears s i multaneously So i t i s also i n the H ea v en World

. .

Color and sound are both present ; but the tone is the
ori ginator of the color H ence it is said that this is par
.
,

ticu l ar ly the worl d of tone and it is this tone that builds

,

all forms in the P hysical World The musici an can hear

.

cert ain tones in di fl e ren t parts of nature such as the wind

,

in the f orest the break i ng of the surf on the beach the

, ,

roar of the ocean and the sounding of many waters These .

combine d tones make a w hole wh i ch is the key note of the -

—
Earth its tone“ ”
As geometrical figure s are create d by
.

drawing a Violin bow over the edge of a glass plate so the ,

forms we see around us are the crystallized sound figu r es -

of the archetypal forces which play into the archetypes in

the H eaven World .

The work done by man in the H eaven Worl d is many

sided It is not i n the least an inactive dreamy nor illus
.
,

tr ativ e existence It is a time of the greatest and most

.

important activity in preparing for the next life as slee p i s ,

an active preparation for the work of the following day .

H ere the quintessence of the three bodies is built into

the threefold sp i rit As much of the des i re bo dy as the
.

man had worked upon dur i ng life by purify i ng h i s desires

,
 R OS I CRU CIAN CO S M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

and emotions w i ll be w elded into th e human spirit thus

, ,

gi vi ng an i mprove d mind in the future .

As much of the Vital body as the l i fe spir i t had worked

upon transforme d sp i ritual i zed and thus saved from the
, , ,

d ecay to wh i ch the rest of the vital body is subject w i ll ,

be amalgamate d w i th the l i fe spirit to i nsure a better vita l

body and temperament i n the succeeding lives .

As much of the dense bo dy as the divine spirit h as

saved by r i ght action w i ll be worked into it and will bring
better environ ment and opportun i ties .

This spi r i tualization of the vehicle is accompl ished by

cult i vation of the faculties of observat i on di scrimination ,

and m emory devot i o n to high i d eals prayer concentra

, , ,

tion persistence and right use of the life f orces

, .

The second heaven is the real home of man—the Ego ,

th e Thinker H ere he dwells for centuries assim i lat i ng the

.
,

fruit of the last earth life and preparing the earthly con
diti on s which will be best su i te d for h i s nex t step i n prog
ress The sound or tone wh i ch per vades this Region and is
'

.
,

everywhere apparent as color is his instrument so to speak

, ,
.

It is this harmonious sound v ibrati on wh i ch a s an elixir ,

of life bu i lds into the threefol d spiri t the quintessence of

,

the threefold body upon wh i ch it depends for growth

, .

The life in the second heaven is an exceedingly active

one vari ed in many d i ff erent ways The Ego ass i m i late s
,
.

the fruits of the last earth l i fe and prepares th e envi ron

.

ment for a new phys i cal existence It is not enough to .

say that the new condit i ons will be dete rrni ne d by con
duct and action in the life just closed It is required that .

the fru i ts of the past b e worked into the Worl d which is

to be the next scene of acti v i ty whil e the Ego is gaining
fresh phys i cal experiences and gathering further fruit .

Therefore all the denizen s of the H eaven Worl d work upon

 126 RO S I CRU C I AN CO S M O C O N C E P TION -

ing how to build a body which shall afl or d a better means of

express i on It is man s d estiny to become a Creative In
.
’

tell i g en ce an d he i s ser v i ng his apprenticesh i p all the tim e .

Dur i ng his heav en l i fe he is le arning to build all kinds of

K a b odie s— the human included .

We have spoken of the forces which work al ong the _

positive and negative poles of th e d i ff erent ethers M an .

h i m s elf is p ar t of th at for ce Those whom we call de ad .

are the ones who he l p us to l i ve They i n turn are helped .

” “
by the so called nature spirits which they command
-
, .

Man i s directe d i n this work by Teachers from the higher

creative H ierarchies which helped h i m to bu i ld his vehicles ,

before he atta i ne d self consciousness, in the same way he -

h i mself n ew b uilds his bodies in sleep During heaven .

Ii fe they teach h i m consciously The painter is taught to

‘
l- f
. .

b uild an accurate eye capable of taking in a perfect per ,

gs iieftiv e and of d i st i nguishing colors an d shades to a

p
f

i d egré e i ii con c
’ e i vab le among thos e not interested in co l o r

mathemat i cian has to dea l with space and the

T h ef 7
1
'
'
~

.
,

f fa iful ty f or s pace f perCe pti on is connecte d w

’
ith the delica te
'
‘ J
-

“ ad j ustmen t Of l th ie three sem i c i rcular ca als which are

n -

s i tua ted i nsi de ftll efi eafrgi each pointing in one of the three
‘ ‘ ‘

f d i frieifsie nsf i h s p ac e f Logi cal thought and mathemat ical

‘ ’

ab il it ylfla rie? i ii iprdp erti ori ti l t h e accuracy of the a d justment

" ‘

I I Of i f t ese s
h emi c i rcular ) Ca nals M l i si cal ab i lity is also de
‘
.

e d t i fth e f t b t addition to the n e ces

'

p n n r n e l u
‘

s a r a 3 ‘
e p o r r c or i n
‘

"S i t
y f r? t h e '
dj t ii v f t h m i circular canals
'

o l
p p
r o er a u s i e n o E e se s -
,

the musi c i an requires extreme del i c acy of the fibres of

“

f JCb r tig
iss ef -
i fw h ie h t h ere e af ei i abouti th re e l ith ou san d in the
h u in aln irear , f eacli capable of i i nter pretiing irab edi lt mtwenty five
'

e l
-

i g d ati ons lof

‘
t on e rs I ni gtglgie i ea rsi c f l th ezan aj ori tyl o h peopl e
‘

r r af i a
 M A N A N D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OLU T I ON 12 7

the pos sible gradations Among ord i nary m u s i cal people

.

the g reatest degree of e fficiency i s about fifteen soun d s to

each fibre ; but the maste r musician who is able to i nter ,

pret and bring down music from the H eaven World re ,

qu i res a greater range to be able to d ist i ngu i sh the d i ffer

ent notes and detect the slightes t discor d i n the most com
pl i cated chords Persons who require organs of such ex
.

ce ed in g de l icacy for the express i on of their facult i es ar e

specially taken care of as the higher state of their devel

,

opm en t m erits and demands N one oth er rank s so h i gh

.

as the musician which is reasonable when we consider

,

th at whil e the painter d raw s h i s inspirat i on ch i efly from

the world of color— the n earer Desi re Worl d— the mus i cian
attempts to bring to us the atmosphere of our he avenly
home worl d ( where as sp i ri ts we are c i t i zens ) and to
, , ,

translate them into the sounds of earth l i fe H i s i s the .

highest mission because as a mode of expression for soul

,

l i fe music reigns supreme That music is di ff erent from

, .

and higher than all the other arts can be understood when
we reflect that a statue or a painting when once created , ,

is perm anent They ar e drawn from the Desire World

.

and are therefore more easily crystallized while music , ,

being of the H eaven World is more elusive and must be ,

r e create d each time we hear it

-
It cannot be imprisoned.
,

as shown by the unsuccessful attempts to do so part i ally

by means of such mechan i cal d ev ices as phono graph s and
piano players The musi c so reproduced loses much of the
-
.

soul stirring sweetness it pos sesses when it comes fresh

-

from its own world carrying to the soul memories of its

,

home and speaking to it in a lan g uage that no beauty

expressed in marble or upon canvas can equal .

Th e instrument through wh i ch man senses music is the

most perfect se nse organ in the human body Th e eye i s .
1 28 ROS I CRU C IA N CO S M O CO N C EP T I ON -

n ot by any means true but the ear is in the sense that it

‘

, ,

hears every sound without d i storti on wh i le the eye often ,

distorts what i t s ees .

In a ddition to the musical car the mus i ci an must also ,

learn to bu ild a long fine hand w i th slender fingers and

,

sensit i ve nerves oth erwise he woul d not b e able to repro

,

duce the melod ies he hears .

It is a law of nature that no one can i nhabit a more

efficient body than he is cap able of b ui lding H e first .

l earns to bu i ld a certain gra de of body and afterwards he

l earns to l i ve i n it In that way he discovers its defects
.

and is taught how to remedy th em .

Al l m en work unconsciously at the bu i lding of the i r

bo di es dur i ng ante nat al l ife unt i l they have reached the
-

point where the quinte ssence of former bo d i es— which they

‘
have saved— i s to be bu i l t in Then they Work consciously
C
. .

It w i ll therefore be seen that the more a man advances and

the more he work s on his vehicles thus making them im ,

mortal the niore power he has to bu i ld for a n ew life The

,
.

advanced pup i l of an occult schoo l sometimes commences

’

to build for himself as s ecu re s the work during the fir st

three weeks ( which belongs exclusively to the mother ) has
been completed When the period of unconscious bui lding
.

h as passed the m an has a chance to exercise his n ascent

creativ e power and the true original creative process
,

”
“
Epigenesis -
begins
Thus we see that m an learns to bu i ld his vehicles in the
H eaven World and to us e them in the P hysi cal World
,
.

N ature pro v i des all phase s of experience i n such a mar

vel ou s manner and with such consummate w i sd om that

as we learn to see deeper and deeper into her secrets we

are more and more impressed with our own i n si gn ifican ce
an d w i th an ever gro wing reverence f or God whose Vi s i
-
,
130 R O S I CR U CIAN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

on h i s journey he becomes more an d more limited by h i s

,

past choi ce If he has chosen a steam r ead using soft coal

.
, ,

he must expect to be so i led and dusty H ad he cho sen a

‘

roa d burn i ng anthracite or using electricity he woul d h ave

been cl eaner S o it i s with the man in a n ew l i fe H e
. .

m ay have to l i ve a hard l i fe but h e i s free to choose ,

whe ther he will live it cle anly or wallow in the mire .

Other conditions are also within hi s control subject to the ,

l imits of his past cho i ces and acts .

The pictures in the panoram a of the coming life of ,

which we have just spoken begin at the cra dle and en d at ,

the grave This is the oppo si te d i rect i on to that in wh ic h

.

they travel i n the after death p anorama already explained-

, ,

which passes before the vis i on of the sp i rit i mmed iately

following i ts release from the dense body The reason for .

th i s radic al difference in the two panoramas i s that in the

before birth panorama the object is to Show the r ei n car
-

nat i ng Ego how certa i n caus es or acts always pr odu ce cer

tain effects I n the case of the after de ath panoram a the
.
-

obj ect is the reverse i e to showhow ea ch ev en t i n th e

,
. .
, "

past l i fe was the effect of Some ca us e further back i n the

l i fe N ature or God does noth i ng w i thout a log i cal rea
.
, ,

son an d the further we search the more apparent it becomes

,

to us th at N atu r e is a wise m other always us i ng the best

' ‘
’

means to accompl i sh her ends .

But i t may be asked Why should we r ein carn atc ? Why

,

must we return to this li mited an d m i serable earth exi st

ence ? Why can we not get exper i ence i n th e se h i gher
’

realms w i thout com i ng to E arth ? We are t i red of this

d reary weary earth life "
,

Such queries are ba se d upon misunderstandings of sev

l

eral kinds In th e first place let us realize and engrave it

’

.
,

deep upon the tablets of our memory that th e p urp ose of

 M AN A N D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OL U T I ON 13 1

life is n ot h ap pin ess, b u t ex p eri en ce

Sorrow and pa i n .

are our most benevolent teachers while the joys of life are ,

but fleeting .

This see ms a stern doctrine and the heart cries out pas
sion ately at even the thought that it may possibly b e true .

N evertheless it is true and upon examin ation it wi ll be

, ,

found not such a stern doctrine after all .

Consider the blessings of pain If w e coul d place our .

hand upon a hot stove an d feel no pain the hand m i ght be ,

allowed to remain until it and perhaps th e arm were

burne d away without our knowing anything about it unti l
,

too late to save them It is the pain resulting from the

.

conta ct with the hot stove which makes us snatch our

hand away be fore serious damage is done Instead of los .

ing the h an d we escape with a blister which quickly heals

,
.

This is an illustration from the P hysical World We fin d .

that the same principle applies in the Moral and Menta l

“

Worlds If we outrage morality the pangs of con scienc e

.

bri ng us pain th at wi ll prevent us f rom repeating the act

and if we do not heed the first l esson nature will give us ,

ha rder and h arder experiences unti l at l ast the fact i s

force d into our consciousness that the way of the trans “

”
g r es sor is hard Th i s will
. continue until at l ast we are
forced to turn in a new direction and take a step onw ard
toward a better life .

“
Experience is knowl edge of the cause s which follow
acts. This is the object of life together with the d evel ,
”
opm en t of Will which is the force whereby we apply
“
,

the results of experience Experience must be gaine d but .

,

w e ha v e the choice whether we gain it by the hard path of

personal e xperience or by obse r vat i on of other people s acts ’
,

reasoning and reflecting thereon guided by the l ight of ,

whatever e x peri ence we have already had .

 ROS I CR C U I AN COS M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

Thi s is the metho d by which th e occult student shoul d

le arn inste ad of r equ ir in g the lash of advers i ty and p ain
,
.

The more wil l in g w e are to learn in that way the less we ,

”
shall feel the st i ng i ng th em e of the p ath of pain an d “

”
“
the more quickly shall we gain the path of peace .

The choic e is ours but so long as we have not l earne d

,

al l there is to learn in this world we must come back to it ,

.

We cannot stay in th e higher worlds and learn there unti l

we h ave mastere d the lessons of earth life That woul d .

be as s ensible as to send a ch i ld to kindergarten one day

and to college the next The child must return to the kin
.

d er gar ten day after day and spend years in the gr ammar
.

sch ool an d the high school before i ts study has developed

its capacity sufficiently to enable it to underst and the les
sons taught in college .

—
Man i s also in sch oo t the school of experience H e .

must return many times before he can hope to master

all the knowledge in the world of sen se N o one earth .

life however r i ch i n experience could furnish the knowl

, ,

edge so n ature decrees that h e must return to Earth after

, ,

i ntervals of rest to take up h i s work where he dropped i t

, ,

exactly as a child takes up its work in schoo l each day ,

after the interven i ng sleep of n i ght It is no argument .

aga i nst th i s theory to say that man doe s not remember hi s

former lives We cannot recall all the events of our pres

.

ent l i ves We do not recollect our labors in learning to

.

write yet we h av e acqu i re d a knowledge of the art of writ

,

i ng which proves that we d i d learn All the faculties we

, .

posse ss are a pr oof that we acquired them somet ime some ,

whe re Some people do remember their past howe ver as

.
, ,

a remarkable i nstance related at the end of the next chap

ter will show an d it is but one among many
, .

Again if there were no return to E arth wh at is th e

, ,
 R OS I CR U CI AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

i t will take no more than i ts stre ngth enables it to lift

’

Its attractive power is of a cert ain k i nd and is li m ited to a

certa i n quant i ty of that k i n d The same is t r u e of th e .

see d atom It can take in each Region nothing ex ce pt the

-
.
, ,

mater i al for wh i ch it has an affin ity and nothing beyond a

ce rta i n defin i te quant i ty even of th at Thus the veh i cl e .

built aroun d th i s nucleus becomes an exact counterpart of

the correspon d i ng vehicle of the last i ncarnation m inus the ,,

ev i l wh i ch has bee n expurgate d an d plus the quintessence

of good wh i ch has been incorporated in the see d atom -
.

The mater i al selecte d by the threefold sp i r i t forms itself

into a great bell shaped figure Open at the bottom and with
-
,

the see d atom at the top If we conce i v e of th i s illustrat i on

-
.

sp i ritually we may compare it to a d i ving bell de scen ding -

i nto a sea compose d of flu i ds of increas ing d ens ity These .

correspon d to the di ff erent subd iv i s i ons of each World .

The matter taken into the texture of th e bell shaped body -

makes it heav i er so that it sinks i nto th e next lower su b

,

d i visio n and takes fr om that i ts proper quot a of matter .

Thus i t become s still heavier and Si nks yet deeper unti l it

has passed through th e f ou r f su b divi si on s of the Region of
‘

Concrete Thought and the sheath of the new m i nd of th e

man is complete N ext the forces in the seed atom of th e
.
-

desire body are awakened It pla ces i tself at the top of th e

.

bell i ns i d e and th e m ater i al s of the sev enth Regi on of the

, ,
r

Des i re World draw around it until it sinks to the sixth

Regi on getting more material there an d th i s process con
, ,

t i nnes until the first Region of the Desire World is re ached .

The bell has now two layers— the sheath of mind outside
and the new desire body inside .

The see d atom of the v i tal body i s next aroused into

-

activ i ty but here the proce ss o f formation is not so simpl e

,

as in the case of the mind and the desire body for it must ,
 M AN A N D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OLU T I O N 1 35

be remembered that those veh i cles were comparatively u n

organ i zed while the Vi tal bo dy and the dense bo dy are
,

more organ ize d and very compl i cate d The material of a .

,

gi ven quantity an d quality is attracted in the s ame man

,

ner an d under the operation of the same law as in the ca se

of the h i gher bo d ies but th e b u il din g of the new body
‘

and the place ment in the proper en v i ronment is done by

four great Beings of imme asurable w i s d om wh i ch are the ,
“ ”
Recording Angels the Lords of Destiny
,
They i mpress .

the reflect i ng ether of the Vital body in such a way that the
pictures o the coming life are reflected i n it It ( th e v i ta l
f
.

body ) is built by the inhabitant of the H eav en Worl d an d

the element al spirits in such a man ner as to form a
particular type of brain But mark th i th e r ecin car na t
'

i n g E g o i ts elf i n cor por a tes th er ei n th e qu in tess en ce of i ts

f o r m er v i ta l b od i es an d i n a d d i ti on to th is a ls o d oes a

li ttl e or ig i na l Th i s is done that in the coming life

wor k .

there may be some room for Original and individual expres

sion not pr edete rmined by past action
, .

It is very important to remember this fact There is too .

great a tendency to think that all wh i ch now exists is the

result of something that previousl y existed but if that were ,

the case there would be no mar gin left for new an d original
effort and for new cause s The chain of cause and effect is
.

not a monotonous repetition T h er e is an i n flu x of n ew

.

an d or i g i na l caus es a ll th e ti m e That is the real back .

bone of evolution— the only thing that gi v es i t meaning

and makes it other than an unrolling of latent actual ities .

“ ” —
This is Epigenesis the free will that cons i sts of the
-

freedom to inau g urate something entirely new not merely ,

a choice between two courses of action This is th e impor .

tant factor wh ich a l one can expl ain the system to which
we be l ong in satisfactory m anner I nv olution an d Evolu
'

.
 13 6 RO S I CRU C I AN C OS M O C O N-
C E P T I ON

tion in themsel ve s are i nsufficient

h ut coupled with Epi r

genes i s we have a full triad of explanation .

The fate of an in di vi dual generated under th e l aw of

Consequence is of great complex i ty and involves as socia
,

ti on with Egos in and out of incarnation at all times Even .

those incarnated at one ti me may not be l i v i ng in the s ame

locality sothat it i s imposs ible for one i nd i v i dual s destiny
,
’

to be all worked out i n one l i fetime or i n one place The , .

Ego is therefore brought into a certa i n environment and

family with which it is in some way related As regard s .

the fate to be worked out it is somet i mes immaterial into

which one o f sever al environments the Ego is incarn ated ,

and when such is the case it is allowed its choice as far as

‘

possible but once an Ego is so placed the agents of the

, ,

Lords of Destiny watc h unseen that no act of free will ,

-

shall frustrate the working out of the portion of fate

‘

selecte d If we do aught of such a nature as to circumvent

.

that part they will make another mov e so as to enforce

, ,

fulfillment of the destiny It cannot b e too often reite r

.

ated however that thi s doe s not render man helpless It

, ,
.

1
i s merely the same law that go verns after we have fired a ‘

pistol We are then unable to stop th e bullet or even to

.
,

d eflect it from its course in any way Its d i rection w as .

determined by the pos i tion in wh i ch the pistol was held o

when we fire d That could have be en changed at any

.

t i me before the trigger was pulled, as up to that time we

h ad full control The same is true regarding new actions
.

which make future destiny We may up to a certain point

.
, ,

modi fy or even altogether counteract certain causes already

set in mot i on but once started and no further action
, ,

taken they will some t i me get beyond our control Th i s is

, .

“”
called ripe fate and i t is th i s k i nd that i s meant when
it is sa i d th at the Lor ds of Destiny check every attempt to
13 8 ROS I CR U C I AN COS M O C O N C E P T I ON -

mony in the materials of the body because that would mean ,

a perfect body yet the d i scord must not be so great as to

,

be d i srupti ve of the organism .

Thus wh i le hered ity i n the first place is tru e only as

regards the materi al of the dense bo dy and not the soul
qualities wh i ch are enti rely in div i dual the incoming Ego
, ,

also d oes a certa i n amount of work on its d ense bo d y in ,

c or or ati n
p g in i t the qu i ntessence of its past phys i cal qual i
ti es N o bo dy is an exact mixture of the qual ities of its
.

parents although the Ego is restr i cted to the use of th e

,

mater i als taken from the bo d ie s of the father and mother .

H ence a music i an incarnates where he can get the material

to bu i ld the slen der han d and the del i cate car wi th i ts ,

sens i t iv e fibres of Corti an d i ts accurate adjustment of the

three semic i r cular canals The arrangement. of these mate
rials howev er i s to the extent named under the control
, , , ,

of the Ego It i s as though a carpenter were given a p i le

.

of boards to use in buil d i ng a house in wh i ch to l i ve but ,

is left to h i s own ju d gment as to the k i n d of house he

wishes to build .

Except in the case of a v ery h i ghly de veloped being ,

this work of the Ego is almost negl i gi ble at the present

stage of man s evolution The greatest scope i s given in
’
.

the bu i ldi ng of the desire body very l i ttle i n that of the ,

Vital body and almost none in the dense body ; yet e ven
th i s l i ttle is suffic i ent to make each in d i v i d ual an expres
si on of h i s own spirit and d i ff erent from th e parents .

When the impregnat i on of the o v um has taken place ,

the des i re body of the mother works upon it for a pe r iod

of from e i ghteen to twenty one days the Ego rema i n i ng -

outs i de i n its d esi r e b ody and mind sheath yet always i n

.
j ,

close touch w i th the mother U pon the exp i rati on of that .

’
time the Ego enters the mother s body The bell shaped .
-
 M AN AN D T H E M E T H OD O F E V OLU TI ON 1 39

vehicles draw themsel ves down over the head of the vital
bo dy and the be ll closes at the bottom From th i s time .

the Ego broods over its coming instrument until the birth
of the ch i ld and the new earth life of the reincarnating
Ego commen ces .

B I RT H on TH E D E N S E B ODY .

The veh i cles of the new born do not at once become -

active The dense body is helpless for a long time afte r

.

birth Reason i ng from analogy we can rea d i ly see that the

.

same must be the case wi th the higher vehicles The occul t

“
.

sc i ent i st sees i t but even without clairvoy ance reason will

,

show that th i s must be so As the dense bo d y i s slowly .

prepared for th e separate indiv i dual l i fe w i thin the pro

,

tect i ng cover of the womb so the other bod i e s are gr adu ,

ally born and nurtured into activ i ty and wh i le the times ,

given in the following descr i ption are but approx imate they ,

are neverthe l ess accurate enough for general purposes an d

show the co nnect i on between the M i croc osm an d the Macro
cosm — the i n d i v i d ual and the world .

In the peri od imme d i ately follow i ng birth the d i fferent

veh i cles inter penetrate one another as in our previous
-
, ,

illustrat i on the sand penetrate s the sponge and the water

,

both sand and sponge Bu t though they are all present as

.
, ,

in a dult life they are m er ely p r es en t N one of their posi

, .

ti v e facult ies are act i ve . The v i tal body cannot use the
forces wh i ch operate along the posi ti v e pole of the ethers .

Ass i m i lation which works along the positive pole of the

,

chem i cal ether is very da i nty during childhood and what

,

there is of it is due to the macrocosmic vita l body the ,

ethers which act as a womb for the chil d s vit al body unt i l ’

the se venth year gradually ripening it during that period

,
.

The propagative faculty which works al ong the positive

,
14 0 R OS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

pole o f the life ether is also latent The heating of the

,
.

—
bo y which i s Carr i ed on along the pos i t i ve pole of the
d
—
li ght ether and the c i rculati on of the bl ood are due to
th e macr ocosm i c vit al bo d y the ethers acting on the child
,

an d slowly d evelop i ng i t to the po i nt where i t can control

these funct i ons itself The forces working along the nega
.

t i ve pole of the ethers are so much the more act i ve The .

excret i on of solids earn ed on along the negative pol e of

,

the chemical ether ( correspon d i ng to the sol i d subdivision

of the Chemical Reg i on ) i s too unrestra i ne d as is also the
, ,

e x cretion of flui d which is carried on along the negativ e

,

pole of the life eth er ( correspon d i ng to the secon d or fluid

x

sub di vision of the Chem i cal Reg i on ) The passive sense .

percept i on wh i ch is due to the negative forces of th el i ght

,

ether i s al so excee dingly prom i nent The child is very

, .

”
impressionable and it is all eyes and ears “
.

During the earlier years the forces Operating al ong the

negative pole of the reflect i ng ether are al so extremely
”
active In tho se years childre n can see the hi gher “ ’

Worlds and they often prattl e about what they see until
the ridicule of the i r el ders of punishment for telling sto “

”
r ies teaches them to des i st .

It is deplorable that the little ones are forced to lie

or at least to d eny the truth — bec ause of the incredulity of
their wise elders Even th e investigati ons of the Society
‘‘ ’’
.

f or P sychical Re se arch have proven that children often

have invis i ble playm ates who frequently vi sit them until
,

they are several years old Dur i ng th ose years the clair
.

voyance of the ch i ldren is of the s ame negative character

as that of the mediums .

It is the same w i th the forces working in the desire

body The passive feel i ng of physical pain is present wh i le
.
,

the feel i ng of emotion is almost entirely absent The child .

 1 42 R OS I CRU CI AN C O S M O C O N C E P T ION
-

'

having only a dense body and a vital b ody The traditions .

of mythology an d f ol k lore a l l over the worl d concern i ng

-

giants in Olden t i mes are absolutely true becaus e then men ,

grew as tall as trees and for the same re ason

, .

B I RTH OF T H E DE S I RE B ODY .

The vi tal body of the plant bu i lds leaf after le af carry ,

ing the stem h i gher and h i gher Were it not for th e.

macrocosm i c des i re body it would keep on in that way

i n defini tely but the m acr ocosm l c desire bo dy steps m at a
,

ce r tain p oi n t an d checks further growth The force that

'
.

is not needed for further growth i s then ava i lable for

other purposes and is used to buil d the flower an d the seed .

In like m anner the human vital body when the d ense ,

.
body comes un d er its sw ay after the se v enth year makes
, ,

the l atter grow very rapidly but about the fourtee nth year
,

the indi v i dual desire body is born from the womb of the
macrocosmic desire body and is then free to work on i ts
dense body The excessiv e growth is then checked and
.
"

the force therefore used for that purpose become s avail able
"

for propagation that the h uman plant may flower and

,

bring forth Therefore the birth of the person al des i re

.

body marks the period of puberty From this period the .

attraction towar d s the opposi te sex is felt being espec i ally ,

active and unrestr ained i n the third septenary period of

life— fr om the fourteenth to the twenty fir st ye ar b ec au se -
,

the restraining m i nd is then st il l unborn .

B IRTH OF T H E MIN D .

After the fourteenth year the mind is in turn broode d

,

o ver and nurtured by the macrocosm i c m i n d unfold i ng its ,

latent poss i b i lities an d making it capabl e o f origina l

.

tho ught The force s of the individual s different vehi c le s

.
’
 M A N A N D T H E M E T H OD OF E V OLU T I O N 1 43

have now bee n ripe ned to such a degree that he can use
them all i n hi s evoluti on therefore at the twenty fir st year
,
-

the Ego comes into possession of its complete vehicle It .

does this by means of the blood heat and by developing -

individua l blood This is done in connection with the

.

f ul l development of the l ight ether .

TH E B LOOD TH E VEH I CLE OF TH E EGO .

In in f an cy and up to the fourteenth year the red mar

, ,

row bones do not make al l the blood corpuscles Most of

- .

them are suppl i ed by the thymus gland which is largest ,

i n the f oetus and gradually diminishe s as the i nd i vi d ual

b l ood making faculty develops in the growing child The
- .

thymus gland contains as it were a supply of blo o

,
d C OI ,

p u scl es given by the parents and consequently the

,
ch i ld ,

which draws its blood from that source does not realize i ts ,

individuality N ot until the blood is m ad e by the child

.

”
does it think Of itself as I and when the thymus gland
,
“
,
”
di sappears at the age of fourteen the I feeling reaches
“
, ,

its ful l express i on, for then the blood is made and dom
i n ate d entirely by the Ego The following will make clear
.

the idea and its logic

It will be remembered that assimilation and growth de
pend upon the force s working along the positive pole of
’
the vital body s chemical ethe r That is set free at the .

se venth year together with the balance of the vital body

, .

Only the chem i ca l ether is fully ripe at that t i me ; the

other part s need more ripening At the fourteenth year .

the li f e ether of the vital body which has to do with ,

propagation is fully ripe In the pe riod from seven to

,
.

fourte en years of age the excessive assimilation has stored

up an amount O f force which goes to the sex org ans and
is ready at the time the desire body is set free .
1 44 R OS I CRU C I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T ION

This force of sex is store d i n the blood during the third

of the se ve n year p er i o d s an d in that time th e l ight ether
-
,

which is th e avenue for the blood heat i s developed and -

,

controls the he art so that the body is neither too hot nor
,

too cold In early ch i ldhood the blood very Often rises

.

to an abnorma l temperature During th e perio d of ex .

c ess iv e growth i t i s frequently the reverse but in the hot ,

hea ded unrestrained youth passi on and temper very Often

, ,

d r i ve the Ego out by over heat i ng the blood We very

’

-
.

appropriately call th i s an ebull ition or bo i ling over of

temper and describe the e ff ect as cau si ng the person to
“ ”
lose his head i e become incapable of thought That
, . .
,
.

is exactly what happens when passion , rage or temper ,

overheats the blood thus drawi ng the Ego outside t h e

,

bod i es The d escription is accurate when of a person i n

.
\ ,
”
such a state we say H e has lost control of h i mself The
, ,
“
.

Ego i s outside of his veh i cles and they are running amuck ‘

bereft Of the guiding influence of thought part Of the work ,

of which is to act as a brake on impulse The great and

”

terrible danger of such outbursts is that bef or e the owner

re enters his body some d i semb od i ed entity may take pos
-

”
session of it and kee p h i m out T his is called Obsession .
“
.

Only the man who keeps cool and does not allow excess of
heat to drive him out can think properly As proof of the .

assertion that the Ego cannot work in the body when the
blood is either too hot or too cold we will call attention to
the well known fact that excessive heat makes one sleepy
-

and if carrie d beyond a ce rtain point it drives th e Ego

, ,

out leaving the body in a faint that is unconscious

, , ,
.

Excessive cold has also a tendency to make the body sleepy

or unconscious It is only when the blood is at or near
. .

the normal temperatur e that the Ego can use it as a

veh icle of consciousness .
1 46 ROS I CRU C I AN COS M O -
C ON C EP T ION

old Statutory
. al so recogniz es this as th e ea rl iest

whe n the man is deemed fit to exerci se a franchise .

At the pre sent stage of human development the man

goes through the se principal stages in e ach l ife cycle from ,

one birth to the ne xt .

 C H APT ER IV .

R EBI RTH AN D TH E LAW OF C ON SE Q U E N OE .

N LY three theories worth y of note have ever been

brought forward to solve th e riddle Of Life and

In the previous chapte r we have to some extent e x , ,

—
plained on e of these three theories that Of Rebirth to ‘

gether with its comp anion law the law of Consequence

, .

It may not be out of place to compare the theory Of Re

birth with the other two theories advanced with a vie w ,

to ascertaining their relative foundation in nature To .

the occultist there can be no question H e doe s n ot say . ,

”
that he bel ieves in it any more than we need to say that
“

“ ”
we believe as to the blooming of the rose or the flowing
Of the river or the O perat i on of any of the visible worki ngs
-

of the material world which are continually going on b e

,

f ore our eyes We do not say of these things that we be

.
“

” ”
l ieve ; we say that we know because we see them S O
“
, .

“ ”
the occult scientist can say I know in regard to Re birth ,

the l aw of Consequence and their coroll aries H e see s the .

E go and can trace its path after it h as pas sed out of the
den se body at de ath until it h as reappeare d on earth
” “
through a new birth Therefore to him no belief is
.

necessary For the s atisfaction of others howe ver it may

.
, ,

be well to examine these three theories of life and death

in order to arr ive at an intelligent conclusion .

Any great law of nature must necessarily be in harmony

147
148 R OS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

with all her other laws Therefore it may be very helpfu l

.

to the 1n qu 1r er to examine these theories in the i r relation

to what are adm itte d by all parties to be known laws of“

nature as Observed in that p art of our un i verse with

,

whi ch we are more familiar To th i s end we will first

.

s ta te the th ree theories :

( )
1 The Mater i alistic Theory holds that life is a

journey from the womb to the tomb ; that mind is

the result Of certain correlations of matte r ; that
m an is the highest intelligence in the Cosmos ; an d,
that his intelligence perishes when the body di sin
tegr ates at d eath .

( 2 ) The Theor y O f Theo l ogy assert s that at each birt h

a newly created soul enters the aren a of l i fe fresh
-

from t h e hand Of God pass i ng from an invisibl e

,

state through the gate of birth into v i sible exist

ence ; that at the end Of one short span of l ife i n
the material worl d it passes out through the gate
of death into the in v ISI ble beyond whence it returns
,

no more ; that its hap pi ne ss or misery there is de

term in ed for all eterni ty by its actions during th e
infinitesimal period intervening between birth and
death.

( )
3 The T h eory o f Rebirth teaches that each soul i s
an inte gr al par t of God, enfolding all divine possi
b il ities as the seed enfolds the plant ; that by means
O f repeated existences in an earthly body of gradu

al ly improving quality the latent possib i lities are

,

sl owl y developed into dynamic powers ; that none

are l ost by this process but that al l mankind will

,

ul timately attain the goa l of perfection and r e union-

with God .

Th e fi rst of these theories is m om stic . It seeks to e x

150 ROS I CRU CI A N COS M O C ON C EP T ION -

theory claiming to solve the gre atest prob lem of l i f e

Life i tsel f .

We may therefore safe l y pass from th e materi alistic ,

theory as being in adequate to solve the mystery Of l i fe and

death and turn to a consideration of the next theory .

On e of th egreatest Objections to th e orthodox theological

d octrine as it is expounded is itS entire an d confessed
, ,
’

i nadequacy Of the myriads of souls which have been

.

cre ate d and h ave inh abited this Globe s1n ce the be g inning
of existence even if that b egm n in g d ates back no further
,

than six thousand ye ars the In S1gn ifican t number of ,

onl y one hundred and forty and four thousand are to

“ ”

be saved " The rest are to be tortured f orever and ever "
The devil gets the b est Of it all the time On e cannot help .

“
sayin g with Buddha If God permits such misery to exist
,

H e cannot be good and i f H e is powerless to prevent it

, ,
” 5
H e cannot be God .

N othing in nature is anal ogous to such a m eth od Of g

l

creat i on i n order that destruction may follow It is repre .

sented that God desires ALL Sh ould be s aved and is averse

“
to the destruction of any h av 1n g for their salvation given ,
” ”
H i s onl y S on and yet this gl orious p l an Of sa l vation
,
“

fai l s to save "

If a trans Atl antic l ine r with two thousand soul s on
-

board sent a wireless mess age that she was sinking just
“
Off Sandy H ook would it be regarde d as a
,
glorious plan
”
of salvat i on if a f ast motor boat capable Of rescuing only -

two or three people were sent to h er aid ? Certainly not "

,

It would more likely be denounced as a plan of destru c “

”
tion if adequate means were not provided for the saving
of at least the m aj ority Of those in danger .

But the theolo gi ans plan Of salvation is vastly wors e

’

than this becau se two or three out of two thousan d is an

,
 R E B I RT H AN D T H E L AW O F CON S E Q U E N C E 151

immense ly greater proportion than the orthodox theo

l ogical p l an of saving only out of all the myriads
of souls created We may safely reject this theory al so
.
,

as being untrue because unre asonable If God were al l

, .

wise H e would have evol ved a more efficaciou s plan S o .

H e has and the abo v e is only the th eory of the theologi an

,
.

The teach ing of the Bible is very different as wi ll app e ar ,

late r .

We turn n ow to consider the doctrine of Rebirth which ,

pos tulates a slow process O f development carr i ed on with ,

unwavering persistence th rough repeated embodiments in

forms Of increasing efficiency whereby a ll are In time
”

, ,

brought to a height of spiri tual splendor at present in con

cei v ab le to us There is nothi ng unreasonable nor d ifficult
.

to accept in such a theory As we look about us we find

.

everywhere in nature this striving for perfection in a sl ow ,

persistent ma nn er We find no sudden process of creation

. .

or destruction such as the theologian postulates but we do

, ,
“ ”
find Evolution .

E v ol ution is the history Of the progression Of the

Spirit in Time Everywhere as we see about us the
.
,

varie d phenomena in the uni verse we realize that the path ,

of evolution is a spiral Each l oop of the spiral is a cycle

. .

Each cycle merges into th e next as the loops of the spiral

,

are continuous e ach cycle being the improved product of

,

those preceding it and the creator O f those more develope d

states which succeed it .

A straight line is but the extension of a point It occu .

pies but one dimen sion in space The theory of the mate
.

r i al i st and that of th e theo l ogian would be analogous to this

l ine The material i st makes the line of life start at birth

.
,

and to be consistent the death hour must terminate it

,
.

The theol ogian commences his l ine with the creation of

152 R OS I CR CU I AN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON

the soul just previous to birth Afte r death th e soul l ives

.

on i ts fate irretrievably determine d by the deeds of a few

,

short years There is no com ing back to correct mi st akes

. .

The line ru ns straight on implying a modicum Of ex per i

,

ence and no e levation for the soul after death .

N othing in nature move s I n a str aight line such as th ese

two theories imply ; nor do they move even in circl es f or ,

that would imply a never ending round of the same ex per i

-

e n ces and the u se Of on l y two d i mensions in S pace . All

th ings move in progressive cycl es and i n order to t ake

full advantage Of a l l th e Opportunities for advancement
Off ered by our three dimensional universe
-
it is necess ary ,

that the evolving life sh ould tak e the three dimensiona l -

— —
path the S piral which goes ever onward and upward .

0 Whe ther we l ook at the modest little plant in our garden

or go to the redwood district of C alifornia and ex amine on e
of the giant sequ o1as with its forty foo t diameter it i s -
,

—
always the s ame every branch twig or l e af wil l b e found
,

r owm g I n either a single or a double spiral or in opposi te

g ,

pa i rs each balancing either analogous to eb b and flow

, , ,

day and night life and death and other alter natin g activi
,

ties in nature .

Examine the vaulted arch of the sky an d observe the .

—
fiery nebulae or the path of the Solar Systems e verywhere
the spiral meet s the eye In the sprl n g the Earth discard s
.

its white blanket and emerges from its period of rest

its winter s slee p All activ i ties are exerted to bring f orth
’
.

new l i fe everywher e Time passes The corn an d the

. .

grape are ripen ed and harvested Again the busy summer .

fades into th e si l ence and inactivity of the winter Again

"

the snowy coverlet en wraps the Earth But her s l eep is .

not forever ; she wi ll wake aga 1n to the song of th e new

 R OS I CRU CI AN C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

when hewas place d i n an envir onment that m ade it ex

tr em ely diffi cult for h i m to go astray or to puni sh the ,

other who was hand i capped to such an extent that he never

,

had an idea of what const i tutes t r ue morality Surely n ot " .

Is it not more log i cal to think th at we may hav e misin

terpreted the B i ble than to i mpute to God such a mon
strous plan and method of procedu re ?
It is useless to say that we must not inquire into th e
mysteries of God ; that they are past our fin di ng out The ,
.

inequalities of life can be satisfactorily explained by the

twin law of Rebirth and Cons equence and made to har
m on i z e with the conception of a just and l ov1n g God as
“

taught by Christ H imself .

Moreover by means of these twin l aws a way to emanci

,

p at i on from present undesirable p osi ti on

l
or environment r

is shown together with the means of atta i ning to any de

,

gree of development no matter how ini per f ect we may be

,

What we are what we have a ll our good qual itie s are

"

, ,

the result of our own action s in the past What we l ack

,
.

in physical moral or mental excellence may yet be our s

, ,

in the future .

Exactly as we cannot do otherwis e than take up our

lives each morn i ng where we la i d them down the preceding
night so by ou r work in previous li v es hav e we made the
,

cond i t i ons un d er wh i ch we now li v e and labor and are ,

at present creating the condi tions Of our future l i v es .

Instea d of bemoaning the lack of this or that f acu l ty which

we cov et we mu st set to work to acquire it
,
.

If one ch i ld plays beautifully on a musical instrument ,

with hardly an e ff ort at learning while another despite , ,

persistent e ff ort is a poor player i n comparison it merel y

, ,

shows that one expended th e effo r t in a previous l ife and is

 R E B I RT H AN D T H E LAW O F CO N S E Q U E N C E 1 55

easily regai ning a former proficiency while the efiorts of the

,

other have been starte d only in the present incarnation and ,

in conse quence we see th e uphill work But if th e latter

.
,

persi st he may, even in the pre sent life become superior

, ,

to the former unless the former constantly improves .

That we do not remembe r the eff ort made in acquiring

a faculty by hard work is immaterial ; it does not alter
the fact that the faculty rema i ns with us .

Genius is the hall mark of the advance d soul which by

-
,

hard work in many previous lives has developed it self in

some direction beyond the normal ach i evements of the
race It reveals a glimpse of the degree Of attainment
.

wh i ch w i ll be the common possess i on of the coming Race .

It cannot be accounted for by heredity which applies only

,

in part to the dense body an d not to qual i tie s of the soul .

If gen i us c ould be account ed for by hered i ty why is there ,

not a long line of mechanical ancestors prev i ous to T h omas

E di son each mo re capable than his predecessor ? Why does
,

not genius propagate itse l f ? Why is not Siegfried the son ,

greater than Richard Wagner the father ? ,

In cases where th e expression of genius depends upon

the p os session of speci all y constructe d org ans requiring ,

ages Of development the Ego naturally incarn ates in a

,

family the Egos of which have for generations labored

, ,

to build a sim i lar organism Th at is why twenty nine

.
-

mus icians of more or less genius incarnated in the Ba ch

family during a period Of two hun dred and fifty ye ars .

That genius is an expression Of the soul and not of the

.

body is sh own by the fact that it did not gradual l y im ,

prove and reach effl orescen ce in the person of John Sebas

tian Bach but that the proficiency wh i ch reached its high
,

est express i on in him towered high above ancestors and

d escendants alike .
1 56
“

R C
OS I RU I AN C C OS M O -
C ON C EP T I ON

The body is simply an instrument the work it yields ,

being dep en d en t u p on th e Ego which g uides it as th e

'

quali ty of the melody is dependent upon the m u swi an s ’

sk i ll aided by the ti m br e of the instrument A g ood

,
.

mus10 1an cannot fully express h i mself upon a poor in

'

stru m en t an d even upon the same i nstrument all musi “

, ,

c i an s do not and cannot play alike Becaus e an Ego i n .

carn ates as th e son of a great musician it doe s not n eces

sar ily follow that he must b e a st i ll gre ater g eni us

”

as ,

would be th e case if physical hered i ty were a fact and

g enius were not a soul quality -
.

”
.
The Law of Attraction accounts in quite as satisf ac
“

tory a manner for the facts we ascr i be to h ered i ty We .

kn ow that people of l i ke tastes will seek one another I f .

we know that a fri end is in a certain city but are ignorant ,

Of his address we will naturally be governed by the l aw

,

of association in our eff orts to find h Im If he is a musi .

ci an ,
he will most likely be found where musicians are ’

wont to assemble ; if he is a student inquiry will be made

at libr aries reading rooms an d book store s or if he is a
,
-
,

sporting man we would seek him at rac e tr acks poolrooms ,

or saloons It I S not prob able that the musician or the

.

student would frequent the latter places and it is safe to

say that our search for the sporting man would not be
successful if we sought him i n a library or at a classic al
concert .

S i mi l arly the Ego ordinarily gravitate s to th e most

,

congenial assoc iations It i s constrained to do so by one

.

of the twin forces Of the Desire World—the force O f .

Attraction .

The Objection may be urged that there are pe ople of

entirely opposite tastes or bitter enemies even in the , ,
 ROS ICR U C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
'

158
-

in the sacred books of an y religion In one ( an d one only )

‘

O f the r el i g i ous writings of India is it touched upon In .

the K athopanishad ( ch v ; verse 9 ) i t i s state d that Some.

“

men accor d i ng to the i r dee ds go into the womb and othe rs

, ,
”
S th an u is a Sanskrit word which
“
into the sth an u ‘ ’

means m
.
,

” “
ot i onless but it also mean s a pillar , and has
“
,

b een interpreted to mean that some men bec ause Of thei r ,

s i ns go back to the mot i onless plant kingdom

,
.

Spirits I ncarnate only to gain experience ; to conquer

the world ; to overcome the lower self an d attain self mas -

tery When we realize this we shall understand that there

.

comes a time whe n t h ere is no further need for I ncarnation

because the lessons hav e all been learned The teaching .

of the K athopa ni shad ind i cates that instead of remaining

ti ed to th e wh eel of b i rth and death, man will at some tim e
"
’
‘

” “
go into the mot i onless state Of N ir v ana .

In the Book of Rev elation we find these words : H im “

that overcometh will I make a pi llar in the temp l e of my

God an d h e s h a ll g o n o m ore ou t referring to entire lib ,

er ati on from concre te existence N owhere is there any .

authority for the d octr i ne of the transm i grat i on of souls .

A man who has evol v ed so far as to have an indi vi dual ,

separate soul cannot turn back in his progress and enter the
vehicle of ani mal or plant which are under a gr oup spirit ,
-
.

The in d i v i dual S pirit is a h i gher e v olution than the group

spirit and the lesser cannot contain the greater .

Oliver Wendell H olmes in his beautifu l poem The , ,

“

”
Ch ambered N autilus h as em b od ied th i s idea Of constant
,

progression in gradual ly improving vehicl es and fina l lib ,

cration The nautilus bu i lds its spiral shell in chambered

.

sections constantly lea v ing the smaller ones which it has

“

, ,

outgrown for the one l ast bui lt

,
 R EB I RT H AN D TH E LAW OF CON S E Q U E N C E 159

a: a s a: a:

Y ear a f te
yea r rb
eh el d th e s il en t to l i
T h a t sp re a d h i s l us tr ou s c o l ; i
S til l , a s th e s p r a l r ew , i g
H e l e f t th e p a s t y ea s d w el l n f or th e n ew,
’ ‘

r i g
i
S t ol e w th s of t s t ep i ts s h n n a r ch w ay th r ou h , i i g g
i
B u l t u p i ts d l e d oor , i
r
S t etch e d i n hi s l a s t f ou n d h om e , an d n ew t h e old
-
k m ore .

T h an ks
f or th e h eav enly m e ssa e r ou h t b y th ee, g b g
C i
h ld O f th e w a n d er n s ea, i g
Ca s t f r om h er l a
p f or l or n "
i
F r om th y d e a d l p s a cl e a r er n ote i s or n b
T h an ev er Tr ton l ew f r om w r ea th ed h or n "
i b
Whil e on m i n e c a r i t r n g s , i
g
T h r ou h th e d ee p cav es of t h ou h t I h ea r a v o ce th at g i i gs
s n

B u l d th ee m or e s ta tel y m a n s on s , O m y soul "

i i
A s t h e sw f t se as on s r ol l "
i
L e av e th y l ow v au l t e d p a s t "
-

L et e a ch n ew te m p l e , n o l e r th a n th e l a s t, b
r
S h u t th ee f om h e av en w th a d om e m or e v ast, i
i
T l l th ou a t l en g th ar t f ee, r
i g i g
Leav n th n e ou t r ow n sh ell b y l f e s u n r e st n
’
i i g s ea "

The necessity previously referred to of Obtaining an

, ,

organism Of a spec i fic nature br i ngs to m i nd an inter esti ng ,

phase of the twin laws of Rebirth and Consequence These .

laws are connected with the motion of the Cosmic bodies ,

the S un the p l anets and the signs of the Zodi ac A l l move

, .

in harmony with these l aws guided in their orbits by their ,

indwel ling spiritua l Intelligences—the P l anetary Spirits .

On account of the precession of the equinoxes the Sun

moves backward thr ough the twel ve signs Of the Zodiac at
the rate of approximate l y one degre e of space in 7 2 ye ars ,

and through each sign ( 3 0 degree s of spa ce ) in about

ye ar s or around th e wh o le circl e in about
,

years .

This is due to th e f act that the E arth does not S pin upon
a s tationary a x is Its axis h as a slow swingi ng motion of
.
,

its own ( j ust like the wabb l e of a spi n ning top th a t h as

 RO S I CRU C I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

almost spent its force ) so that it describes a circle in space

,

and thus one st ar after another be com es Pole Star .

Because Of this wabbling motion the Sun does not cross

the equ ator in the sam e place every year b u t a few hun ,

dred r ods further back hence the name the precession Of “

the equin o xes be cau se th e e quino x preced es—com es too

, ,
” “
.

, r

early .

All happenings on the E arth I n connection with the

,

other Cosmic bodies and their inhabitants are connecte d

with this and other Cosmic movements S o are al s o th e .

l aws of Rebirth and Con sequence

As the Sun passes through the diff erent SI gn s l n the
course Of the year the climatic and other changes affect
,

man and his act i v itie s in different ways Simil arly the .

passage Of the Sun by the precession of the equ inoxes ,

through the twelve signs of the Zodiac—which is called a

]

World year brings ab ou t con d iti on s on the Earth of a far

’

-
,

grea ter vari ety It is necessary to the growth of the soul

.

that it should ex perIen ce them all In fact as we have .

_

seen the man himself m

,
’

ak es the se cond i tions while in

l

the H eaven World b etween i ncarn ati on s Therefore every

‘

.
,

Ego is born tW1ce during th e time the Sun is passing

through one sign of the Zodiac ; and as the sou l itself is ,

necessarily double sexed in order to Obtain all experi ence

-
, ,

i t i nc arnates alte rn ately in a male and a female body This .

is because the experience of one sex differs widely from

that of the other At the s ame time the outside cond i tions
.
,

are not greatly altered in one thousand years and there f ore
perm i t the enti ty to receive experience in the same identica l
env i ronme nt from the standpoint of b oth man and woman .

These are the general terms upon which the l aw of

,
.

Re birth operates but a s it is not a bl i nd law it is subject

, ,

to frequent modi fications determined by th e Lords of ,

1 62 ROS I CR U C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP T ION
-

of this inabi l ity to escape what is written In th e star s ,

though per f ectly cognizant Of it occurred in Los Ange les , ,

California in 190 6 Some instructions in astrology were

,
.

’
given to Mr L a well known lecturer Mr L s own
. .
,
-
. . .

horoscope was taken up because a pupil will be more in ,

ter este d in that than In the nativity Of a stranger H e is .

also enab led to check the accuracy of th e interpretat i on

of th e signs which are given him The horoscope revealed .

a l iability to accidents an d Mr L w as shown how accl . .

dents and other events in the past figured to the time of

occurrence In addition he was told that anothe r accident
.
,

would befall him and that it would occur on the twenty

fir st of the following July or the seventh day after i e , ,
. .
,

on the twenty eighth the l atter day bei ng regarded as the

-
,

more dangerous H e was warned against conveyances of

.

any kind and the place Of the threatened injury was d esig
flate d as the breast shoulders, arms and lower p art of the
,

h ead . H e wa s thoroughly convinced of the dange r and

promised to remain at home on that day .

The write r went north to Seattle and a few days be f ore '

the critical time wrote to M r L an d ag am warned him . . .

Mr L answered that h e re membered the warning and

. .

woul d act accordingly .

The next co mmunication in regard to the matt er cam e

from a mutual friend who stated that on the 2 8 th Of Jul y,

Mr L had gone to Sierr a Madre on an electric car which

. .

ha d collided with a rail road train Mr L sustaining in ,

. .

u rI es Of the exact description mentioned and also having a

j
tendon cut in the l eft leg .

T h e question was why Mr L having entire faith in . .

,

the prediction had disregarded the advice The explana

, .

tion came three months l ater wh en he had recovered suffi ,

 R EB I RT H A N D T H E LAW O F C ON S E Q U E N C E 16 3

cien tly to wri te . The letter said ,

I thought th e 2 8 th was
”
the 2 9th .

There is no question in the writer s mind that this was ’

”
a piece of ripe fate impossible to escape which was
“
, ,

accurately foreshown by the stars .

The stars may there f ore be ca l led th e Clock of De s

”
t iny
. The twel ve signs of the Zodi ac correspond to the
dial ; the Sun and the planets to the hour hand which ,

indicates the year ; and the Moon to the minute hand indi ; ,

cating the month of the year when the diff erent items in
the score of ripe fate a ll otted to each l ife are du e to work
themselves out .

It cannot be sufficient ly emphasized however that , ,

though the re are some things that can n r be escaped man ,

has a certain scope of free will in modifying cause s al ready

set goin g A poet puts it thus :
.

On e sh ip sai l s e as t a n d il s w es t
a n oth e r sa
With th e s el f sam e w in d s th a t b l ow
-
.

’
Ti s th e se t of th e s ail an d n ot t h e ga l e
Wh i ch d eter m in es th e w ay th ey g o .

A s th e w i n d s of th e s ea a r e th e w ay s O f f ate
As w e v oy a g e a l on g th rou gh li f e,
’
Ti s th e a ct of th e sou l th a t d e term in es th e g oal ,
A n d n ot th e c a l m or th e s tr i f e .

The great point to grasp is that our present action s

determine future cond i tions .

Orthodox relig i onists and e v en those who profess n o

religion at all often bring forward as one of their strong
,

est Object i ons to the law of Rebirth that it is taught in

“ ”
India to the ignorant heathen who belie v e in it If it ,
.

is a natura l law however there is no Objection strong

, ,

enough to inv alidate it or make it inope rative Be f ore .

“ ”
we spe ak of ignorant heathen or se nd missionaries to ,

them it might be well to e x am ine our own kn owl edge a

,
1 64 RO S I CRU C IA N COS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

little E ducators everywhere complain of su perficial ity on

.

the part of our stu d ents P rofessor Wilbur L Cross of . .

,

Yale mentions among other startl i ng c a ses of ignorance

, ,

the fact that in a class of forty students n ot on e cou l d ,

s car i ot "
”
J d I
“

p lace u as

It would seem as though the labors of m 1ss10 n ar1es could

”
profitably be di verte d from heathen countries and from “

slum work to enl i ghten the college bred ind i vi duals of our -

own country on the pr i nc i ple that ch ar itf bifii n s at

,
“

”
home and as God w i ll not let the i gn or an t heathen
, ,
.

”
perish it would seem better to leave him in ignorance where
he is sure of heaven than to enl i ghten him and so render
,

his chances of going to hell leg i on Surely this is a case .

,
“ ” ’
of Where ignorance is bliss tis folly to be wise We .

would be do i ng ourselves and the heathen a signa l service

b letting him alone and looking after th e ignorant Chri s
y
tI an nearer home .

Moreover to call this a heathen d octr I n e doe s not dis

,

prove i t Its assumed pr i ori ty I n the E ast is no more an

.

argument aga i nst i t than the accuracy of the solution of a

mathemat i cal problem is in v ali date d because we do not
’

happen to like the person who first solved it The only .

question is is it corr ect ? If so, it is absolutely immateri al

,
—

whence the solution first came .

All other religions have been but leading up to the

Christian religi on They were Race Rel i gions and con
.

t ain only in part that wh i ch Christianity has in fuller

measure The real Esoter ic Christianity has not yet been
.

taught publicly nor will it be so t aught unt i l humanity

,

has passed the material i stic stage and becomes fitted to

r eceive it The laws of Rebirth and Consequence have
.

been secretly taught all the t i me but hy th e d ir ect C om , ,

m an d of Ch ris t H i m s elf as we sha ll see these two laws

, ,
1 66 R O S ICR U C I AN C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

mind the emphatic statement that in the process of evolu

t i on u p to the t i me when man gam ed self consciousness -
,

a bs olu tely n oth i n g w as l ef t to ch an ce

After gain i ng self consciousness there I s a cert ain scope

-

for the exerci se of man s own indivi dual will to enable

’

unfold his Divine spiritual powers .

The great Leaders of mankind take eve rything into

cons i derati on the food of m an included This has a
, ,

great deal to do w i th hi s development Tel l m e what .

”
you eat and I wi ll tel l you what you are is not a f ar
l

fetched idea but a great truth in nature

,
.

The man of the first Epoch was ethereal That does .

not contradict the statement that he was m i neral like for -

,
'
all gases are mineral The Earth was st i ll soft not yet
.
,

hav i ng sol i d i fied In the B ible man i s called Ad am and

.

it i s said th at he was made of earth .

Ca i n is descr i bed as an ag ri cul turist H e symbolizes .

the m an of the Secon d Epoch H e h ad a v i tal body like .

th e p lants wh i ch susta i ne d h i m .

In the Th i r d Epoch food w as obta i ne d from liv ing

ani mals to su ppl enfi ft the former pl ant fo od M i lk w as .

the means used for evol v ing the des i r e body which made ,

—
the mank i nd of that time an i mal l i ke Th i s i s what is .

meant by the B i bl e statement that Abel was a shepherd “ ”

.

It i s nowhere stated that he k i lled ani mals .

In the Fourth Epoch man had e vol v e d beyon d the ani

m al— h e had mind Thought breaks d own nerve cells ;
.

ki ll s destroys and causes d ec av

,
Th er ef ore the food of
.

th e Atlantean was by analogy dead carcasses

, ,
H e killed .

to eat and that is why the Bible states th at N imrod was “

”
a m i ghty hunter N imrod represent s the man of the
.

Fou r th Epoch .

In the m eanwh ile man had descended deeper and deeper

,
 REB I RT H AN D T H E LAW OF C ON S E Q U E N C E 16 7

into matter H is f orme r ethereal body formed the skel

.

eton within and had become solid H e had also lost by .

degree s the spiritual perce pt i on which was possessed by

him in the earl i er Epochs Thus it was des i gned H e is
.
‘
.

dest i ne d to get it back at a higher stage plus the self ,

consciousness which he did not then possess H e h ad .

,

howe v er during the first four Epochs a greater knowl

, ,

edge of the spiritual world We know he d i d not die and

.

that when one body wasted away it was like the dryin g
of a leaf from the tree in the autumn— another body would
row to t ke its place Th erefor e he had no rea l appre ci a
g a .

tion o f the opportunities and advantages Of this Earth l ife

o f concrete existence .

But it was necessary that he shou l d become thorough l y

awake to the great importance of this concrete existence ,

so that he might learn from it all that could be learned .

S o l ong as he felt that he was a citizen of the higher

Worlds and knew for a certainty that physical l ife is but a
s mal l p art of real existence he did not take it serio usl y
,

enough H e did not apply himself to the cultiv ation of

.

the opportuni ties for growth which are found only in th e

present phase of existence H e dal li ed h i s time away with
.

out devel oping the resource s of the world as do the peop l e ,

o f India today for the same reason

,
.

The only way in which an appreciation of concrete

physical existe nce could be aroused in man was b y d epr iv
ing him of the memory of h i s higher spiritual existe nce ,

for a few incarnations Thus during his Earth l ife he

.
, ,

came to hol d no positive knowl edge of any other than the

one present physical life and was in this way impell ed
,

to ea rnestly appl y himself to l iving it .

There h ad been religions previous to Christianity which

h ad taught Rebirth and the l aw Of C onse quence b u t the ,
16 8 RO S I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON C E P T I O N
-

time h ad now come when it was no longer conducive

'

to m an s advancement that he should know this doctrine

’
,

and i gnorance con cerning it came to be regarded as a sign

‘

'

of progress This one si ngl e l i fe was to be made para

.

mount Therefore we find that the Christ i an Religion as

.
,

publicly taught does not embody the laws of Consequen ce

,

and Rebirth N evertheless as Christian i ty is the religion

.
,

of th e most advanced R ace it must be the most advanced ,

Religion and because of the elim i nation of this doctrin e

,

from its p u b li c te achings the conquest of th e world of

,

matter is being made by the Anglo Saxon and Teu toni c -

races in which this phase has been carr ied furthest

, .

As some new additi on to or change in th e food of man

h ad been made in every Epoch to meet its conditions and
accomplish its purposes we now find added to the food
,

of th e prev i ous Epo chs a new article— WI N E It was .

needed on account Of i ts benumbing eff ect upon the spir

i tu al principle in man because no religion in and of
, ,

itself could have made man forget his nature a s a spirit

,

and have caused him to th i nk of himself as a worm of the “

-

” “
dust or made him beli eve th at we walk with the same
,
” —
force with which we think indeed it was never in ,

tended that he should go so far as that .

H itherto only water had been used as a drink and i n

th e ceremonies of the Temple service but after the sub ,

mergence of Atlantis—a continent which once existed b e

tween Europe and America where the Atlantic Ocean now ,

—
lies those who escaped destruction began to cultivate
the vine and make wine as We fin d nar rated in the Bible
‘

story of N oah N oah symbolizes the remnant of the At

‘

l an te an Epoch which became the nucleus of the Fifth

,

Race—therefore our progenitors .

Th e active princip le of a l coh o l i s a Spirit and as the

1 70 RO S I CR C
U I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

t i on scene saying Elij ah has come already and they

, ,

knew him not but have done to h im whatsoe v er they

,
”
l i sted
. And following this i t is sa i d that they under ,
“
~

”
stood H e spake of John the Bapt i st ( Matt x vii zl 2 .

On th i s occasion and also at the t i me when Reb i rth w as

,

d i scussed between H im and H i s d isc i ples they told H im ,

that some thought H e was El i jah and other s that H e

'

w as one of the prophets who had reincarnated H e com .

m an de d them to (
“
tell no man Matt x vii :9 ; Luke . .

ix Th i s was to be for tho us ands of years an

p
, ,

esote ric teach i ng to be known only among the few pio

,

neers who fitted themsel v es for the knowledge pushing ,

ahea d to the stage of de v elopment when these tr uths will

aga i n be known to man .

That Christ taught Rebirth and also the l aw of Con

s equence i s perh aps shown in no other place as clearly
,

as in the case Of the man who had been born bl i n d whe re ,

H i s d i sciples asked Who did sin this man or h i s parents

,
“
, ,
”
that he was born blind ? ( John ix
H ad Christ not taught Reb i rth and the l aw of Gonse
q u en ce,
the natural answer would have be en N onsense " ,
“

how could the man have sinned b efor e h e was b or n an d ,

”
h a ve brought bl i ndness upon h 1m sel f as a result ? But
Christ does not answer in that way H e is not surprised .

at the quest i on nor does H e treat it as be ing at all

,

unusual showing that it was quite in har mony with H i s

,

teach i ngs H e explains

. N e i ther hath th i s man sinned
,
“
,

nor h i s parents ; but that the works of ( the ) God should

be m ade manifest in h im
The orthodox interpretation is that the man was born
blind in order that Christ might have the Opportuni ty of
perform i ng a miracl e to show H i s power It woul d have .

been a strange way for a God to Obtain gl ory—capriciously ,

 R EB I RT H AN D TH E LAW OF CON S E Q U E N CE 171

condemning a man to many years of bl indness and mis ery

that H e might show Off at a f uture t ime " We would
“ ”

consider a man wh o acted in such a manner a monste r

of cruelty .

H ow much m ore l ogica l to th i n k that there may be

ano ther e xplanation To impute to God conduct which in
.
,

a human be in g we woul d denounce in the strongest terms

, ,

is surely un reasonab l e .

Ch rist di ff erentiates between the physically blind body

of th e man and the God within which is the H igher S elf
,
.

The dense body has commit te d no sin The God within .

has done some de ed which manifests in the particular

affliction from which he is su ffering It is not stretching
.

a point to call a man a God Paul says know ye not

.
,
“

”
that ye are Gods ? and he refers to the hum an body as
”
th e templ e of God
“
the indwelling spirit
,
.

Finally although most peop le do not remembe r their

,

past lives there are some who do and all may kn ow if

, ,

they wil l live the life nece ssary to attain the knowledg e .

This requires great str ength of character because such ,

knowl edge wi ll carry with it a knowledge of impending

fate that may be hanging b l ack and sinister over one ,

which will mani fe st in di r e disaster N ature has gr a .

ci ou sl y hidden the pas t an d the future from us that we ,

may not be rob be d of peac e of mind by suffering in antici

p etion of the pain in store f or us As we attain greater
.

development we shal l learn to wel come a ll things with

equan imity see in g in a ll troub l es the result of past evi l
,

and feeling th ank f ul that the Obl i gations incurred thereby

are being annu ll ed kn owing that so much less stands
,

between us an d the day of liberation from the wh eel of

birth and death .

When a per son d i es in childhood in one life h e or she ,

1 72 R OS I CRU C I AN CO S M O C ON C E P T ION -

n ot in f re quently r emembers th at life in the n e xt incarn a

tion because chi l dren under 14 years do not j ourney
,

around t h e entire l ife cycle which necessitates the build ,

I n g of a complete set of new vehicles They simply pas s .

into th e upper R egions of th e Desire World and there -

wait f or a new incarnation which usuall y takes place in ,

from one to twenty years after death When they rein .

carnate they bring with them the Ol d mind and desire

,

body an d if we listened to the prattle of ch i ldren we

, ,

should ofte n be able to discover and reconstruct such

stories as the f ollow i ng

A REM ARKAB LE S TORY .

On e d ay in S ant a B arbara Cal a man by th e name of ,

.
,

Roberts cam e to a tr ained clairvoyant who is also a l e cturer

on Theosoph y an d asked f or h e l p in a perplexing case .

M r Robert s had been wa l king in the street the previous

.

day wh en a l ittle th ree year ol d girl c ame u p to him an d

- -

put her arms around his knees calling him p apa Mr

‘

. .
,

Robe rts was i ndignant thinking th at someone was trying

,

to father the child on him TBut the mother of th e child .

who came up directly was equally put out and tried to get
,

the chi l d away Th e chi l d h owever kept on clinging

.
, ,

to Mr R insisting th at h e was h er father On account

. .
,
.

of circumstances to be told l ater Mr R could not put . .

it out of his mind and sought out the cl airvoyant who

, ,
’
accompanied him to the house of the child s parents ,

where the l ittl e girl at once ran up to Mr R and aga i n . .

called him p apa Th e cl airvoyant whom I wil l call X

.
, ,

first took the chil d over to the window to note whether

the iris of the eye would expand and contract when he
turned her to and from the l ight in order to see whether ,
'

anoth er entity than the rightfu l owner was in posse ssion

 R O S I C R U Q I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

a ruse to entrap h im into the hand s of confeder ates th e

, ,

officer refused and drove him to the coast at the point of

the gun H e was take n to Engl and an d tried and his in
.

nocence proven .

First then d i d the authorities take hee d of h is con stant

ravings about his wife and child whom h e knew must ,

s tarve in that wild and l onely country

. An expedition .

was sent out to the cabin when it was found that only the
,

skeletons of the wife and ch il d rema i ned Mr Rob erts . .

’

father had d i ed in the meantime and though h e had ,

d i s i nherited Mr R his brothers divided w

. .
,
ith him and h e
came to America a broken man .

H e then pr od u ce d ph otogr aph s of himse l f and his wife ,

and at th e suggestion of Mr X they were mixed with a

. .

number of other photographs and shown to the little girl ,

who un hesitatingly picked out the photogr aphs of both

h er alleged parents although the photograph shown was
,

very different from the pre sent appearance of Mr Roberts . .

lot Cosmié Plane

5 d Co smic pl a ne
.

Co s mic Plane

5ih Cos m ic Pld n e

Cos mi c Pla ne
"

7th Co s m ic Pl a ne i n c l u d e s a l l
-

th i s li n e the S ev en w orld s b e m
' '

i i
s ub d i v s o n s 0
} it .

wi se o "m

w
-

(o Glze or ld 0 1 De s ire
R e m Ph y s ical wo ld r .
 TH E R ELAT I O N O F M A N TO G O D 17 9

de rstan di ng wi ll result and if a common nomencl ature is

,

not agreed upon by writers and te achers the pre sent con ,
” “
fus i on will be worse confounded When the name God
.

is used it is al ways uncertain whether The Absolute The ,

On e Existence is meant ; or The Supreme Being Who is

, ,

the Great Architect of the U niverse ; or God Who is th e ,

Architec t of our Solar System .

” ”
The division of the Godhead into Fath er S on and ,
“

”
H oly Ghost is a l so confusing Although the Be ings
.

designated by these names are immeasurably above man

and worthy of all the reverence and worship he is capable
of rendering to his highest conceptions of Divinity yet ,

They are different from one another in actu al fact .

Diagrams 6 and 1 2 wil l perhaps make the subject c lear .

It must be kept in mind that the Worl ds and C osmic

Plane s are not one above an other in space but that the ,

sev en Cosmic P lanes inter penetrate each other and all the
-

seven Worlds They are state s of spirit matter permeat ing

.
-

one another so that God and the other great Beings who
,

are mentioned are not f ar away in space They pervade .

e very part of their own real ms and real ms of greater

density than their own They are all present in our world
.

and are ac tuall y and d e facto nearer than hands and“

”
feet. It is a l iteral truth when we say in H im we li v e “

”
and move and have our being for none of us could ,

e xist outside these gr eat Intelligences Who perv ade and

sustain our world with Their Life .

It has been shown that the Etheric Region extends

beyond the atmosphere of our dense Earth ; that the De
sire Worl d extends out into space further than the Etheric
Region ; a l so that the World of Thought extends further
into inte r planetary Space than eith er of the others Of
-
.

course the Worl ds of rarer substance occupy a l arger space

,
18 0 ROS I CRU C IAN COS M O C ON C EP T I ON -

than the d enser World which h as crystalli zed and con ,

d en se d thus occupying less sp ace

,
.

The same princi ple i s operative in the Cosmic pl ane s .

The densest of them is the seventh ( counting from the

top d ownwar d ) It is represente d in the d i agr am as
.

larger than any of the others the reason being that it ,

i s the plane w i th wh i ch we are most i ntimately concerned ,

and i t was d es i red to indi cate i ts p r i nc i pal subd i vis i ons .

In r eal i ty h owe ver it occup ies less S pace than any of the
, ,

other Cosmic P lanes although i t must be borne in mind ,

that even w i th thi s cam par atively restr i cti ve qualificat i on

,

as to its extent it is still imm easurably vast far beyond

, ,

the utmost power of t h e human m i n d to conce i ve com ,

pri si ng with in its limits millions of Solar Systems similar

to our own which ar e the fields for the evolution of m
,
any
g rades of beings of approximately our own status .

Of the six Cos mic P lanes above our own we know

nothing save that we are told they are the fields of
‘

act i vity of great H ierarchies of Beings of indescribable

sp l endor .

P roceeding from our Phys ica l W orld to th e inner and

i

"
finer Worlds and up through the Cosmic Planes we fin d ,

that God the Arch i tect of our Solar System the S ource
, ,

and Goal of our existence is found in the h i ghest d ivision ,

of the seventh Cosmic P lane Th i s is H i s World . .

H i s Realm includes the systems of evolution carried on

in th e other planets which belong to our system—U ranus ,

Saturn Jupiter Mars Earth Venus Mercury and thei r

, , , , , ,

satellites .

The great Spir i tua l Intel ligence s d esignated as th e

P lanetary Spirits which gu i de these evolutions are called
, ,
“ ”
the Seven Sp i rits before the Throne They are H is .

Ministers each presid i ng over a certain department of the

,

—
Kingdom of God whi ch is ou r Sol ar Sys tem The S un .
 1 82 ROS I CRU C IAN C OS M O C O N C EP TIO N -

Great Logo i They contain within Themselves all th e

.

great H ierarchies which diff erentiate more and more as

They d i ffuse th rough th e var i ous Cosmic P lanes ( See .

d i agram There are forty ni ne H ierarch ies on the sec

-

on d Cosm i c P lane ; on the th i rd there are 343 H i erarchies .

Each of these is capable of septenary d i v i s i ons an d su b di

v i s i ons so that in the lowest Cosmi c P lane where the
'

, ,

Solar Systems man i fest the numb er of d i v i sions and sub

,

divi sions ar e almost infinite .

In the H ighest World of the seventh Cosmic P lane

dwells the GOd of our Solar System and the Gods of all
oth er S ol ar Systems in the U niverse
'

These great Be i ngs .

are also threefol d in manifestat i on l i ke The Suprem e ,

Bei ng The i r three aspects are W i ll Wi sdom and Acti v i ty

.
,
.

E ach of the seven P lanetary Sp i r i ts wh i ch proc ee d

0
from God and have charge of the evoluti on of l i fe on one
of the seven planet s is also threefol d an d d i ff erentiates
,

within i tself Creat i ve H ier archi es wh i ch go through a

septenary evolution The evoluti on carr ie d on by one
.

P lanetary Sp i rit d i ff ers from the meth ods of development

i naugurate d by each of the o thers .

It m ay be further state d that at least in the particul ar ,

planetary scheme to wh i ch we belong the entit ies farthest ,

evolved in the earliest stages wh o h ad reached a h i gh ,

stage of perfecti on i n prev i ous evolut i ons assume the func ,

tions of the or i gi nal P lanetary Sp i r i t and conti nue the

“

e v olution the or 1g1n al P l anetary Sp i r i t with draw m g from

,

act i ve part i c i pat i on but gu i d i ng i ts Regents

, .

The forego i ng i s the teaching relat i ve to all the Solar

Systems but coming d own to the parti cular System to
,

wh i ch we belong the follow i ng i s the teach i ng whi ch the

,

suffici ently tra i ne d Seer can ob ta i n for h i mself by per

~

s onal i nvest i gation of the memory of nature .

 '
C H APTER VI .

TH E S CH E M E OF EVOLU TI ON .

T h e B egin n i n g .

N harmony with the H ermetic ax iom As above so ,

below and v i ce v ersa Solar S yswm s are

”
,

and come to birth anew in cycles of activity and rest ,

as does m an .

There is a constant flaming out and dyl n g down of

activity in every department of nature corresp onding to ,

th e alternations of ebb and flow day and night s u mmer , ,

an d winter life and death

, .

In the begin ning of a Day of Ma n ifestation it is t aught

that a certain Great Be ing ( desi gnate d in the Western
World by the name of God but by other names in other
,

parts of the earth ) limits H imsel f to a certain portion

of sp ace in which H e elects to create a So l ar System
,

for the evo lution of adde d se l f conscious ness ( See d-

i a .

gr am
H e includ es in H i s own B eing host s of gl orious H ier
ar chies of to us immeasurable spiritu al power and spl en
, ,

dor They are the fruitage of p ast manifestations of this

.

same Being and also other Intell igence s in descending ,

degrees of development down to such as have not reached

a stage of consciousness as high as our present humanity ,

and therefore these l atter will not be ab l e to fi nish their

e vo l ution in t hi s System —
In God this great coll ectiv e
.

18 3
 R OS I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON C EP T ION -

—
Be i ng there are conta i ne d less er beings of every grade of
i ntelli gence and stage of consc i ousness from omni scienc e ,

to an unconsciousness deeper than that of the d eepest

trance cond i t i on .

During the period of manifestation with which we are

concerned these various grades of beings are working to
,

acquire more exper i ence than they possessed at the begin

n i ng of th i s peri od of ex i stence Those wh o in prev i ous
.
,

m ani festat i ons have attained to th e h i ghest degre e of

,

d evelopment work on tho se who have not yet evolv ed any

consciousness They induce in them a stage of self con
.
-

sci ou sn ess from wh i ch they can take up further w

'

ork
themselves Those who had started their evoluti on in a
”

former Day of Man i festation but had not progressed far

,
'

at the close now take u p their task again just as we t ak e

,
.
,

u p our daily work in the morning where we left off th e

pr evious night .

All the different Beings however, do not take up their

,

ev olution at the early stages of a new man i festation Some .

must wait until those who precede them have made the
conditions which are necessary for their further develop
ment There are no instant aneous processes 111 nature
. .

All is an exceedingly slow unfolding a de velopment which , ,

though so exceedingly slow is yet absolutely certain to

,

attain ultimate perfection Just as there are progressive

.

stages in the human li t il dh ood youth manhood or , ,

womanhood and ol d age — so in the macrocosm there are

,

d i ff erent stages corresponding to these various periods of

the microcosm i c life .

A child cannot take up the duties of fatherhoo d or

motherhood Its undeveloped mental and phys i cal con
.

d i tion render it incapable of do i ng such work The same .

is tru e of the less evolved beings in the beginning of mani

18 6 R O SI CR U C IAN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON
f

Form side of mani festation Involution bel ongs to th e .

Li fe side ; but the most adv anced scientists regard Epi

genes i s as a dem onstrable fact The Rosicrucian Cosmo .

Concept i on comb i nes all three as necessary to full under

stand i ng of the past pres ent and future devel opm ent of
,

the System to which we belong .

TH E WORLDS .

We mi ght use a h om ely instance to illustrat e the build

ing of a C osmos Suppose a man w ants to establ i sh a
.

home 111 wh i ch to l i v e H e first selects a su itable locat i on

.

and then procee ds to build a house d i vi d i ng it i nto vari ous ,

rooms to serve certa i n purposes H e makes a kitchen .

,

d i ni ng room be d rooms and b athroom and furni she s the m

-
, ,

all to su i t the spec i al purpose they are in tended to ser v e

'

When God des i re s to create H e see ks out an appropriate

‘ ,

place 1n space which H e fills with H i s aur a permeating

, ,

e very atom of the Cosmic Root substanc e of that particular -

port i on of space w i th H i s Li fe thus aw akening the acti v

.

i ty l aten t w i th in e v ery i n sep arate atom

/

This Cosmic Root substance 1 s an expression of the -

negative pole of the U n ive rsal Sp i r i t while the great ,

Creative Being we call God ( of whom we a s spirits are , ,

part ) i s an e xpress i on of the p os i ti v e energy of the s ame

U niversal Absolute Sp i rit From the work of one upon .

the other all that we see about us in the P hys i cal World
,

has resulted The ocean s the Earth e veryth i ng we see

.
, ,

man i fest i ng as mineral plant animal and human forms , ,

— all are crys ta lliz ed spa ce emanate d fro m this negativ e ,

Sp i r i t substance wh i ch alone exi sted at the dawn of Being

-
, .

As surely as the har d an d fl in ty house of the snail i s the

sol i d i fie d j u i ce s of i ts soft bo dy so surely all for m s are ,

crystall i zations around the ne gative pole of Spirit .

 THE S CH E M E or E voLUTI oN 187

God draws from th e Cosmic Root subs tance outside H i s -

immediate sphere ; thus the substance within the nascent

cosmos becomes dense r than it is in U niversal space b e ,

tween Solar Systems .

When God has thus prepared the mate rial f or H i s

H abitation H e next sets it in order
,
Every p art of the .

system is pervaded by H i s consciousness but a different ,

modification of that consciousness in each part or di vi

sion The Cosmic Root substance is set in varyi ng rates
.
-

of vibration and is therefore di ff erently const i tuted in its

v arious divisions or regions
,
.

The above is the mann er in which the Worlds come into

being and are fitted to ser ve di ff erent purposes in the evo
l u tion ary scheme the same as the various rooms in the
,

house are fitted to se rve the purposes of everyday l ife in

the P hys i cal World .

We have already seen th at there are seven World s These .

”
Worlds ha v e each a different measure an d rate of vibra
“

tion In the densest World ( the P hysical ) the measure of

.

vibration though in the case of light waves reaching a

,
-

rate of hundreds of millions per second is nevertheless i n ,

fin i tesim al when compared to the r ap i d i ty of the vibration

in the Desire World wh i ch is next to the P hysical To
, .

get some con ceptl on of the meaning and rapidity of vibra

tion perhaps the easiest way is to watch the heat v ibrat i ons
,

rising from a very hot S tov e or from a steam radiato r ,

near a window .

It must be borne constantly in mind that thes e Worlds

are not separate d by S pace or di stance as i s the earth ,

from the other planets They are states of matter of vary

.
,

ing density and v i brat i on as are the solids liqui d s and

, ,

gases of our P hysical World These Worl ds are not in .

s tan tane ou sl y created at the beginning of a Day of Mani

1 88 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P T ION -

f e station , nor do they l ast unti l the end ; but as a spider

"

S p i ns its web thread by thread S O God d iff erent i a tes one ,

after another of the Worl d s with i n H i mself as the n eces ,

S ity ar i ses for new con d i t i ons i n the scheme of e v olut i on

in which H e i s engaged Thus h ave all the seven World s .

been gradually d i fferent i ate d as they are at pre sent .

Th e h i ghest Worlds are created first and as involution ,

is to slowly carry the l i fe into denser an d denser matter

for the build i ng of forms the finer Worlds gradually con ,

dense and new Worlds are differentiate d w i thin God to

furni sh the necessary links between H imself and th e
Worlds which have consol i d ate d In due t i me the point .

of greatest density the na dir of mater i al i ty is reached

, , .

From that point the life begins to ascend i nto higher

Worlds as evolut i on procee d s
,
That leaves the denser .

Worlds depopulated one by one When the purpose h as

, .

been served for which a particular Worl d was created God ,

ends its ex i stence which ha s become s uperfluous by ceas

, ,

ing within H imself the part i cular activity which brought

into being and sustained that World .

The h i ghest ( fin est rares t, most ethere al ) Worl ds are

,

the first created an d the last eliminated while the three

’

densest Worlds in which our present phase of evolution is

,
.

c arried on are but compar atively e vane scent phenome na

,
’
incident to the S pirit s di p into matter .

TH E S EVEN P E RI ODS .

The evo l ution ary scheme is carried through these fi ve

Worlds in seven gre at P eriods of Manifestati on during ,

which the virgin spir i t or evolving life becomes first

.

, , ,

—
man then a God ,
.

At the beg1nn 1ng of Mani festation God d i fferentiates

~

wi th i n ( not fr om ) H imself these v 1r g1 n sp i rits as S parks ,

1 90 ROS I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON C E P T I O N -

of proper veh icles At l ast when he was far enough ad

.
,

van ced and equ i pped with the thr eefold body a s a neces sary
”
instrume nt these h i gher Be i ngs opene d his eyes and
,
“

turne d his gaze ou twar d u pon the Chemical Regl on of the

'

P hysical World that h i s energies m i ght conquer it

,
.

When he has fitted h i mself by his work i n the Chemical

R egi on his next step in progress w i ll be towards an ex
,
.

p an sron In consciousness that will include the Ether ic

Region ; then the Des i re World etc etc ,

.
,
.

In the Rosicrucian terminolo gy the name s of th e seven ,

Periods are as follows

1 . The S aturn P er i od .

2 . The Sun P er i od .

3 . The Moon P eriod . Th ese per iods are

4 . The Earth P eriod cess1ve Rebirths of our

5 . The Jupiter P eriod . Earth .

6 . The Venus P er i o d .

7 . The Vulcan P eriod .

It must not be thought that the above mentione d P eriods -

have anythi ng to d o with the planets which move in their

orbits around the sun i n company with the earth In fact .
,

it cannot be too emphat i cally stated that there is no con

n ecti on whate v er between these planets and the P eriods .

The P er i ods are S imply past present or future incarnation s ,

” “
of our E arth conditions through which it has passed
, ,

is now passing or will pass in the future

, .

The three first ment i oned P eri ods ( the Saturn Sun an d ,

Moon P er i ods ) hav e be en passed through We are now in .

the fourth or Earth P eriod When this Earth P eriod of

, .

our Globe has been completed we and it Shall pass in ,

turn through the Jupiter Venus and Vulcan condition s ,

before the great septenary Day of Manifestation comes to

 TH E S C H E M E O F EVOLU T I O N 1 91

an end when al l that now is will once more be merged i n

,

the Absolute for a pe riod of rest and aS S 1m il ation of the

fru its of our evolution to r e— emerge for further and higher
,

development at the dawn of another Great Day .

The three and one half P er i ods already behind us h ave

-

been spent in gain i ng our present vehicles and consc i ous

ness The remaining three and one half er i ods w i ll be
.
P -

devoted to perfecting these d i fferent vehicles and expanding

our consciousness into something akin to omniscience .

The journey m ade by the virgin sp i r i t from unconscious

n ess to omniscience unfold i ng its latent poss i b il i t ie s into
,

a kinetic energy is a process of marvelous complexi ty and

,

only the roughest outl i ne will at first be given As we .

progress i n our prese nt study however more de tails will be

, ,

fi l led in until the picture is as complete as the writer i s

,

capable of making it The atte nti on of the student i s

.

called to the definition of te rms that are gi ven as n ew

i deas are being presented H e is earnestly importuned to
.

familiarize himse l f with them as the i ntention is to Sim

,

li f the m atter by using only one f am i l i ar English nam e

p y
for the same idea throu ghout the work Th e name wil l be .

as descriptive as possible of t h e ide a to be conveyed in ,

hope that thereby much of the confusion arising from a

multiplex term inology may be avoided By paying strict .

attention to de fin i ti on of te rms it S hould not be too diffi

,

cult for any person of average intelligence to acqu i re a

knowl edge of at le ast the outlines of the scheme of
evolution .

That such a knowledge is of the utmost importance will ,

we think h e conceded by every intelligent individual We

,
.

live in this world governed by the l aws of nature U nder

,
.

these laws we must live and work and we are powerless ,

to ch ange them If we know them and intell i gently co

.
1 92 ROS I CR C U I AN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON

Operate with them these natur e forces become most valu

,
-

able servants e g electricity and the expansive force of

, . .
,

steam . If, on th e other han d we do not understand them

,

and in our ignorance work contrary to them they become ,

most dangerous enemies c apable of terrible destru ction

,
.

Therefore the more we know of the worki ng methods of

,

nature which latter is but the visib l e symbol of the in

,

visib le God the be tter able we shall be to take advantage

,

of the opportunities it off er s for gr owth and power ; for

em ancip ation f r o m bond age an d f or e l e vation to mastery ;
 C H APTER VI I .

T H E P ATH OE EVOLU TI ON .

W ORD of warn m g 111 regar d to d i agrams used for

purposes of i llustrat i on may not be out of place .

The stu d ent shoul d r emem b er that anythi ng that i s

reduced into another d i mens i on can never be accurate The .

1 ctu r e of a house would mean l i ttle or noth i ng to us i f

p
we h ad never see n a house In that case we would see i n
. .

th e p i cture only l i nes an d blotches It would convey no

.

mean i ng to us Diagrams use d to illustrate superphys i cal

.

matters are much les s true representati ons of the reality ,

for the S imple reason that i n the case of the picture the ,

three dimens i onal hou se I S only reduced to two dimens i ons

-
,

while i n the case of diagrams of the P er i o d s World s and ,

Globes the real i ties possess fr om four to seven dimens i ons

, ,

and the d i a grams of two dim en s1on s by which it i s en d eav

ored to rep resent them are thus so much further removed
.

from the pos si b i lity of correctly portraying them We .

must constantly bear i n m i nd th at these Worl d s i nter — pene i -

trate that the Globes inter penetrate and that the way
-
,

they are shown in the d i agram is analogous to taking all

the wheels of a watch and laying them si d e by si de i n or der
t o show how the watch keeps t i me If these d iagrams are
.

to be of any use to the s tudent they must be spiritually

conce i ve d Otherwise they w i ll be confusing instead of
.

enl i ghtening .
 T H E P A TH O F E V OL U T ION 1 95

R EVOLU T I ON S AN D C OS M I C N I GH T S .

The S aturn P eriod is the first of the seven P eriods and ,

at this early stage the virgin sp i ri ts take their fir st step

towards the evolut i on of Consciousness and Form By .

reference to di agram 7 i t w i ll be seen that th e evolutio nary

impulse travels S even times around the seven Globe s A B , , ,

C D E F and G the arrows showing the d i recti on

, , , ,
.

First a part of the evolution is accompl i shed on Globe

,

A situated in the World o f Divine Spirit the rarest of the

, ,

five Worlds which form our field of evo l ution Then .

,

gradually the evolving life is transferred to Globe B wh i ch ,

is located in the somewh at denser World of Life Sp i rit .

H ere another stage of evolution is passe d through In due .

time the evolv i ng life is ready to enter the arena on Globe

C which is situated in and forme d of th e yet denser su b
,

stance of the Region of Abstract Thought After learning .

the lessons peculiar to that stage of existence th e l i fe ,

wave travels onward to Globe D which is locate d in and ,

formed of the substance of the Region of Concrete Thought .

Th is is the densest degree of matter reache d by the life

wave during the S aturn P eriod .

From thi s point the life wave is carried upward again

to Globe E which is S ituate d in the Region of Abstract
,

Thought as i s Gl ob e C yet the conditions are not the same

,
x

as on Globe C This is the Involutionary S tage and the

.
,

substance of the Worlds is getting d enser all the time .

The ten dency in everything is to become denser and more

soli d as t i me goes on ; also as the path of evolution is a
,

S p i ral it will be clear that though the same points are

, ,

gone over the conditions are ne v er the same but are

, ,

on a higher and more a d vanced plane .

Wh en the work on Globe E has been completed the ,

 ROS IC R U C I AN C O S M O C O N C EP T ION -

next step 1 s taken on Globe F wh i ch is situated in the

, ,

World of Life Sp i rit the same as Globe B ; thence i t

,

mounts to Globe G When the work there is d one the

.
,

l i fe wave has travele d once aroun d all the seven Globes ;

once down an d up through the four respective Worlds .

This journey of the l i fe wave i s called a Revolution and ,

sev en Revoluti ons make one P er i od During one P eriod .

the life wave travels seven t i mes down and up through the
" our Worlds .

When the life wave h as traveled its full complement of

sev en t i me s aroun d the seven Globes completing the seven ,

Revoluti ons the first Day of Creat i on closes and there fol
,

lows a Cosm i c N i gh t of rest and ass im i l ation after which ,

the Sun P eri od dawns .

Like the night of sleep between two days of human life

. and the i nterval of rest between two earth l i ves th i s Cosmi c ,

N ight of rest after the complet i on of the Saturn P eriod

is not a t i me of pass1ve repose but a season of preparati on ,

for the act i v i ty to be u nf ol d e d in the com i ng Sun P eriod ,

where man in the mak i ng is to take a further dip into

- - -

matter Therefore new Globes are necessary the positions

.
, ,

of which in the se v en Worl d sare d ifl eren t from those occu

.

p i ed by the Worlds of the Sa turn P er i od The providing .

of these new Globes and oth er subject i v e acti vities occupy

, ,

the e v ol v i ng sp1r1ts dur i ng the inter v al between P eriods "

the Cosm i c N i ght The manner of proce dure is as follows
.

When the l i fe wa v e has left Globe A i n the Saturn

P eriod for the last time the G l obe beg i ns to slowly d isin
,

teg r ate
. The forces wh i ch bui lt it are transferred from
the World of D i vine Sp i rit ( where Globe A is located
d ur i ng the Saturn P eriod ) to the World of Li fe Spir i t
( where Glob e A is located during the S un Period ) Thi s .

i s shown on diagr am 8 .
1 98 R O S I CR U CI AN C O S M O C ON C EP T ION-

When the l i fe wave has left Globe B i n the Saturn

Pe r i o d for the last t i me i t also com m ences to d i s i nte grate
, ,

an d the forces the reof l i ke the see d atom of a human,

-

vehi cle are use d as a nucleus for Glob e B i n th e Sun

,

P er i o d th i s Globe be i ng then located in the Reg i on of

,

Abstract Thought .

In l i ke manner the forces of Globe C are transferred

to the Reg i on of Concrete Thought and d r aw upon the
substance of that Reg i on for the material wherew i th to
bu i l d a new Globe C for the com i ng Sun P er i od Globe D .

i s S i m l lar ly transmuted and placed in the Des i re World .

Globes E F an d G in or der nam e d are analogously trans

, , ,

ferre d The result i s ( as reference to di agram 8 w i ll Show )

.

that i n the Sun P er i od all the Globes are loc ated one ste p
further down i nto denser m atter than they were i n th e
S aturn P er i od so that the l i fe wa
,
v e upon its emergence ,

from the Cosmic N i ght of Rest i nterven i ng be tween the

last activ i ty on Globe G of the Saturn P eri o d an d the
renewed act i v i ty on Globe A of the Sun P erio d finds a n ew
environment w ith the opportuni ty t hus afior d ed for n ew
,

experi ences .

The l i fe wave n ow circles se ven t i mes around the seven

’

Globes duri ng the Sun P eriod travers i ng se ven tim es d own

'

an d up the four Worlds or Reg i ons i n wh i ch these Globes

are located It makes seven Re v olut i ons i n the Sun P eriod

.
,

as i t d i d in the S aturn P er i o d .

When the li fe wa v e lea v es Globe A in the Sun P eriod

for the last t i me that Globe beg i ns to dis i ntegrate Its
,
.

force s are transferre d to the d enser Reg i on of Abstract

Thought wh er e th ey form a planet to b e used dur i ng the
,

Moon P er i o d In the same way the forces of the other

.
,

Glob es are transferre d and ser v e as nucle i for the Globes

of th e Moon P er i o d as shown l n d i agram 8 the process, ,
 TH E WO R K OF E V O LU T I O N 1 99

being ex actl y the same as when the Globes were removed

from their locations in the Saturn P eriod to the pos i tions
they occupied during the Sun P eriod Thus the Globes .

of the Moon P eriod are place d one step further down in

matte r than they were dur i ng the Sun P er i o d the lowest ,

( Globe D ) being S ituate d in the Ether i c Reg i on of the

Physical World .

After the interim of Cosmic N i ght between the Sun

P er i od an d the Moon Period the li fe wave starts i ts course
,

on Globe A of the latte r completing in due t i me its seven

,

Revoluti ons as before,

Then there is another Cosmic
.

N ight dur i ng which the Globes are ag a i n tr ansferre d one

,

step further down and thi s time the densest Globe is

,

located in the Chemical Region of the P hys i ca l Worl d as ,

reference to di agram 8 will S how .

This then is the Earth Period and the lowest and

, ,

densest Globe ( Globe D ) 1s our present Earth .

The l ife wave here as usual started on Globe A after

, , ,

the Cosm i c N ight succeeding the Moon P eriod In th e .

pres ent Earth P eriod it has circled three times around the
seven Globe s and is now on Globe D in its fourth ,

Revolution .

H ere on earth and in this present fourth Revolution the ,

—
greatest ensi ty of matte r the nadir of materiality was
d —
reached a few millions of years ago The tendency hence .

forth will be upward into rarer substance During the .

three and one half Revolutions which remain to complete

-

this P eriod the cond i t i on of the Earth w i ll gradually b e

,

come more and more ethereal and in the next— the Jup i ter
,

P eriod— Globe D will again be located i n the Etheric

Reg i on as it was in the Moon P eriod the other Globes
, ,

be i ng also e l evate d correspondingly .

In the Venus P eriod they will be located in the same

20 0 R OS I CRU CIA N Cos M o C O N C E P T I ON
-

Worlds as were the Gl obes of the Sun P eriod The Globe s

.

of the Vulcan P er i od w i ll have the same density and be

locate d i n the s ame Worlds as were the Globe s of th e
Saturn P er i od Th i s i s all S hown on d i agram 8
. .

When the life wave h as completed i ts work in the Earth

P eriod and the Cosmic N ight wh i ch follows is past it wil l ,

go through its seven Revolut i ons on the Globes of the

Jup i ter P er i od Then w i ll come the usual Cosmic N i ght
.
,

with its subjectiv e act i vities ; after which the seven R evolu
tions of the Venus P eriod ; then another rest su cceeded ,

by the last of the P eriods of the present scheme of ev olu

“

—
tion the V ulcan P eriod The life wave also makes i ts
.

seven Revolutions he re and at the end of the last Revo

,

lu ti on al l the Globes are d i ssolved and the l i fe wave I S

reabsorbed by God for a peri od of t i me equal in duration
,

to that occupied by all of the seven P er i o d s of activity .

God H imself then merges into the Absolute du r1n g the

U niversal N ight of ass i milation and prep aration for an
othe r Great Day .

Other an d grander ev olution s w i ll then fol l ow but we ,

can deal only with the seven P eriods describ ed

"

.
2 02 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O -
C ON C E P T ION

the v1rg 1n spl ri ts who are now our humanity will perfect
, ,

their vehi cles and expand their consciousnes s in the five '

Worlds by their own e ff ort s and genius This period is .

“ ”
calle d Evolution .

The above is the key to th e understanding of wh at

follow s .

A thorough comprehension of the scheme of planetary

evolution which has bee n outlined in the preceding pages is
of i mmense value to th e student Although some bel i evers .

i_ the laws of Cons equence and Rebirth seem to t hink

.

that the possession of such knowle dge i s quite non essenti al -

and of little use it is nev ertheless of very great i mpor

,

tance to the earnest student of these two laws It trains .

the mind in abstract thought and ele v ates it above the

]

sordid things of concrete existe nce helping the imagina ,

tion to soar b eyon d the hampering toil s of self i nterest

,
-
.

As state d in our study of the Desire Worl d Interest is the

‘

m ainspring to act i on yet at our present s tage of progress

, , ,

Interest is generally aroused by selfishness It is some .

times Of a ve ry subtle nature but it spurs to action of ,

various kinds All action in spired by Int erest generates

.

certain eff ects wh i ch act on u s, and in consequence we are

‘

bound by action h aving to d o with the concr ete Worlds .

But i f our minds are occupied with such subject s as

,

mathematics or study of the p l anetary ph ases of evolution,

we are in the Regi on of purely Abstract Thought beyond ,

the i nfluence of Feeling, an d the mind is di rected upward

towards the spiritual realms and li b erati on When we are .

extracting cube root or multiplying figures or thinking of

, ,

P er i ods Revolut i ons etc we have no Feeling about it

, ,
.
,
.

We d o not quarrel about twice two be i ng four If our .

feelings were i nvolve d we Should perhaps try to make it

five and quarrel w i th the one who for personal reasons , ,
 TH E WORK O F E V OLU T I ON 203

said it was but three but in mathematics Truth i s most

,

clearly apparent an d Feeling i s eliminated Therefore to .

,

the average man, desir i ng to live in the feel ings mathe ,

maties is dry an d un i nteresting P ythagoras taught his

,
.

pupils to l i ve in the World of Eternal Spir i t and he de

m e nded that those who desired i nstruction from h i m S houl d
fi r st stu dy mathematics A mind capable of un derstan d i ng
.

mathemati cs i s above the average and is capable of rising

into th e World of Spir i t because it i s not fettered in the
,

World of F eel i ng an d Des i re The more we accustom our .

se lves to th i nk i n terms of the Sp i ritual Worlds the better ,

we shall be able to rise a bove the i llusions wh i ch surround

us in this concrete existen ce where the twin feelings I n , ,

ter est and In di fference obscure the Tru th and b i as us as

, ,

the refract i on of the l i ght rays through the Earth s atmos ’

h r e gives us incorrect ideas of the posit i on O f the lumi

p e

nary em i tting them .

Therefore the student who wishes to know Truth ; to

enter and i nvestigate the realms of Spirit ; to free h i m self
from the toils of the fles h as rap i dly as i s consi stent w i th
,

safety and proper growth is earnestly adv ised to study ,

‘

w hat follows as thoroughly as poss i ble ; to assimila te it and

draw mental concept i ons of these Worlds Globe s and ,

Peri ods If he w i shes to progress i n th i s way the study

.
,
”
of mathemat i cs and of H inton s Th e Fourth Dimension ’ “

are also admirable exercises in abstract thought This .

work of H i nton s ( though basically incorrect because the

’
,

four di mens i onal Desire Worl d cannot be actually found by

-

three d i mensional methods ) has ope ned the eyes of several

-
,

persons who have S tudied i t and made them clai r voyant , .

Moreover remembering that logic is the be st teacher in any

,

world it is certain that the individual who succee ds in

,

enterin g into the superphysical Worl d by means of such

2 04 ROS I CRU C IAN CO S M O -
CON C E P T ION

abstract th ought w i ll not become confuse d but

S tu d l es I n , ,

w i ll be able to give a good account of h i mself un der all

cu cu m stan ces .

A stupendous scheme is here unfolded, and as more and .

more d eta i l i s filled in, its complexi ty becomes almost i n

conce i vable Anyone capable of comprehen d i ng i t w i ll be
.

well reward ed for t aking the utmo st pains to do so Th ere .

fore the student should read Slo wly repeat often think
, , ,

dee ply an d much .

This book p articularly th i s c hapter cannot be read in a

, ,

c asual m anner E v ery sente nce has we i ght and be aring

“

upon what follows and presupposes a knowledge of wh at

,

precedes it If the bo ok i s not stud i ed thoroughly and sys

.

tem atical ly it wi ll grow more an d more incomprehensible

,

an d confus i ng w i th every page On the other han d i f it .

,

is stud i ed an d well thought out a s the stu dent proc ee ds ,

it w i ll be found that each page is i lluminated by th e in

creased knowle dge gained by study of wh at went before .

N 0 work of th i s kin d deal i ng with the dee pest phases of

, ~

the Great World Mystery that the human mind at its ,

present stage of d eve10 pm en t ( is capable of gr asping can , ,

be written in such a manner that it will be light rea d ing .

Yet the deepest pha ses now comprehens ible to us are but
the A B C of th e scheme as i t w i ll be revealed to us when
our minds h ave become capable of under standing more in ,

la te r stages of our de v elopment as Supermen .

TH E S AT U RN P E R I OD .

The G lobes of the S aturn P er i od consisted o f much rarer

and finer substance than our Earth as will be evi dent from ,

a s tudy of diagrams 7 and 8 which the student I S ad v i sed to ,

keep c l o se at hand for frequent reference while studying

this subject The den sest Globe of that P e riod was l oc ated
.
 R OS I CRU CI AN COS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

bod ie s an d their great spir itual powers They are called .

”
Thrones in th e B i ble and worked on man of the i r own
,

free w i ll They w ere so far advanced that this evolut i onary

.

man i festat i on could gi ve them no new exper i ences and ,

therefore no a d ded wisdom ; and the same may be said of

two st i ll hi gher order of H ierarch ies to be name d later ,
.

The rest of the creative H ierarch i es i n order to complete ,

the i r own evolut i on were compelled to work on in and

, ,

with man .

These Lords of the Flame were outside the dark Satur n

Globe an d their bodies em i tted a strong light They so to .
,

say projected their pictures upon the surface of that

,

anc i ent Saturn Gl ob e wh i ch w as so unimpress i on able that

,
\

it reflecte d in a multiple or echo l i ke manner everyth i ng

,
-
,

that came i n contact w i th i t g i ving back the images man i

,

fo lded.
( T h is is tol d i n the Greek myth wherein it i s said
that Saturn destroyed hi s children ) .

H owever by repeated efforts during th e first R evolution

, ,

the Lords of the Flame succeede d i n impl anting in the

evolving life the germ which h as developed Ou r present
dense body Th i s germ was sdm e wh at devel oped dur i ng th e
.

remainder of the first six Re vol ut i ons being gi v en the ,

capacity for developing the sense O rgans parti cularly the ,

ear Therefore the ear is the most highly developed organ

.
,

we possess It is the i nstrum ent which carr i es w i th the

.

greatest accura cy the 1m pr ession s of outside conditions to

t h e consciousness It 1 8 less subject to th e illusions of th e
.

P hys i cal World than the other sense organs .

The consci ousness of the e v ol vi ng life of that Peri od

was like that o f the m 1n er al of today— a state of u n con
s ci ou sn ess s i milar to that attained by med i ums i n the

deepest trance— yet dur i ng the first s i x Re v olutions the ,

e vo l ving life worked on the germ of the dense body under

 TH E WORK O F E V OL U T I O N 20 7

the direction and with the help of the different creative

H i erarch i es In the m i ddle of the seventh Revolut i on the
.

Lords of the Flame Who had been inacti ve s i nce They

,

gave the germ o f the dense body in the first Revolut i on ,

again became act i v e this time to awaken the highest sp i r

,

i tu al pri nciple They aroused the in i tial activity of the

.

d i vi ne spiri t in man .

Thus man owes h i s h i ghest and lowest vehicles— th e d i

,

vine S pirit and the dense body to the evolut i on of the

Saturn P eriod These th e Lor d s of the Flame of their own
.
,

free will helped h i m to man i fest not being un der the ,

sl i ghte st compulsion to d o so .

The work of the various creativ e H ierarchies i s not

started on Globe A at the commencement of a P er i o d
,
,

or a Revoluti on It commences in the m i ddle of one

.

Revolut i on growin g in strength and reaching its h i ghest

,

efli c e cy
i n in t e
h mi d d le of the Cosm i c N ight — wh i ch is
betw ee n R evolut i ons as well as between P eriods Then
,
.

it gradu ally decl i nes as the l i fe wave S weeps on to the

,

middle of the next Revolut i on .

Thus the work of the Lords of the Flam e in awakening

the germ i nal consciousness was most act i ve and effic i ent
,

d uring the rest P erio d between the S aturn and Sun

P eriods .

We reiterate that a Cosm i c N ight is not to be regarded

as a t ime of inact i v i ty It is not inert existence as we
.
,

saw in the c ase of the in d i vi dual pass i ng from death to a

new birth So w i th the great death of all the Globes of a
.

P er i od
. It is a cessat i on of act i v e manifest ati on that a ,

proport i onately keener subjective act i v i ty may be u nfol d e d .

P erhaps the best idea of the nature of this subj ect i v e

act i vity may be ga i ned by observi ng what happens when
a ripe fruit is burie d in the ground Fermentation and .
 R O S I CRU C I AN C O S M O C O N C E P T IO N
-

dec ay of the flesh sets in but out of that chaos comes the
, ,

new plant sprout i ng forth into the a i r and sunsh ine

, .

So when a P er i od i s p ast all is resolve d i nto conglomerate

"

, ,

ch aos apparently incapable of be i ng reduce d to order

_
, . .

At the proper t i me howe v er the Globes of a new P er i o d

, ,

are formed an d ma de rea dy for occupancy as man bear i ng -

Worlds H i ther the ev olv i ng li fe is transferre d from five

.

d ark Glob es wh i ch i t tra v erses dur ing the Cosm i c N i ght ,

to commence the act i v i t i es of a new creati ve day i n an

altered en v i ronment prep ared and external ize d during the
,

act i v ities of the Cosm i c N i ght As the forces of fer .

mentation i n the fru i t sti mulate the see d and ferti lize th e '

soil in which it grows so the Lor d s of the Flame sti m u

,

lated the germ of divine spir i t part i cularly dur i ng th e ,

Cosm i c N ight between the S aturn and th e Sun P eri o d s ,

cont i nuing t heir act i v i t i es unt i l the middle of the first

Revolution of the Sun P eri od .

RE CAP I TU LATI ON .

Before the activ ity i n any P er i o d can be s tarte d there ,

i s a recap i tulat i on of all th at has been gone through

before Ow i ng to the sp i ral path of e v olut i on th i s act i v ity
.
,

takes place each t ime on a h i gher scale than the stage i n

progress i on wh ich i t rehearses The necessi ty w i ll be c ome
.

apparent when the actu al work in recapitul ation is de

scribed .

The first Revolution of any P eriod is a recapitulation

of the work upon the dense body i n the Saturn P eriod ,

and is spoken of among Rosicrucians as the Saturn “

”
Revolut i on .
0

The Second Period is the Sun P eriod and therefore ,

the second Re v olut i on of any P er i od subsequent to the

Sun Period would be the Sun Revolution ” “
.
2 10 R OS I CRU CI AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P TIO N

Globes of the latter, the Sun P eriod Gl obes were gl owing

l i ght balls of the consistency of g as These great gas
-
,
.

balls contain ed all that h ad been evolved in the S aturn

,

P er i o d and similarly in the atmosphere were th e creativ e

, ,

H i erarch i es .

Instead of the echo l i ke reflect i ng quality of the Sat

-
,

u r n P er i od these Globes to some extent

,
had the q ual i ty
, ,

of absorb i ng and work i ng over an y S ight or sound pro

” “
cte d aga i nst their surfaces They as it were sensed
j e .
, ,

th i ngs The Earth does not seem to do this and a ma

.
.
,

teri al i st woul d scoff at the i dea yet the occult i st kn ows ,

that th e Earth feel s everyth i ng on and i n it Th i s lighter .

Globe w as much more sens i ti ve than the Earth because ,

i t was not l i mi ted and boun d in such hard and fast con
d i ti on s of mater i al i ty as is our present hab i tat .

The l i fe of course was di fferent because no forms such

, , , ,

as we know Could h ave ex i ste d there But life can express .

i tself in forms of fiery gas as well as— in fact better

—
than i n forms of hard chem i cal matter such as the
present dense forms of m i neral, pl ant animal and m an ,
’

As the e v olv i ng l i fe appeared upon Glob e A in the first ,

,

or S aturn Revolution of the S un P eriod it was still in ,

charge of the Lor d s of the Flame who in the m i ddle of -

the last Revolut i on of th e S aturn P eriod awakened in ,

man the germ of the divine sp i ri t .

They h ad prev i ously g i v en the germ of th e dense body

and i n the first half of the Saturn Re volut i on of the Sun
,

P erio d were concerned with certain improvements to be

,

ma d e upon i t .

In the Sun P eriod the formation of the vital body was

to be commenced wi th all thereby i mpl ied of capability
,

for assi m i lat i on growth propagation glan d s etc

, , , ,
.

The Lords of the Flame i ncorporated i n the germ of

 TH E WORK O F E V OL U T I O N 2 11

th e dense body only the capability of evolving sense organs .

At the time now under consideration it became necess ary

to ch ange the germ in such a way as to allow of inter
penetration by a vital body also capability of evolving ,

glands and an alimentary canal This was done by the .

jo i nt action of the Lords of the Flame who gave the ,

original germ and the Lords of W i sdom who took charge

, ,

of material evolut i on in the Sun Period .

The Lords of Wisdom, who were not so highly evolved

as the Lords of the Flame worked to complete their own ,

evolution ; therefore they received the assist ance of an

order of ex alted Beings Wh o l i ke the Lords of the Flame , ,

acted of the i r own free will In esoteric parlance they are.

called the Cherubim These exalted Beings did not how

'

.
,

ever become active in the work until it was necessary to

,

awaken the germ of the second S piritua l pr m ciple of our

man in the m akin g as th e Lords of Wisdom were qu i te
- - -
,

cap able of doing the work connected with the Vital body
which was to be added to the const i tution of m an in the
S un P eriod but not of aw aken i ng the second spiritual
,

pri nciple .

When the Lords of the Flame and the Lords of Wisdom

had in the Saturn Re volution of the Sun P erio d con
, ,

j ointly reconstructe d the germinal dense body the Lords ,

of Wisdom in the second Revoluti on started the proper

, ,

work of the S un P eri od by rad i ating from their own

,

bo dies the germ of the vital body making it capable of ,

inter penetrating the dense body and giving to the ger m

-

the capability of furthering growth and propagation an d

of exciti ng the sense cente rs of the dense body an d causing
it to move In short, they gave germinally to the v ital
.
, ,

bod y all the faculties which it i s now unfolding to become

a perfect and p l iab l e instrument for the u se of the spirit .
2 12 R OS I CR C A COS M O C ON C EP T ION
U I N -

Th l S work occupl ed the se con d th ird f ourth and fif th ,

‘
,

Revolutions of the Sun Period In the S ixth Revolution .

the Cherubim ente red and awakene d th e germ of the

second aspect of the threefold spirit in man—the life
spirit .In the seventh and l ast Revolution the newly
awakened germ of the life S pirit was linked to the ger
minal divine S pirit and this was still furth er: worke d
,

upon .

We remember that 111 the Saturn Period our con scious

ness was similar to the trance condition By the ac tivity .

of th e S un P eriod this was modifi ed unti l it became l ike

the consciousness of dreamless S leep .

E v olution in the S un P eriod adde d to the constitution

of the evo l ving embryonic man the ne xt h i ghest and the ,

next l owest of h 1s present vehicles As the resul t of the .

S aturn P er io d he possesse d a germina l dense body and

divine S p 1r1t At the end of the Sun P eriod he possessed
.

a germin al dense body vital body div i ne spirit and l ife

, ,

spirit i e a twofol d spirit an d a twofold body

,
. .
,
.

We also n ote th at as the first or S atu r n Revolution of

'

, , _ ,

an y Period is concerned wi th work in the dense body

( b cause that was started in first Revolution ) so the

‘
e a -

second or Sun Revolution, of any P eriod is concerned

,

with improvements on the vital body because it was ,

started in a second Revolution In like manner the S ix th .

,

Re vol ution of any Period is dedicated to some work on

the life S pirit and any s e venth Revolution is particul arly
,

concerned with matter s connected with the divine spirit .

In the Saturn Period m an in the making went through

- - -

a mineral stage of existence That is to say he had a

.
,

dense body onl y in the sen se as had the mineral H i s .

consciousness was al so similar to that of th e present

m inera l .
2 14 R O S I CRU C I AN COS M O C ON C E P TION -

germ of a desire body and Starting the germinal activity

of the third aspect of the three f o l d S pirit in man—the
—
human spirit the E g o .

In the m i d dle of the seventh Revolution of the S u n

P erio d the Lords of Wisdom took charge of the germinal
,

l i fe sp i r i t given by the Cherubim i n the sixth Rev olution

of the Sun P er i od They did th i s for the purpose of
'
.

link i ng i t to the divine Spirit Their greatest act i v ity in

.

thi s work was reached in the Cosm i c N i ght i ntervening

betwee n the Sun an d the Moon P erio d s In th e fi rst dawn .

of the M oon P er i od as the life w ave started up on i ts new

,
.

pilgrimage the Lords of Wisdom reappe ared bearing with

, ,

them the germin al vehicle s of the evol vi ng man In the .

first or Saturn Revolut i on of the Moon P eriod they co

, ,

operated w i th the Lords of Ind i vidual i ty who h ad Spe

“ ”
,

ej al charge of th e material evolut i on of th e Moon P eriod .

Together they reconstructed the germ of the dense body ,

brought over from the Sun P eriod Th i s germ h ad u n .

folde d embryon i c sense organs digestive organs glands , , ,

”

etc.
,
and was inter penetrated by a budd i ng vital body
-

wh i ch d i ffused a certa i n degree of l i fe into th e embryon i c

dense body Of course it was not solid an d Visible as it
.
,

is now yet in a crude sort of way i t was somewhat organ

,

i ze d an d is perfectly distingu i shable to the trained cla i r

voyant sight of the competent investigator who searches
the memory of nature for scenes i n th at far off past -
.

In the Moon P er i od it was necessary to reconstruct the

dense body to make i t capable of being inter penetrated -

by a desire body and also capable of evolv i ng a nervous

,

system muscle carti lage and a ru d imentary skeleton

, , .

This reconstructi on was the work of the S aturn R evolu

tion of the Moon P er i od .

In the second or Sun Revolution th e vital body was

, ,
 TH E WORK O F E V OL U T I O N 2 15

al so modified to ren der it cap ab le of being inter penetrate d -

by a d esire body also of accommodating itself to the nerv

,

ous system muscle skeleton etc The Lor d s of Wisdom

, , ,
.
,

who were the originators of the vital body also he l ped the ,

Lords of Individuality with this work .

In the third Rev olution the proper Moon work com

m en ced. The Lords of Indi v idual i ty radia ted from them
selves the substance which they helpe d the unconsc i ous ,

evolving man t o appropriate and build into a germinal de

sire body They also helped him to incorporate this germ
.

inal desire b ody in the compound vital body and dense

body which he already possessed This work was carried
.

on all through the th ird and f ourth Revol utions of the

Moon Period .

As with the Lords of Wisdom so with the Lords of ,

-

Individual ity ; though exalte d far above man they worked ,

on and in him to comple te the i r own e v olution Wh i le .

they were capable of dealing with the lower vehicle they ,

were powerless in regard to the higher They could not .

give the spiritual impulse necessary to the awakening of

the third aspect of the threefold spirit in man Therefore .

another cl as s of Beings who were beyond the n ecessity of

evol ving in such an e v ol ution as we are passing through
who also worked of their own free will as d i d the Lords ,

—
of the Flame and the Cherubim came in during the
fifth Revolution of the Moon P eriod to h elp man They , .

“ ”
are called Seraphim They awakened the germ of the
.

third aspect of th e S pirit— th e human spirit .

In the sixth Revolution of the Moon P eriod the Cheru

bim reappe ared and co operated with the Lords of Indi
-

v i du ali ty to link the new l y acqu ired germ of the human

spirit to the l i fe S pirit .

In the seventh Revo lution of the Moon Period the Lord s

 2 16 RO S I CRU C IAN C O S M O C ON C E P TION
-

of the Flame again came to the aid of m an helping the ,

Lor ds of I ndividuality to link the hum an sp i rit to th e

div i ne spi r i t Thus the separat e Eg o—th e threefol d spirit
.

came into exis tence

-
.

B efore the beg inning of th e Saturn P eriod the vir gin

\ spirits who ar e now man were i n the World
,
of V irgi n
”
Spirits and were All conscious as God in whom ( not
,
“
-

from whom ) they were differentiated They were not

,
.

”
“
s elf consc i ous however The attainment of th at faculty
.

is partly the Object of evolution wh i ch plunge s the Vi rgi n

sp i rits i nto a sea of matter of gradually i ncreas ing density
which eventually shuts it from the All consciousness -
.

Thus in the S atur n P er i o d the v i rgi n spirits were im

,

m erse d in the World of Di v i ne Spiri t an d encased in th e

tiniest film of that substance which they p artia lly pene
tr ated by th e help of the Lords of Flame .

In the Sun P eriod the virgin spirit was p lunged into the
denser World of Life Spirit and more effectively b l inded to
the All consciousness by a second v eil of the substance of
-

the World of Life Spirit Still by the help of th e C heru

.
,
-
e

bim it partially penetrated this second veil also The .

feeli ng of th e Oneness of All w as not lo st either for the ,

World of Life Spirit is still a universal World c ommon s

to and inter penetrat i ng all the planets of a Solar System

-

In the M oon P eriod however the Virgin spirits take a

, ,

further dip into the sti ll denser matter of the Region of

Abstract Thought and here the most opaque of its vei l s ,

the human spirit is added H e nceforth the All conscious

,
.
-

ness of the virgin Spirit is lost It can no longer penetrate.

its vei l s l ook ou twar ds and perceive oth ers so it is forced

, ,

to turn its consciousness i n wa r ds and there it finds its s elf ,

as the Ego separated and apart from all others

,
.

Thu s the virgin Spiri t is enc ase d in a threef o l d veil, and

2 18 RO S I CRU CIA N C O S M O CON C E P T I ON
-

rents however is used merely to suggest an anal ogy be

, , ,

cause the Beings of the Moon P eriod po ssesse d nothi ng

like our present re d blood which is one of the ve ry latest
,

acqu i sitions of man .

Towards the end of the Moon P eriod there was a divi

sion of the Globe which was the fiel d of our and other
evolutions; which for the sake of greater simplicity we
, ,

have not heretofore menti oned but with which we Shall ,

presently become acq au in ted .

P art of th at great Globe was so crystal li zed b y man on

accou nt of his inability to kee p the part which he inhabited
in the high state o f vibrati on ma i ntained by the o th e r
beings there and as th i s part became more inert the cen
, ,

tr i f u g al force of the revolving Globe sent i t spinning into

space where i t began to circle around the gl owing fiery
,

central portion .

The spiritual reason for th e throwing OR of such crys

tall iz ati on s is that the h i ghest be i ngs on such a Globe r e
qu i re for their e volution the exceedingly rap i d v i brations
of fire They are hampered by condensation al though such
.
,

a con d ition is nece ssary to the evolution of other and less

advance d beings requ i r i ng lower rates of Vibration There .

fore when part of an y Globe has been consolidated by a

,

group of evolving beings to the detriment of others th at ,

part is thrown off to exactly the proper dist ance from the
central mass so that i t circles as a satellite around its
,

pr i mary The heat v ibrat i ons which str i ke it are of th e

.

rate and strength suitable to the pecul i ar nee d s of the

beings evolving upon that s atellite Of course the law of .
,

gr av itation accounts quite sat i sfactorily for the phenom

enon from a ph ysi ca l point of Vi ew But there is always .

a deeper cause that yi elds a more com plete explanation and

,

which we will find i f we consider the spir i tua l side of

 TH E WORK O F E V OL U T I ON 2 19

things . As a physical action is but the visible manifestation

of the invisible thought wh i ch must prece de it so is the ,

throwing off of a planet from a central Sun simply the

v i s i ble and unavoidable effect of invis i ble S piritua l
cond i tions .

The smaller planet which was thrown off in the Moon

Period condensed with comparati ve rap i d i ty and remained
,

the field of our evoluti on until the en d of that P eriod .

It was a moon to the parent planet circl i ng around it as ,

our Moon circles around the Earth but it did not Show ,

phases a s our Moon does It revolve d in such a manner

.

that one half was al ways l ight and the other always dark
-
,

as is the case with V enus On e of its poles was pointe d

.

d i rectly towards the large fiery Globe as one of the poles ,

of Venus po i nts d i rectly towards the Sun .

On th i s satellite of the Moon P eriod there were currents

which encircle d it as the group sp i rit currents encircle the
,
-

Earth The Moon beings followed those currents instinct

.
-
z

i v el y from the light to the dark side of this old Moon At .

certain ti mes of the year when they were on the light side
, ,

a sort o f propagation took place We have the atavistic .

residue of those moon travels for propagat i on in the migra

-

t i ons of the birds of passage which to the present day , ,

follow the group spirit currents around the E arth at cer

-

ta i n seasons of the year for ident i cal purposes Even th e

,
.

( honey ) moon trip s of human be i ngs show th at man him

self h as not yet outgrown the migratory impulse in connec
tion with mating .

The Moon beings at this last stage were a l so capable

of giving utterance to soun ds or c r ies These were Cosmic
,
.

sounds— not expressions of individual j oy or s orrow for ,

as yet there w as no i nd i vidual The development of the .

v —
indi idual came later i n the Earth P eriod .
 2 20 RO S I CRU CI A N C O S M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

At the end of the Moon Period once m ore c ame th e

i nterval of rest the Cosm i c N ight The d i vided parts
,
.

were dissolved and merge d in the general Chaos wh i ch

precede d the reorg ani zation of the Gl obe for the Earth
P eriod .

The Lords of Wisdom had now evolved so far that they ,

were capable of taking charge as the h i ghest creative

H i erarchy They were gi v en special charge of the divine
.

spiri t in man during the Earth P eriod .

The Lords of Ind i v i dual i ty were also suffici e ntly ad

v an ced to work upon the S p i r i t in man and the life sp i rit

was therefore put un der their charge .

Another creat i ve H i erarchy had spec i al care of the thr ee

germs of the dense v i tal an d d es i re bod i es as they were
, ,

evolving They were the ones who un d er direction of

.
,

. the h i gher o r ders actually d i d the princ i pal work on these

,

bodies us i ng the evolv i ng l i fe as a k i nd of instrument

,
.

”
This H ierarchy is called the Lord s of Form “
They .

were now evolved so far that they were giv en charge of

S i —
the third aspect of the p rit in man the human Spiri t
i n the com i ng E arth P er i od .

There were twelve great Creative H ierarchi e s active in

the work of evolution at the com mencement of the Saturn
Period Two of these H i ar ar ch ie s did some wor k to help a t
.

the very beginn i ng N o information has been given as to

.

what they d i d nor anything about them except that they

, ,

helped of their own fr ee will and then withdrew f rom,

l imited existence into l ibe ration .

Three more of the Creative H ierarchie s fol l owed them

at the beginning of the Earth Period—the Lords of the
F l ame the Cherubim and the Seraphim—l eaving seven
,

H ierarchies in active service at the time th e Earth Period

2 22 RO S I CRU CI AN COS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

began ( Diagram 9 will give a cl e

. ar idea of the twe l ve
Creative H ierarchies and their status ) .

DI A GR A M 9 .

Th e T wel v e G reat C reat i v e H ie rarch i es .

i
Z od acal S ign N am e S t atus
— i
. .

l Ar es N a m el e s s Th e fi rst an d secon d
2 — T au r u s N am e l ess or d e r s ar e s a d t o h a v e . i
p ass e d ey on d t h e k en b
of a n y on e on E a r th It .

i s n ow n th a t th ey a v e k g
s om e a ss s ta n ce a t th e i
e nn n of ou r ev ol u b gi i g
t on i .

T h e th r ee f ol l ow m g or d er s w or e d k
of i
th e r ow n f r e e w l l t o h el p m a n i
du r n i g
th e th r ee p er od s w h ch p r e i i
ce d e d th e E a r th P e r od T h ey h av e i .

ib i
—G mi
a l s o p a sed t o l er a t on
s
3 e ni S e r ap h m i e w h o, i n th e M oon P e r od , i
a rou s e d i n m a n i n th e
m a n g th e g e rm of th e ki
h u m a n S p r t— th e E g o
.

ii .

C h er u m bi w h o, i n th e S u n P e r od , i
a r ou se d th e g e r m of th e
l f e sp r t i ii .

L or d s o f F l am e w h o, i n th e S a tu r n P e
. .

r i od , a r ous e d th e
g e rm
of t h e d v n e sp r t a n d i i ii
g a v e th e g e r m of th e
d en se od y b .

T he f oll ow n S ev en i g
r ea t v e H e r C i i
a r ch e s ar e i
a ct v e in th e E a th i r
P e r od i
Lor d s o f W s d om i w h o , i n th e S u n P e r od ,
. . . i
s tar te d th e V ta l od y i b .

ii
L or d s of I n d v d u a li ty w h o, i n t h e M oon P e r o d ,
. i
s ta r te d th e d e s re od y i b
8 —S c or p
.

io L or d s o f F or m w h o h av e sp e c al ch ar g e
. i
of h um a n ev ol u t on i n i
th e E a r th P er od i
9—S a g g i ta r i u s
.

r
L o d s of M n d i th e h u m a n ty of th e i
S a tu r n P er od i
1 0—
.

C ap ri corn us r
A ch an el s g th e h u m an ty of th e
. i
S u n P er od i
l l —A qu a r iu s A n el s g th e h u m an i ty of th e
M oon P e r od i
—P i
.

12 sces Th e
. r Vi gi
n S p r ts ii
w h o a r e th e h u m an ty
. i
of th e p r e sen t E a th r
P e io d r .
 C H APTER IX .

S TRAGG LER S AN D N EW COM E RS .

N fol l owing through the prece di ng chapter the evol uti on

of life consc i ousness and form—the tr i ple ph ase of
,

—
manifestation of the v i rgi n spirit which is the life
that gathers the for m about itself and gains cons ci ous n ess
thereby we have spoken as though there were only one
,

class ; as though the virgin spirits with out ex cepticm had

‘

, ,

made cons tant and uniform progress .

This was done for the sake of simplicity because strag ,

g le rs there were as,

there are i n any great body or
company .

In school there are every year those who fail to reach

, ,

the standard requ i red for promot i on into a higher grade .

Similarly in every P eriod of Evolut i on there are th ose

, ,

who fall behind bec ause they hav e not attaine d the stand
ard necessary to pass onward to the next higher stage ,

Even so early as the Saturn Perio d there were some who

failed to improve sufficiently to take the next forward step .

At that stage the H i gher Beings were working with the

life wh i ch was itself unconscious but that unconscious
, ,

ness di d not prevent the retar dat i on of some of the virgin

spiri ts who were not so pliable nor so readily adaptable
,

as others .

In that one word Adaptab i l i ty we have the gr ea t

“
,

se cret of advancement or retardation All progr ess depends

.

22 3
 ROS I CRU C IA N C OS M O C ON C EP TION -

upon wheth er an evolving being is fl ex ible adap tabl e and ,

pl i able so as to be able to accommodate itself to new con

,

d iti on s or whether it i s c rystallized set and incapable of

, , ,

alteration A d aptab i lity is the quality which makes for

.

progress whether an entity is at a high or a low stage of

,

evolution Lack of it i s the cause of th e retardati on of

.

the Spirit an d retrogression of the Form This applies to .

the past present and future the division of the qualified

, ,

an d the unqual i fied thus be i ng made w i th the exact and

imperson al justice of the l aw of Consequence There .

never was nor ever shall be any arbitrary distin ctio n mad e
,
” ‘f ” “
between the sh eep and the g oats .

The hardened unrespons i ve con d i tion of some of the

Saturn beings prevente d the awakening of th e divine
spirit with i n them therefore they rema i ned simply mi n
,

eral al l they had ga i ned be i ng the germ i nal dense body

, .

Thus there were two cl asses or k i ngdoms in the Sun , ,

P eriod i e
,
. the stragglers of the Saturn Peri od who
.
, ,

were still m i neral and the p i oneer s of the S aturn P eriod

, ,

who were c apable of receiving the germ of a Vital body and

becom i ng plant like -
.

In addit i on to those two kingdoms there was also a "

th i rd—a new l i fe wave wh i ch was j ust commenci ng i ts

,

act i vity at the beginn i n g of the Sun P er i od ( Th at is the .

l i fe w ave whi ch now ensouls our an i mals ) .

The matter i nto which the new l i fe wave entered to ,

gether w i th the stragglers of the Saturn P er i od composed ,

the m l n er al k i ng d om of the Sun P er i od There was h ow .

,

ever a great d i fference between those two classes or sub

,

div i sions of the second kingdom It is poss i ble for the .

” “
stragglers to make a spurt and overtake the pioneers
who are n ow our hum ani ty— but it is i mpossibl e for the
new life wave of th e Sun P eriod to do that It will reach .
 226 O S I CR U C I A N C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

Thus a t the beginn i ng of th e Moon Period th ere were

the f oll owm g clas ses '

l —Th e P ioneer s wh o h a d s u ccess f ully p a ssed th ou h th e S atu r n r g

a n d th e S u n P er od s i
Th ey h a d d en se an d v tal
. od es, i b i
i i
d v n e an d l f e S p r t i ii g
er m i n all
y a c ti v e
—
.

2 T h e S tr a g g l e r s of th e S u n P er od , wh o h a d d en se a nd v tal i i
od b i
e s, a l s o d v n e Sp i iri —
t al l i
er m n al g i
—
.

3 T h e S tra gg
l er s of th e S atu r n P er od , w h o h a d i
een p r om ote d b
i n th e s e v en th R
ev ol u t on of th e S u n P e r odi T h ey h a d i .

g b
th e er m of d en s e od y an d di v n e S p ri t i i
—
.

4 T h e P on ee r s of th e n ew L f e Wav e, w h o h a d th e sam e v eh cl e s
i i i
a s cl a s s 3 , b u t el on b g i
t o a d ff er en t sch em e of ev ol u t on i
f r om ou r s
—
.

5 T h e S tr a g l er s of th e n ew Li f e W av e, w h o h a d onl y th e er m
g g
f or th e d en s e ody b
6 —A N ew L f e W av e , w h i ch en t ere d u p on i ts e v ol u t on a t th e
.

i i
e b gi i g
nn n of th e M oon P e ri o d an d i s th e l f e th at —e n i
s ou l s ou r pl a n ts of th e p r e s en t d ay .

It is necessary to remember that N ature hastens sl owly .

. She m akes n o sud d en changes in forms

r
To her t i me i s .
,

noth i ng the attainment of perfect i on is everything A .

m i neral does not ch an ge to a plant at one bound but by ,

gr adual almost impercept ible degree s A plant does not

, .

'
become an animal in a n i ght It requires m il li on s of ye ars .

to br i ng about the change Thus at all times there are all .

st ages and gradat i ons to be found l n nature The Ladder .

of Being stretches w ithout break from protopl asm to God .

Therefore we have to de al not with six diff erent king ,

doms correspond i ng to the abov e Six classes which entered

the arena of evolution at the begi nn i ng of the Moon
P eriod b ut wi th three kingdoms only— mineral pl ant and
, ,

The l owest cl ass in the Moon P eriod composed the new

l ife stream which there commenced its evolut i on It .

formed the hardest mineral part yet it must be borne in ,

mind that it was by no means as hard as the mineral of

,

th e present time but onl y about as dense as our wood

, .
 S T RAGGLER S AN D N E WCO M E R S 22 7

This statement does not contradict former ones which

described the Moon as watery nor does it conflict with ,

diagram 8 showing the dense st Globe in the Moon Perio d

,

as located in the Etheric Region which is etheric As ,

.

be fore state d the f act that the path of evolution is spiral

,

pre vents any condition ever being duplicated There are .

s i milarities but never reproductions of identical conditions

,
.

It is not always possible to describe conditions in ex act

terms The best availabl e term is use d to convey an ide a
.

of the conditions existing at the time under consideration .

Class 5 in our list was nearly mineral yet on account ,

of having passed through and b eyond the mi neral condi

tion during the Sun P eriod it ha d some p l ant ch arac ,

ter i sti cs .

C l ass 4 was al most p l ant and did evol ve to a plant before

the close of the Moon Period It was however more .
, ,

nearly allied to the mineral kingdom than the next tw o

cla sse s whi ch formed the higher kingdom We m ay there
, .

fore group classes 4 and 5 together as fo rming a sort of ,

”
half step a minera l plant kingdom which compo se d the
-
,
“
-

surface of the ancient planet of the Moon P eriod It w as .

somethin g like our present pe at which is also a state ,

between the mineral an d the plant It was soggy and wet .

,

consistent with the statement that the Moon P eri od w as

wate ry .

Thus the fourth fifth and sixth classes composed the

,

d i fferent gradations of the mineral kingdom in the Moon

P eriod— the highest be ing nearly plant and the lowest
the hardest minera l substance of that time .

Classes 2 and 3 formed the p l ant kingdom though they ,

were bo th re ally more th an plants yet were not qu i te ,

animal They grew in the minera l plant soil ; they were

.
-

stationary like plants ; yet th ey coul d not have grown in a

 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P T ION -

purely m i neral so i l as our plants d o now Good e x amples

, .

of what they were l i ke may be foun d i n our par as i tic plants ,

wh i ch cannot grow in a purely m i ner al so i l but seek the ,

foo d alr eady specialized by a real plant or tree .

Class 1 was compose d of the p i oneers of the life wave

of virgin S pirits In the Moon P eriod they were going
.

through a sort of animal like existence Yet they were -

.

like the animals of our t i me only in so far as they had the

same veh i cles an d were under th e contro l of a group
spi r it which inclu d ed the whole human family In ap
,
'
.

e n c they were very d i fie re n t from ou r prese nt animals

p ar a e ,

a s shown by the part i al descript i on given in the previous

chapter They d id n ot touch the surface of the planet

.
\ ,

but floated suspended by umbilical l i ke cords Inste ad -

.

of lungs they had a gill l i ke app aratus through which they

-

”
breathe d the hot steamy fir e fog “
These features of the
-
.

Moon existen ce are still recapitulate d by the embryo dur

ing the period of gestation At certain stages of devel op
.

ment it has the gills The M oon be i ngs at that time had
.

al so the horizontal sp i ne of the animal .

During the Moon P eriod severa l more d i visions of cl asses

occurred than in the prece d ing peri o d s because there were , ,

of course stragglers who failed to keep abreast of the crest

,

wave of evolution As a result there were at the begin

.
,

ning of the Earth P eriod 5 classes some of them contain

, ,

ing several d i v isions as diagram 10 will show These d ivi

, .

sions occurred at the fo llowing times and for the follow

ing reasons :
In the middle of the fi fth Revol ution of the Moon Period ,

when the Seraphim bestowed the germ of the human spirit

upon the pioneers who had fitted themselves to pas s on,
s ome were found wanting when weighed in the ba l ance
 R OS I CRU C IAN C OS M O -
C ON C E P TION

DIA G R A M 1 0

S h owm g th e d ff eren t i c l as ses of th e several l ife w aves w hic h are

i
e v ol v n g i n th e f ou r kin gd om s of th e e arth ; th eir sta tu s at the
b eg in n i ng f
o th e ear th p er i od a nd th e i
v e h cl es th e y th en p osse ssed ; als o

th ei r p resen t statu s .

C LAS S V EH ICLE S P R E S E N T S T AT E

—
l P i on eer s of th e Di v i n e Den s e
S a t ur n S u n
. a n d Li f e s p iri t Vi t al b od y
M oon P er i od s H um an De s i re J

2—Th e
Di v i n e De n s e
'

Th e M on goli an s Af
S tr a g l er s of
g b od y
.

s p 1 ri t V1 t a 1 me an s an d al l l ower
th e M OO11 .

Li f e l De s i r e R ac e s

—
3 ( a ) T h e S tr a ggl er s
of t h e S a t ur n Pe
ri od Di v i n e

( b ) Th e S tr aggl er s
"sp i r i t b od y An t ’
ODOI d S

of t h e S un P er i od . . Li f e l Vi tal
Al l th e a b ov e b lo g t
e n o o u r l i f e w a v e

( 0 ) P i on eer s of th e
n ew S un li f e wav e . S am e as 3a an d 3b An i m al s

4—( ) a S tr aggl ers of P l an t Ki n gd om

th e n ew S un life
w av e Di v i n e s p i ri t Den s e bod y Tree s an d p e ren m al s

( b ) Pi on ee r s of th e
n ew M oon li f e w av e S am e as 4a F l ower s an d grasses

5 a ) gg
S tr a l er s of M i n eral Ki n d om g
th e n e w M oon li f e
Den s e b od y onl y S an d , s of t s oi l s . e tc .

( b ) Th e n ew li f e
w av e of th e E ar th
P er i od Den s e b od y o n ly : s am e as 5a . M oun t ai n s . r oc ks . etc .
 S T RAG GLE R S AN D N E WCO M E R S 23 1

is nevertheless a very se rious matter to be h el d in a state

of inertia for inconceivab l e milliards of years before a ,

new evolution shall have progressed to such a stage that

those who fail here can have an opportu nity to procee d .

The S pir i t is not conscious of the lapse of time but it is ,

none the less a serious lo ss and there must also be a

,

feel i ng of unhomelikenes s wh en at last such spirits find

themselves in a new evolution .

So far as the pre sent humanity is concerned that possi ,

b il ity is so small as to be a l most negligible It is said .

,

however that of the total numb er of Virgi n spirits which

,

started evolution 111 the S aturn P eriod only about three ,

fif th s will pass that critical point in th e next Re vo l ution

and go on to the en d .

The greatest apprehension of occul t scient i sts i s mate rial

ism which if c ar ried too far not onl y prevents progr ess but
, ,

will destroy all the seven vehicles of the v ir g m S pirit leav ,

ing it naked Such an one will then have to commence at

.

the very beginning of the new evolution All the work it .

has done S ince the dawn of the S aturn P eriod will hav e
been utterly was ted For this reason the present perio d
.
,

is to our hum anity the most critical of all Therefore

, .

occult scientists speak of the S ixteen Races of which the ,

Germano Anglo Saxon is one , as the sixteen possib i lities

- -
“

”
for destruction May the reader safely pass them all for
.
,

their grip is worse than the retardation in the next

Revolution .

Spe aking genera lly c l as s 5 in the foregoing l ist was

,

given the germ of divine spirit in the se v enth Revolution ,

when the Lords of Flame reappeared Therefore they were .

th e pioneers of the last life wave wh i ch en tered evolution

,

in the beginni ng of the Moon Period They pa ssed their .

 2 32 R OS I CR U CI A N C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

mineral existence there The stragglers of that life w ave

.

were thus left with only the germ of a dense body .

In ad dition to the above, there was also a new life wave

“
-

1ner al kingdom ) entering upon its evo l ution

( our present m
at the beginning of the Earth P eri od .

At the end of the Moon P eriod these classes possessed

the v ehicles as they are classified i n diagram 1 0 an d st arted
,

with them in the beginning of th e Earth P eriod During .

the time which has elapsed since then the human kingdom
,

has been evolving the link of mind and has the reby ,

attained full waking consc i ousness The animals have

.

obtained a desire body ; the plants a vital body ; the str ag

g l er s of the life w ave which entered evolution in the Moon

Period have escaped the hard an d fast cond i tions of rock

formation and now their dense bodies compose our softer
, soi l s while the life wave that ente red ev olution here in
the Earth P eriod forms the hard rocks and stones .

Thus have the d ifferent classe s ob tained the vehicl es

ascribed to them in diag ram 3 to which the re ader is
,

referred.
 234 RO S I CRU CI AN C O S M O C ON C E P TI ON -

elements In the Saturn P eriod there was but one element

;
,

Fire — i e there was w armth or heat which is incipient

.
,
.
, ,

fire In the second or Sun P eriod there were two ele

.
, ,

ments Fire and Air In the third or Moon P eriod there

,
.
, ,

were three elements Water be i ng a d ded ; and in th e fourth

, ,

or Earth P eri od was a d de d the fourth element Earth

, ,
.

Thus i t will be seen th at a new element was adde d for

each P eriod .

In the Jupiter P eriod an element of a spiritual natu re

will be adde d which will unite with the speech so that
,

words will invariably carry with them under standing

not misunderstan d ing as is frequently the case now For
, .

”
instance when one says house he may mean a cottage
,
“
, ,

while the hearer may get the idea of a tenement fiat

building .

0 To this e nvironment of the four elements as speci fied ,

above the d iff erent clas ses mentioned in diagram 1 0 were

,

brought over by the H ierarchies in ch arge of them We . .

remember that in the Moon P eri od these cla sses formed

—
three kingdoms animal animal plant and plant mineral ,
- -
.

Here on Earth however th e c onditions are such that there

, ,

can be no large half w ay clas ses There must be four dis

-
.

tin ctl y diff erent king doms In this crystalli ze d phase of .

existence the lines between th em must be more shar ply

drawn th an was the case i n former Periods where one king ,

dom gradu ally merged into the next Therefore some of .

the classes mentione d in diagram 10 advanced one hal f -

step while others went back half a step

, .

Some of the mineral plants advanced completely into -

the plant kingdom and became the verdure of the fields .

Others went down and became the purely mineral soil in

which the plants grew Of the plant animal s some ad .
-

v an ced i nto the an i ma l kingdom ahead of time and th os e , ,

 T H E EART H P E R IO D 23 5

species have yet the colorless p l ant blood and some l ike -
, ,

s tar fish es have even the fi ve points like the pet al s of

-
,

flowers .

All of cl as s 2 whose desire bodies could be divided into

two parts ( as was the case with all of class 1 ) were fitte d
to become human vehicles an d were therefore a dvanced
into the human group .

We must carefully r emember that in the above para

graphs we are deal ing with Form not with the Life which ,

dwell s in the Form The instrument is graded to suit the

.

l ife that is to dwell in it T h é se of class 2 in whose

.
,

vehicles the above menti oned divi sion could be made we re

rai sed to the human kingdom but wer e given the indwell
,

ing spirit at a point in time later than class 1 H ence .

,

they are not now so far evolved as cl as s 1 and are there ,

f ore the lower r aces of mankind .

Those whose de sire bodies were incapab l e of division

were put into the same d i vision as clas ses 3 a and 3 b They
’

are our present anthropoids These may yet overta ke our

.

evol ution if they reach a suffic ient degree of advancement

bef ore the crit i cal point already mentioned which will ,

come in the m iddle of the fi fth Revol ution If they do not .

overtake us by that time they will h ave l ost touch with

,

our evo l u tion .

It was said that man had built his threefold body by

the h el p of others higher than he but in the previous ,

Period there was no co ordinating power ; the threefol d

-

spirit the Ego was separate and apart from its vehicles
, , .

N ow the time had come to unite the spirit and the body .

Wh er e the desire body separa ted the higher p art became ,

somewhat master over the lower part and over the dense
and vital bodies It formed a sort of animal sou l with
.
-

wh i ch the spirit could uni te by means of the l ink of mind .

 236 ROS I CRU CIAN CO S M O -
C ON C EP TION

Where there was no division of the de sire b ody the veh icle ,

was given over to des i res and passions without any check ,

and coul d therefore not be used as a veh icle wi th in wh i ch

the spir i t could dwell So it was put under the rule of a
.

group sp i rit which ruled it from wi th ou t It b ecame an

-
.

ani mal body an d that k i nd h as now degenerated into th e

,

body of the anthr opoid .

Where there was a d i vision of the de sire body the dense ,

body gr adually assumed a vertical position thus taking ,

the spine out of the horizontal currents of the Desire

World in which the group spirit acts upon the animal -

through the horizontal spine The Ego could then enter

‘

.
,

work in an d express itself through the vertical spine and ‘

build the vertic al laryn x and brain for its adequate expres
S 1on m the dense body A horizont al larynx i s also under
.

. the domination of th e group Spir i t While it is true that

-
.

some animals as the starling raven parrot etc p rev i

"

, , , ,
.
,

ou sl y mentioned are able , because of the pos sess i on Of a

,

vertical larynx to u tter w ords they cannot use them un der

, ,

stan di n gl y. Th e us e o f wor ds to ex pr ess th ou g h t i s th e

d can be exercised only by a
h i g h es t h u ma n pr ivi leg e an

reasoning, th i nk i ng entity like man If th e student will .

‘

keep this In m i nd, it wil l be eas1er to fol low the diff erent
steps which lead up to this result .

T H E S AT U R N R EVOLU TI ON OF T H E E AR TH P E R I ODS .

This i s the Revolution during which in each P eriod , ,

the dense bo d y 1s reconstructe d This time it was given the .

ability to form a brain and become a vehicle for the ge rm

of mind which was to be added later This addition .

constituted the final reconstruction Of the dense body ren ,

dering it capabl e of attaining the highest degree O f effi

cien cy poss i ble to such a vehicle .

U nspeakable Wisdom h as bee n emp l oyed in its con struc

 RO S I CRU C I AN C O S M O C O N C EP TION
-

We do not consciously direct the process of mi xing th i s

,

flui d The great maj ority of people know nothing of

.

metabolism or any other phase of chemistry S O it is not .

enough to say that a s we taste what is coming we dire ct

, ,

the process by means of signal s through the nervous

system .

-
When thi s fact of the selectl on Of juices was first proven ,

scientists were sorely puzzle d trying to learn h owthe right

kin d of juice was selected and caused to enter the stomach
b efor e the food They though t the signal was give n along
.

the ner v ous system But it was demonstrated be yond doubt

.

that the prOper juice was poured into the stom ach even
though the n erv ou s system was blocked .

At last Starl i ng an d Bayliss in a series of e x perime nts

, .

of brilliant ingenuity proved that infinitesimal pa rts of

,

the food are taken u p by the blood as soon as th e food en

ters the mouth go in advance to th e digestive glands and
,

cause a flow of th e proper juice .

This again is only the physical side of the phenomena

, .

To understand th e whole wonderful connect i on we must ,

'

turn to occult science Th at alon e explain s why the signal

.

is c arried by the blood

The blood is one of the highes t expressions of the vita l
"

bo dy The Ego guides and controls i ts dense 1n stru m en t

.

by means of the blood therefore the blood is also the m eans

,

used to act on the nervou s system During some of the .

time that digestion 1s goI n g on it acts parti ally through the

,

nervous system but ( especi ally at the commencement of

,

the digestiv e process ) it acts directly upon the stomach .

When durin g scientific experi ments the nerves were

,
‘

blocked the direct way through the bloo d was still Open and
,

the Ego derive d the nece ssary informat i on in that way .

It wi l l al so be Seen that the blood is driven to wherever

 TH E E A RTH PE R I OD 2 39

the Ego un f ol ds the greatest activity at any time I f a .

S i tuation requires sudden thought and action the b l ood is ,

promptly driven to the head If a heavy mea l is to be

.

digested the gre ater portion of the blood leaves the he ad ,

centering around the dig estive organs The Ego coneen .

trates its efiorts on ridd i ng the body of the use less food .

The refore a man con n ot th i nk well after a heavy meal H e .

is sleepy because s o much blood has left the brain that the
residue is insufficient to carry on the functions necessary
to full waking consciousness besides nearly al l the vital
, ,

fluid or solar energy specialized by the spleen is absorbed

by the blood rushing through that organ after a mea l in
greater volume th an between meals Thus th e rest of the .

sy stem is also deprived of the vital fluid in a large measure

during digestion It is the Ego th at drive s the blood into
.

the brai n Whenever the body goe s to S leep the blood

.
,

leaves the brain as may be proven by placing a man on a

,

balanced tabla When he goes to s lee p the tab le will ,

invariabl y tip towards the feet raising the head Durin g

,
.

coit i on the blood is centered in the sex org ans etc All , .

these examples tend to prove that during the w aking hours ,

the Ego works in and controls the dense b ody by means of

the blood The larger port i on Of the total amount goes to
.

that part of the body where at any given time th e Ego ,

unfolds any particular activity .

The reconstruction of the dense body in th e Saturn

Rev olut i on of the Earth Period was for the purpose of
rendering it capable Of inter penetration by the mind It
-
.

ga v e the first impulse to the building of the f rontal part of

th e brain also the incipient division in the nervous sys tem
wh i ch has since become app arent in its sub division s —the
voluntary and the sympathetic The latter was th e o nl y
.

one provided f or in the Moon Period Th e voluntary n e rv .

24 0 R OSI CRUCIAN cosM o OO N OE P T I ON -

ous sy ste m ( which h as tr ans f orme d the dense body f rom a

mere autom aton acting under stimuli from w ithout to an ,

extraordinary adap table i nstr um ent c apable of be ing g ui de d

‘

an d controlled by an E g o fro m with i n as not added

) w
until the present Earth Per i o d .

Th e p rincipal part of th i s reconstructive work was done

by the Lor ds of F orm They ar e the Creative H ierarch y
.

which is most active in the Earth Per i od as were the Lords ,

of Fl ame in the S aturn P eriod the Lords of Wis d om in,

the Sun P eriod an d the Lords of Individu ality in the

,

Moon P eri od .

The Ea rth Period is pre eminently the P eriod of Form

-
,

for here the form or m atter S i d e of evolut i on reache s i ts

greatest and most pronounce d stat e H ere S p i ri t is more .

helpless an d suppresse d an d Form is the most d ominant

factor—hence the prominence of the Lords of Fo rm .

TH E S U N RE VOLU TI ON OF T H E E AR TH P ERI OD .

During this Revol ution the vital body was rec onstructed
to accommodate the germina l mind The vit al body was'
.

f ashioned more in the like ness O f th e dense body so that ,

it could become fitted for u se as the densest veh i cle during

the Jupiter P eriod when the dense body will have become
,

S piritualized— as expla i ned later in th i s work .

Th e Angels who were the humanity of the Moon P er1od

, ,

were aided by the Lords of Form in this reconstruction .

The organiz ation of the vital body is now next in efficiency

to that of the den se body Some writers on this subject call
.

the former a link and contend tha t it is simp l y the mol d

,

O f the dense body and not a separate vehicl e

,
.

While not desiring to criticis e and while admitting th at

,

this contenti on appe ars to be justified by the fact that man ,

at his present stage of evolution cannot or dinari ly use the

,
 RO S I CRU CI AN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON
i

unfold th e vibr atory powers of org ans now connecte d w ith

the v oluntary nervous system and thus become trained
occulti sts controll ing their own bo d ies and exercising the
,

cla i r v oyant faculty as they will to do They are cal led .

voluntary or tra i ned cl aI r voyan ts .

In the Jup i ter P eri od man will function in his vital

bod y as he now does i n h i s dense bo d y ; and as no develop
ment i n nature i s su d den the process of separat ing the
,

two bodies has already commence d The vital bo dy w ill

.

then atta i n a much h i gher degree of e fficiency than the

d en se b od y of to d ay . As it is a much more pli able veh i cle ,

the sp i r i t w i ll then be able to use i t i n a manner imp ossible

of real i z at i on i n the c ase of the present dense vehicle .

T H E M O ON R EVOLU T I O N O F T H E E AR T H P E R I O D .

H ere th e Moon P er i od was recap i tul ated and much the ,

same con dit i ons prevaile d ( on an adv anced scale ) as Ob

tai ne d on Globe D Of th at P erio d There was the s ame
.

kind of fire fog atmosphere ; the same fi ery core ; th e same

-

d i vision of the Globe i nto two parts in order to allow the

,

more h ighly evol ved be i ngs a chance to progress at the

proper rate and pace which it would be impossible f or
,

beings such as our humanityto equal .

In that Revoluti on th e Archangels ( humanity of the

Sun P eri od ) and the Lor d s of For m took charge of the
reconstruction of the desire bo dy but they were not al One
,

in that work When the s eparati on of the Globe into two

.

parts occurred there w as a similar division in the desire

,

bod ies of some of the evolving beings We have already .

noted that where this d i vision took pl ace the form was ,

ready to become the veh icle of an i n dwel ln g spirit and in ,

order to further this purpose the Lords Of Mind (humanity

of the S aturn P eriod ) took possession of the higher part .

of the desire body and im planted in it the separate se l f

 TH E E A RTH PE RIOD 2 43

hood without which the present man with all his g lorious
,

poss i b i l i ties could never ha ve ex i sted

,
.

Thus in the latter part of the Moon Revolution the

first germ of separate personal i ty was implanted in the
h i gher part O f the des i re body by the Lords of Mind .

The Archangels were active i n the lower part of the

desire body giving it the purely an 1mal desires They
, .

also worked in the desire bod i es where there was no div i

sion Some Of these were to become the vehicles of the
.

animal group spirits which work on them from without

-
, ,

but do not ente r wholly into the animal f orms as the indi ,

vidual sp i rit does into the huma n body .

The desire body was reconstruc ted to render it capab le of

being i nter penetr ated by the germinal m i nd which dur i ng
-
,

the Earth P er i od will be implante d in al l those desi re

,

bo di es in which it was possible to make th e before men

ti on ed d i v i s i on .

As has b een pre viously explaine d the desire body is an ,

unorgani ze d o v oid hol d i ng the dense body as a d ark S pot

,

wi th i n its center as the white of an egg surrounds the yolk

, .

There are a numbe r of sense centers in the ovoid which ,

ha v e appeared S ince the beginning of the Earth Period In .

the a v erage human being these centers appe ar merel y as

edd ies in a current and are not now awake hence his ,

desire body i s of no use to him as a s ep ar ate vehicle of

consciousness but when awakened they look l ike whirling
,

vortices .

R E S T P ERI ODS B ET WE E N R EVOLU TION S .

H itherto we have noted only the Cosmic N ights be tween

P eriods We saw that there was an interval Of rest and
.

assi milation betw een the Sa turn and the Sun P eriods ;
another Cosmic N ight between the Sun and the Moon
2 44 R O S I CRU C IA N C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

P eriods , et c But in addition to these there are al so rests

.
,

between the Re v olutions

We might liken the P eriods to the different incarnations
O f man ; the Cosm i c N ights between them to the intervals

between death s and new b i rths ; and the rest between Revo
lut i ons would then be an alogous to the rest of Sleep between
two days .

When a Cosmic N igh t sets in all manifested things ar e

,

—
resol v ed into a homogeneous mass the Cosmos again
becomes Chaos
Thi s periodica l return Of matter to pri mordial subst ance
i s what makes it possible for the spirit to evolve Were the .

crystallizing proces s of active manifestation to continue

indefinitely it would Off er an insurmountable barrier to the
progress of Spirit Eve ry time matter has crystall ized to
.

such a deg re e th at it becomes too hard for the spIrIt to

work in the l atter withdraws to recupe rate i ts e x hausted
,

energy on the same principle that a power drill which has

,
-

stopped when boring in h ard metals 1S with drawn to ,

regain its momentum It is then ab l e to b ore its way

.

further into the metal .

Freed from the crystal liz m g energy of the evo l ving spir
its the chemical forces in mat ter turn cosmos to chaos by
,

restoring matter to its primordial state that a new start ,

may be made at the dawn Of a new Day Of m anife stationby

th e regenerated virgin spirits The experience g ained in
.

former P eriods and Revolutions enables the Spirit to build

up to the point l ast reached with comparative celerity
, ,

also to facilitate further progress by making such altera

tions as its cumulati v e experience dictates .

Thus at the end of the Moon Revolution of the Earth

Period al l the Gl obes and all l ife re turned to C haos r e
, ,
 C H APTER XI .

TH E GEN E S I S AN D E v oLU T I ON OF OU R S OLAR S YS TEM .

C h aos .

N th e previous pages nothing h as been said about our

Solar System an d of the d i fferent planets wh i ch
,

compose i t because i t was not unti l th e Earth P eriod

,

was reac he d that the present different i at i on was made .

The Earth P eri od is the acme of diversificati on and ,

although we hav e been speaki ng of only one class of vi rgin

S pir i ts — those who i n the stric test and most l i m i ted se nse
, ,

—
are concerned w i th the Earth evolut i on there ar e In real
”
0 ity seven “Ray s or stream s of l i fe all pursui ng d i ff erent ,

evolutions yet all belongi ng to the or iginal cl ass of Virgin

,

S pir i ts to wh i ch our human i ty belongs .

In the prev i ous P er i ods all of these d i ff erent sub classe s

or Rays found a suitable environment for their evolution
on the same planet But in the Earth Peri o d con d i tions
.
, ,

became such that in order to prov i de for each class the

degree of h eat an d the vibr at i on necessary for i ts par ticu
lar phase of evoluti on they were segregate d on differ ent
,

planets at vary i ng distances from the Sun—the central

,

source of life This is the rais on d etr e of our S vstem

.
’

and all the other Solar Systems i n the U n i verse .

Before procee di ng w i th the description of the evolution

O f our humanity on the Earth after i ts separat i on from

the central Sun it i s necessary for the maintenance of

,

sequent i al ord er in the d escr i pti on to expla i n th e d i fferen

ti ati on which scattered the plan ets of our System in spac e .

246
 GEN E S I S AN D E V O L U T I O N O F S OLA R S Y S T E M 24 7

—
Active manifestation particu l arl y in the Physical
World— depends upon separate ness ; upon the limitation
Of life by form But during the interim between P eriods
.

and Re volutions the marked disti nction betwee n form and

life ceases This appl i es not only to man and the lower
.

kingdoms but to the Worlds and Globes which are the

,

basis Of form for the evolving life Only the seed atoms .
-

and the nuclei or centers Of the Worl d Globes remain -

all else is one homogeneous substance There is but one .

Spirit pervading space Life and Form its positive and

.
,

negative poles are one , .

This state of th i ngs was what Greek myt ho l ogy de

“
scribed as Chaos T h e ancient N orsemen and the T en
.

”
tonic mythol ogy call it Ginnungagap which was bounded
“
,

upon the northern side by the cold and foggy N i flh eim “

- —
the land of mist and fog and upon the south side b y
”
the fire Muspel heim
“
When heat and c ld ente red the
.
o

sp ace which was occupied by Chaos or Ginnungagap they ,

cause d the crystallization of the visible universe .

The Bib le also gives one the ide a of infinite space pre
ceding th e activ ity Of Spirit .

In our pre sent materi alistic period we have unfortunate

l y l ost the ide a of all that lies behind that word Space .

”
We are S O accustomed to speaking Of empty S pace or “
,
“ ”
the great void of space, that we have entirely l ost the
grand and h oly significance of the word and are thus i n ,

capable of f eeling the reverence that this ide a Of Space

and Chaos should insp i re in our breasts .

To the Rosicrucians as to any occult school there is n o

, ,

such thing as empty or void space To them s pace is S pir it

.

in its attenuated f orm ; wh i l e m a tter is crys tal li z ed s pa ce

or S pi r i t.Spirit in manifestation is dual that wh i ch we
see as Form i s the negat i e v m a —
n i festation Of Spirit crys
 ROSI CRU CI A N C O S M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

tall iz ed and inert The positiv e pol e of Spirit manife sts

.

as Life galvani z i ng the negative F orm into acti on b ut

, ,

both Life and Form or i gi nated in Spirit Space Chaos " , ,

To get an idea from everyday life whi ch w i ll illustrate ,

we may take the hatching of an egg The egg is filled .

with a moderately viscous fluid This flu i d or moisture .

, ,

is subjected to heat an d out of the soft fl u i dic substance

, ,

comes a living chick with hard bones and comparatively

,

hard flesh and with down that has a c omparatively hard

,

quill etc
, .

When a living chick can come out of the inert fluid of

an egg without the addition of any har d en i ng substance
from outside is it a far fetched ide a to claim that the
, .
- -

universe i s crystallized Sp ace or Spirit There is no doubt

?

th at the cl aim will seem foolish to many ; but this book

i s not for the purpose of convincing the world at l arge
.

that these things ar e It is intended to aid those who

.

inherently feel that these thi ngs must b e and to help them
to see the light upon this great World mystery which the -
,

w riter has been permitte d to behold The s pecial Object .

at present is to Show that S pirit 1 s active all the time— in ,

one way dur 1ng Manifestation and in another during ,

Chaos .

Modern science would sneer at the idea that l ife could

exist upon a Globe which is in the process Of formati on .

That is b ecause science cannot di ssocl ate Life and Form

and cannot conceive of Form except as solid and tangibl e
—cognizable by one of our five physical senses .

Th e occult scienti st in accordance with the ab ove defin i

,

tions of Life and Form holds that Life may exist inde
,

pendently of Concrete Form ; may have Forms not per

ceptib l e to our p resent l imited senses and amenable to ,
2 50 R OS I CR C U IAN C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

result of the ex i stence in Chaos The i nterim be tween

‘

P e ri ods an d Revolutions is i n reality much mor e impor

tant to the growth of the soul than concrete existence ,

though the latter i s the bas i s of the former an d therefore

cannot be d i spense d w i th The i mportance of the Chaoti c
.

i nteri m l i es i n the fact that dur i ng that per i o d the evol v

i ng ent i t i es of all classes are S O closely un ite d that they
are really one ; consequently those wh i ch ar e of lower
d evelopment d uring man i festat i o n are i n closest contact
wi th the more h i ghly e v ol v e d thus experienc ing an d ben
,

efiti n g by a much h i gher v i brat i on than their own Th i s .

enables them to l i ve over an d ass i m i late the i r past ex pe ri

en ces i n a m anner imposs i ble when hampere d by Form .

We have seen th e benefit to the S p i r i t i n man from th e

i nterim between death and a new b i rth There the form .

st i ll exists though much more attenuated than the dense

,

bo dy ; but in the Cosmic N ight and inte rvals O f rest

between P e ri o d s and Revolutions where there is perfect ,

freedom from form the beneficial results of p ast ex pe ri

,

en ce s can be much more effecti v ely ass i m i l ated .

We have a wor d wh i ch was or i ginally coi ned to con v ey

the idea of the state of things b etwee n man i festations .

This word however has been used in a mater i al sense to

, ,

such an extent that i t h as lost its pri mal s i gnificance .

That word is Gas .

It may be thought that th i s is a very old word which ,

has nearly always ex i ste d as a synonym f or a state Of

matter l i ghter than l i qu i d s but such is not the case The
,
.

”
wor d was first used in P hys i ca a work which appeare d
“
,

i n 1 6 3 3 the author of i t be i ng C om m en iu s a Rosi cru ci an

, ,
.

Com m en iu s d i d not call h i mself a Ros i cruc i an ; no true

Brother does S O publ i cly Only the Ros i cruc i an knows the
.

b rother Rosicruc i an N ot ev en th e most i ntimate friends

.
 GEN E S I S A N D E V O LUTI O N O F S OLA R S Y S TE M 251

or relatives know of a man s connection with the order

’
.

Those only who are In i tiates themselves know the writers

O f the pa st wh o were Rosicrucians because ever through
, ,

their works Shine the unmistakable words phrases and ,

S i gns indicative of the d ee p meaning th at remains hidden

from the non Initiate -

The Rosicrucian Fellowship is
.

composed of students of the teachings Of the Order which ,

’
are now given publicly because the world s intelligence is
,

growing to the necessary point of comprehension This .

work is one of the first few fra gments Of the R os1cr uc1an
knowledge being publicly given out All that h as been .

printed as such previous to the l ast few ye ars has been

, ,

the work of either Charl atans or traitors .

Rosicrucians such as P aracelsus C om m eniu s B acon , , ,

H ellm on d and others gave hints i n their works and in

fl u en ce d others The gr eat controversy concerni ng the
.

authorship Of Shakespeare ( which has to no avail blunted

S O many goose quills and wa sted so much good ink that
-

m i ght have served useful ends ) would never have arisen

h ad it been known that the S im i lar i ty I n Shakespeare and
Bacon is due to the fact that both were influenced by the
same Initi ate who also influence d Jacob Boehme and a
,

pastor of Ingolsta d t J acob u s B al d us who lived subsequent

, ,

to the death Of the Bard of A v on and wrote L at i n lyric

,

verse If the first poem of J acob u s Baldus is re ad with a

.

certain key it w i ll be found that by read i ng down and up

,

the l i nes the following sentence w i ll appear

,
H i therto ' “

I have S poken from across the sea by means of the drama ;

now I will express myself i n lyrics .

”
In his P hys i ca Com m en iu s the Rosicrucian wrote
, , ,
“ ”
Ad huc spi r itum incognitum Gas voco i e This , . .
,
“

”
hitherto unkn own Spirit I call Gas Further on in the.

same work he says This vapor which I have calle d Gas

,
“
 ROS I CRU CIAN C OS M O -
C ON C E P TI ON
-

is not far removed from the Chaos the ancients spoke of .

We must learn to think of Ch aOs as the Spirit Of God ,

wh i ch perva d es every part of infinity ; i t w i ll then be seen

i n i ts true l i ght as the occult maxim puts it : C haos is
,
“

the see d ground Of the Cosmos an d we shall no longer

-
”
,

won d er h ow something can come out of noth i ng be

“ ”
,
”
cause Space is not synonymous w i th nothing It holds “
.

w i th i n i tself the germs O f all that exists d ur i ng a physical

mani festat i on yet not qu i te all ; for by the weddi ng Of
,

Chaos with Cosmos there is something new brought forth

each time which d i d not exist before ; something that was
,

not f oreshown and late nt The name Of that something

.

—
is Genius the cau se of Epigenes i s .

It appears in all kingdoms It i s the expression of the

.

progre ssive S pirit in man animal and pl ant Chaos is

,
.

the refore a ho l y name ; a name that s i gn i fies the C ause of

all we see in N ature and i nspires a feel i ng of devotion
in every tried true and tra i ned occult i st H e regards the
,
.

v i s i ble sense world as a revelation of the hidden poten tiali

ties Of the Chaos .

TH E B I RT H OF T H E P LAN E TS .

To e x press hims elf in the dense ph ysIOal worl d it was

, _
,

necessary for man to evolve a suitable dense body In a .

world l i ke thi s he must have a body with l i mbs organ s , ,

and a muscular sy stem by means of which to move about ;

al so a br ain to direct an d co ordin ate his movements If
-
.

the condit i ons had been diff erent the body woul d have been
mod i fied accordingly .

It is necessary for all beings high or low in the scal e,

of existence to possess veh i cles for expressi on In any par

,

ticu l ar world in w h i ch they may wish to manifest Even .

the Seven Spirits before The Throne must possess these

 GEN ES I S AN D E V O LU TI ON O F S OLA R S Y S T E M 2 53

necessary vehicles which of course are differently condi

,

ti one d for each of Them Collectively, They are God and

.
,

make up the Triune Godhead and H e man ife sts in a dif ,

f eren t way through each of Them .

There is no contradiction in a scribing different num

”
bers to God We do not sin against the oneness of l i ght
.
“

because we distinguish three pri mary colors into which it

divides itsel f The white l ight of the Sun contains th e
.

se ven colors of the spectrum The occultist sees even .

twelve colors there being five between red and violet

,

going one way around the circle— in addition to the red ,

orange, yellow green etc of the visible Spectru m Four

, ,
.
, .

—
of these colors are quite indescrib able but the fif th the4 ,

middle one of the fiVH l S simi l ar to the tint of a new

b l own pe ach blossom It is in fact the color of the v ital
-
.

“
body Train ed clairvoyants who describe it as bluish
.

”
grey or reddi sh grey etc are trying to describe a
,
“
-
,
.
,

color that h as no e quivalent in the physical world an d

they are therefore compe ll ed to use the nearest descriptive
terms aff orded by our lan guage .

P erhaps Color wil l enable us to real ize th e oneness of

God with th e S ev en Spirits before The Throne better than
anything else We wil l therefor e turn to diagram 1 1
. .

We see here a wh ite triangle looming up from a dark

b ackground . White is synthetic containing all colors ,

within itself as God contains within H imself all things

,

in the Solar Sys tem .

Within the white triangle are a blue a red and a yellow ,

circle All other colors are simply combinations O f the se

.

three primary colors These circles correspond to the

.

three aspects of God which are without beginning and

, ,

end i n God though extern al i ze d onl y during activ e mani

,
2 56 ROS I CRUC I AN C OS M O C ON CEP T I ON -

one extremity This is the most unfavorable position

.

for Sneh an orgen T OO long a time i s requ i red for im

.

p ulses to travel from one extremity to the other— from the

brain to the fee t or for impacts on the feet to re ach
,

the brain In cases Of burns for instance sc i ence has

.

.
, ,

demonstrated that valuable time is lost the sk i n be i ng , -

blistere d before a message can be carried from the injur ed

place to the brain and back agam .

This i nefficiency would be gre at ly l es sened if the brain

were in the center of the body S ensations and the r e .

sp on ses thereto could be more quickly rece i ved a d trans

n

m itte d
. In the spherical planets the Planetary Spiri t d i
r ects fr om th e cen ter the movements O f its vehicle In .

future m an will bend, over as shown i n d i gram 1 2 H e

,
.

wi ll become a spher e direct i ng h i s energies outward b e

, ,

cau se a Spherical form aff ords the gr eate st faci lity for
motion in all directi ons an d indeed for combination of
, ,

S imultaneous motions .

The Rosicrucian Cosmo Conception teaches that there

-

I S a further evolution in S tore f or planets .

When the be i ngs upon a pl anet have evolved to a su ffi

~

cient degree the p l anet becomes a Sun— the fixed center

,

of a Solar System When the be i ngs upon i t h av e e v ol v ed

.
Q

to a sti ll greater degre e and consequently it has reached

,

i ts maximum of br i ll i ancy it breaks up into a Zodiac

, ,

becom i ng S O to spe ak the womb for a new Sola System

, ,
r
.

Thus the great host s of Di vi ne Be i ngs who u nt i l then , ,

were confined w i thin that Sun ga i n fr eedom of act i on ,

upon a great number of stars whence they can affect in

,

diff erent ways the system which grows up within the i r

sphe re of i nfluenc e The planets or man bearing worl d s
.
,
-
,
"
within the Zodiac are constantly being worked upon b y
2 58 RO S I CR U CI A N C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

"

these forces but in variou s ways according to the st age

, ,

they h ave reached i n evoluti on .

Ou r Sun coul d not become a Sun until it had sent out

from i tself all the be i ngs who were not suffi c i ently evolved
to en dure the h igh rate of vi brati on and the great lum i
n osi ty of the be i ngs who were qual i fie d for that evolut i on
. .

All th e b eing s upon the d ifferent planets would have been

.

consume d had they rema i ne d in the Sun .

Th i s v i s i ble Sun however though it is the place of

, ,

evolut i on for Be i ngs vastly above man is not by any ,

means the Father of the other planets as materi al science ,

supposes On the c ontrary i t i s i tself an emanation from

.
,

the Central Sun wh i ch i s the i nv i s i ble source of all tha t

,

I S i n our Sol ar System Ou r v isible Sun i s but the

.

m i rror i n are reflected the rays of energy from the

wh i ch”
,

Sp i r itual Sun The real Sun is as invisible as the real

.

Man .

U ranus w as the first planet to be thrown off from the

nebula when i ts differentiati on began i n Chaos at the ,

d awn of the Earth P er i od ? There was no l i ght but the

d im l i ght of the Zod i ac Th e l i fe that l eft w i th U ranus
.

i s of a rather backward strain and is sa i d to evolve very ,

very slowly .

Saturn was next diff erentiated It is the field of act i on .

for the life wh i ch is at the stage of evolution correspond

i n g to the Saturn P er i od This planet was di ff erentiated
.

before the ignit i on of the nebula and ( l i ke all nebul ae

when pass i ng through their Saturn P eriod of evolution )
was not a source of light but a reflector , .

Jupi ter was diff erent i ated shortly afterwards when th e ,

nebula h ad become ignited T h e heat of Jup i te r is n ot so

w
.

great as that of the Sun V enus or Mercury but on account

, ,

of i ts immense bulk it is capable of reta i ni n g i ts heat and

,
 R OS I CR U C I AN C O S M O C O N C EP T I ON
-

of the evolving beings who hav e brought themsel ves to th at

deplorable end .
‘

N eptune and its satellites do not properly bel ong to

our Solar System The other planets—or rather their
Spirits—exercise an influence over the whole of humanity
.

but the influence of N eptune is restricted to o n e particular

class the astrologers The wr i ter for instanc e has sev
-
.
, ,

era l times fe l t its compelling influence in a m arked way .

 C H APTER XII .

EVOLU T IO N ON T H E E ART H .

T h e P olar i an E p och .

H I LE the material which now forms the Earth

was yet a part of the Sun it was of course in a
, , ,

fiery condition ; but as th e fire does not burn ‘

S pirit
, our human evolution commenced at onc e being ,

confin ed particular l y to the Polar Region of the Sun .

The highest evolved beings which were to become

human were the first to appear The substances which
.

now form the Earth were all molten and the atmosphere ,

was gaseous yet man recapitulated his mineral stage an ew

,
.

From that attenuated chemical substance of the sun man

himself built his first m i neral body assisted by the Lords
,

of Form I f this statement is objected to on the ground

.

that man could not build unconsciously the case of the ,

mother can be cited in answer Is she conscious of build

‘
'

ing the body of the babe in her womb ? yet surely no one
will say tha t she has nothing to d o with it " The only
difference is that the mother builds unconsciously for the
babe ; and man built unconsciously for h i mself .

’
Man s fi rst dense body did not even remotel y resemble
h i s present sp l endidly organized vehicle That has been .

evolved only in th e course of myriads of years The first .

d ense body was a large baggy object with an opening at

,

the top from which an organ projected This was a k i n d

, .

26 1
 2 62 R O S I CR U C I A N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

of organ of or 1en tation and d i rection In the course of .

t ime the dense bo d y d r ew more clo sely together and con

d en sed If it came too close to places of greater heat than
.

i t could endure it d isintegrated In ti me the organ grew

, .

sens i tive to the condition that threatened destruction and

the d en se b ody automatically moved to a safer place
’

This organ has now d egenerate d into what is called the

”
p i neal gland Someti mes it is called the third eye but
.
“
,

that is a m i snomer because i t never was an eye but rather

“

, , .

the localized organ for the sensing of heat and cold which ,

faculty is now distributed over the entir e dense body .

During the P ol ar ian Epoch this sense was thus l o cali zed ,

as the sense of sight is now in the eye and that of hearing ,

i n the ear The extension of the sense of feel i ng s1n ce that

.

0
time indicates the manner in which the entire body will
be improved so that at some future time any part of it
,

will be able to perceive all thing s T h esenses of sight and

.

hearing will be extended ov er the enti re body as the sense ,

of feel i ng is now Then man will be all eyes and ears

. .

Specialized sense organs indicate lim i tation Sense per .

cepti on by the whole is comparat i ve p erfection .

At the ea rly stage of wh i ch we are now speaking the r e

was a kind of propagati on These im m ense baggy crea
.

tures divi d ed in halves in a manner s i milar to the division

‘

of cells by fission but the separated portions would not

,

grow each r em ain in g on ly half as large as the original

,
~

form .

T H E H Y P ERB OR EAN E r ooH .

At d i fl er en t po i nts on the fiery globe there began in _

the course of tim e th e format i on of crust island s i n a sea

.
~
-

of fire .

The Lor d s of Form appeared w i th the Angels ( h um an

,
 Ros ronU rA N c C O S M O C ON C EP T IO N
-

centrifugal force If that force 1s stronger than the cc

.

h esi ve t endency the consolidate d mass is thrown outwar d s

into space .

At the t i me when the Earth globe was separated f rom -

the parent mass it inclu d ed that part wh i ch i s now our

,

Moon On th i s great globe was evolving the l i fe wave now

.
-

p as sm g through the human k i ngdom also the life waves ,

which entere d ev olution i n the Sun Moon and Earth ,

P eriods and are now evolving through the animal plant

, ,

and mineral kingdoms .

Mention has been ma d e of the stragglers of various

P erio d s who in later P erio d s were enabled to tak a a step ‘

upwar d i n evolut ion There were some however who d i d

.
, ,

not take th i s step They d id not evolv e and w ere th ere

’

,
.

fore left further and further beh i nd until they became a ,

drag and a h i n d rance to \the progressi v e ones It became .

necessary to get th eh m out of the way that the evolution ,

of th e others m i ght not be retarded .

In the beginn i ng of the Lemurian Epoch these fail ,

“

”
ures ( note that they were fai lu r es not merely stragglers ) ,

had crystallized that part of the Earth occupied by them

‘

to such a degree that it became as a huge cinder or clinker ,

in the otherwise soft and fiery Earth They were a hin .

d r an ce and an obstruct i on so they with the part of th e

, ,

E arth they had crystallized were thrown out into space

,

beyond recall That i s the genesis of the Moon

. .

TH E —
M OON TH E E I GH T H S P H ERE .

The seven Globes A to G inclusi v e are the field of

, , ,

Evolution The Moon is the field of Dis i ntegrat i on

.

If Earth had not segregated from the original Globe

whi ch is now the Sun, the rap i d i ty of the v i brations would
have disintegrated man s vehicles H e would have grown
’
.
 E V OLU TIO N ON TH E EA RT H 2 65

so rapidly that the growth of the mushroom would seem

slow in comparison H e would ha v e become old before
.

he had time to pass through youth That such is the effect.

of too much Sun i s shown by the rap i dity of growth at the

tropics where maturity and old age are reached much
,

sooner than in the north On the other hand had the

.

Moon remained with the Earth man would ha v e crystal,

li z ed into a statue The separat i on of the Earth from the

.

Sun which now sends its rays from a far distance enables
, ,

m an to live at th e proper rate of vibration to unfold ,

slowly The Moon forces reach h im from the exact dis

.
-

tance necess ary to enable him to bu i ld a body of the proper

density But although the latter forces are acti v e in the
.

building of the form they also cause death when their

,

cont inued work finally crystallizes the tissues of the body .

The Sun works in the vital bo dy and is the force which

makes for l ife and wars against the death dea l ing Moon
,
-

T H E LE M U RI AN E P OC H .

In this Ep och appeared the Archangel s ( the humanity ‘

of Sun Period ) and the Lords of Mind ( the humanity of

,

Satu rn P eriod ) These H ierarchies were assisted by the

.

Lo rds of Form who were given charge of the Earth

,

Period They helped man to build his desire body and

.
,

the Lords of Mind gav e the germ of Mind to the greater

part of the pioneers w h o formed class 1 according to the ,

classification in diagram 10 .

The Lords of Form vi vified the H uman spirit m as

many of the stragglers of the Moon P eriod as had made
the necessary progre ss in th e three and one half R evol u -

tions which had elapsed since the commencement of the

Earth Period but at that t i me the Lor ds of Mind could
,
 2 66 R O S I CRUCI A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

not give them the germ of Mind Thus a great part of .

nascent humanity was l eft wit h out this link between the
threefold spir i t and the threefo l d bo d y .

The Lords of Mind took charge of the h i gher par t of the

d es i re body and of the germinal mind i mpregnat i ng the m ,

wi th the qual i ty of separate selfhoo d without wh i ch no

.
,

separate self contained being s such as we are today would

,
-

be possible .

We owe to the Lords of Mind the separate personality,

with all the poss i b i l i t i es for exper i ence an d growth thus
afford ed And th i s po i nt marks th e birth of the Indi
.

vidual .

B I RTH or T H E I N DIVI DU AL .

Diagram 1 will make clear the f act that the personality

0 is th e refle cte d p i cture of the Sp i r i t the mind being the ,

mirror, or focus
As when reflected i n a pond the i m
.

ages of tree s appear

,

inverted the foliage seeming to be the d eepest down i n

,
'

the water so the highest aspect of the sp i rit ( the D i v i ne

,

Spir i t ) finds i ts coun terp a rt i n the lowest of th e three

’
'

bodies ( the dense bo d y ) T h e next h i ghest spirit ( the

.

life spir i t ) is reflected in the next lowest body ( the v i tal

body ) The th i rd spirit ( the human sp i ri t ) an d its r e
.

fl ection the th i rd bo d y ( the des i re bo d y ) appear closest

, ,

of al l to the reflecting mirror wh i ch i s the m i nd the lat

, ,

ter corresponding to the surface of the pond— th e r efl ect

ing med i um in our analogy .

The Spirit came down from the highe r Worlds during

involuti on ; an d by concurrent action the Bod i es were ,

bu i lt upwar d in the same period It is the meet i ng of .

these two streams I n the focussing M i nd that marks the

point in time when the indivi dual the human be i ng the , ,
 ROS I CRU C IA N C O S M O C ON C E P TION
-

which is now Moon worked read i ly in all b odies so that ,

the m an of the H yperborean Epoch was h eI m aph r od ite

capable of produc ing another b eing from himsel f with ou t
intercourse with any other . .

When the Earth separ ated from the Sun an d shortly

afterwar d s threw Off the Moon the forces from the two
,

lum i naries d i d not fin d equal express i on i n all as formerly , .

Some bo d i es became more amenable to th e f or ces from one d

and some to those from the other

I N F LU E N C E OF M AR s .

In the part of the Earth P eriod preceding the separation

'

of the sexes— during the three and one half Revolut i ons -

wh i ch intervened between th e time when Mars was d iff er

en ti ated and the beg i nning Of the Lemur i an Epoch
Mars traveled in a di fferent orbit from the present and its ,

aura ( that part Of its finer vehicles wh i ch extends beyond

the dense planet ) permeated th e body of the central planet
and polarize d th e iron w i th i n it .

As iron is essential to the product i on of warm r ed ,

blood all creatures were col d blooded or rather the flu i d

,
-
, ,

parts of the body were no w arme r than the surrounding

atmosphere .

When the Earth was set fre e from the Central Sun that ,

event changed the orb its of the planets and thus the i n fl u
ence Of Mars over the iron in the Earth was mini mized .

The Planetary Spirit of Mars finally w i thdrew the r e

m ain d er Of that influence and although the d esire bod i es
,
.

of the Earth and Mars st i ll penetrate the dynamic power ,

of Mars over the iron ( which i s a Mars metal ) has ceased

an d iron has become available for use on our planet .

Iron is in real i ty the b asis Of separate existence Wi th .

o u t iron the red

,
heat giving blood wou l d be an im possi
-
 E V OLU T I O N ON T H E E A R T H

b il ity,
and the Ego coul d have no hol d in the body When .

r ed blood de v elope d — i n the latter part of the Lemurian

Epoch —the bo d y became upright an d the time had com e
when the Ego could beg i n to dwell w i thin the body an d
contro l it .

But to dwell within is not the end and aim of evolu

tion It is simply a means by which the Ego may better
.

express itself through its i nstrument that it may man i fest ,

in the P hysical World T O that en d the sense organs the

.
,

larynx and above all , a brain must be bui lt and perfected

, , .

During the early part Of the H yperborean Epoch while ,

the Earth was still united with the Sun the solar forces ,

supplied man with all the sustenance he nee d ed and he

unconsciously radiated the surplus for the purpose of
propagation .

When the Ego entered into possessm n Of its v eh i cles it

became necessary to use part Of thi s force for the buil d i ng
of the brain and the larynx whi ch was orig i nally a part
,

of the creative organ The laryn x was built while the

.

dense body was yet bent together in the bag like shape -

already described w hi ch is still the form Of the human

,

embryo As the dense body straightened and became u p

.

right part Of the creat i v e organ remained with the upper

,

part Of the dense body and later became the laryn x .

Thus the dual creative force wh i ch had hitherto worked

in only one direction for the purpose of creating another
,

be i ng became di v ided On e part was directed upward to

, .

build the brain and larynx by means of which the Ego,

was to become capable of thinking and communicating

t houghts to other be i ngs .

As a result of th i s change only one part Of the force

essent i al in the creation of another being was available
to One indi vidual hence it became necessary f or each indi
,
270 R osI OR UOI A N C O S M O C ON C E P T I ON -

vidual to seek the co operation of another who possessed

-
,

that part of the procreative force which the seeker lacked .

Thus did the evolving entity obtain brain consciousness

Of the outside world at the cost O f hal f its creative po wer .

Previous to that t i me it used within itself both parts of

,

that power to externalize another being As a result Of .

that m odificatiOn however it has evolved the power to

, ,

create and express thought Before then it was a creator .

,

I n th e physical world onl ; since then it h as b ecom e ab l e

y
to create in the three worlds
-

TH E RAC E S AN D T H EI R LEADER S .

Before cons i dering in detail the evolution of t h e Le

m u r i an sit may be well to take a general survey of the
R aces and their Leader s .

Some very valuable works on Occultism bringing before ,

th e public the teachings O f the Eastern W i sdom ha v e ,

neve rtheless conta i ne d certain mistakes owi ng to a mis ,

understand i ng of the teachings by those who were so for I

-

tu n ate as to rece i ve them All books not written directly

.
,

by th e El d er Brothers are liable to contain such errors

,
.

C on si dering the extreme I ntricacy and many complica

tions of the subject the wonder is not that mi stake s d o
,

occur but that they ar e n ot more frequent Therefore the

,
.

w r i ter does not presume to critic i se recognizing that more ,

numerous and more serious mistakes may be embo d ied i n

the present work ow i ng to his own misconception of th e
,

teaching H e simply sets forth in the next few paragrap h s

.

what he has rece i v ed which shows how the differing ( an d

,

seem i ngly contra d ictory ) teaching Of two such valuable

”
works as The Secret Doctrine by H P Blavatsky and . .
,
“ ”
E soteric Bu d dh i sm by A P Sinne tt may be reconciled
, . .
, .
 R OS I CRU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

of the Earth but at a certain po i nt their evolution de

,

m an de d separate fiel d s so those two planets were thrown ,

O ff Venus first and then Mercury

, , Each was given such .

proxim i ty to the central orb as insured the rate of vibra

t i on necessary for its evolut ion The inhab i tants of M er .

cury ar e th e furthest a d vanced hence are cl oser to the Sun

'

,
~
.

Some of the inhabitants of each planet were sent to the

Earth to help nascen t humanity an d are known to occult
”
scient i sts as the Lords of V enus and th e Lords of M er
“ “

”
cury .

The Lords of Venus were leaders of the masses of our

people They w er e in f er ior beings of the V enus evolution
.
,

who appeared among men and were known as messen “

gers Of the Gods ”

For the good of our human ity they
.

led and gu i d e d i t step by step There was no rebell i on

, .

aga inst their aut hority because man h ad not yet evolved
“

an independent will It was to b rI n g h i m to the stage

.

where he would be able to man i fest will and ju dgment

‘

that they guided him u ntil h e should be able to gu i de ,

-

h i mself
It was known that these m
.

essengers communed with th e

“

Gods They were hel d in deep reverence and their com

mands were obeyed w i thout question .

When un d er the tuition of these Be i ngs m ankind had

reached a certain stage Of progress the most a d vanced ,

were placed under the gu i dance of the Lor d s O f Mercury ,

who initiated them i nto the higher truths fo r the purpose

O f making them leaders of the people : These In i ti ates
were then exalted to kingship and were the f ounders of the
d ynasties of D i vine Rulers who were indeed kings by th e
“

”
race of God i by the grace of the Lords f V enus
“

g e ,
. .
,
O

and Mercury who were as Gods to infant hum anity They

,
.

uided and instr ted the kings for the good Of the peo
g u c
 E V OLU TIO N O N T H E E A RT H 2 73

ple and not for self aggrandizement and arrogation of

-

rights at their expense .

At that time a Ruler held a sacred trust to educate and

help his peop le ; to alleviate and promote equity and well
be i ng H e had the light Of God to give him wisdom and
.

guide h i s judgment H ence wh i le those kin gs reigned

.
, ,

all things prospered and i t was i ndeed a Golden Age Yet

, .

as we follow the evolution Of man in detail we shall se e ,

that the present phase or period of development though it ,

cannot be called a golden age in any but a material sense ,

is nevertheless a necessa ry one in order to bring man to ,

the point where he will be able to rule hi m self for s elf ,

m as tery is th e en d an d arm o f a ll r u l er s h i p . N 0 m an can

sa ely r em ain u n g ov er n ed wh o h as l ear n ed to g ov er n

f n ot

h i m s elf
and at the present stage Of development that is
, ,

the hardest task that can b e given h im It is easy to com .

mand others ; it is hard to force Obedience f rom onese l f .

I N FLU E N C E OF M E R C U RY .

T he purpose of the Lords Of Mercury at that time and ,

of all H ierophants of Myste ries sin ce then as also al l ,

th e occult schools Of our day was and is to teach th e ,

candidate the art of Self Mastery In the measure that a

-
.

man has m astered himself an d i n th a t m easur e on ly is he

, ,

qualified to govern others Were the present .rulers of the

masse s able to govern th ems elv es we shoul d again have the
Mi l lenium or Golden Age .

As the Lords of V enus w orke d on the masses Of a l ong

past age so do the Lords of Mercury now work on the
,

Individual fitting him for mastery over self and ( inci

,

dentally only not primarily ) for mastery over others

, .

This work on their part i s but the beginning Of what will

 R O S I CRU C IA N C O S M O CON C E P T I O N
-

be an i ncreas i ng Mercur i al influence duri ng the rema i ning

three and one half Revolut i ons of the Earth P er i o d
-
.

Dur i ng the fir st thr ee and one half Revolut i ons M ars

-

held sway polari z i ng the iron prevent i ng the format i on

, ,

Of the red blood and keep i ng the Ego from i mmur i ng i ts lf

e
I n the body unt i l the latter had atta i ne d to th e requ i s i te

d egree of dev elopment .

Dur i ng the l ast three and one half Revolut i ons Mercury
-

will operate to extrica te the Ego from i ts d ensest vehicle

by means of In i tiatio n .

Incidentally it may be note d that as Mars polarized the

, ,

ir on so Mercury h as polari zed the metal bear i ng i ts name

,

an d the work i ngs of that metal will show very well this

tendency to take the den se bo dy away from th e S p i rit— to

l iberate t h e latter from the former .

That dread d i s ease syphil i s is an exampl e of condi

, ,

tions where the Ego is fettered and immured in the bo dy

to a parti cularly cramp i ng extent Su ffic i ent mercury
.

rel ieves the condit i on l essens the hol d Of th e body upon

,

the Ego and le aves the latt er to that comparative free d om

w i thi n the bo dy which the normal person enj oys But on .

the Other hand an overdose Of mercury cau se s paralysi s

, ,

thus taking the dense body from the man I n an improper

way .

The Lords of Mercu ry taught man to leave and r e enter -

th e body at w i ll ; to funct i on in his h i gher vehicles inde

pen dent Of the dense body so that the latter becomes a
,

cheerful dwell i ng house instead Of a closely locked prison -

—a useful i nstrument i nstead of a clog g i ng fetter .

Therefore occult sc ience speaks of the Earth P eriod as

Mars Mercury an d so it may be sa i d truly that we have
-
,

been in Mars and are go i ng to Mercury as taught i n one ,

of the occult works pre v iously mentioned It is also tru e, .

 ROS I CRU CIAN C OS M O CON C E P T I ON
-

When he born he could hear and feel but his per

-

was ,

cepti on o f lig ht came later We ha v e anal ogous c ases in

.

animals like cats and d og s the you n g of which recei v e

”

the sense O f sight some time after birth T h e Lemurian .

h ad no eyes H e h ad two sensitiv e spot s which were

.
‘

a ff ected by the light of the S un as it shone d i mly throu g h

the fi ery atmosphere of anc i ent Lemuri a but it was not ,

until ne arly the close Of the Atlantean Epoch that he had

s ight as we have it today U p to that t i me th ebui lding of
.

th eeye was in progress —

While the Sun was with i n whi l e
.

the Earth formed part Of the l i ght g i v i ng mass man — -

nee d ed no external illuminant ; he w as luminou s himself .

But when the dark Earth was separate d from the Sun it
became necessary that the l i ght shoul d be perceive d th er e ,
'

fore as th e l i ght rays i mp inge d upon man he perceived

-
,

them N ature built th e eye as a light perce i ver In r e

.
-
,

spou se to the demand O f the already existing functi on, -

wh ich is inv ar i ably the case as P rofessor H uxley has so

,
,

ably shown Th e amoeba has no stom ach , ye t i di gests

t
‘

. .

It is all stomach The ne cessity f or d i gesting f ood buil t

.

5
the stomach in the course of tim e but digestion took place ,

be fore the alimentary c anal was formed In an analogous .

,

manner the percept i on of light called forth the eye The

, .

light itself built the eye and ma i nta i ns it Where th ere .

i s no ligh t ther e can be no eye In cases wh ere animals.

ha v e withdrawn and dwelt in caves — keeping away from

the light—the eye s ha v e d egenerated and atrophied because
there were no l i ght rays to mainta i n them and no eyes
were needed in the dark c aves The Lemurian needed .

eyes ; h e had a perception of light and the light was com ,

m en cing to build the eye i n response to his demand .

H is language consiste d of sounds l i ke those of N ature .

The sighing of the wind in the immense forests w hi ch

 EVOLU T ION ON T H E EAR T H

grew i n great luxuriance in that super tropical cl im ate -

,

the rippling O f t e brook the howl i ng of the tempest for

h ,
—
Lemur i a was storm swept— the thunder Of the wa terfall
-
,

—
the roar of the volcano all these were to him voices Of the
Gods from whom he knew him self to have descended .

Of the birth of his body he knew nothing H e could .

not s ee e i ther it or anyth i ng else but he d i d p erceiv e his

,

fellow beings It was however an inner perception l i ke

-
.
, , ,

our percept i on of persons and th i ngs in dreams but w i th ,

this very important di ff erence that his dream per ception

,
-

was clear and rational .

Thus he knew nothing at a l l about his body in fact he ,

did not even kno whe had a body any more than we know
we have a stom ach wh en that org an i s in good health We
‘

remembe r its existence only when our abuse of it causes

us to feel p ain there U nder normal condition s we are
.

entirely unconscious of its processes Sim i larly did th e .

body of the Lemurian serve him excel l ently although he ,

was unaware Of its exi stence P ain was the means of.

mak ing him aware of his bod y and Of the world without .

Everything in connection with the propagation O f the

race and the bringi ng to birth was done by direction of the
Angels under the leadership Of J chovab the Regent Of the ,

Moon The propagat i ve function was performe d at stated

.

ti mes of the year when the li nes of force running f rom ,

planet to planet were focu ssed at proper angles Thus

, .

the creative force encountered no Obstruction an d p artu r i

tion was painless Man was unaware Of birth be cause at
.
,

that time he was as unconscious of the physical world as

he now is during sleep I t was only in the intimate con
.

tact Of sex relation that the spirit be came aware of the

”
flesh and the man knew h i s wife That is shown in
“
.

“
such pas sages of the Bible as Adam kn ew Eve and she
 2 78
"

RO S I CRU C IAN C O S M O C ON C E P T I ON -

”
bore Seth ; Elkanah kn ew H annah and she bore Sam
“

”
uel and Mary s quest i on H ow shall I conce i ve see i ng
’ “ ‘
”

, ,

I kn ow n o man ? This is also the key to the mean i ng

l
”

”
of the Tr ee O f Knowledge the fruit Of wh i ch opened
“
,

the eyes Of Adam an d Eve so that they came to know both ,

.

good and evil P rev i ously they h ad known only good

'

.
,

but when they beg an to exercise the cre ative function

-

in dependently they were i gnorant of ste llar i nfluences

, ,

as are the i r descendants an d Jehovah s supposed curse was

,
’
.

n ot a curse a t all but a s i mple statement of the result

,

which must i nev i tably follow use Of the generative force

which fa i led to tak e i nto cons i derat i on the effect of th e
stell ar rays on ch i ldbirth .

Thus the ignorant use of the generat i ve force i s pm

0 marily respons i ble for pa i n s i ckness an d sorrow , .

The Lemurian knew no death because when in the ,

course of long ages h i s body d ropped away he entered an

, ,

other qu i te unconscious of the change H is conscious n es s

,
.

Was not focussed I n the phys i cal world therefore the lay ing ,

as i de of one body and the tak i ng of anoth er was no more

tohim than a leaf or tw i g d ry i ng an d fall i ng away from
the tree and being replaced by a new growth .

Their l anguage was to the Lemuria ns something h ol y .

—
It was not a dead language l i ke ours a mere orderly ar
rangement of sounds Each sound uttered by the Lemu
.

rian had power over his fellow be i ngs over the an i mals -

and even over na ture around him Therefore under the .

,

gu i dance Of the Lo rds of Venus who were th e messengers ,

—
of God the em i ssaries O the creati ve hi erarchies the
f —
'

power of speech was used with great reverence as some .

,

thing most holy .

The educati on of the boys differed greatly from that of

the girls The Lemurian methods of educati on seem
.
230 RO S I CR U CI A N C O S M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

question at the present day b u t they di d not make the

,

Lemurian morbid b ecau se h e had no memory

,
N O matter .

what painful or terrifying experiences he endured every ,

thing was forgott en as so on as past The above m entioned

.
-

S trenuous experiences were for the purpose O f develop i ng

memo ry to imprint these violent and constantly repea ted

,
-

i mpacts from without upon the brain because memory is ,

necessary that the experiences of the past may be used as

gui d es to Action .

The educati on Of the girls developed the first germinal ,

flickering memory T h e fi rs t i d ea of Good an d E vi l was

.

f or m u la ted b y th em because O f their e x periences which ,

worke d ch i efly on the imagination Those e xperiences

.

“
most likely to leave a recollection were though t Good
those which did not produce that much desired result were -

”
considered E v i l “
.

Thus woman became the pioneer in culture being the ,

-

”
firs t to de velop the idea Of a good l i fe of which she h e
“
,

came the esteemed exponent among the anci ents and in -

that respect she has n ob ly ded the vanguard ever S ince .

Of course as all Egos incarnate alternately as male and

,

female there is really no p re eminence It is simply that

,
-
.

those who for the time being are in a dense bo d y of the

.

feminine gender have a positive vital bo d y and are there ,

fore more responsive to spiritu al impacts than when the

'

vital body is negati v e as in the male .

As we have seen the Lemurian was a born magician

,
.

H e felt himself a descendant Of the Gods a spiritual being ; ,

therefore his line O f advancement was by g ain in g n ot spir

itu al but m ater ial kn owledge
, The Temples Of Initiation
.

for the most ad v anced d id not need to re v eal to man his

h i gh ori gin ; to educate h i m to perform feats of magic ; to
instruct him h ow to function in th e d esir e w orl d and th e
 E V OL U T I O N O N TH E E A RT H 28 1

higher realms Such instruction is necessary today b e

.

cause now the average man has no knowledge of the spir

i tu al world nor can he function in superphysical realms
,
.

The Lemurian however in his own way did possess that

, , ,

knowl edge and could exercise those faculties but on the ,

other hand he was ign orant of the Laws of the Cosmos and
,

of facts regarding the physical world which are matters of

common e v eryday knowledge with us Therefore at the
,
.

School of Initiation he was taught ar t the laws of N ature ,

and facts relating to th e physical universe H is will was .

strengthened and his imagination an d memory wakened so

that h e coul d correlate e xperiences and devise ways and
means of ac tion when h is past experiences did not serve
to indicate a proper course Of procedure Thus the T ern .

ples of Initiation in the Lemurian times were H igh

Schools for the cultivation of Will power and Imagina -

”
tion with post graduate courses in Art and Sci ence
,
“
-
.

Yet though the Lemurian was a born magicia n he never

, ,

misused his powers because he felt himself related to the

Gods U nder the direction O f the Messengers of the Gods
.
,

already spoken of his forces were directed toward the

,

molding of form s in the animal and the plant worl ds It .

may be hard for the materialist to understand how he

could do such work if h e could not see the world about
”
h im
. It is true man could no t see as we understand the
term and as he now sees Objects outside in space with his
physical eyes Still as th e purest of our children are
.
,

clairvoyant to this day while they remain in a state Of

sinless innocence so the Lemurians who were yet pure
, ,

an d innocent possessed an internal perception which gave

,

them only a dim idea Of the ou twar d S hape Of any Object ,

but illumin ed SO much th e brighter its inner nature its ,

 RO S I CRUCI A N OO S M O OO N OE P T IO N -

soul quality by a spiri tual appercept i on born Of i nnocent

-
,

pur i ty .

Innocence however is not synonymous with V i rtue

, , .

Innocence is the ch i l d Of Ignorance an d could not be ma in

tain ed i n a uni v erse where the purpose Of evolut i on is the
acquisit i on Of W i s d om T O at ta i n that end a knowl ed ge .
,

of goo d and evil right and e n g is essential also choice

, , ,

of action .

If having knowledge and cho i ce man ranges himself on

, ,

th e sid e Of Good an d R i ght he culti v ates V i rtue and W i s

s -

dom If he succumbs to temptat i on and d oes wrong know

.

i n g ly h e fosters v i ce
,
.

’
God s plan is not to be brought to naught howe ver ,
.

E very act is a see d ground for the law of Conseq uence -

.

We reap what w e sow The weeds Of wrong acti on bear .

fl oWer s of sorrow an d suffer i ng an d when the see d s fro m ,

them have fallen into a chastened heart when they ha v e ,

b een watere d by the tears of repentance V i rtue w i ll event

nally blosso m forth What blessed assurance that out O f
.
,

e v ery e v i l we do Good w ill eventually accrue f or in our

, ,

Father s K ingd om naught but Good can en d ure

’
.

”
“

Therefore the Fall w i th its consequent pain and suf

“

tering is but a temporary state where we see throu gh a

glass d arkly but anon we shall behold again face to face
,

the God w i th i n an d without who is ever percei v ed by the

pure in heart .

TH E F ALL OF M AN .

This is cabalistically described as the experience of one

pair who Of course repres ent humanity
,
The key i s ,
.

gi v en in the v erse where the Messenger Of th e Gods sa y s

n

to the woman in sor row thou shalt bri ng forth ch i l d ren

,
“
 ROS I CRUCI AN COS M O C ON CE P TION -

shifte d to the higher worl d s at death and back to the

phys ical world at reb i rth .

“
The open i ng of the eyes was brought about in th e fol
lowing manner : We remember that when the sexes sep
ar ated the male became an express i on for W i ll wh ch is
, i ,

one part of the twofold soul force ; the fema l e express i ng -

the oth er part Imag inat i on If woman were not i magina

, .

t i ve she could not build the new body in th e womb an d

were not the Spermatozoon an embodiment of the con cen
‘

tr ated human w i ll it could not accomplish impregnation

,

and so commence the germ i nation which r esults in the ,

continued se gmentation of the ovum .

These tw i n forces W i ll and Imagination are both

-

, ,

neces sary to the propag ation of bodies Si nce the separa .

tion Of th e sexes however one Of these forces rema ins

, ,

within each ind i vidual and only the part g i ven out is ava i l
able for propagat i on H ence the necessity for the one .

sexed be ing who expresses only one kind Of soul force to -

,

unite with another who expresses the compl ementary soul

,

force This was previously expla i ned ; also that the part
. .

of the soul force not used for propagation becomes avail

-

able for i n n er growth SO long as man sent out the full .

«
,

d ual sex force for generation he could accomplish nothing

-
,

in the direction of soul growth for himself But S ince

“

-
.

then the part not used through the Sex organ has been ap -

r op r i ated by the indwelling spirit to build the bra i n and

p
the larynx for its expression .

Thus man bu i lt on all through the latter part Of the ,

Lem u rI an Epoch and th e first two thirds Of the Atlantea n -

Epoch until by the above ment i oned use of thi s half of

,
-

h i s sex force h e became a fully conscious thinking rea

-
,
-
, ,

S on i ng be i ng
, .

In man the brain is the l in k between the spiri t an d th e

 E V OLU T ION O N TH E E A RTH 28 5

outside world H e can know nothing Of the outside world

.

except through th e medium of the brain The sens e organs .

-

ar e merely carriers to the brain of impacts from without

and the brain is the instrument which interprets and cO

ordinates tho se impacts The Angels belonged to a dif .

f er en t evolution and h ad never been imprisoned in a dense

and cumbrously slow vehicl e such as ours They had .

learned to Obt ain knowledge without a physical b r aIn .

Their lowest vehicle is the vital body Wis dom came to .

them as a gift without the necess i ty of laboriously think

,

ing it out through a physical brain .

“ ’
Man however had to fall into generation and work
, , ,

for his knowledge The spirit by means of one part of

.
,

the sex force directed inward bu i lt the brain to gather

-
,

kno wledge from the physical world and the same force is
‘

feeding and building the br ain today It is subverted .

from its proper course inasmuch as it should ha v e gone

outward for proc reation but man retains it for selfish pur
,

poses N 0 so th e Angels They had e xperienced no di

. .

vision Of their sou l powers therefore they coul d send out

-
,

the dual so ul force wi th ou t s elfish r es ervati on

-
.

The force that goes outward for the purpose of creating

another being is Love The Angels sent out their w h ol e
.

l ov e wi th ou t s elfish n ess or d esir e and in return Cosmic

, ,

Wisdom flowed into them .

Man sends out only part of his love ; the residue he

sel fishly keeps and uses to build his inner organs of ex
pression to improve h i m s elf; thus does his love become
,

selfish and sensual With one part Of his creative soul

.

power he selfishly loves another being because he desires

‘

co operation in propagation
-
With the other part of his .

creati v e soul power he thinks ( a l so f or sel fish reasons )

-

because he desires knowledge .

286 RO S I CRU C I A N C O S M O C O N C E P T I O N -

T h e Angels lo v e without desire but man h ad to go ,

through selfishness H e must d es i re a n d work for w i s d om

’
. .

selfishl y that he may r each sel fl essn ess at a h i gher stage

,
.

The Angels helpe d h i m to propagate e v en after the sub

version Of part of the soul force They helped h im to
‘

-
.

bu i l d the physical bra i n but they h ad no knowle dge that

,

coul d be transm i tted by means Of i t because they did not ,

know how to use such an i nstrument an d coul d not speak

di re ctly to a bra i n being All they could do was to con
-
.

trol the phys i cal expression Of the lo v e Of m an and gui d e

it through the emot i ons In a lo v ing innocent way thus , ,

sav ing man the pain an d trouble incident to the exercise

Of the sex function w i thout w i sdom
-
.

H ad that r eg i m e lasted man woul d have remained ,

S imply a G od gui d e d automaton and would ne v er hav e

-

become a personali ty— an ind i v i d ual That he has b e .

come S O 1 s due to a much mali gne d class of entities calle d

-

the L ucifer Spirits .

T H E LU C I F E R S P I RI T S .

These spirits were a cl as s Of s tragglers in th e life wave

of the Angels In the Moon P eri od they worked them
.
'

sel ves far ahead of the great mass of those who are now i
.

the most adv anced of our humanity They ha v e n ot p ro .

g re s se d as far as the Angels who were the pionee r human

ity Of the Moon howe v er but they were so much in
, ,

a d vance of our persent humanity th at it was impossible for

them to take a dense body as we ha v e done ; yet they could
not gain knowl edge without the use of an inn er organ ,

a physical bra i n They were half way between man who

.
-

has a brain and the Angels who nee d none — in short they ,

were dem i gods

-
.

They were thus I n a ser i ous situation Th e only way .

 RO S I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP TION -

resulted from the unwise use of the pr opagative f acul ty

and its abuse for the gratific ati on Of the senses Animals .

I n their wild stat e are exempt from sickness and pain

'

becau se thei r propagation is carried on under the care and

‘

directio n O f th e wise group spirit at only those times Of the

-

year which ar e prop i t i ous to that process The sex func .

-

t i on i s d esigned solely for the perpetuation o f the species

and under no circumstances for the gratification of sensual

H ad man remained a God guided automaton he would

-
,

have known no sickness pain nor death unto thi s day ;

, ,

but he woul d also have l acked the brain consciousnes s and -

independence which resulted from his e nlightenment by

the Lucifer Spirits the light givers who opened the eyes
,
“ -
,

of h i s understand ing and taught him to use his then dim

vis i on to gain knowledge of the Physical Worl d which he
was destined to conquer .

From that time there have been two forces working in

man One force is that of the Angels, who build new
.

beings in the womb by means of the Love w hich i s turned

downward for procreation ; they are therefore the perpetu
ator s of the race .

-
The other f orce i s th at of th e Lucifers wh o are the ,

instigators of all mental activity by mean s of th e other ,

p art of the sex force which is carried upward for work

-
,

in the brain .

The Lucifers are also called serpents and are vari

” “

ou sl y represented in d i ff erent mythologies More will be .

sa i d about them whe n we come to the an ayl si s of Genesis .

F oi the present enough h as been said to warrant u s in

'

pursuing the main line of investigation which leads us to ,

follow the progress of man s evol ution stil l further through

’
,

the Atlan tean and Aryan Epochs down to the present d ay ,

.
 E V OLU T IO N ON T H E E A RT H 289

What has been said about the enl i ghtenment of the

Lemurian s applies to only a m i nor portion Of those who
lived in the latter part of that Epoch and who became ,

the Seed f or the Seven Atlantean Races The greater .

part of the Le murians were an imal like and the for m s -

i nhab i ted by them have degenerate d i nto the savages and

anthropo i d s of the present day .

The S tu dent i s requested to note careful ly that it was

the F or ms which degenerated There is a very important
.

distinction to be kept in mind between the bodies ( or

forms ) of a race an d the Egos ( or l ife ) which incarnates
,

in those race bodies

-
.

When a race is born the for ms are en souled by a certai n

,

group Of sp i rits and h ave inherent capab i l i ty of evolv i ng

to a certain stage of completion and no further There .

can be no standing st i ll i n nature therefore when the l i m i t ,

of attainment h as been reac hed the bodies or forms of that

,

race begin to degenerate sink ing lower and lower until at

,

last the race dies out .

The reason is not far to seek N ew race bo d ies are .

-

particularly flexible and plastic affor di ng great scope for ,

the Egos who incarnate in them to improve those veh i cles

and progress thereby The most advanced Egos are
.

brought to birth in such bodi es and improve them to the

best of their ability These E gos however are only
.
, ,

apprenti ce s as yet and they cause the bodies to gradually

,

crystall i ze and harden until the limit of improvement of

that particular kind of body h as been reached Then .

forms f or another n ew race are create d to aff ord the ,

advancing Egos further scope f or more extended experience

and greater devel opment They discard the old race
.

bodi es for the new, their discarded bodies becoming the

habitations for less advanced Egos wh o in their turn ‘

, ,
2 90 R OS I CRU C IAN COSM O -
C ON C EP TI ON

use them as stepping stones on the path of progress Thu s

-
.

the old race bod i es are use d by Egos of i n cr easin g inferi or

-

i ty gradually degenerating unt i l at l ast there are no Ego

,
s
low enough to profit by incarnat i on in such bodies Th e .

women then become sterile and th e race for m s di e -

We m ay easily trace this process by certain exampl es .

The Teuton i c Anglo Sax on race ( p articularly the Ameri

- -

can branch Of it ) has a softer an d more flex i ble body and

a more high st rung ner v ous system than any othe r race on
-

earth at the present time The Ind i an and the N egro

.

have much harder bodies and because of th e duller ner ,

vous system are much l ess sensitive to l acerations An

, .

In di an will continue to fight after receiving wounds the

S hock O f which would prostrate or kill a wh i te m an ,

wh ereas the Indian w i ll qu i ckly recover The Austral i an

fi
.

aborigine s or Bushme n furnish an example of a r ace d ying

out on account of sterility notwithstandi ng all that the
,

British government is doing to pe rpetuate them .

It has been sa i d by white men agai nst th e white race ,

that whe r ever it goes the other races d i e Ou t The whites .

h ave been gu i lty of fearful Oppress i on towards those other

races having in many c ases massacred multitud es of the
,

defensele ss and unsuspecti ng native s—as w itness the con

duct of the Spaniards towar d s the ancient Peruv i ans and
Mexicans to spec ify but one of many instances The
,
.

Obl i gat i ons resulting from such betrayal of confi d ence and

abuse Of super i or intell i gence an d power w i ll all ha v e to

b e p ai d— yea to the last least iota —
, ,
b y those incurr i ng
them . It is equally true however that even had the
, ,

wh i tes not massacred starve d enslaved expatriated and

, , ,

otherwi se maltreated those Ol d er races th e latter would ,

nevertheless had d ied out just as surely though more ,

slowly because such is the Law O Evolution

,
f — the Or de r
29 2 RO S I CR U C I A N CO S M O C ON C EP T I ON -

It app eared to be surroun de d by an aura of l i ght mist as -

do street la mps when seen through a dense fog It w as

-
.

then poss i ble to see only a f eW f eet in any direction and

‘

the outlines of all Objects not clo se at hand appe ared

.

dim hazy and uncertain

,
Man was guided m or e by .

internal perception than by external vision

N ot only the country but a l so the man Of that time ,

was very different from anything existent on earth at th e

p resent ti m e H e had a head but scarcely any forehead ;
.
,

h i s bra in had no frontal development ; the hea d slope d

almost abruptly back from a point j ust above the eye s .

As compared with our present humanity he was a giant ; ,

his arms and l egs were much l onger in proportion to his ,

body than ours Instead Of walking he progressed by a

, .
,

series Of flying leaps not unlike those of the kangaroo

, .

H e had Smal l bli nking eye s an d his ha i r was round i n

section The l atter peculiarity if n o other distinguishes
.
, ,

the descendant s of the Atlantean races who remain with

us at the present day Their hair was straight glossy.
, ,

black and rou n d in sectio n That of the Aryan though .

,

it may diff er in color is al ways ova l in section The ear s

, .

O f the Atlantean sat much f urther back upon th e h ead ,

than do those of the Aryan .

The h igher vehicles of the early A t l anteans were not

drawn into a concentr i c position in relation to the dens e
body a s are ours The S pirit was not quite an i n dwelling
, .

S pirit ; it was p ar ti hl ly outside therefore could not con ,

trol its vehicle s with as great facility a s though it dwel t

entirely inside The head of the vital body was outside of
.

and held a position far above the physica l head There .

is a point betwe en the eyebrows and about half an inch

below the surface of the skin which has a corresponding
“
,

po int in the vital body This point is not the pituitary.

 EVOLU T IO N O N T H E EA RTH 2 93

body which l ies much deeper in the head Of the dense

,

body It might be called the root O f the nose

.
“
When .

the se two points in the dense and the vita l bodies inter
penetrate as they do in man today the trained clairvoyant
, ,

s ee s them as a black spot or rather as a vacant space l ike

.
, ,

the i nvisible core of a gas flame This is the seat Of the .

—
indwelling spirit in the man the H oly Of H olies in the
temple of the human body barred to all but that indwell
,

ing human ego whose home it Is The trained c l airvoyant .

can see wi th more or less distinctness according to his ,

capacity and training al l the different bodies which f orm

,

the aura of man This spot alone i s h idden f rom him

. .

This is the Isis who se veil none may l ift N ot even

“
.

the highest evo l ved being on earth is capab l e of un veiling

the ego of the humblest and least developed creature .

That and that alone upon ea rth is so sacred that it i s

, ,

absolute ly safe f rom intrusion .

These two points just spoken Of— th e one in th e den se

body and its counterpart in the vita l body—were far apart
in the men of the early Atlantean days as they are in ,

the animals of our day Th e head of the horse s vita l

.
’

body is far outside the hea d of its dense body T h e two .

points are clos er together in the dog than in any other

animal e x cept perhaps the elephant When they become
, , .

concentric we h ave an animal prodigy ab l e to count , ,

spell etc
, .

On account of the dist an ce between th ese two points ,

’
the Atl antean s power of perception or vision was much
keener in the inner Worlds than in the dense P hysica l
World obscured by its atmosphere of thick h eavy fog
, , .

In the f ul l ness of time however the atmosphere Sl owly

, ,

became clearer ; at the same time the point S poken of in ,

th e vital body came closer and closer to the corresponding

 RO S I CRUCI AN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

point in the dense body As th e two appr oach ed each

.

oth er man gra d ually lost touch w i th the i nner Worlds

, .

They became dimmer as the dense P hysical World be came

cle arer in outline Final ly in the last third Of the At
.
,

lante au Epoch the point in the vital body was united to

,

the corresponding point in th e dense body N ot until then .

d i d man become fully awake in the dense Physic al World ;

but at the same t i me that full sight and perception in the
P hysical Worl d we re ga i ned the capabil i ty O f perceiving
,

the inner Worl d s was gradually lost to most of the people .

In an earlier t i me the Atlantean did not cl early per

cei ve the outlin e O f an Object or a person but he saw th e
.
,

soul and at once knew its attributes whether they were ,

beneficial to him or otherwise H e knew whether the m an .

or animal he was reg arding was kindly or i nimically dis

posed toward him H e was accurately taught by spiritual
.

pe rcept i on how to deal With others and how to escape

harm therefor e when the S piritual World gradually f aded
,

from his consciousness, gre at was his sorrow at the l os s

”

f
i
i

Th e Rm oah al s were th e first of the Atlante an Races .

They h ad but l ittl e memory an d that little was chiefly con

n e cted with se nsation T hey rem em b ered colors and tones
.
,

and thus to some extent they evolved Fe eling The .

Lemuri an had entirel y l acked Feeling in the fi ne r sig ,

ni fication of the word H e had the sense of touch could

.
,

fee l the physical sensations o f pain ease an d comfort b u t , ,

not the ment al and spiritual ones of j oy sorr ow, sympathy ,

and antipathy .

With memo ry came to the Atlanteans th e ru diments of

’

a language . They evolved words and no l onge r made use

of mere sounds as did the Lemurians The Rm oah al s
,
.

began to give names to things They we re yet a S piritual .

race and the i r soul powers bei ng like the forces of natu re
,
-

,
 ROS I CRU C I AN CO S M O C O N C EP TI ON
-

sciou sn ess O f the early Atlantean was as yet princip ally

, ,

an internal picture consci ousness The power of the edu

-
.

cator to call up these pictures befor e the soul Of the chil d

was the determi ning factor upon which depended the soul
qualities that would be possessed by the grown man The .

instinct and not the reason was appealed to and aroused ,

and by this method of education the son In the great m a ,

j or i ty O f cases ,readily absorbed the qualities O f the father .

It is thus evident that there was at that time good reason

for bestowing honor upon the descendant s of great men ‘

,
’
because the son almost always inherited most Of his father s
g ood qualities . U nfortunately that
, is not the case in our
time although we Still follow the same practice Of ho nor
,

ing the sons Of great m en ; but we have no reason whatever

for do i ng so .

Amon g the Toltecs e xperience came tob e h igh ly valued

, . .

The man who had gained the most varied experience was
the mo st honored and sought Memory was then so great
.

and accurate that our present memory is n othi ng in com

parison In an emergency; a Tolte c of wide pr actical e x
.

p er i e n ce would be very li kely to rememb er similar cases

in the past and suggest what a ction shoul d be taken Thus

,
.
_

he became a valuable adviser to the community when a

situation devel oped which mine of the member s had pre
v iou sl y encountered and they were unable to think or rea

son from analogy as to how to deal promptly with the

emergency When such an indi v idual was not available
.
,

they were compelled to e xperiment in order to fin d what

was best to do .

In the midd l e t hird of Atl antis we find th e beginning

of separate nation s Groups of people who discovered in
.

one another sim i lar tastes and habits would leave their
old home s an d fo und a new co l ony They remembered th e
.
 E V OLU T I O N ON TH E E A TH R 2 97

Old customs and followed them in their new homes a s f ar

as they suited forming new ones to meet their own par
,

ticu l ar ideas and necessities .

The Leaders Of mankind initiated great Kings at that

time to rule the people o ver whom they were gi v en great
,

power The masses honored these kings with all the re v er

.

“
ence due to those who were thus truly Kings by the grace
”
of God This happy state however had in it the germ of
.
, ,

disintegration for in time the Kings became intoxicated

,

with power They forgot that it had been put into their
.

hands by the grace of God as a sacred trust ; that they ,

were made Kings for the purpose of dealing justly by and

helping the people Th ey began to use their power cor
.

ru ptly ,
for selfish ends and personal aggrandizem ent in ‘

stead Of f or the common good arrogating to themsel ve s ,

privileges and authorities never intended for them Ambi .

tion and selfishn ess ruled them and they abused their high ,

divinely derived powers for purposes of oppressio n and

,

revenge This was true not only of the Kings but a l so

.
, ,

O f the nob l es and th e higher classes and when on e con ,

siders th e power possessed by them over their f el l ow

beings o f the l es s developed classe s it is easy to under ,

stand that its misuse would bring about terrible conditions .

The Origina l Turanians were the fourth Atlantean Race .

They were especially vile in their abominable selfishness .

T h ey erected temples where the King s were worshiped as

gods and caused the extreme oppression of th e h e l pless
,

l ower cl asses B l ack magic of the worst and most n au seat

.

ing kind flourished and a ll their eff orts were directed

towards the gratification of vanity and extern al disp l ay .

The Original Semites were the fif th and mo s t important

of the seven Atlantean Races because in them we fin d the ,

first germ of th e corrective qua l ity of Thought There f ore .

2 98 RO S I CRUC I A N C O S M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

the Original Semitic Race became the seed race for the -

se v en Races of the present Aryan Epoch

.
.

In the P ol ar I an Epoch man acqu i re d the dense bo d y as

an instrum ent of action In the H yperborean Epoch the
.

v i tal body was ad d ed to g 1v e power of motion necessary to

action In the Lemurian Epoch the desire body furni shed

.

incentive to action .

The mind was gi ven to man in the Atlantean Epoch to

gi ve purpose to action but as the Ego was exc eedingl y
,

weak an d the des i re nature strong th e nascent m i nd,

coalesce d with the desire body ; the faculty of Cunni ng r e

su l ted and was the cause O f all the wickedness Of the mid

dl e third of the Atlantean Epoch .

In the Aryan Epoch Thought and Reason were to be

evolved by the work of the Ego i n the mind to conduct
D esire into channel s lea ding to the attam m en t Of sp i r i tual
perfecti on which is the Goal of Evolution This faculty
, .

Of Thought and Of f orm m g Ideas was gained by man at

the expense Of loss Of control over the vital forces i e — . .

,

power over N ature .

With Thought and Mind man can at present exercise

power over the chem i cals and m I n er al s only for his mind ,

is now in the first or m i neral stage of its e v olution as was ,

his dense b ody in the Satur n P eriod H e can exercis en o

.

power over plant or animal lif e Wood and various .

vegetable substances together with different parts of the

,

animals are used by man in his industries These Shi b

,
.

stances are all in the fina l analysis chem i ca l matter en

souled by mineral life of which the b od i es in all the king
,

d oms ar e compos ed as previously expla i ned Over all these

,
.

var i et i es Of ch em l cal mineral comb i nat i ons man at h i s

present stage may have dom i n i on but unt i l he has reached
,

the Jupiter P erio d that dominion will not be extended so

,
30 0 R OS I CRU C I AN COS M O C ON C EP T ION
-

During the existence Of this Race the atmosphere of ,

Atlanti s commenced to cl ear definitely and the previously ,

mentioned point in the v ital body united with the corre

spon di ng point in the dense body This combination of .

events gave man the ab i l i ty to see Objects clearly w i th

sharp well defin ed contours ; but it also resulted in loss
,
-

of the Sight perta i n i ng to the inner Worlds .

T h i s we see an d i t may be well to definitely state it as

,

a law : N O progress is ever made that is not gained at the

~

cost Of some previously possessed faculty which is later ,

regained i n a h i gher form .

Man bu i lt bra i n at the e xp ense of the temporary loss of

the power to bring forth Offspring from himself alone In .

order to get the i nstrument wherewith to gui d e h i s dense

body he became subject to all the d i fficulty sorrow and
, ,

pain which is involved in the co operation necessary to the -

perpetuation Of the race ; he ob tain ed h is reasoning power

at the cost of the temporary loss Of his sp i ritual ins i ght .

While reason benefited him in m any ways, it Shut from

his vision the soul Of things which had previously spoken
’
to him and the gaining Of the intellect which is now man s
,

most precious possession was at first but sa d ly contem

plated by the Atlantean wh o mourned the loss Of spir i tual
,

sight an d power which marke d its acquisition .

The e x change of S piritual powers for physical faculties

was necessary however in order that man m i ght be able
, ,

to function independent Of outside guidance in the P hys

, ,

ical World which he must conquer In t ime his h i gh er .

powers will be regained when by means of his experiences

,

in his journey through the denser P hys i cal Worl d he has ,

learned to use them properly When he possessed them .

,

he had no knowle d ge O f their proper use an d they were ,

 E V OL U T IO N O N T H E E A T H R 30 1

to o precious and too dangerous to be used as toys with ,

which to experiment .

U nder the guidance of a great Entity the Origina l ,

Semitic Race was led eastward from the continent of At

lantis over Europe to the great waste in Central Asi a
, ,

which is known as the Gobi Desert There it prepared .

them to be the seed of the se v en Races of the Aryan Epoch ,

imbuing them potentia l ly with the quali ties to be evo l ved

by their descendants .

—
During a l l the previous ages f rom the commencement
of the Saturn Period through the Sun and Moon Periods
, ,

and in the three an d one half Revolutions of the Earth

-

Period ( the P ol arI an H yperborean Lemurian and earlier

, , ,

—
part Of the Atlantean Epochs ) man had been l ed and
guided by higher Beings without the slightest prerogati v e
,
.

In tho se days he was unab l e to guide h imself not yet hav ,

ing evolved a mind of his own ; but at last the time had
come when it was necessary for his further development
that he should begin to guide himself H e must l ear n .

independence and assume responsibility for his own actions .

H itherto he had been compelled to obey the commands of

his Ruler ; now his thoughts were to be turned from the
visible Leaders the Lords from V enus whom he wor
, ,

—
shipped as mess engers from the gods to the idea of the
true God the invisible Creator of the System Man was
, .

to l earn to worship and Obey the commands Of a God he

could not see .

Their Leader there f ore called the people together and

delivered a soul stirring oration which might be thus e x
-
,

pressed :
H itherto you have seen those who led you but there are ,

Leaders of varying grades Of sp l endor hi gher than They , ,

302 R O S I C RU C I A N CO S M O -
C ON C EP TI ON

Whom you h ave not seen Who guided your every tottering
"
,

step in the evolution of consciousness .

E x alted above all these glorious Be i ngs stands the i n v i s

ib l e God Who has created the heaven and the earth up on ,

which you dwell H e has willed to give you dominion over

.

all this land that you may be fruitful and mult i ply in it
,
.

This in v isible God only must you worship but you must , ,

worship Hi m in Spiri t and in Truth an d not make any ,

graven image Of H im nor use any l i keness to pictur e H im

,

to yourselves because H e is e v erywhere pr esent and I s

, ,

b eyond any comparison or similitude .

If you follow H i s precepts H e will bless you abundantly ,

in all good I f you str ay from H i s ways ev il will follow

.
,
.

The ch o ce is yours You are free ; bu t you m us t en d u r e

i \ .

th e consequ en ces o f you r own a cti on s .

The ed ucation Of man proceeds by four great steps .

First he is worked upon from wi tho ut unconsciously

, ,
.

T hen he is placed under the Rulersh i p of Divine Messen

.

gers and Kings whom he sees and whose commands he ,

,

must Obey N ext h e is taught to revere the commands of

.

a God whom he does n ot see Finally he learns to rise .

,

above commands ; to become a law unto himself ; and by ,

conquering himself of his Own free will to li v e in harmony ,

with the Order of N ature wh i ch is the Law Of God ,

.

Fourfold also are the steps by wh i ch man climbs u p

ward to God .

First through fear he worships the God whom he begins

, ,

to s ense sacrificing to propitiate H im as do the fetish

, ,

worshipers .

N ext he learn s to look to God as the Gi ver Of all things

, ,

and hopes to recei v e from H im mater i al benefits h er e an d

n ow .H e sacrifices through avarice expecting that the ,
304 R OS I CRUC I AN C OS M O -
C O N C E P TION

the increa sed quanti ty of water gradually inundated that

conti nent destroying the gr eater part of the population
,

and the evidenc es of the i r c i v i l i zat i on .

Great numbers were driven from the doomed continent

by the floo d s an d wan d ered across Europe The Mon
, .

gol i an races are the descendants of those Atlantean ref u l

gees The N egroes and the savage races with cu rly hair
.
,

are the last remnants of the Lemurians .

TH E ARYAN E P OC H .

Central As 1 a was the cradle of the Aryan Races wh o ,

descended from the Orig i nal Sem i tes Thence h aVe the .
‘

d i fferent Races go ne out It is unnecessary to describ e

.

them here as historical researches have sufficiently re

,

vealed their main f eatures .

In the present ( the Fifth or Aryan ) E poch man came

”

to know the use of fire and other forces the div i ne or i g 1n ,

of which was purposely withheld from him that he might ,

b e fre e to use them for h i gher purposes or h i s own devel

opm en t . Therefore we h a v e in thi s present Epoch two

classes : On e l ooks upon this Earth an d upon man as b e

ing of divine or 1g 1n ; the other sees all things f r om a purely a

uti litarian viewpo i nt .

The most advanced among hum anity at the beginning of

th e Aryan Epoch were given the h i gher Init i ations that ,

they might take the place of the messengers of God i e ,

, . .
,

the Lords of Venus Such human In i t i ates were f rom this

.

time forth the only mediators between God and man Even .

they do not appear publicly nor show any signs and won
d ers that they were Leaders and Teachers Man was left .

ent i rely free to seek them or not as he desired , .

At the end of b u r present Epoch the highest In i tiate

wil l appear publicly when a sufficient number of ordinary
,
 E V OLU T IO N O N T H E EA RTH 3 05

humanity desire an d wi ll vo l untari ly sub j ec t themse l ves

,

to such a Leader They w i ll thus form the nucleus for the

.

las t R ace which will appear at the beginning of the Sixth

,

Epoch After that time races an d nations will cease to

.

exist H umanity will form one spiritual Fel l owship as

.

before the end of the Lemurian Epoch .

The n am es of the Races which h ave spread over the

Earth during the Fifth Epoch up to the prese nt t im e , ,

are as f ol low :
l — The Aryan, which went south to India
.
,

2 — The Babylon i an Assyr l an Chaldean

.
- -
.

3 — The P ersian Gr aeco Latin

.
- -
.

4 — The Celtic
. .

5 The Teu ton ic An gl o S axon ( to which we

.
- ~ -

belong ) .

Fr om the mi xture of the different nations now t aking

”
place i n the U nited States w i ll come the Seed f or the “

last Ra ce in the beginning of the Sixth Epoch

, .

Tw o more Races will be evolved in our pre sent Epoch ,

one of them being the S l av : When in the course of a few

‘

hundred years the Sun because of the precession o f the

, ,

equinoxes sha l l have ente red the sign Aquarius the Rus
, ,

sian people and the S l av Races in genera l will reach a

degree of spiritua l development which will advance them
far beyond their present condition Music will be the .

chief factor in bringing this about for on th e wings of ,

music the soul which is attuned may fly to the very

Throne of God where the mere intellect cannot reach
,
_
.

Development attain ed in that m anner however is not , ,

permanent because it is one sided therefore not in har

,
-
,

mony with the l aw of evolution which demands that ,

developmen t to be permanent must be evenly balanced

, ,

i n other words that spirituality sha ll evo l ve through or

, ,
 3 06 R O S I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON
'
-

at least equally with intellect For this reason the Slavic

,
.

c i v i l i zat i on w i ll be short l i v e d , but it w i ll be great an d

-

j oyful wh i le i t l asts for it is being born of deep sorr ow

,

and untold su ff ering and the law of Compensation wil l

,
”

bri ng the oppos i te in due ti me .

“ From the Slavs will descend a people which will form

the last of the seven Races of the Aryan Epoch and from
‘

the people of the U nite d States w i ll d escend the l ast of

all the Races in th i s scheme of evolution which will run , .

its course in the beg i nning of the Sixth Epoch .

TH E e '
r EE N P ATH S TO Dnsr nu cr ron .

Th e sixtee n Races are called the Sixteen path s to

”
destruct i on because there is always in each Ra ce , a ,

d anger th at th
, e soul may become to o much attached to
the Race ; th at it may become so enmeshed in Race cha r -

acte r i sti cs i t cannot u se above the r ace idea and will “

-
,

therefore fa i l to a d vance that i t may so to speak crystal

, , ,

l i ze into that Race an d consequently be confined to the

Race bo d i es when they start to degener ate as happened to
-
,

the Jews .

In P eriods, Revolutions and Epochs where there are

,

no Races there i s much more t ime and the likelihood of

, ,

becoming foss i lized is not so great nor so frequent But ,

.

the sixteen Races are born and d ie in such a relatively

short time there is grave danger that the one who gets too
much attached to condi tions may be left beh i nd
Christ i s the great unifying Leader of th e S ix th Epoch ,

and H e enunciated this law when H e uttered those little

understood words : If any man come to me and h ate
“
,

not his father and mother and wife and chil dren and
, , , ,

brethren and sisters yea and his own life a l so he cannot

, , , ,

b e my discipl e .
 EVOLU T I ON ON TH E E AR TH 30 7

And wh osoeve r doth not bear h i s cross and come after

,

me cannot be my discip le
,
.

whosoever he be of you that forsaketh not

”
all th at he h ath, h e ca nnot be my disciple
.

N ot th at we are to leave nor underestimate family

,

ties b ut th at we are to ri se above them Father and

,
.

”
mother are bodies ; all relations are part of the Race
“

which be longs to Form The soul s must recognize that

.

th ey are not Bodies, nor Races but Egos striving for per
,

fection If a man forgets this and identifies himse l f with

his Race—cl inging to it with fanatic patriotism h e is
,
.

l ikel y to become enmeshe d in and sink with it when h is

compeers have passed to greate r h eigh ts on the P ath of
 C H APTER XI II .

B AC K T O TH E B I B LE .

N o ur a e
g the missionary sp 1r1t is strong The West .

ern churches are sending mission aries all over the

world to convert the people of every nation to a bel ief
i n their creeds nor are they alone in thei r prose ly ting
e ff orts The East has commenced a strong invasion of
.

Western fields an d many Christi ans who hav e become

,

dissatisfied with the creeds and dogmas taugh t b y th e

clergy and impelled to search for truth to satisf y the de
"

mands of the intellect f or an adequate explanation of the

problems of l ife have familiarized themsel ves with and
, ,

in many c ases accepted the Eastern teachings of Bud

,

dh i sm H induism etc
, , .

From an occult point of view, this missionary eff ort ,

whether from East to West o r vi ce v ers e is not desirable , ,

be cause it is contrary to the trend of evolution The great .

Le aders of humanity Who are in charge of our deve l op

ment give us every aid neces sary to th at end Re l igion .

is one of these aids and there are excellent reasons why

,

the Bib le containing not only the one but both the
, ,

Jewish and Christian religions should have been given

,

to the West If we earnestly seek for light we shal l see

.

the Supreme Wisdom which has given us thi s double

religion and how no other religion of the present day is
suitab l e to our peculiar needs To this end we wil l in thi s
.
 R O S I CRU C IAN C O S M O CON C EP TION
-

dic ta r ewar ds for obedi ence and i ns tan t pu n ish m en t f or

d i s reg ar d of i ts pr ov i s1on s Thus was man taught co axed .
,

an d coerce d i n to reason i ng m a l i m i te d manner that

“
‘

the
why of q th e trans gressor i s har d an d that he mus t
“
,
fear ,

”
G od ,
or the Le ade r Who gui d e d h i m .

Ou t of all wh o w ere chosen as see d for the new Race

,
,

but few remaine d f ai thful Most of them were rebellious

“

an d so far as they wer e conce r ne d en ti rely frustrate d the

, ,
'

purp ose of the Le ade r b y i n ter m arry i ng w i th the other

Atlantean Races th us b r i n gi ng i nferior bloo d into their
,

descendants That 15 wha t i s m e ant i n the B i ble where

.

the fact i s recorde d t h at th e sons of God marr 1ed the

.

daughte rs of men F or th at act of d i s obedience were they

.

”
abandoned an d lost “
Eve n th e fa i thful d ie d accor din g
.
,

to the bo dy i n th e Deser t of Gob i ( the W i lderness ) in

,
” “

C entral As ia the cradl e of our present Race

,
They rein .

car n ate d,
as their ow n descendants of course ,
and thu s ,
”
inher i ted the P rom i se d Lan d the Earth as it is now
“
, .

They are the A ryan R aces in whom Re ason is being , ,

evolved to perfecti on .

The rebell i ous ones who w e re aba ndon ed are the Jew s
'
,

of whom the g reat m aj or ity are sti ll governed more by the

Atlante an faculty of Cunn ing than by Reason In the m .

the race feel i ng i s so stron g that they distinguish only

-

two classes of peop l e : Jews and Gentiles They de spise the .

othe r nat i ons an d are in turn desp i se d by them for thei r

cunning selfishness and avarice It is not denied that
, .

they give to charity but it i s pr i ncipally i f not exclusively

, , ,

among their own people and rarely inte rnationally as ,

was done in the case of the earthquake disaster in Italy ,

where ba rriers of cree d r ace and nationality were f or ,

gotten i n th e h u m an fe el in g of sympathy .

In such cases as that and the San Francisco disaste r th e ,

 BA CK T O T H E B I B LE 33 1 1

inner spiritua l nature of man becomes more in evidence

than under any other circumstances and the close observer ,

may then discern the trend of evolution The fact then .

becomes manifest that though in the stress of ordinary life

our actions may deny it nevertheless at heart we know and
,

acknowledge the great truth that we are brothers and the

hurt of one is really felt by all: Such incidents therefore , ,

point out the direction of evolution The contro l of man .

by Re ason must be succeeded by that of Love which at ,

pres ent acts independent of and sometimes even contrary

to the dictates of Reason Th is anomaly arises from
.

the fact that Love at pre sent is rarely quite unselfish

, ,

and our Re ason is not always true In the N e w Galilee .

“
,

the coming Sixth Epoch Lo ve will become unselfish and

,

Re ason will approve its dictates U ni v ersa l Brotherhood .

shall then be fully realized each working for the good of

,

al l because self seeking will be a thing of the past

,
-
.

That this much to b e desire d end may be attained it

- - -
,
” “
wi ll be nece ssa ry to select another cho se n people from
the prese nt stock to serve as a nucleus from which the
n ew Ra ce shall spring This choosing is not to be done
.

contrary to the will of the chosen Each man must choose .

f or himself ; he must wi lli n g ly enter the ranks .

Ra ces are but an evanescent feature of evolution B e .

f ore the end of the Lemurian Epoch there was a cho sen “

people ”
,
different from the ord i nary humanity of that
time who became the ancestors of the Atlantean Races
,
.

”
From the fifth race of those another chosen peop l e was “

drawn f r om which the Aryan Races descended of which

, ,

there have been five and will be two more Before a n ew .

Epoch is ushered i n howe v er there must be a new heaven

, ,
“

”
and a new earth ; the physical features of the Earth will
be cha nged and its density decreased There will be one .
 RO S I CRUC IA N C OS M O -
CO N C E P TI ON

Race at t h e beginning of the next Epoch but after that ,

every thought and feeling of Race w ill disappear H uman .

ity will again constitute on evast Fellowship regardless of ,

all distinctions Races are simply s teps l n evolution which

.

must be taken otherwise there will be no progress for the

,

spirits incarnating in them But though ne cessary ste ps

.
, ,

they are also extremely dangerous ones and are therefore ,

the cause of g rave concern to the Leaders of mankind .

They call these sixteen Races the sixteen paths to destr u c

“

tion bec ause while in pre v i ous Epochs the changes ca me

”
,

after s uch enormous interv als that it was easier to get

the m aj ority of the entities in l ine for promotion it is ,

di ff erent with the Races They are comparati v ely eva

.

n escen t ; therefore extra care must b e taken that as e w of

the spirits as possible become enmeshed in the f etters of

R ace .

This is exactly wh at happened to the spirits incarn ated

m the Jewish Ra ce bodies -
They attached themse l ves so
.

firm l y to the Race that they are drawn back into it in

“ ”
successi ve 1n car n ation s Once a Jew always a Jew is
.
,

their slogan They have en

. tirely forgott en their spiritual
nature and glory in the m atéri al fact of being Abraham s “ ’

” ” “
seed. Therefore they are neither fish nor flesh They .

have no part in th e ad v ancing Aryan Ra ce and yet th ey

are beyond those remnants of the Lemurian and Atlantean
pe oples which are still with us They have be come a peopl e
.

without a country an anomaly among mankind

, .

Because of their bondage to the Race idea their one -

,

time Leader was forced to abandon them and they became ,

“
lost . That they might cease to regard themsel ves as
separate from other peoples other nations were stirred up
,

against them at vari ous t imes by the Leaders of humanity

and they were led captive from th e country where they h ad
3 14 RO S I CRU CIA N C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

The rejection of Christ by the Jews was the supreme

proof of their thralldom to Race Thenceforth all efforts .

to save them as a wh ole b y giv i ng them special prophet s

and teachers were abandoned and as the futility of exiling
, ,

them in a b ody h ad been pro ven they were as a last , ,

expedient scattered among all the nations of the earth

,
.

Desp i te all however the extreme tenac i ty of this people

, ,

has pre v ailed e v en to the present d ay the maj or i ty being ,

yet or th od ox In Amerl ca however there i s now a sl igh t

.
, ,

fall ing away ; The younger generati on i s commencing to

m ar ry ou tsi de th e Race In t i me an increasing number
‘

.
,

of bod ies with fewer an d fewer of the Race characterist i cs

, ,

will thus be pro v i d ed for the incarnating spirit s of the

Jew s of the past In this manner w i ll they be sav ed in
.
‘

spite of themselves They became lost by marrying i nto

.
” “

in ferior Ra ces ; they will be saved by amalg amati n g with

th ose m ore ad v an ced
'

As the present Aryan Races are re asoning human be ings ,

capable of profiti ng by past experience th e l ogica l means ,

of helping them is by telling them of past stage s of growth

and th e fate that o v ertook the disobedient Jews Those .

rebels had a written record of how the i r Le aders had dealt

with them It set forth how t h ey had been chosen and
.

rebelled ; were punished ; but were yet hopeful of ultimate

redemption That record may be profitably used by us
.
,

that we may learn how n ot to act It is immaterial that

‘

,
.

i n the course of ag es i t has become mut i la ted and th at the

, ,

Jews of tod ay are still under the d elusion of be i ng a

“ ”
chosen people ; the lesson that m ay be drawn from their
experience is none the less v ali d We may learn h ow a .

“ ”
chosen p eople may h arass th e i r Leader frustrate H is ,

plans and become bound to a Race for ages Their e x

, .

ri en ce should be a w ar ning to any future h

“
p e c osen peo
 B A C K TO TH E B IB LE 315

”
pl e
. This Paul points out in unmistakable terms ( H eb .

i i : 34 ) For if the wor d spoken by ange l s was steadfast

“
,

and every transgression and disobed ience received a just

recompense of reward H ow shall we escape if we neglect,
”
so great salvation ? and P aul was speaking to Christians ,

for the H ebrews to whom he wrote th i s were converted had ,

accepted Chri st and were people who m he expe cte d would ,

i n some future i ncarnat i on be among the new chosen ,

“

”
people who woul d wi l lin g ly follow a Le a d er and evolve
,

the faculty of Love and Spir i tual perception the intuition ,

which shall succee d self seekin g an d Reason -

__
.

The Chri stian teaching of the N ew Testament be l ongs

particul arly to the pioneer Races of the Western World .

It is being speci ally implanted among the people of the

U nited St ates for as the object of the new Race of
, _

the Six th Epoch w i ll be th e unificat i on of all the Races the ,

” “
U nited State s is becom i ng the melting pot where all -

the nations of the earth are be i ng amalgamated an d from ,

”
this amalgamation will the n ext chosen people the “
,

nucleus be chiefly derived

,
.

Those spirits from all countries of the earth who ha ve

, ,

striven to follow the teachings of the Chr i st consc i ously ,

or oth er wi se will be incarnated here for the purpose of

,
.

giving them conditions suitable for that development .

H ence the Am erican born Jew is different from the Jew

-

of other countries The very fact that he has incarnated

.

in the Western World shows that he is becoming em an ci

pated from the Race spirit and is consequently i n advanc e
-
,

of the crystalli zed Ol d Worl d orthodox Jew as were his ,

parents or they would not have con ceived the idea of sever
,

ing the old ties and moving to Am erica Therefore the .

Amer i can born Jew i s the pioneer who will prepare

-

the path wh i ch his compatriots will follow later .

3 16 RO S I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP T ION
-

Thus we can see that the Bibl e contains the teachin g

‘

pecul i arly needed by the Western peoples that they may be

,

taught a lesson by the awful example of the Jewish Race

as recorded in the Ol d Testament and l earn to live by
,

the teachings of the Christ in the N ew willingly off ering

,

u p their bodies as a livi ng sac rifice upon th e altar of F el

3 18 R OS I CRU CIAN COS M O C ON C EP TION
-

say that the wor ds of the H ebrew language particularly ,

the old style ru n into one another an d are not divided as

,
'

are those of our language Add to this that th ere is a

.

custom of l eaving ou t vowel s f rom the w riting so that i n ,

reading much depends upon where and h ow they are

inserted and it will be seen how great are th h d ifficulties
,
‘

to be surmounted in ascertaining the original meaning .

A slight change may entirely a l ter the signification of

almost any sentence .

In addition to these gre at difficu lties we must also

bear I n m 1n d that of the forty seven translators of the -

’
K ing James version ( that most commonly used in Eng
land and America ) , only th r ee were H ebrew scholars and ,

of those three two died before the Psalms had been trans
,

lated " We must still further take into consideration that

the Act which autho rized the translation prohibited the
translators from any rendition that would greatly deviate
fro m or tend to d i sturb the already existing bel ief It .

i s evident therefore that th e chances of getting a correct

, ,

transl ation were very small indeed

N or were conditions much more f avorab l e in Germany ,

for there Martin Luther was the sole translator and e v en

he did not translate from the original H ebrew but merely ,

from a Latin text Most of the versions u sed in Conti

.

n en tal P rotestant countries today are simp l y tr ans l ations ,

’
into th e different languages of Luther s translation ,
.

True there have been r evisions b ut they h ave not

, ,
-

greatly improved matters Moreover thereis a l arge num

.
,

ber of p eop l e in this country who insist that the E ngl ish
text of the King James version is absolutely correct from
cover to cover as though the Bible had been originally
,

written in English and the K i ng Jam es ver s10 n were a

,
‘

c ertified copy of th e or iginal manuscript

-
So the ol d .
 O CC ULT A N AL Y S I S O F G E N E S IS 3 19

mistakes are still there i n spite of the eff orts which ha v e

,

bee n made to era d icate them .

It must also be noted th at those who or1g1n ally wrote

the Bibl e did not intend to give out the truth in such
plain form that h e Wh o ran might read N othing was .

further f rom their thoughts than to writ e an open book “

of God The great occultists who wrote the Zohar are

.

v ery emphatic upon this point The secrets of the Thorah

.

were not to be understood at all as the following quotat i on

,

will S how
“
Woe to the man who sees in the Thor ah ( the l aw )
“
only s impl e recitals an d ordinary words " Because if in ,

truth it contained only these we would even to day be able

,

to cpm pose a Thorah much more worthy of admirat i on .

But it is not so Each word of the Thorah contains an

.

elevated meaning and a sublime mystery Th e

.

rec i tals of the Thorah are the vestments of the Thorah .

Woe to h i m who takes this vestment of the Thorah for

the Thorah itself " The S imple take not i ce of the
garments and recit als of the Thorah alone They kno w .

no other thing They see not that which is concealed

.

under the vestment T h e m or e i ns tr u cted m en d o n ot pay

.

a tten ti on to th e v es tm en t but to the body which it en

,

”
vel op s .

In the preceding words the allegorical meanings are

pla i nly implie d P aul also unequ i vocally says that the
.

story of Abraham and the two sons whom he had by Sarah

and H agar is purely allegorical ( Gal iv :22 '
Many
.

passages are veiled ; others are to be taken verbatim ; an d

no one who has not the occult key is able to find th e deep
truth hid d en 1n what is often a very h i d eous garment .

The secrecy regard i ng these deep matters and the i n

Variable use of allegor i es Wh ere the mass of the p eopl e
3 20 ROS I CRU CI AN oos n o co n cnr r ron

were permi tted to co me in conta ct with occul t tr uths will

al so b e apparen t from the p r ac tice of Chris t w h o always ,

spoke to th e mul ti tude in parabl e af t erward pri v ately s

,

expl ai ni ng to H is d i sciples the deeper mea ning contain ed

therei n On sever al o ccas ions H e i mpos ed secr ecy upon
.

them with regard to s uch pri v ate teachi n g s .

Paul s meth ods ar e als o in harmony wi th this f or he

’
,
”
giv es m i lk or th e more elem en tary teach i ng to the
“

” ”
b abes in th e fa i th r eservi ng the meat or deeper teach
“ “
,

in g for the str ong — thos e who had qualified themselves

” “

to under stan d and r eceive them .

but we do not possess one sin gle l in e of the ori ginal writ
ing s As early as 2 8 0 B C the S ep tu agint a trans lati on
. . .
,

into Gre ek w as brought forth Ev en in th e tim e of Chr i st

, .

the re w as al rea dy th e utm os t confusi on and di versi ty of

opini o n r eg ar di ng wha t w as to be admi tted as ori ginal ,

an d what h ad been interpolated .

It w as not un til the r etur n from th e B abyl oni an ex i le

that th e scribe s began to p i ec e together th e di fferent wri t
ings and not unti l about 5 00 A D did the Talmud ap
,
. .

pear g i vi n g th e first te x t r esembling the pres en t one

, ,

wh i ch in vi ew of the foregoing facts cann ot be perf ect

, , .

The Talmud was then tak en in hand by th e Masorete

sc h ool w hi ch fr om 5 90 to about 8 0 0 A D w as principally
“

. .
,

in Ti be rias With gr eat and pa in staki ng labor a H ebrew

.
,

Ol d Test ament was produced wh i ch is the nearest to the ,

ori gin al we ha v e at the pres en t time .

Thi Ma soretic text wi ll be used i n the followi ng elucida

s

ti on of G enesi and not relyin g upon the work of one

s
, ,

tran slator i t wi ll b e s upplem ent ed h v a Germ an tran sla

,

ti on the work of three eminent H eb r ew scholars— H Arn

,
.
 ROS I CRU CIAN C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

ha v e been the pro per metho d to pursue if the authors h ad

”
meant to wr i te an open book of God ; but that was not
“

their purpose It was wr i tten solely for the init i ated

.
,

an d can be read understand i ngly by them only It woul d .

have require d much les s skill to have written the book

pla i nly than to have concealed its me aning N o pa m s .

are ever spared however to bri ng the information in d u e

, , ,

time to tho se who are enti tle d to it wh i le w i thhol d i ng

, ,

it from those who h ave not yet e arned the right to pos
sess it .

T H E N E B U LAR T H EOR Y"

Regarded by the light thrown upon the genesis and

evolut i on of our system it is plain that both renderings of
,

the open i ng sentence in the Book of Genesis are n ecessary

to an understand i ng of the subject The first tel ls tha t .

there was a beginning of our evolution in wh i c h the ,

heavens were create d ; the other interpretation supp l ements

the first st atement by add i ng that the heavens and the
“
earth were create d out of the ever exi st ing essence not -
,
“ ”
out of nothing as is jeeringly pointed out by the ma
,

ter i al i st The Cosmic Root substance is gathered together

.
-

and set in motion The rings forme d by the inertia of the

.

revolv i ng mass break away from the central part form i ng ,

planets etc as th e modern sc i enti st w i th remarkable in

,
.
, ,

g e n u i ty,
h as reasone d out O ccult and modern science
. are
in perfect harmony as to the m odu s op er an di There i s .

noth i ng in these statements inconsistent with the two

theori es as w i ll presently be shown Occult sc i ence teaches
,
.

that God i nst i tute d the process of format i on an d i s con

stan tly gu i d i ng the System i n a defin i te path The mo d ern .

sc i en ti st in refutat i on of what he calls a fool i sh i dea an d

, ,

to demonstrate that a God is not necessary takes a bas in ,

 C
O C U LT A N ALY S I S O F G E N E S I S 3 23

of water an d pours a l i ttle o i l into it The water and the .

oil represent space an d fir e mist respectively H e now -

.

commences to turn the o i l around with a needle bring ing ,

i t into the form of a sphere This he explains r epr e .

, ,

sents the Centra l Sun As he turns the oil ball fas ter and
.
-

faster i t bulges at the equator and throws off a r ing ; the

,

r ing breaks and the fragments coalesce form ing a smaller ,

ball whi ch circles around the central mass as a planet

,

circles around the Sun Then he pityingly asks the occul t.

scientist Do you not see how it is done ? There is no

,
“

need for your God or any supernatural force

,
.

The occultist readily agrees that a Solar System may

be formed i n approxi mately the manner illustrated But .

he marvels greatly that a man possessing the clear in

tuition enabling him to perceive with such accuracy the
operation of Cosmic process es and the intellect to con ,

cei v e this brill i ant demonstration of his monumental

theory should at the same time be quite unable to see
,

that in h i s demonstration h e h i m s elf p lays th e par t of

God . H i s was the extraneous power that placed the o i l
in the water where it would ha ve rema ined inert and
,

shapeless through all etern i ty had he not suppl i ed the

force that set it in motion thereby causing it to shape ,

itself into a representation of Sun and planets H i s was .

the Thought which designed the exper i ment us ing the ,

o i l water an d force thus illustrating in a splen d i d man

, ,

ner the Tr iun e God working in Cosmic substance to form

a Solar System .

The attr i butes of God are Will W i sdom and Acti v ity , ,
.

”
( See d i agram 6 N ote carefully
. what the n ame G od
“

s i gn i fies i n th i s terminology ) The scient i st has Wi ll to

.

make the e xperiment H e has ingenuity to supply ways

.

an d means for th e demonstr ation Th i s ingenu i ty corre .

3 24 R OS I CRU C I AN COS M O -
C ON C E P TION

spon d sto Wis d om the second attribute of God , .

also the muscular for é e necessary to perform the action ,

corresponding to Activi ty which is the third attribute of ,

God .

Further the universe is n ot a vast perpetu al motion ma

,
-

chine which when once set going keeps on without any

, , ,

internal cause or guiding force That a l so is proven by .

the experiment of the scientist for the moment he ceases ,

to turn the oil ball the orderly motion of his miniature

-

planets also ceases and a l l returns to a sh apel ess mass of

oil floating on the wate r In a corresponding manner th e .
,
” “
u niverse would at once dissolve into thin space if God
for one moment ceased to e xert H i s a ll em br acing c are -

and en erg i z m g activity .

The second interpretation of Genesis is marve l ousl y e x act

in its description of a twofold f ormative energy I t does .

’
not spec i fically state that God i s Triune The reader s .

knowledge of that fact is taken for granted It states the .

exact truth when i t says that only two forces are active 111
the formation of a uni v erse .

When the first aspect of the Triune God manifests as

the Will to create It arouses the second aspect ( which is
,

Wisdom ) to design a plan for the future universe This .

first man i festat i o n of Force is Imag i nation A f ter this .

primal Force of Imagination has conceived the Id ea of a

universe the th i rd aspect ( which is Activity ) working in
, ,

Cosmic substance pro d uces Motion This is the second

,
. .

manifestation of Force Motion alone however is not .

, ,

sufficient To form a system of worlds it must be or d er ly

.
,
’

motion Wisdom is therefor e necessary to guide Motion

.

in an i ntelli gent manner to produce definite results .

Thus we find the o pening sentence of th e Bo ok of

 3 26 RO S I CRU CI AN C O S M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

Elohim ( which was decidedly not only a plural wo r d

but also b oth masculine and feminine ) as being the equ i va
”
lent of the s i ngular sexless word God
, ,
Yet could they
“
.

have done diff erently even had they known ? They were
,

forb i dden to d isturb existing ideas It was not truth at

.

any price but peace at any pric e that K ing James desired
, ,

his sole anxiety being to avo i d any controversy that might

create a d i sturbance in his kingdom .

N “”
The plural them is also used where the Creation of man
"

is mentioned clearly indicating that the reference is to

,

the creation of ADM the human species and not Adam

, , ,

the i nd i vidual .

We have shown that six creative H i erarch ies ( besides

the Lords of Flame the Cherub i m the Seraph i m and the
, , ,

two unnamed H ierarchies which have passed into libera

tion ) were a ct i ve i n assisting the virgin spirits which in
themselves form a seventh H ierarchy .

T h e Che rub i m and the Serap him had nothing to do

with the creation of Form ; th erefore they are not men
tion ed in the chapter under consideration which deals ,

pr incipally with the Form side of C reation H ere we

-
.

find mentioned only the seven creat ive H ierarchies which

d i d the actual work of br i ngi ng man to where he acquired
a dense physical f orm through which the indwelling spirit
,

could work
‘

After a descr i ption of each part of the work of Creation

”
i t i s sa i d : and Elohim saw that it was good
“
This is . .

s aid seven times the last time being on the si xth day
, ,

when the human form had been created .

It i s state d that on the seventh day Elohim rested .

This is all in accord w i th our occult teaching of the part

taken by each of the creat i v e H i erarchies in the work of
evolution down to the present P eriod It is also taugh t .
 O CC U LT AN ALY S I S O F G E N E S IS 327

th at in the present Epoch the Gods and creati v e

H ierarchies h ave withdr awn from active participatio n that ,

man may work out his own s alvation leaving the neces ,

Sary guidanc e of ordinary hu ma nity to the E l der “

”
Brothers wh o are now th e m ediato r s between m an and
,

th e God s .

TH E S AT URN PE RI OD .

H aving satis fi ed ourse l ves that the beginning of our

System and the work of the creative H ierarchies as de ,

,
-s

scribed b y occu lt science h armoni ze Wi th the teachings of

‘

,
"
the Bibl e we wi ll now examine the Bible account of the
,
“ ”
diff erent D ays of Creation and see how they agree w i th
the occul t teaching s relative to the Saturn Sun an d Moon , ,

Periods ; the three and one hal f Revolutions of the Earth -

Period ; an d the P ol ar ian H yperborean Lemurian and , , ,

Atlantean Epochs which have preceded the present Aryan

,
'
Epo ch .

N aturally a detailed account could not be given in a

,

few lines like the first chapter of Genesis but the ma i n ,

points are there i n orderly succession very much like an ,

algebraical formu l a for Creation

“
The second verse proceeds : The Earth was waste and
uninhabited and darkness r ested upon the face of the deep ;
,

and the Spirit s of the Elohim floated above the dee p In .

the beginning of manifestation that which is now the

Earth was in the Saturn P eriod an d in e x actly the condi ,

tion described as m ay be seen by referring to the d escr ip

,

tions already given of that Period It was not without .

“

”
form and void as e x pressed in th e Ki ng James version
,
.

It was hot and thus well d efin ed and separate f rom the
‘

,
-

deep of space which was cold It is true that it was

,
.
“

”
dark but it cou l d be dark an d still be hot f or dark
, ,
“
328 R OS I CRU C I A N C O S M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

heat necessarily precedes glowing or visibl e heat Above .

this dark Earth of the Saturn Period floated the creative

H ierarchies They worked upon it from the outs ide and
.

molded it The Bib l e refers to them as the Spirits of the

.
“

”
E l o h im .

TH E S U N P ERI OD .

The Su n Period is wel l described in th e third verse ,

which says And the Elohim said Let there be Light ;

,
“
,
”
and there was Light This passage has been j eered at as
.

the most ridiculous nonsense The scornful query has been .

put H ow could there be light upon the Earth when the

,

Sun was not made until the fourth day ? The Bib l e nar
rator however is not speaking of the Earth alone H e
, ,
.

” “
is speaking of the central Fire mist from which were -
,

formed the planets of our system including the Earth ,

.

Thus when the nebul a reached a state of gl owing heat ,

which it did in the Sun P eriod there was no n ec essity ,

f or aln outside illuminant ; the Light was within .

In the fourth verse we read : The Elohim di ff erentiated “

”
between the light and the darkness N ecessarily for the .
,

outside space was dark in contradistinction to the gl ow

,

ing nebul a which existed during the Sun Period .

TH E M OON P E R I OD .

Th e Moon Period is described in the sixth verse as f ol ,

lows : and Elohim said Let there be an ex pans i on ( trans

“
,
”
lated fir m am en t in other versions ) in the waters ; to di
”
vide the water from the water This exactly describes .

cond i tions in the Moon P eriod when th e heat of the glow ,

ing fir e mist and th e cold of outsid e space had formed a

-

body of water around the fiery core The contact of fire

,
.

and water genera ted s team whi ch i s water in e x pansion,

,
 R OS I CRU CIAN C osM o OON OEP TI N
-
O
first firm incrustation . H ea t
and moisture had g ene rated
the solid body of our present Gl obe .

T h e P olari an E p och : The ninth verse which describes ,

the Earth Period in this fourth Revol ution ( where the

re al Earth Period work commenc ed ) also describ es the ,

formation of the mineral kingdom and the Recapitul ation

by man of the m l n er al stage in the P ol ar ian Epoch Each .

Epoch is also a Recapitulation of the previous stage Jus t .

as there are Recapitulations of Globes Revolutions and , ,

Periods so there are on each Globe recapitulations of al l

, ,

that has gone before These Recapitulations are endless

. .

,
—
There is always a spira l within a sp i ral in th e atom in ,

the Globe and in all other phases of evolution

,
.

C omplicated and bewildering as this may appear at

first it is really n ot so difficult to understand There i s
,
.

an orderly method running through it all and in time one

is able to percei v e and follow the workings of this metho d ,

as a clue leading through th e m az e Analogy is on e of the

‘

best h elps to an understanding of evolution .

T h e H yp er b or ean E p och is described in v erses 1 1 to 1 9 ,

"
as the work of the fourth day It is h ere recorded tha t
.

Elohim created the plant kingdom the S un the Mo on , , ,

and the stars .

The Bible agre es with the t eaching of modern science

that plants succeeded the m l n er al The difference b e.

tween the two teach i ngs is in regard to the time when the
Earth w as thrown off from the central mass Science as .

s erts that it was before the format i on o f any incrustation

which coul d be called m i neral and plant If we mean .

such m i nerals and plants as we have today that assertion ,

i s correct . There was no dense material substance b u t ,

nevertheless the first incrustati on that took place in the

central Sun was mineral The Bible narrator give s only
.
 O CC U LT AN AL Y S I S OF GEN E S IS 331

the principal incidents It is not recorded that the in

.

crustation melted when it was thrown off from the central

mass as a ring which broke the fragments afterward ,

coalescing In a body as small as our Earth the time r e

.
,

qu i re d for recrystall i zation was so comparatively short that

the historian does not mention i t nor the further sub ,

sidi ary fact that the melting process took place once m ore

when the Moon was thrown ofi from the Earth H e prob .

ably reasons that one who is entitled to occult i nformation

is already in possession of such minor deta i ls as those .

The plants of the incrustation of the central fir e m i st -

were ethereal therefore the melting processes did not d e

,
"

stroy them As the lines of force along which the ice

.

crystals form are present in the water so when the Earth ,

crystallized were those ethereal plant forms present i n i t

,
-
.

They were the molds which drew to themselves the dense

m ater i al form ing the plant bodies of the present day an d
-

also of the plant forms of the past which are embedded

-

in the geolog i cal strata of our Earth globe .

- These ethereal plant forms were a i ded in their forma

-

tion when the heat came from outside after the separa ,

t i on of the Earth from Sun and Moon That heat gave .

them the vital force to dra w to themselves the denser sub

stance.

T h e Lem u ri an E p och is descr i bed in the work of the

fifth day This Epoch be i ng the th i rd is in a sense a
.
, ,

Recapitulation of the Moon P eriod and in the Bibl i ca l ,

narrative we find described such conditions as Obtained in

—
the Moon eriod water fir e fog and the fi rst attempts
P ,
-
,

at moving breathing life

, .

V erse s 2 0 and 2 1 tell us that Elohim said Let the

“
,

waters bring forth life breathing things -

and
fowl and Elohim formed the great amphibians
 ROSI CRIICIA N COSMIC CON C E PTION -

and all life breathing things according to their species an d

-
,

all fowl with wings .

This also harmonizes with the teaching of material sci

ence that the amphibians preceded the birds .

The student is invited to note particularly that th e

th i n gs th at wer e for m ed wer e n ot Lif e It does n ot say .

”
that Life was created but “th ings th at br eath e or i n h ale
,
‘ ‘

life
. The H ebrew word for that which they in
hale is n ep h es h and it should be carefully noted as we
, ,

shall meet it in a new dress later .

T h e A tlan tean E p och i s dealt with in the work of the

sixth day In vers e 2 4 the cre ation of mammals is men
.

ti on ed and there the word n eph es h aga i n occurs e xplain

, ,

ing that the m ammal s breathed life Elohim said Let

“ “
,

the earth bring forth life breathing things -

mam
“
mals and in verse 2 7 Elohim forme d man ,

i rf their likeness ; male and female made they " Elohim ]

”
them .

The Bib le historian here omits the a se x ual and -

hermaphrodite human stages and comes to the two sepa

rate sexes as we know them now H e c ould not do other
, .

wi se as he is describing the Atlantean Epoch and by the

, ,

tim e that stage In evolut i on was reached there were neither

sexless men nor hermaphrodites the d i fferent i at i on of the,

sexes having taken place earlier— in the Lemurian Epoch .

That which a f terward became man could hardly be spoken

of as man in the earlier stages of its development as it
'

diff ere d but little from the animals Therefore the B i ble .

narrato r is doing no violence to facts when he state s that

man was formed in the Atlantean Epoch .

In verse 2 8 ( all versions ) will be found a very small

prefix with a very gre at s i gnificance :
,
Elohim said Be “
,
”
f ruitful and R E plenish the earth -
This plainly sho ws .
3 34 RO S I CRU C I A N C OS M O C O N C E P T I ON -

The reader is re f erred to diagram 1 4 for an accurate under

standing of the positi on and constitution of Jehov ah -
.

As Regent of our Moon H e has charge of the degen ,

crate evil Beings there and H e a l so rules the Angels

, , .

With H im are some of the Archangel s who were the h u ,

manity of the Sun They are called the Race spirits

.
“
-
.

It is the work of Jehovah to build concrete b odies or

forms by means of the hardening c rystallizing Moon
, ,

forces Theref ore H e is the giver of children and the

.

Angel s are His messengers in this work It is well known .

to physiologists that the Moon i s connected with gestation ;

at least they have observed that it measures and go v ern s
,

the periods of intra uterine life and other physio l ogica l

-

functions .

The Archangel s as Spirits and Leaders of a Race are

, ,

known to fig ht for or against a people as the exigencies ,

of the evo l ution of that Race demand In Daniel x :2 0 .

,

ah Archange l
“
speaking to Daniel says And now will I
, , ,

return to fight with the prince of Persia : and when I am

“

”
gone forth l o the prince of Grecia shal l come
, , .

The Archangel Michael is the Race spirit of th e Jews -

( Dan i e l x ii zl ) but J eh,ov a h is n ot th e God of th e J ews

alon e ; H e is th e Au th or of a ll R ace relig ion s wh i ch l ed u p -

to C h r is tian i ty N evertheless it is true that H e did take

.
,

a specia l interes t in the p rogenitor s of the present degen

er ate Jews — the Original Semites the seed race for the ”
,
“
-

seven races of the Aryan Epoch Jehovah of course takes .

, ,

specia l care of a seed race in which are to b e inculcated

-
,

th e embryonic faculties of the humanity of a n ep och .

For that reason H e was particularly concerned with the

Original Semites They were H i s chosen people —chosen
“
.

to be th e seed for a new Race which was to inh eri t th e ,

 O CC U LT A N ALY S I S O F GE N E S IS 33 5

Promised Land — not merely insignificant P alestine, but

the entire Earth as i t i s at present
, .

'

He did not lead them out of Egypt That story orig .

i n ated with their descendants and is a co nf us ed account

of their journey eastward through flood and disaster out
” “
of the doome d Atlantis into the w i lderness ( the Desert
of Gobi in Central Asia ) there to wander during the
,

cabalistic forty years until they cou l d enter the P romised

,

Land There is a double and peculiar significance to the

.

”
descriptive word promised in this connect i on The land
“
.

was called the prom i sed Land because as land or earth ,

suitable for human occupation it d i d not exist at the t i me

,
”
the chosen people were led into the wi lderness
“
P art
‘
.

of the Earth had been submerg ed by floods and other parts

chan ged by volcanic eruptions h ence it wa s necessary that
,

a period of ti me elapse before the new Earth was in a

fit condition to become the possession of the Aryan Race .

The Original Semites were set apart and forbidden to

marry into other tr i bes or peoples but they were a st i ff ,
-

necked and hard people being yet led almost exclusi v ely
,

by desire and cunning therefore they disobeyed the com

,

mand T h eir Bible records that the sons of God married

.

the daughters of man—the lower grades of their Atlantean

compatriots They thus frustrate d the des i gns of Jeho v ah
.

and were cast off the fruit of such cross breed i ng be i ng

,
-

useless as seed for the coming Race .

The se cross breeds were the progenitors of the present

-

”
Jews who now speak of lost tr i bes
, They know that
“
.

some of the original n umber left them and went another

way but th ey do not know that those were th e few who
,

remained true The story of the te n tribes be i ng lost is a

.

fable Most of them perished but the faithful ones su r

.
,
 336 ROS I C RU C IAN C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

vi ved, an d
from that f aithful remnant have descended the
present Aryan Races .

M
“
: The contention of the oppon ents of the Bibl e, that it i s a
mere muti lat i on of the original writings is ch eerfully
'

agreed to by occult science P arts of it are even conceded

.

to be entire fabricat i ons an d no attempt is made to prove

its authenti c i ty as a whole in the form we now h aVe i t
,
.

The present effort i s simply an attempt to e xhume a few

kernels of occult truth from the bewilderi ng mass of mis
leading and i ncorrect interpretat i ons under which they
have been burie d by the various translators n d rev i sors
a
.

I N VOLU T I ON EVOLU TI ON
,
AN D E P I GE N E S I S .

H aving in the foregoing paragraphs d isentangled fro m

the general con q I On the i d ent i ty an d miss i on of Jehovah ,

it may be that we can now find harmony in the two seem

ing ly contra d ictory accounts of the creation of man as ,

r ecorded i n the first and second chapters O f Genesis in the ,

first of which it is written that he was the last an d in the ,

second that he was the first created of all liv ing things .

We note that the first chapter deals chiefly with the

creation of Form the second chapter is devoted to the
,

consideration of Life while the fifth chapter de al s wit h

,

Consciousness The key to the meaning then is that we

.
, ,

mus t di fferentiate sharply between the physical Form and ,

the Life that bu i lds that Form for i ts own express i on Al .

though the order of the creation of the other kin n m s i s

not as correctly given in the second chapter as in the firs t ,

it i s true that if we consider man from the Life s i de he ,

was created firs t but i f we consider him from the stan d

,

point of Form as is done in the first chapter he was

, ,

created las t .

—
All through the course of evo l ution through Peri od s ,
 ROSI CRU CIA N CO S M O CON C EP TION -

ent ered it by Involut ion ; but the means for devising im

m nts i s Epigenesis
p r o ve e .

There is a strong tendency to regard al l that is as the ,

r esul t of something that has been ; al l improvements on

p reviously e x isting forms as bein g present

,
in all forms
as l atencies ; to regard Evolution as simply the unfolding

of germinal improvements Such a conception excludes

.

Epigenesis from the scheme of thing s It allows no possi .

_

b il ity for the bui l ding of anything n ew no scope for orig ,

in ali ty .

The occultist be l ieves the purpose of evol ution to b e th e

development of man from a static to a dynamic God a —
Creator If the development he is at present undergoing
.

is to be his educa tion and if during i ts progress he is , ,

simply unfo lding l at ent actualities wher e doe s he l ea rn ,

to CREAT E ?
If man s devel opment consists so l ely In l earning to bui ld
’

better and better Forms a ccording to m od els already e xist

,
’
ing in his Creator s mind he can become at best only a
, , ,

g ood i m i tator — never a cr eator .

In order that he may become an independent original ,

Creator it i s necessary that his training should includ e

,

su flicien t latitu de for the e x ercise of the in d i vi du al orig

i n al i ty which distinguish es creation from imitation So .

long as Certa i n features of the old Form meet the require

"

ments of progression they are retained but at each r e ,

I ncarnation the evolving Life adds such origina l improve

ments as are necessary for its further e xpress i on .

The pioneers of science are Constantly brought face to

f ace with Epigenesis as a fact In all departments of
nature As e arly as 1 7 5 9 Caspar Wob f publ ished his
.
,
‘

“
Theori a Gen eration i s in which he shows that i n the
-

human ovum ther e is absolutely no trace of the com in g

 OCC ULT AN A LYS I S OF G EN E S I S 3 39

org anism ; th at its evolution consists of the addition of n ew

"

f ormations ; a building of something which is not latent

in the ovum .

H mckel ( that gre at and fear l ess student of nature as h e

see s it and very near toknowledge of the complete truth
,

re garding evolution ) s ays of the Theoria Gen er ationi s” “

“
Despite its small compass and d ifficult terminology i t is ,

one of the most valuable works in the whole literature of

bio l ogy .

H aecke l s own views we find thus stated in his An

’ “
,

”
th r opog en i e
“
N owadays we are hardly justified in call
°

ing Epigenesis an hypothesis as we have fully convinced ,

ourselves of its being a FACT and are ab l e at any moment “

”
to de monstrate it by the help of the microscope .

A b u il der wou ld be but a sorry craftsman were his abili

'

ties limited to the building of houses after only one par

ti cu l ar model which during his apprenticeship his master
, , ,

had taught him to imitate but which he is unable to alter

,

to meet new re quirements T o be successful he must be.

capable of designing n ew and better houses improving ,

that which experience teaches was not serviceable in the

earlier bui l dings The same force which the builder now
.

directs outward to build houses better adapted to new

conditions was used in past P eriods to build new and bet
ter vehicles for the evolution of the Ego
Starting with th e simplest organ i sms the Life which is ,

now M an built the Form to suit its necessities In due .

time as the entity progressed i t became evid ent that new

, ,

improvements must be added which conflicted With the

lines previously followed A new start must b e given i t in
.

a n ew speci es wh er e it could retrie ve any previous mis

~

takes Which experience taught would precl ude further de

v el opm en t if the O l d lines were adhered to and thu s th e ,
3 40 RO S I CRU C IAN C O S M O C ON C EP T I O N
-

e v olving li f e woul d be enabled to progress further in a

new species . When later experi ence proved that the n ew
form also was inadequate inasmuch as it coul d not ad apt
,

itself to some improvement necessary to the progress of the

evolving life it too was discarded and s til l another de
,

p ar ture made in a form

,
adaptable to the necessary i m
provement .

Thus by successive steps does the evolving Life improve

its vehicles and the improvement is still going on Man
,
.
,

who is in the vanguard of progress has built his bodies , ,

from the sim il i tu d e of the am oeba up to th e human form

of the savage and from that up through the various grades
,

until the most a d vanced races are now u srn g the best and
most highly organized bodies on Earth Between deaths .

and rebirths we are const antly build i ng bodies in wh ich to

function during our l i ves and a far greater degree of ef
ficien cy than the present w i ll yet be reached If we make .

nl i stakes in buil d ing between i ncarnat i ons they become ,

e v ident when we are using the body in Earth l i fe an d it is -

w ell for us if we are able to perce i ve an d real i ze our mis

takes th at we may avoid making them afresh life after
,
.

life .

But j u st as the builder of houses would lag commercially

I f he did n ot con stantly improve h i s meth ods to meet the

exigencies of h i s business so thos e who pers i stently adhere

“

to th e ol d forms fail to rise above the spec i es and are left

behind as stragglers These stragglers take the forms
,
.

o u tgrown h y th e pioneers as prev i ously explained an d they

’

, ,

compose the lower Races and specie s of any kingdom in

which they ar e evo l ving As the Li fe wh i ch i s now Man
.

passed through stages analagous to the mineral plant and , ,

animal k i ngdoms and through the lower h uman Races "

stragglers W er e l e f t a ll a l ong the way who h ad failed to

 R OS I CRU C IAN C OS M O C ON C EP TION
-

”
b a ffled in h is eff orts to find the mis sing l ink conn ecting “

the two .

From the point where the p i oneers of our life wav e ( The
Aryan Races ) occup i ed ape l i ke forms they have pr ogr essed -

to their present stage of d evelopment while the Form s ,

”
( which were the missing link ) have d eg en erated and are
“

n ow ensouled by the l ast str aggl er s of the Saturn Period .

The l ower monkeys in stead of b eing the progenito rs of

,

the higher species are stragglers occupying the most de

,

generated specimens Of what was once the hum an form .

Instead of man h av1n g ascended f rom the anthropoids th e ,

—
reverse is true the anthropoids have degenerated from
man Material sc i ence dealing only with Form has thus
'

.
, ,

misled itself an d dr awn erroneous conclusions in this mat

ter .

The same r elative conditions are to b e found in the an i

mal kingdom The pioneers of the life wave which en
.

ter ed evo l ution in the Sun Period are our present day -

mammals The different grades correspond to the steps

.

once taken by man but th e for m s ar e a ll d eg en erating

,

u n d er th e m an ag em en t of th e s tr agg l ers
‘

S i m i larly the .
,

pioneers of the l ife w ave which entered evoluti on in the

Moon Period are found among the fruit trees while the ,

stragglers of th at life wave en sou l al l other plant forms -

.

Each life wave however remain s definitely confined

, ,

within its own b orders The anthropoids may overtake us .

and become human beings but no other anim al s will reach ,

our particular point of development They wil l reach a .

S i m i lar stage but under d ifier en t cond i tions in the J upiter

, ,

P er i od The present plants will be the hum anity of the

.

V enus P eriod under a st i ll greater d i fference of cond i t i on

, ,

and our m i nerals will reach the human stage under the
‘

conditions of the Vu l can Peri od .

 O CC U LT A N AL Y S I S OF G EN E S I S 3 43 .

It will be noted that the modern evolutionary theory ,

p a r ticularly th at of H aeckel would if it were completely

, ,

reversed be in almost perfect accord with the kn ow l edge

,

of occult science .

The monkey has degenerated from the man .

The polyps are the last degeneration l eft beh in d by the

mammals .

The mosses ar e the l owest degenerat ions of the plant

kingdom .

The mineral kingdom is the final goal of the forms

of a l l the kingdoms when they have reached the acme
of degeneration .

A corroboration of this is found in coal which was once ,

vegetable or plant forms ; als o i n petrified wood and fos

sil i z ed remains of various animal forms Common stone .

or rock which no scientist would admit had its orig i n i n

,

another kingdom is to the occult investigator as truly

,

minera l ized plants as coa l itself The mineralogist wi l l .

l earnedly explain that it is composed of hornblende fel d ,

spar and mica but the trained clairvoyant who can trace
, ,

i t back in the memory of N ature through mill i ons of years

, ,

can supplem ent that statement by adding : Yes and that ,

which you cal l hornblende and feldspar are the leaves and
stems of prehistor ic flowers and the mic a is all that remains
,

of their peta l s .

The occult teaching of evolution is also corroborated

by the science of embryology in the ante natal recapitula -

tion of all past stages of development The diff erence b e .

tween the ovum of a human be i ng and of some of the higher

mammals and even of the higher developments in the plant
,

k i ngdom is ind i st i nguishable even under the micro scope

, , .

Experts are unable to tell which is an i mal and which is

hum an Even after several of the initial ante natal stages
.
-
 RO S I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

hav e been passed through the experts cannot differentiate

between animal and human embryo .

But if the animal ovum is studied th r ough th e ent i re ~

period of gestation it will be observed that it pas ses

,

through the mineral and plant stages only and is born ,

‘

when it reaches the animal stage This is because the .

Life ensouling such an ovum passed through its mineral

]

e v olut i on in the Sun P eriod its plant l i fe in the Moon

,

P eriod and i s now forced to stop at the anima l stage in

,

the E ar th P er i od
,
.

On the other hand the Lif e which uses the human ovum
,

had its mineral existence in the Saturn P eriod its plant ,

existence in the S un P eriod passed the animal stage in the

,

Moon P eriod has still some scope for Epigenesis after it

,

has reached the animal stage and therefore goes on to the

—
human nor doe s it stop there The father and mo ther .

giv e the substance of their bodies for the building of the

’
ch ild s body but particularly in th e higher races Epi
, , ,

genesis makes i t poss i ble to add some thing whi ch makes

the ch ild di fferent from the parents .

—
Where Epigene sis is inact i v e i n the individual family , ,

nation or Race there evolutio n ceases and d eneg er ati on

commences .

A LIVI N G S OU L ?

Thus th e two C reation stories harmonize very wel l .

On e deals with Form which was built up through min

,

eral plant and animal and reached the human las t

,
.

The other tells us that the Life wh i ch now ensouls human

forms was man i fested anterior to the Life which ens oul s
the forms of the other kingdom s .

On e of these ac counts of Creat i on would not have b een

sufficien t Th er e are i m portant particul ars hidden b eh ind
.
 RO S I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON ‘
-

H is Angels and Archangels were the pri ncipals in this ,

action fixes the time when this creat i on occurred It was .

between th e early and the middle parts of the Lemuri an

Epoch and must have been afte r the Moon was thrown
,

out from the Earth because Jehovah had nothing to do

,

wi th the generation of bodies before the Moon was throw n

off
. The forms were then more ethereal There were no .

dense and concrete bodies It is poss i ble to make such .

bodie s only by means of the hardening and crystallizin g

M oon forces
-
It must have been in the first half of th e
.

Lemurian Epoch because the separat i on of the sexes

, ,

which is recorded later took place in the middle of that

,
.

epoch .

At that time man in the making had not yet commenced

- - -

to breathe by means of lungs H e had the g ill l i ke ap .

-

paratus still present in the human embryo whi l e passing

through the stage of ante natal life corresponding to that -

E poch H e had no warm red blood for at that stage there

.
, ,

was no indiv idual spirit th e entire form was soft and,

pliable an d th e skeleton soft like cartilage Befor e the .

later date when it became necessary to separate humanity

,

into s ex es the skeleton had grown firm and solid

,
.

The work done by Jehovah was to b ui ld dense hard bone ,

substance into the soft bodi es already existing P revi ous .

to this time i e d uring the P ol ar i an and H yperborean

,
. .
,

Epochs neither animal nor man had bones

,
.

R IB
’
A DAM S .

The grotesque and impossible manner i n wh ich the sep

arat i on of the sexes is said to have been accomplished ( as

descr i be d i n the common vers i ons of the Bible and i n th i s ,

part i cular case i n the Masoretic text also ) i s anoth er e x

,
-

ample of what may be done by changi ng vowels in the old

 O CC ULT A N AL Y S I S O F GE N E S IS 34 7

“
H ebrew te x t Read in one way the word is rib but in ,

another which has at least as good a claim to considera

,

tion with the additional ad v antage of being com m on sen se

,
e
,
”
i t reads side If we i nterpret this to mean that m an
.

was male female and that Jehovah caused one side or se x

-

in each being to remain latent we shall not be doing vio ,

-

” “
lence to our reason as we would by accepting the rib
,

story .

When this alteration i s made th e occu lt teaching as ,

previously given harmonizes with that of th e Bible an d both

a g ree with the teaching of modern science that man was
b i se xual at one time before he developed one se x at the
-

expense of the other In corroboration of this it is pointed

, .
,

out that the foetus is bi sex u al u p to a certa i n point ; there

’

after On e se x predominates while the other remains in ,

abeyan ce so that each person still has the opposite se x

,

organs i n a rudimentary form and therefore is really b i

sexual as was p rim i tive man
, .

Apparently the Bible narrator does not wish to give in ,

this secon d creation account an accurate picture of the ,

whole of evol ution but rather to particularize a little more

,

what was said in the first chapter H e tells us that man .

did not always breathe as he does now ; that there was a

time when he was not separated into se xes ; and that it was
Jehovah Who effected the change thus fi x ing the time of ,

the occurrence As we proceed it wi ll b e f ound that much

.
,

further information is g iven .

G U ARDI AN A N GELS .

During the earl ier Epochs and Periods th e g reat creative

H ierarchies had worke d upon human i ty as it was u n con
sci ou sl y evo l ving There h ad been only on e com m on con
.
 ROS I CRU C IA N C O S M O C ON C EP TI ON -

sci ous n essamong ALL human being s ; one group Spirit -

for all mankind as it wer e

,
~

In the Lemurian Epoch a new step was taken Bodies .

had been definitely formed but they must have warm red
, ,

blood before they could be ensouled and become the abode

of indwell ing spirits .

In nature no process is sudden We would get a wrong .

idea were we to imagine that air blown into th e nostrils

could put a soul into an image of clay and gal vani z e it into
l ife as a sentient th i nk i ng being
, .

The i ndividual sp i rit was very weak and imp otent and
quite u nfitted for the task of guiding its dense vehicle .

In that r espect it is not yet very strong T o any qualified .

observer it is evi d ent that the des i re body rules the per
,

son al i ty more than does the spir i t even at our present ,

stage of advancement But in the mid d le of the Lemuri an

.

—
Epoch when the lower personality the threefold body
,

wag to be endowed w i th the l i ght of the Ego the l atter , ,

if l eft to it self would have been abs olutely powerl ess to

‘

guide its instrument .

Therefore it was necessary for someone much more high ly

evolved to help th e indiv i dual S p i r i t and gradually prepare
the way for its complete union with its instruments It .

Was an a l ogous to a new nation over which until it b e , ,

c omes capable of form i ng a stable government for itself ,

s ome stronger power establishes a protectorate guarding it ,

alike from external dangers and internal indiscretions .

Such a protectorate was exercised over evolving hum anity

by the Race spirit and is exercised over the an i mals by the
-
,

group spirit in a som ewhat d i fferent way

-
,
.

Jehovah is the Most H i gh H e is Race God as one .

-
,

might expres s it h aving dominion over all Form H e is

,
.

'
the Chief Ruler and the highest P ower i n m ain tai nin g th e
3 50 R OSI CR C U I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P TION

chapter we fin d these words for the soul of °

the flesh is in the blood the blood itself me d i ate s

”
for the soul wh i ch shows that th i s applies to both man
,

and beast for the word here used in the H ebrew i s

,

n esh am ah and means soul —not life as it is rendered

” “ “
,

i n th e K ing James version .

The Ego works directly through the blood The Race .

spir i t gu i des the Rac es by wo rk i ng in th e blood as the ,

group spirit guides the animals of i ts spec i es through the

-

blood So also does the Ego control its own vehicle but
.
,

with a di fference .

The Ego operates by means of the h eat of the blood ,

while the Race ( i e tribal or family ) spirit works by

. .
, ,

means of the air as i t is drawn i nto the lungs That is

, .

why Jehovah or H i s messengers breathed into m an s

, ,
“ ’

”
nostrils thereby securing admission for the Race Spirit,
,
-

Community Spir i ts etc -

, .

The d i fferent classes of Race sp i rits g uided their people s -

to var i ous climates an d di fferent parts of the Earth To .

the tra i ned cla i r v oyant a tribal sp i r i t appears as a c loud,

-

enveloping and permeat i ng the atmosphere of the whole

country inhabite d by the people under its domini on Thus . ,

are produced the d i fier en t peoples and nati ons P aul spoke .

”
of The P rince of the P ower of the A i r of principal i ties
“ “

”
and powers etc showing that he knew of the Race spirits
,
.
-
,

but now not even an attempt is ma d e to understand what

they mean although the i r influence i s strongly felt P atr iot
,
.

i sm is one of the sentiments emanating from and fostered

by them It has not now so much power over people as

.

formerly There are some who are be i ng liberated from

.

“
th e Race spir it and c an say with Thomas P aine
-
The ,
”
world is my country There are thos e who can leave
.

father and moth er an d look upon all men as brothers .

 O CC ULT A N ALY S I S OF GEN E S IS 3 51

They are being liberated f rom the Family spirit or spirit

”

-
,

of the Clan which is di ff erent f rom the race spirit, an

,
-

etheric entity Others aga i n who are deep in the to i ls of

.
,

the Race or Family spir i t w i ll suff er th e most d rea d ful

-
,

depression if they leave home or country and breathe the

air of another Race or Fam i ly spi rit -
.

At the time th e Race spirit entered human bod i es the

-

individualized Ego commenced to get some sl i ght control

of its vehicles Each human entity became more and more
.

conscious of being separate and distinct from other men ,

yet for ages h e d i d not think of h i mself pr i ma r i ly as an

'

ind i vi d ual but as belong i ng to a tribe or a family The

,
.

”
afli x
“
son to many present d ay surnames is a remnant of -

this f eel i ng A man was not S i mply John or James

.
” ” “
,
“
.

He was John Roberts on or James Will i ams on In some

, .

” ” “ “
countries a woman was not Mary or Martha She was ,
.

Mary M ar th asd au gh ter M ar th a M arysd au gh ter This cus

,
x

tom was continued in some European countries until w i th

”
in a few generations of the present time the son affix “

remains with us yet and the fam i ly name is st i ll much

honored .

Among the Jews even down to the time of Christ the

, ,

Race spirit was stronger th an the indiv i dual S pir i t Every

-
.

Jew thought of himself firs t as belonging to a certain tri be '

or family H i s proudest boast was that he was of the

.

“ ”
Seed of Abraham All th i s was the work of the Race
.

spirit .

Previous to the advent of Jehovah when the Earth was ,

yet a part of the Sun there was one common group spir i t
,
-
,

compos ed of al l the creative H ierarchies which controlled ,

the entire human family but it w as intended that each

,

body shou l d be the temple and pliable instrument of an in ‘

 R O S I OR U OI AN C O S M O lOON cE P T I ON

dwelling spirit and that meant an infinite di vision of

rulership .

Jehovah came with H is Angels and Archangel s and made "

the first great d ivision into Races g ivi n g to each group the ,
'

guiding influence of a Race sp i rit— an Archangel -

For .

each Ego H e appointed one of the Angels to act as guard i an

n

unt i l the i n d i vi d u al spiri t had grown strong enough to b e

come emancipated from all outs i de influen ce .

M I XI N G B LOOD IN M ARRI AGE .

C hrist came to prepare the way for the emancipation

of humanity from the guidance of the diff erentiat i ng Race
and Fam ily sp i r i t and to unite the whole human f am i ly
-
,

in On e U niversal Brotherhood .

H e t aught that Abraham s seed referred to the b odi es

“ ’

only and cal l ed the i r attention to the fact that before

,

Abraham l i ved " the ] the Ego—was i n em sten ce The

-
.

threefold in d ividual spirit had its bein g before all Tribes

and Races and it wil l rema i n when they h ave passe d away
and even th e memory of them is no more .

The threefold spirit in man the Ego is the God within , , ,

whom the personal bodily man must learn to f ollow

,
.

Therefore did Christ say that to be H i s disciple a man , ,

must forsake all that he h ad H i s teaching points to th e

emancipation of the God within H e calls upon m an to .

exercise h i s prerogative as an individual and rise above

fam i ly tribe and nation N ot that he is to di sregard kin
, ,
.

an d country .H e must fulfill all duties but he is to cease ,

id entifying him sel f with part and must r ecognize an equal -

kinship with a ll the world Tha t is the ideal given to

.

mankind by the Christ .

—
U nder the r u l e of th e Race spirit the nation tr ibe or
~

_
-
, ,

f amily was considered fir st the indi vidual last The fam .

 ROSICR U CIA N COS M O -
C ON C EP TION

made by great grandfather grandfather and f ather are re

-
,

pro d uced in th e son by the f amily spirit which lived in the

.
-

h aem ag l ob in of the blood H e sees h im se lf as the continu

.
-

ation of a long line of ancestors who live in h i m H e sees

"

. .

all the events of the past lives of th e family as th ough he

had been present therefore he does not realize himself as
,
”
“

an Ego H e i s not si mply David but the s on of Abra

.
“
,
“

” ”
“ ”
ham ; not Jo seph but the Son of David ,
.

By mean s of this common blood men are said to have

lived for many generat i ons because thro ugh the blood their ,

d escendants h ad access to the memory of nature i n which ,

the records of th e lives of their ancestors were preserved “

That is why in the fifth chapter of Gene sis it i s stated

, ,

that the patriarchs lived for centu r i es Adam Methuselah '

.
,

an d th e other patr iarchs d id n ot p er s on al ly attain to suc h

great age but they lived i n the consciousness of their de

,

scen d an ts who saw the lives of th eir ancestors as if th ey

,

h ad lived them After the expirat i on of the period stated

.
,

the d escendants did not th i nk of themselves as Adam or

Methuselah Memory of those ancestors faded an d so i t
.

i s said they died

”
The second S ight of the Scotch H ighlanders Shows
“

that by means of endogamy th e consc iousness of the inner

WOrl ds is retained They hav e pract i ced marrying in th e
.

Clan unt i l recent ti mes ; also in G i ps i es who always marry ,

in the trib e The smaller th e tribe and the cl oser the in

.

” “
breeding, the more pronounced is the sight .

The earlier Races would not have dared to disobey the

i n j u n cti on i ssu ed by the tribal God not to marry outside
i

of th e tribe nor had they any inclination to do so for

, ,

they had no mind of their own .

The Or i ginal Sem i tes were the first to evolve Will an d ,

they at once married the daughters of the men of other

 OCC U LT AN ALY S I S O F G E N E S I S 3 55 ‘

tribe s, f rustrating tempora rily the design of their Race

“

spirit and being promptly ej ecte d as evil doers who had -

“
gone a whoring after S trange god s thereby rendering
-
”
,
:

”
themse l ves unfit to give the seed for the seven Races of
“

our present Aryan Epoch The Ori g i nal Semites were f or

.
,

the time being the last Race that the Race spirit cared to
,
-

keep separate .

Later m an was given free will

,
The time had come
.

when he was to be prepared for i ndividualization T h e .

”
f ormer common consciousness the involuntary cl air voy
“
,

ance or second sight which constantly held before a tribes

-

man the pictures of his ancestors lives and caused h i m’

to feel most closely identified with the tribe or family ,

was to be replaced for a time b y a strictly individual con

sciou sn ess confined to the material world so as to break
,

u p the nations into individuals that the Brotherhood of

,

Man regard l ess of e xterior circumst ances may become a

f act. This is on the same principle that if we ha v e a
num ber of buildings and wish to make them into one

large structure it is necessary to break them up into sep

,
.

ar ate br icks Only then can the la rge building be con

.

st ructed .

In order to accomplish this separation of nations into

indivi duals laws were given which prohibited endogamy
,

or marriage in the family and henceforth incestuous mar

ri ag es gradually came to be regarded with horror Strange .

blood has thus been introduce d into all the families of the
Earth and it has gradually wiped out the invo luntary clair
voyance which p romoted the clannish feeli ng and segre
gated humanity into groups Altruism is supersedi ng
.

patriotism and loyalty to the fam i ly is disappearing in

,

consequence of the mi xture of blood .

S cience h as l ate ly discovered th at h aem oly sis resul ts f ro m

 R
OS I CRU CI AN COS M O -
C ON C E P TION

the inoculation of the bl ood of one individua l into th e

‘

v eins of anot her of a different species causing the death ,

of the lower of the two Thus any an i mal inoculated with

.

the blood of a man dies The blood of a dog transfused

‘

i to the ve i ns of a bird kills the bird but it w i ll n ot h u rt

“

,
’
the dog to have the bird s blood inoculated into its Veins .

S cience merely states the fact the occu lt scientist gives ,

the reason The blood is the vantage ground of the spirit

.
,

as shown elsewhere The Ego i n man works in its own

.

vehicles by means of the h eat of the blood ; the race family ,

Or community spirit gains entrance to the blood by means

of the air we inspire In the animals are also both th e
.

separate spirit Of the animal and the group sp i rit of the

,
-

species to which it belongs but the spirit of the an ima l i s

‘

not i ndividualized and does not work self consc iously with -

i ts veh i cles as does the Ego hence it is altogether domi ,

n ted by the g roup sp i r i t which works in the b lood

g
-
.

When the blood of a higher an i mal is inoculated into

‘

the veins of one from a lower sp ec i es the spirit in the ,

blood of the higher ani mal is of cour se stronger than the

S pirit of the less evolved ; hence when it endeavor s to as

s ert itself it kills the imprisoning for m and liber ates itself .

When on the other hand the blood of a l ower species is

, ,

inoculated into th e ve i ns of a higher an i mal the higher ,

spirit is capable of ousting the less evolve d spi r i t in the

strange b l oOd and assi m ilat i ng the blood to its own pur
'

poses therefore no Visible catastrophe ensues

,
.

Th e group spirit always aims to preser v e the i nteg rity

-

'

of i ts doma i n in the blood of the species under its charge .

Like the human Race God i t resents the marriage of its

-
,

subjects into other species and visits the s i ns of the fathers

upon the children as we see in th e case Of hybrids Where
'

a h orse a n d a donkey produ ce a mul e f or instance

-
the ,
 R OS I CR CU I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

to keep it out of incarnation at the present stage of human

d evelopment and by the admixture of strange blood by
,
"

i ntermarr i age of the individuals Of different t ribes or

nations the leaders of man are gradually helping him to
,

oust the fam i ly tribal or na tional spirit from the blood

, ,

but with it has necessar i ly gone the involuntary cl ai rvoy

ance which was due to its working in the blood wh ereby ,

it fostered the famil y trad i tions in its charges and so we ,

see that a lso i n th e cas e of m an a facu l ty was d es tr oyed

by th e m ix tu r e of b l ood That lo ss was a gain however

.
, ,
’
for it has concentrated man s energy on the material world
an d h e is better able to master its lessons than if he were

still distracted by the Visions of the higher realms .

As man becomes emancipated he gradually ceases to

“ ’
think of h i mself as Abraham s Seed as a Clan Stewart ,
“

” ” ” “
Man as a Br ahmin or a Levite
“
he is learning to
“

,
”
think more of h imself as an individual an I The more ,
“
.

' ”
h e cu l tivates that Self th e m or e he frees h imse l f from
“
, _

the fami l y and national spirit in the blood, th e more he -

becomes a sel f sufficient citizen of the worl d

-
.

There is much foolish even dangerous talk of giving , ,

up the Sel f to the N ot Self ; only when we have cultivated

-

S elf can we sacr i fi ce ourselves and gi ve u p the S elf to

“
a ,
f

the WH OLE S O long as We can only love our own family

.

or nation we are incapable of loving oth ers We are bound . ,

by the tie of kin and country When we have burst the

‘

tie of blo od and ass er ted ou rselves and become self suffi -
e

c i ent may we become unselfish helpers of humanity When

'

a man h as reached that stage he will find that instea d of ,

having lost h i s own fami ly he has gained a ll the families ,

in the world for they will h ave become his sisters and
,

brothers his fathers and mothers to car e for and to help

, -
.

T h e n h e w i ll reg a i n the viewpoint Of the Spiritua l World

‘
 OOOULT AN AL Y S I S OF GE NE S IS 3 59

which he l ost by the mixing of blood but it will be a ,

h igher facul ty an intelligent voluntary clairvoyan ce wh er e

,

he can see what h e wills and not merely the negative f ac

u lty imprinted in his blood by the family spirit whi ch -

bound him to the family to the excl u sion of all other

famil i es H is viewpoint will be universal to be u sed for
.
,

u niversal good .

Fo r aforementione d reasons m tertr ib al and later int er

, ,

national marriages came gradually to be regarded as de

,

sirable and preferable to close intermarriages .

As man progressed through these stages and gradu a lly ,

l oSt touch with the i nner wor l d h e sorrowed over th e l os s

,
”
and l onged f or a re turn of the inner vision B u t by “
.

degrees he forgot and the mat eria l wor l d gradually loomed

,

up bef ore his mind as the only reality until at last he has ,

come to scout the ide a that such inner Worlds e xist an d

to regard a bel ie f in them as f oo l ish supersti tion .

The four causes contributing to this condition were

( )
1 The clearing of the foggy atmo sphere o f the At
l an tean continent .

( ) The indrawing of the vita l body so that a point

2 ,

at the root of th e nose corresponds to a similar point in

the vita l body .

( )
3 T h e e l imination of inbreeding and the su b stitu

tion therefor of marriages outside th e f amily and tribe .

( )
4 The use of intoxicants .

The Race spiri ts still e xist in and work with man bu t

-

.
,

th e more advanced the nation the more freedom is given

,

the individual In co untries where people are most f et

.

ter ed the Race spirit is strongest

,
-
The more in harmo ny
.

a man is with the l aw of Love an d the h i gh er h i s ide al s

, ,

the more he frees himself from the spir i t of the Race .

P atrio tism while good in itself, is a ti e of the R ac e

,
-
 RO S I CR U CIA N C OS M O C O N C EP TI ON -

spirit T he i deal of U niversal Brotherhoo d which id enti

.
,

fies itself wi th neither country nor race is the only path ,

which leads to emancipation .

Christ cam e to reunite the separated races in bond s of

peace and good will wherein all will willingly and con
,

s ci ous ly follow the law of Love .

The present Christianity is not even a shado w of the

true rel i gion of Ch rist That will re main in abeyance
.

until all race feeling shall have been overcome In the

-
.

Sixth Epoch there will be but one U niversal Bro therhood ,

under the Leadership of the R eturn ed Christ b u t th e day ,

and the hour no man knows for it is not fixed b u t d e , ,

'

pends upon how soon a sufficient number of p eople shall

]

have commenced to live the life of Fellowship and Love ,

which is to be the hal l mark of the new dispensation

-
.

T H E FALL or M AN .

In
‘
connection with the analys i s of Genes 1s a f ew more ,

words must be said ab out The Fall which is the back “

,

b one and sinew of popular Chr i stiani ty H ad there been .

”
no Fall there would have been no need for the plan
“
,
“

of salvation .

When l n the middle of the Le muria n Epoch the separa

, ,

tion of the sexes occurred ( in which work Jehovah and H is

Angels were the Ego be g an to work slightly upon
the den se body building organs within Man was not at
,
.

that time t h e wide awake conscious being he is at present;

-

b y
ut b means of half the sex force he was building a brain ,

for the expre ssion of thought as prev iously described H e .

was more awake in the Spiritual World than 1n the physi

cal ; hardly saw his body and was not conscious of the act
of propagation : The Bible stateme nt that Jehovah put
man to sl ee p wh en h e was to bring forth is c orr ec t Th ere .
 Lucifer opened the eyes of woman She sough t the h elp .

of man an d opened his eyes Thus in a real though d im

.
,
” “
way they first knew or became aware of one another an d
,

al so th e P hysical World They becam e consci ous of de ath

.

and pain and by this knowledge they learne d to d iff erentiate

between the inner man and the outer garment he wears and
renews each tim e i t is necessary to take h i s next step in
\

e v olution They cease d to be automatons and became fr ee

.

think i ng be i ngs at the cost of freedom f rom pa 1n s i ckness ,

and death .

That the interpretation of the eat i ng of the fruit as a .

symbol of the generative act is n ot a far fetched idea is -

shown by the declarat i on of J ehovah ( which is not a

curse at all but simply a statement o f the c onsequences
,
.

that wo ul d follow the act ) that they wi ll die and that th e

woman will hear her children in pain and sufferin g H e .

’
knew that as man s attention had now bee n calle d to h i s
,

p h ysical garment he would become aware of its loss by

, _

death H e also knew that man had not yet wisdom to

.

bri d le h 1s passion and regulate sexu al intercours e by th e

positions of the planets therefore pa i n i n chil dbirth m ust
,

follow his ignorant abuse of the function .

It has always bee n a sore puzzle to B i ble commentators

what connection there could possibly be be twee n the eating
of fruit and the bearing of children but if we under ,

stand that the eating of the fruit is symbolical of the gen

” “
er ativ e act whe reby man becomes like God inasmuch as
he kn ows his kind and 1S thus able to generate new b eings ,

th e solution i s easy .

In the latte r part of the Lemurian Epoch when man

arrogated to himsel f the prerogative of perfo rming the
generative act when he please d it was h is then powe rful
, , ,

wi ll th a t enabl ed h im to do so By eating of the tree

.
“
 ’

oooULr A N ALYS I S OF feENE srs

'
3 63
’

”
of know ledge at any and all tim es he was ab le to create
a n ew body whenever h e lost an old vehicle .

We u sually think of death as someth i ng to be drea ded .

”
H ad man also eate n of the tree of life ha d he learned
“
,

the sec re t of how to perpetu ally vital ize his body there
“

would hav e been a worse c ondition We know that our .

bod i es are not per fect t od ay and i n those ancient days they
were exc eedingly pri m i tive Therefore the anxiety of th e
(
.

”
creative H ierarchies lest man eat of the tree of life a lso “
,

and beco m e capable of ren ew1n g his vital body was well
’

founded H ad he done so he would have been immortal

.

I ndeed but would neve r have been ab l e to progress The

,
.

evolut ion of the Ego depends upon its vehicles and if it

could not get new and improving one s by death an d birth ,

there woul d be stagnation It i s an occult m am m that

.

the oftener we die the better we are ab le to l ive for every ,

birth gives us a new chance .

We have seen that brain know l edge with its concomitant

-
,

sel fishness was bought b y man at the c

,
ost of th e power to
‘

create from himself alone H e bought his free will at

.

th e cost of pain and death ; but when man learns to use his
intellect f or the good of humanity h e will gain spiritual ,

power over l ife an d in addition will be guided by an innate ,

k nowledg easmuch h igher than the present brain conscious -

ness as that is higher than the l owest anim al consciousn ess .

Th e fal l into generation was necessary to bui l d th e

br ain but that 1s at be st only an indirect way of gaining
, , ,

knowledge and wil l be superseded by d i rect touch with the

Wisdom of N ature which man without any co operation
, ,
-
,

wi ll th en be ab l e to use for the generation of n ew b odi es .

”
The l arnyx will again spe ak the l ost Word the creative “
,
“

”
F i at
,
which under the g uidance of great Teachers was
, ,
 RO S I CRU C I AN C O S M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

s d in ancIent Lemuria in the creation of p l ants an d

u e

animals .

Man will then be a creator in very truth N ot in th e .

slow and toilsome manner of the present day b ut b y the ,

use of the proper word or magic al formula will he be able

,

to create a body .

All that was manifeste d during the des cending period

of involution remains until the corresponding point on the
ascending arc of evolution has been reached The present .

generative organs will degenerate an d atrophy The female .

organ was the first to come into existe nce as a separate

unit an d according to the law that the fi rst shall b e
,
“

”
last wi ll be the l ast to atrophy The male organ was
,
.

differentiated l as t an d is even now commencing to divid e

its el f f rom the body Di agr am 13 will make thi s cle ar
. .

Cenl ra poinl
 C H APTE R XV

C H RI S T AN D H IS M I S S I ON .

T h e E v olu ti on o f R eli gi on .

N the foregoing part of this work we have become

famili ar with the w ay i n which our pr esent outsi de
world came into ex i stence and how man evol ved the ,

c om plicated organism with wh i ch he is related to outer

conditions . We have also; in a measure studied the ,

Jewish Race religion

- We will next consider the last
.

and greatest of the divine measures put forth for the

,

uplifting of humanity i e C hristianity wh ich wi ll be

‘

, . .
, ,

the U niversal Religion of the f uture .

It is a notable fact that man an d his re l igions have

evo l ve d side by side and in an equal degree The earl iest .

religion of any Race is f ound to be as savage as the pe op l e

governe d by it and as they b ecome more civilized their ,

r e l igions become more and more h um ane and in h armony

with h igher ide al s .

”

From this fact material ists h ave drawn the in f erenc e

that no religion has a higher origin than man him se l f .

Their investigation s i nto early history have resulted in a

conviction that as m an progressed he civil i ze d his God
, ,

and fashioned E 1m after his own pa ttern .

This r easom n g 1 s defective because it fai l s to take into

,

account that man 1 s n ot the body but an i n dw el li n g spirit , ,

an Ego wh o use s the body with ever incre asi ng f aci l ity as -

ev ol u tion progresses .
 R O S I CRU C I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

There is no doubt that the law f or the b ody is The “

Surviv al of th e FitteSti The l aw for the ev olution of

”

”
th e S pirit demands Sacr i fice As long as m an believes
.

”
that M i ght is Right the Form prospers and waxes
“
,

strong bec ause all obstacles are swept out of the way re
,

g ar d le s s of others If the
. body were all that manner of ,

l ife would be the only one possible for man H e w ould be .

altogether incap able of an y reg ard for others and woul d

forcibly res i st any attempt to encroach upon what he con
sider ed his r gh ts
1 — the right of the stronger which is the ,

sole standard of justice under the l awof the Su rvival of

the F i ttest H e would be quite regardless of his fellow
.

beings ; ab sol u tely i n sen sib le to an y force fr om wi th ou t

’

that tended to make him act in any m anner not c onducive

to h 1s own momentary ple asure .

It is manifest then that whatever urges man toward a

, ,

hig her standard of conduct in his dealing with others must

come fr om wi th in and from a source which is not identical
,

with the body otherw i se it would not strive with the body
,

and often p revail ag am st i ts most obvious interests More .

over it must be a str onger force than that of the body or

, ,

it could not succeed in overcoming its d esires an d com

pelling it to m ake sacrifice s for those who are physically .

That such a force e xists surel y n o one will deny We

, .

have c ome to that stage in our advancement where instead ,

of s eeing m physica l weakness an Opportunity for e asy

rey we r cogn i ze 1n the very frailty of another a valid
p ,
e

claim upon our protection S elfish n ess is being S lowly

.

but surely routed by Altrui sm .

N ature is sure to accomplish h er purposes Though .

slow her progress is orderly an d certain In the bre ast of

,
.

every man this force of Altrui sm works as a leaven It is .

3 70 RO S I CR CU I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

and long enough it w ill kill as surely as a bullet from a

,

p i stol
.

If we now apply what has been said about music or

sound to the problem of how th i s i nner f orce i s awakened
and strengthened we may perh aps understand the matter
,

bette r.

In the first place let us particularly n Ote the f act that

,

the two tun i ng forks were of th e sam e pi tch H ad th i s not

-
.

been the case we m i ght have sounded and Sounded on e of

,

them unt i l the crack of doom but the other one would,

have remaine d mute Let us understand this thoroughly :

.

Vi bration can be induced in one tuning fork by one of -

li ke ton e on ly Any th i ng or any be i ng can be aff ected as

.
, ,

abov e stated by no sound ex cept i ts ow n key n ote -

.

We know that this force of Altru i sm e xi sts We also .

know that it is less pronounce d among uncivilized people

th an among people of higher soc i al attai n ment and among ,

the very l owest races it is al most entirely l acking The .

l ogical conclusion i s that there was a time when it was

a ltogether absent Consequent upon th i s conclusion fol
.

l ows the natur al quest i on : What induced it ?

The material personal i ty surely h ad noth i ng to do with
it ; in fact that part of man s nature was much more com
,
’

f ortab l e without i t than it has been at any time since .

Man must have had the force of Altruism latent wi th i n ,

oth e r wi se i t could not have been aw akened Still further .

,

it must have been awakened by a f orce of the same k i nd

a s im i lar force that was already activ e —as the s econd

tuning fork was starte d into vibration by the first after

-

it was struck .

We also saw that the vibrations in the second fork be

came stronger and stronger under the continued impacts of
sound from the first and that a glass case was no hi ndranc e
,
 C H RI S T AN D H I S M I S S IO N 371

to the induction of the sound U nder the continued im .

pacts of a force similar to that within him the Love of ,

God to man h as awakened this force of Al truism an d is

constantly increasing i ts potency .

It is therefore reasonabl e an d l ogic al to concl ude that ,

at first it was necessary to give man a religion oommen

,

surate with his i gnorance It would have been usel es s

.

to talk to him at that stage of a God Who was all tender

, ,

ness and love From his v i ewpoint those attribute s were

.
,

weaknesses and he could not have been expected to rever

ence a God Who possessed what were to him despic able
qual ities The God to Whom he rendered obe dience must
.

be a strong God a God to be feared a God Who coul d

, ,

hurl the thunderbolt and wield the fl ail of the l ightning .

Thus man was 1m pelled first to fear God and was gi v en

,

religions of a nature to further h i s spiritua l we ll being -

under the lash of fear .

The next ste p was to induce in h 1m a certain kind of

u n se lfish n ess by causing him to gi v e up part of his worldly
,

goods— to sacrifice This was achieved by giving him the

.

Tribal or Race God Who 1 s a Jealous God requiring of

-
, ,

him the strictest allegiance and the sacrifice of weal th ,

which the growing man greatly prizes But in return this .

,

Race God is a friend and mighty ally fighting man s bat

-
,
’

tles and giving him back many fold the sheep bullocks ,

and grain which he sacrificed H e had not yet arri v ed at .

the stage where it was possible for him to understand

.

that a l l creatures are akin but the Tribal God taught ,

him th at he must deal mercifully with his br oth er tri b es

m an and gave laws which made for equity and fair dea l ing
between men of the same Race .

It must not be thought that these su ccess1v e steps were

taken e asily nor without rebe l lion and l apses upon th e
,
3 72 R OS I CR CU IAN C OS M O -
C ON C EP T I ON

part of primitive m an S el fish n ess is ingrained in the .

lower nature even unto this day an d there m u st h ave been ,

'

many lapses and much backsliding We have in the Jew .

ish B i ble good example s of how m an forgot and had to ,

”
be patiently an d persistently prodded again and again by “

the Tribal God Only the vis i tat i ons of a l ong suffering
.
-

Race Spir i t were potent at times i n b rin gm g him back to

-
, ,

the law — that law very few people have even yet learne d
to Obey .

There are always pioneers however who require some , ,

thi ng higher When they become sufficiently numerous a

.
,

new step in evolution is taken so that several gradations ,

always exist There came a time nearly two thousand

.
,

years ago when the most advanced of humanity were

,

ready to take another step forw ard and learn the religion ,

of living a good l i fe for the sake of future reward in a state

Q
of ex i stence in wh i ch they must h ave faith .

That was a long hard step to take It was compara ,

.

ti vely easy to take a sheep or a bullock to the temple and

ofier it as a sacrifice If a man brought the fir st fruits of
.
-

his granary his vineyards or his flocks and her d s he stil l

, , ,

had more an d he kne w that the Tribal God would refill

,

his stores and gi v e abundantly in return But in this .

new departure i t was not a questi on of sacrificing his

,

goods It w as dem anded that he sacrifice h i m s elf It was

.
a

not e v en a sacrifice to be m ade by one supreme e ff ort of

martyrdom ; that also woul d have been comparatively easy .

Inste ad i t was demanded that day by day from morning

, ,

until n i ght he must act mercifully toward all H e must

,
.

forego selfishness and lov e h i s neighbor as he had been

, ,

used to loving hims el f Moreover he was n ot promi se d .

,

any immediate and visible reward but must have faith in ,

a f uture happ iness .

 RO S I CRU CI A N C O S M O C O N C EP T ION-

JE S U S AN D C H RI S T JES U S -
.

To gain some slight insight into the Gre at Myste ry of

Golgoth a and to understand the Miss i on of Chr i st as the
, ,

F ounder of the U niversal Re ligion of the futu re it is ,

necessary that we first become familiar with H i s exact

nature an d incidental l y with that Of Jehovah Who i s the
, ,

h ead of such Races religions as Taoism Bud d hism H indu

-
, ,
”
ism Juda i sm etc ; also with the ident i ty of The Fa ther
, , .
“
,

to Whom Christ is to gi ve u p the K ingdom in due time

‘

,
.

“
In the Christ i an creed occurs this sentence : Jesus
”
Christ the only be gotten Son of God
, This i s generally .

understood to mean that a certain person Who appe ared

in P alestine about years ago Who is spoken of as .
,

— —
Jesus Christ o e separate in iv i dual was the onl y be
n d
gotten Son of God .

This is a great mistake There are thr ee distin ct and

.

widely d ifferent Be i ngs chara cter i zed i n this sentence It .

is Of the greatest imp ortance that the student shoul d cle arly
underst and the exact nature of these Three Great and
E x alted Beings— d i ffering vastly in glory yet e ach entitled ,

to our deepest and most devout adoration .

The student is requested to turn to diagram 6 and note

that The only be gotten ( The Word of Whom Joh n
“ ” ” “
,

spe aks ) is the second aspect of the Supreme Being .

”“
This Word and it alone i s begotten of H i s Fathe r
, ,
“

”
( )
“
the first a spect before all Worlds Without H im w as .

not anythi ng made that was made not even the th ird
”
,

asp ect of the Supreme Be i ng wh i ch proceeds from the ,

”
two previous aspects Therefore the on ly begotten is
.
“

the exalted Be i ng which ranks abo ve all el se in the U ni

verse save only th eP ower aspect which created It
,
-
.

The first aspect of the Supreme Being thinks out or “

,

i magines the U n i verse before the beginning of active

,
 C H RI S T AN D H I S MI S S I O N 3 75

manifestation everythi ng incl uding the mi ll ions of Sol ar

, ,

Systems and the great creative H ierarchies which inhabit

the C osm l c Planes of existence abov e the seventh which is ,

the field of our evolution ( See diagram This is al s o

the Force wh i ch dissolves everything that has cryst all ized
beyond the possibility of further growth an d at l ast when ,

the end of active man i festation has come reabsorbs within ,

Itself all that is until the dawn of an other P eriod of

,

M anife station .

The second aspect of the Supreme Being is that which

.

manifests in matte r as the forces of attracti on an d cohe

sion thus giving it the capability of comb i ning into Fo rms
,
” “ “
of various kinds This is Th e Word
. the cre ative
]

Fia which molds the primordial Cosmic Root substance -

in a manner similar to the formation of figures by musical

vibrations as pre v iously mentioned the same tone al ways
, ,

producing the same figure So this gre at primordial

.

WORD brought or spoke into being in finest matter

”
,
“
, , ,

all the diff erent Worlds with al l their myriads Of Forms

, ,

which have since been Oopied and worke d ou t in detai l by

the innumerab l e creati v e H ierarchi es .

”
“
The Word could not have done this however until , ,

the third aspect of the Supreme Being h ad first prepared

the Cosmic Root substance had awakene d it from its nor
-

m al state of inertia and set the countless i n s ep ar a te atoms

spi nning upon their axes placing those axes at various,

angles with respect to e ach other giving to each kind a cer ,

”
tain measure of v i bration
“
.

These varying angles of inclination of the ax es and th e

measures of vibration made the Cosmic Root substanc e -

c apable of forming different combinations w hi c h are the ,

bases of the seven great Cosmic P lanes There I S I n each .

,

of th e se P l anes a di ff erent dec l ination of th e axes

,
and ,
3 76 RO S I CRU C IA N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

also a diff erent measure of vibration consequently the con

,
,

d iti on s and com b in at1on s 1n e ach One are diff erent from
“
those in any of the others due to the activity of The ,
”
Only Begott en .

Diagram 1 4 shows us that

”
The F ather is the highe st I ni tiate among the hum anity
of the Saturn P eriod The ord i n ary humanity of.

that P eriod are now the Lords of Mind .

”
Th e S on ( Chr i st ) is the highest Initiate of the Sun
P eriod The ordinary humanity of that Period are
.

now the Arch angels .

”
The H oly Spirit ( Jehovah ) is the highest Initiate of
the Moon P eriod The ordinary humanity of th at
.

/
P eriod are now th e Ange l s .

This diagram al so shows wh at are th e vehicl e s of the se

d iff erent orders of Beings and upon com p arison with,

di agram 8 it will be se en th at their bodies or vehicles

,

( indicate d by s q uares on diagr am 1 4 ) c orr espond to the

Gl obes of the P eriod in which they were human This is .

always the c as e so f ar as the ordinary human itie s ar e

,

concerned f or at the end Of the Period during which any

,

life wave becomes individua l ized as hum an beings those ,

beings retain b odi es c orresponding to th e Gl obes on which

they have functioned .

On the other hand, the Initiates have progresse d an d

evo l ve d f or themsel ves higher vehicles discontinuing the ,

ordinary use of the l owest vehicle when th e ability to use a

new and h i gher one h as been attained Ordinarily the .
,

lowest veh i cle Of an Archangel i s the desire body but ,

Chr i st Who is the highest Initiate Of th e Sun Period

, ,

ordinarily uses the l ife spirit as lowest vehicle funct i oni ng ,

as consc i ously in the Worl d of Li fe Sp i r i t as we d o i n the

P hysical World ; The student is requested to note this ‘
 RO S I CRU CI A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON -

point particularly as the Worl d of Life Spirit is th e fi rst

,

u n i v er sa l W orld as explained in the chapter on Worlds

,
It -
.

is the World in which differentiation ce ase s an d unity

begins to be realized so f ar as ou r so l a r system is ,

c oncerned .

Christ has power to build an d function in a vehicl e as

l ow as the desire body such as 1s used by th e Archangels , ,

b ut H e can d escen d n o fur th er The signific ance Of this .

w i ll be seen presently .

J esu s b elongs to our humanity When the m an Je sus .

, ,

is studied through the memory of nature he can be traced ,

back life by l ife where he l ived in d ifferent circumstances

, ,

u nder various names in different incarnations the sam e

, , ,

in th at respect as any other human being T h is can n ot b e

, .

d on e wi th th e B ei n g Ch r is t , . I n H is cas e can be f ou n d bu t
on e in car na ti on .

Jt must not b e suppose d h owever that Jesu s was an , ,

ordinary individual H e w as of a singularly pure type of

.

mind vastly super i or to the great majority of ou r present

,

humani ty Through m any live s had he trod the P ath of

.

H oliness and thus fitted himself for the gre atest honor
"

e ve r bestowed upon a human being

A .

i
H i s mother the V irgin Mary was also a type of th e
, ,

highest human p urity and because of that was se l ecte d to

become the mother of Jesus H i s father was a h i gh Ini .

tiate virgin and capable of performing the act of fecunda

Q
, ,

tion as a sacrament without personal des i re or p assmn

, .

Thus the beautiful pur e and lovely S pirit whom we,

know as Jesus of N azareth was bo rn into a pure and pas

si on le ss bo d y This bo dy was the best that could be pro
.

du ced on E arth and the task Of Jesus in that incarnation , ,

was to c are for it and evo l ve it to the highest possible

 CH RI S T A N D H I S M I SS I O N

degree of efficiency in preparation for the great purpose it

,

was to serve .

Jesus of N azareth w as born at about the time stated in

the historic records and not 1 0 5 B C as stated in some
,
. .
,

occult works The name Jesus is common in the East

.
,

an d an Initiate named Jesu s did live 1 0 5 B C but he . .

,

took the Egyptian Initiation and was not Jesus of N a z a

,

reth with whom we are conce rned

,
.

The Individual who later incarnated u nder the name

of Christian Rosenkreuz wa s al ready in a high incarnatio n
when Jesus Of N azareth w as b orn and is incarnate today ,
.

H i s te sti mony as well as the results of fir st hand investi

,
-

g at i on by later Rosicrucians al l agree in placing

,
the birth
of Jesus of N azareth at the begi nning of the Christian E ra ,

on about the date usually ascribed to that event .

Jesus was educate d b y the Essene s and reached a very

high state of spiritual d evelopment during the thirty year s
i n which he used his body .

It may h ere be said parenthetically that the Essene s

, ,

were a third s e ct which existe d in Palestine besides the ,

two mentioned in the N ew Te stament— the P harisees and

the Sadducees The Esse nes were an exceedingly devout
.

order widely diff erent from the materialistic S adducees

,

and entirely opposite to the hypocritical publicity see king ,

Ph arisees They shunned all mention of themsel ves an d

.

their methods of s t udy and worship To the l atter pecu .

l iar ity is due the fact that almost noth i ng is kn own of ~

them and that they are not mentioned in the N ew

,

Testament .

It is a law of the Cosmos that no Being however high , ,

can function in any world without a vehicle built of the

material of that world ( See diagrams 8 and There
fore the desire bo dy was the lowest vehicl e of the group of
380 R OS I CRU CI A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON-

sp i r i ts who h ad reached the human stage in the Sun

P er i od .

Ch ri st was one of tho se spi r its and was conse quently u n

able to bu i ld for H i mself a v it al body an d a dense physi cal
veh i cle H e could have worke d upon humani ty in a desire
.

bo d y as d i d H is younger brothers the Archangels as

, , ,

Race sp i r i ts Jehovah had opene d an a venue for them to

-
.

ente r the dense body of man by means of the air he in

haled All Race religions were religions of l aw and cre
.
-
,

ator s of sin through di sobe dience of that law T h ey were .

un der the d i rect i on of Jehovah Whose lowest vehicle is the,

human sp i r i t correlating H i m to the World of Abstract

,

Thought where everything is separative and therefore

,

leads to self see king -

.

That i s precisely the reason why the intervention of

Chr i st became necessary U nder the r egi m e of Jehovah
.

u ni ty is impossible Therefore the Chr i st Who possesses

.
,

as a lowest vehicle the un i fying life S p i r i t must enter ,

into the dense human body H e must appear as a man .

among men and dwell in this bod y because only from ,

wi th in is it po ss i b l e to conquer the Race rel i gion which -

influences man f rom wi th ou t .

Christ could not be b or n in a dense body because H e ,

h ad never passed through an evolut i on such as the E ar th

P eriod therefore H e would first have had to acqu i re the
,

ability to build a dense bo dy such as ours But even had .

H e possessed that ab i lity it would have been i nexpe d ient

,

for such an exalted Being to expend for that purpose the

energy necessary for bo d y buil d i ng through ante natal life
- -

ch i ldhood and youth to bring i t to suffic i ent maturity for

,

use H e had ceased to use veh i cles such as would corre

.

spon d to our human spir i t mind and desire body H e

, ,

learned to b uild them in the Sun P er i od and reta i ned th e ,

 RO S I CRU C IAN C OS M O C O N C EP T I ON
-

Jesus vital body was already at tuned to the high vibra tions
’

of the life sp i rit An or d i nary man s vital b ody would

.
’

have instantly collapsed under the terrific vibrations of

,

’
the Great Spirit who entered Jesus body Even that .

body pure and high strung as it was cou l d not withs tand
,
-
,

tho se tremendous impacts for many years an d when we ,

read of certa i n times when Chr i st withdrew tempor arily

from his d i sc i ples as when he later walked on the sea to
,

meet them the esotericist knows that he drew out of

,
’
Jesus veh i cles to give them a rest under the care of the
Essene B rothers who knew more of how to treat such
,

vehicles than Christ did .

This change was consummated with the f u ll and fre e

consent of Je sus Wh o knew during this entire incarn ation
,

that he was preparing a veh i cle for Christ H e submit ted .

g ladly tha t
,
h i s brother humanity might receive the g i gan
tic impetus which wa s given to its development by the ,

myster i ous sacrifice on Golgotha .

Thus ( as shown i n d i agram 14 ) Christ Jesus possessed

the twe lve vehicles which formed an unbroken chain from
,

the P hysical World to the very Throne of God There .

fore H e is th e only Be i ng in the U ni verse in touch with

both God and man and capable of med i ating between them ,

because H e has personally and indi v idually experienced

, ,

all con d i ti ons and knows every limitation incidental to

physical ex i stence .

Chr i st i s un i que among all Beings in all the seven

Worlds H e alone possesses the twelve vehicles N one
. .

sa v e H e is able to feel such compass i on nor so fully und er ,

stan d the pos i tion and needs of human i ty ; none sa v e H e

i s qual i fied to bring th e relief that sha ll fully m eet our
needs .
 C H RI S T AN D H I S M I S S I O N 3 83

Thus do we know the nature of Christ H e is the high .

est In i ti ate Of the Sun P eriod and H e took the dense and
vital bo d ies of Jesus that H e might function directly in
the Physical World and appear as a man among men .

H ad H e appeared in a manifestly miraculous manner it ,

would have been contrary to the scheme of e v olut ion b e ,

cause at the end of the Atlantean Epoch human i ty h ad

been given freedom to do right or wrong That they might .

learn to become self governing no coercion whatever coul d

-
,

be used They must know goo d and e v i l through exp er i

.

ence Before that time they had been led willy n i l ly b ut

.
-
,

at that time they were given freedom u nder the diff erent
Race rel i gions each religion adapted to the needs of its
-
,

p articular T ribe or N ation .

N OT P EA C E BUT A S WORD .

All Race re ligions are of the H oly Spirit They are i n

-
.

sufficient because they are based on law which m akes f or

, ,

sin and brings death pain and sorrow ,

.

A ll Race spirits know this and realize that their re l i

-
,

gions ar e merely steps to something better This is shown .

by the fa ct that all Race religions without exception point

-
, ,

to On e Who is to com e The religion of the P ersians .

pointed to Mithras of the Chaldeans to T ammu z The .

Old N orse Gods foresaw the approach of The Tw i l ight “

of the Gods when S u tr the bright Sun spirit shall super

, ,
-
,

sede them and a new and fa i rer order be established on

”
“
Gimle th e regenerated earth The Egyptian s waited
, .

for H orus the n ew born Sun Mithras and T ammuz are

,
-
.

also symbo lized as Solar orbs and al l the principal Temples

were bui l t facing the East that the rays of the ris i ng ,

Sun might shi ne directly through the open doors ; even

Saint Peter s at Rome is so p laced Al l these facts show
’
.
3 84: RO S I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C E P T ION -

that it was generally known that the On e Wh o was to

come was a Sun sp i r i t and was to s ave human i ty from
-

the sep arative i nfluences necessarily contained in al l Race

rel i gions .

T hese religions were steps which it was necessary f or

mankind to take to prepare for the adv ent of Chr i st Man .

“
must first cultivate a self before he can become really
u n selfish and understand the h i gher phase of U niversal

Brotherhood—unity of purpo se an d interest—for which :

Christ laid the foundation at H i s first coming and wh i ch ,

H e will m ake living realities when H e returns .

As the fundamental principle Of a Race r el ig l on i s sep -

aration inculcating self seeki ng at th e expens e of other

,
-

men and nati on s it is evident that if the princ i ple is car

”
,

ried to its ultimate conclus i on it must necessarily have

an increasingly destruct i ve tendency and finally frustrate

evolution unles s succeeded by a more constructive religion

,
.

Therefore the separative rel igions of the H oly Spirit

must give place to the unifying r el igIOn of th e Son which ,

i s the Christi an rel i g i on .

Law must g i ve place to Love and the separate Races and ,

N ations be un i ted in on e U niversal Brothe rhoo d with ,

Christ as the Eldest Brother .

The Chr ist ian religion has not yet had time to accom
p l i sh t h is great obj ect Man is st i ll in the to i ls
. of the
do m inant Race spirit and the ideals of Christ i an i ty are
-

yet too h i gh for him The intellect can see some of the.

beauties and readily admits that we should love our ene

,

mies but the passions of the desire body are sti ll too
,
“
strong The l aw of the Race spirit b ei ng An eye for an
.
-

” ”
eye the Feel i ng is I ll get even 1 The heart prays for
,
“ ’

Love ; the desire body hopes for Revenge The intellec t .

’
sees i n th e abs tr ac t the beauty of loving one s enemies
"

, , ,
 R OS I CR U C I AN C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON -

hood conj ures up fr i gh tful visions of the abolition of cap

i tal i sm an d i ts I ne v itabl e concomitant the exploitation of ,
” “
others with the wreck of business interests implied
,
”
thereby The word enslaved exactly descr ibes this con
.
“

d i t i on
. Accord i ng to the B i ble man was to have d om l n l on,

over the world but in the vast majority of cases the reverse
,

—
is true i t is the world wh i ch has domin i on over man .

Every man who has property interest s w i ll i n his saner ,

moments a dm i t that they are a never fa i l i ng source of

,
-

worry to h i m ; that he is co n stantly schem ing to hold his ,

possess i ons or at least to keep from being depr i ved of them

,
”
by sharp pract i ce know i ng that others are as constantly
“
,

schem i ng to accompl i sh that to them desirable end The , ,

.

man is the slave of w hat w i th u n con scl ou s I rony he calls

, ,
”
“
my possessi ons when in real i ty they possess him Well
,
.

d i d the Sage of Conco rd say T h i n gs are in the saddle an d

“
,

r i de mank i nd l ”

This state of aff airs is the result of Race religions with -

their system of law ; therefore do they all look for On e “

W11 0 i s to come ”
The Chr i st i an religion AL ON E is n ot
.

look i ng for On e Who is to come but for On e Who is to ,

come ag ai n The time of this second co ming depends

.

upon when the Church can free i tself from the State The .

Church espec i ally in Europe is bound to the Char i ot of

, ,

State : The mi n i s ters are fettered by economic considera

t i ons and dare not proclaim the truth s that their studies
have revealed to them .

A visitor to Copenhagen Denmark recently witne ssed a

, ,

church confirmation service The Church there is under .

State control and all ministers are appointed by the tem

poral power The parishioners have nothing whatever to
.

say in the matter They may attend ch u f ch or not as

.
,
 CH RI S T AN D H IS M I S S IO N 38 7

they please, but they are compelled to p ay the ta xes which

support the inst i tution .

In addition to holding Office by the bo unty of the State ,

the pas tor of the parti cular church visited was decorated
w i th several Orders conferred by the k i ng the glittering ,

badges bearing silent but eloquent testim on v as to th e

extent of his subserviency to the State Du r I n g the cere .

mony he prayed for the king and the legislators that

, ,

they might rule the country wisely As long as kings and .

legislators exist this prayer might be v ery appropriate but

, ,

it was a considerable shock to hear him add :

and Almig hty God protect and strengthen our army a n d
, ,
”
na v y 1
Such a prayer as this shows plainly that the God wor
sh i p ed is the Tribal or N ational God — the Race spir i t for -
,

the l ast act of the gentle Christ Jesus was to stay the sword
of the friend who would have protected H im therew i th .

Although H e said H e had not come to send peace but a

' '

sword it was because H e foresaw the oceans of blood that

,
”
would be spilled by the militant Christian nations in
their mistaken understanding of H i s teachings and because
high ideals cannot be immediately attained by humanity .

The wholesale murder of war and like atrocities are harsh ,

but they are potent illustrations of what Love would

abolish .

There is apparently a flat contra diction between the

, ,

words of Christ Jesu s I came not to send peace but a

“
, ,
”
sword , and the words of the celestial song which heralded
th e birth of Jesus On earth P eace Goo dwill toward men
“
.
, ,

T his contradiction however is apparent only

, ,
.

There is as great an apparent contradiction between a

’
woman s words and her act i ons when she says
“
I am ,
”
g oing to c l e an h ous e an d ti d y up and then ,proceeds to
388 ROS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

take up carpets and pile chairs one upon another produ c ,

ing general confusion in a previou sly or derly h ouse On e .

obser v ing only th i s aspect of the matt er would be justified ,

“ ”
in saying She i s making matters worse instea d of better
, ,

but wh en the purpose of her work is understood the ex ,

p edi en cy of the temporary disorder is realized and in th e

end her house will be the better for the passing disturbance .

Similarly we must bear in mind that the time which

,

has elapsed since the coming of Christ Jesus is b u t little

more th an a moment in comparison with the dura tion of
even one D ay of Manifestation We must learn as did
-

.
,

Whitman to know the amplitude of time and look b e

, ,

yond the past and present cruelti es and jealous i es of the

warring sects to th e shining age of U niversal Brotherhood ,

which will mark the next great step of man s progress on ’

h is l ong and wondrous journey from the clod to the God ,

f rom protoplasm to consciou s uni ty with the Father that ,

f ar ofl , d v n e
on e i i ev ent
To i
wh ch th e w h ol e cr ea t i on m ov es

It may be added that the above ment i oned pas tor dur ,

ing the ceremony of receiving his pupils into the Church ,

taught them that Jesus Christ was a composite individual ;

that Jesus was th emortal human part while Christ was
, ,

the di vine immortal Spirit P resumably if the matter

,
.
,

had been discussed with him he would not have supported

,

that statement neverthe l ess in making it he state d an

,

occult f act .

T H E S TAR O F B E TH LE H EM

The uni fying influence of the Christ has been symboli z ed

in the beautiful l egen d of the worship of th e three magi ,

or wis e men of the East So sk i lfully woven by General

“
,

Lew Wallace into his charming story

“
Ben H u r ,
.
3 90 R OS I CRU CI A N C OS M O C O N C E P TI ON
-

U nder the old disp ensation the path to Initiation was

not open It was for only the chosen few Some m i ght
. .

seek the path but only those who were guided to the Tem
,

ples by the H ierophants found entrance P reviou s to the .

a d vent of Chr i st there was no such sweeping invitation as

,
”
“
Wh osoever w i ll may come .

At the moment the blood flowed on Golgotha however , ,

”
the ve i l Of the Temple was rent ( for reasons presently to
be expla i ned ) and ever since that time whosoever will
, ,

seek adm i ttance will surely find it .

.

In the Temples of Mystery the H ierophant taught his

pupils that there is in the Sun a sp i ritual as w ell as a ,

physic al force The latter f orce in the rays of the Sun

.

is the fecundating pr 1n c1pl e in nature It causes the .

growth of the plant world and ther eby sustains the animal
and human kingdoms It is the upbuilding energy wh ich
.

is the source of all physical f orce .

This physical solar energy reaches its highest e xpres

,

sion in midsummer when the days are longest and the

,

n i ghts are shortest because the rays Of the Sun then fall
,

d i rectly on the northern hemisphere At that time the .

S p i ritual forces are the most inact i ve .

On the other ha nd in December; during the long win

,

ter nigh ts the physi cal force of the solar orb is dormant
,

and the spiritual forces rea ch their maximum degree of

activ i ty
.

The night between the 24th and the 2 5 th of December

'

is The H oly N i ght par ex cel len ce of the ent i re year T h e

, ,
.

Zod i acal S i gn of the i mmaculate celesti al Vi rgin stan d s

upon the eastern hor i zon near m i d n i ght the S u n of th e ,

N ew Year i s then born an d s tarts upon h i s journey fro m

the southernmost po i nt toward th e northern hem i sphere ,

to save that part of humanity ( physically ) from the dark

 C H RI S T AN D H I S M I S S ION
-

3 91

ness and f amine which would inevitab l y result if he Were

to remain permanently south of the equator .

To the people of the northern hem i sphere where all ,

o u r present day rel i gions or i g i nated

-
the Sun is d i rectly ,

below the Earth ; and the spiritual influences are str ong
est in the north at midnight of the 2 4th of December
, ,
.

That being the case it follows as a matter of course that

,

it would then be eas i est for those who wished to take a

defini te step toward Init i ation to get in conscious touch
with the spiritual Sun espec i ally for the first time .

Therefore the pupils who were ready for In i tiation were

taken in hand by the H ierophants of the Myster i es and ,

by means of ceremonies performed in the Temple were ,

raised to a state of exaltat i on wherein they transcended

physical conditions To their spiritual vision, the solid
.

Earth b ecam e tr an sp ar en t and they saw the Sun at m i d

’

night — “
The Star l ”
It was not the physical Sun they
sawwith spiritual eyes however but the Spirit in the Sun
, ,

—The Christ— their Spiritual Savior as the physical Sun ,

was their phys i cal Savior .

This is the Sta r that shone on that H oly N ight and

that stil l shines for the mystic in the dark ness of night .

When the noise and confus i on of physical activity are

quieted he enter s into his closet and seeks the way to the
,

King Of P eace The Blazin g Star is e v er there to guide

.

h im and his soul hears the prophetic song On earth ,

“

”
P eace Goodwill toward men
, .

Peace an d goodwill to all without exception ; no room,

f or one single enemy or outcast " Is i t any wonder that

it is hard to educate human i ty to such a h i gh standard ?
Is there any better way to S how the beauty of an d the ,

necessity for peace goodw i ll and love than by con tr astin g

,
‘

them with the present state of war selfishne ss an d h ate ? ,

3 92 RO S I CRU CIA N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON-

T
stronger the light th e deeper the shadow it c asts
he , .

The h i gher our ideals the more plainly can w e see our
,

sho r tcomings .

U nfortunately at the present stage of deve l opment h u

, ,

manity is willing to learn only by the hardest experience .

As a Race it must become absolutely selfish to feel the

,

bitter pangs caused by the selfishness of others as one ,

must know much sic kness to b e thoroughly thankful for

health .

The religion miscalled Christianity h as therefore been

the bloodiest religion known not excepting Mohammedan ,

i sm wh i ch in th i s respect is so mewhat akin to our m al

,

practiced Christ i anity On the battle fiel d and in the

.
-

Inquis i tion innu merable and unspeakable atrocities have

b een committed in the name of the gentle N azarene The .

S word and th e Wine Cup the perverted C ross and C om

,
-

—
munion Chalice have been the means by which the more
power f ul of the so called Christian nation s gained suprem
acy over the heathen peoples an d even over other but ,

weaker nations professing the same faith as their con

q u er or s The most
. cursory rea d ing of the hi story of the
Gr aecO Latin Teutonic and Anglo Saxon Races wil l cOr
-

,
-

roborate this .

While ma n was under the fu ll sway of Race religions -

each natio n was an united whole Ind i vidual interests were .

willingly subordinated to the communi ty interests All .

“ ”
wer e under the law All were members of their r es pec
.

tive tribes first and individuals only secondarily

,
.

At the present time there i s a tendency toward the other

— ” “
extreme to exalt self above all else The result is evi .

dent in the economic and industrial problems that are "

facing every nation and clamor ing for solution .

The state of development wherein every man feels him

3 94 R OS I CRU C I AN C OS M O -
CON C EP TI ON

the mind is invaluable but when it arrogate s to itself the

,

rol e of dictator as to the conduct of man to man it is as ,

though the lens shou ld say to an astronomer who was in

the act of photographing the Sun through a telescope :
“
You have me improperly focused You are not looki ng .

at the Sun correctly I do not think it I s good to photo

.

graph the Sun anyway and I want you to po i nt me at ,

Jupiter The rays of the Sun heat me too much and are
.

liable to damage me .

I f th e astronomer exercises h i s will and focuses the

telescope as he desires tell i ng it to attend to its business
“

of transmitting the rays that str i ke it l eav1ng the results ,

to him the work will proceed well but i f the lens has th e
,
.

stronger will a nd the mechan i sm of the telescope i s m

league with it the astronomer will be ser l ou sl y hamper ed
,

in having to contend with a refractory 1n str u m en t and ,

th e result will be blurred p ictures of little or no value , .

Thus it is with the Ego It works with a threefold .

body which it controls or should control through the

, ,

mind But sad to say this body has a will of its own and
.
, ,

is often aided an d abetted by the mind thus fr ustrating ,

the purposes of the Ego .

This antagoni stic lower will is an e xpression of the

“

higher part of th e desire body When the division of the .

Sun Moon and E arth took place in the early part of the
, ,

Lemurian Epoch the more advanced portion of hu manity

,

in the making experienced a di v ision of the desire body

- -

into a higher and a lower part The rest of humanity d i d .

likewise in the early part of the Atlantean Epoch .

This higher part of th e desire body became a Sort of

an 1mal soul It built the cerebro spinal nervous system
-
.
-

and the voluntary muscles by that means controll i ng the ,

lower part of the threefold body until the link of mind was
 C H RI S T A N D H I S M IS S ION 3 95

”
iven Then the mind coalesced with this anima l sOul
g
-
.

an d became a co regent -
.

The mind is thus bound up in desire ; is enmeshed in the

se l fish lower nature making it difficult for the spir i t to
,

control the body The focu sing mind which should be the
.
,

ally of the higher nature is alienated by and in l eague ,

with the lower na ture—enslaved by de sire .

The law of the Race religions was given to emancipate -

” “
intellect from desire The fear of Go d was pitted aga i nst
.

“ ”
the desires of the flesh This however was not enough .
, ,

to en able one to become master of the body and secure

i ts wil l ing cO operation It became nece ssary for the spirit
-
.

to find in the body another point of vantage which was ,

not under the sway of the desire nature All muscles are .

e xpressions of the d es1r e body and a straight road to the

ca pital where the traitorous mind is wedded to desire and
,

reigns supreme .

If the U nited States were at war with France it woul d ,

not land troops in England hoping in that way to su b j u ,

gate the French It would l and its soldiers directly in

.

France and fight there

,
.

Like a wise general the Ego followed a SIm il ar course

,

of action It did not commence its campaign by getting

.

control of one of the glands for they are expressions of ,

the vital body ; nor was it poss i ble to get control of the
vol untary mu scles for they are too we l l garrisoned by the
,

enemy That part of the involuntary muscul ar system

.

which is contro l led by the sympathetic nervous system

woul d also be useless for the purpose It must get into a .

more direct touch with the cerebro spinal nervous system -

.

T o do this and secure a base of operations in the enemy s

,
’

c ountry it must contro l a musc l e which is involun tary and

, ,
 R O S I CRU C IAN C OS M O C ON C EP T ION -

yet connected with the voluntary ner vous system S uch a .

“ muscle is the heart .

We have prev i ously spoken of the two kinds of muscles

— voluntary an d i n v oluntary The latter are forme d in .

lengthw i se str i pe s and are connected w i th functions not

.

under the control of the will such as d i gest i on respir ation

, , ,

excreti on etc The v oluntary muscles are those wh i ch

,
.

are controlled by the will through the voluntary nervous

system such as the muscles of the h and and arm They
, .

are striped b oth l engthwise and c rosswise .

The above is true of all muscles in the body ex cept th e

h ear t wh i ch is an involuntary musc l e
, Ordinarily we .
,

cannot control the c i rculat i on U nder normal conditions .

the heart b eat i s a fixed quantity yet to the bewilderment

-
v

of physiologists the heart is cr oss striped like a voluntary

,
-

mu scle It is the only organ in the body e xhibiting thi s

.

peculiarity but sph inx like it refuse s to give materia l

,
-
,

scientists an answer to the riddle .

The occult scientist easily finds the answer in the m em

ory of nature From that recor d h e learns that when the
.

Ego first sought a stronghold in the heart the latter was ,

striped lengthwise only the same as any other I nvoluntary

,

musc l e ; but as the Ego gained more and more control over
the heart the cross stripes h ave gradually developed They
,
~
-
.

are n ot so numerous nor so well de fin ed as on the muscles

’
-

under the full control of the desire body but as the al tru ,

i sti c principles of love and brotherhood increa se in strength

and gradually overrule the reason which is based in d esire , ,

so w i ll these cross stripes become more numerous and more

-

marked .

As pre v iously Stated the seed atom of the dense body

,
-

i s located i n the heart d ur 1n g life and withdrawn only at

death The active work of t h e Ego 1 s m the bloo d N OW
. .
,
 R O S I CR U C I A N C OS M O C O N C EP T ION -

In reality there is but one spirit the Ego b u t l ooking at , ,

it from th e P hysical World, it is refracted into th e three

aspects wh i ch work as stated
,
.

As the blood passes through the heart cyc l e after cycle , ,

hour after hour all through life i t engraves the pl ctu r es ,

it carries upon the seed atoms wh i le they are still fresh

- -

thus mak ing a faithful record of the life which is indelibly

impressed on the soul in the p os t m or tem existence It .

is alway s in closest touch with th e l ife sp 1r 1t the spi ri t of ,

l o ve and unity therefore the he art is the h ome of altruisti c

,

love.

As these pictures pass inward to the World of Life Spirit ,

in which is the true memory of nature they do not com e ,

through the slow physical senses but directly through t h e ,

fourth ether conta i ned in the air we breathe I n the .

World Of Life Spirit the life spirit sees much more clearly
'

than i t can in the den ser W orlds In its high home it is in .

touch wi th the Cosmic Wis d om and in any situation it

knows at once wh at to do and flashes the mess age of guid
ance an d proper acti on back to the heart which as in ,

stantan eou sl y flashes i t on to the brain through the med i um

“
of the pneumo gastric nerve result i ng in first impres
-
,
”—
sions the i ntui tional impulse wh ich is always good , ,

because it is drawn dir ectly from the fountain of Cosmic

Wisdo m an d Love .

This is al l done so quickl y that the heart has control

“
before the slower reason h as had time to take in the situa
tion as it were It is the thought that a man thinketh
,
”
.
“

” ”
,

“
in his heart and it is true that so is he
,
Man is .

inherently a virgin S pirit good noble and true in every

, ,

respect All that is not good is from the lower nature that
.
,

illusory reflection the Ego The virgin spirit is always

‘

.
,

g iving wise counsel If we could .on l y f o ll o w th e impu l ses

 C H RI S T A N D H I S M IS S I ON 3 99

of th e — —
heart the first thought U niversa l Brotherhood
would be reali ze d here and now .

But that is just the point where the trouble begins .

Af te r the good counse l of the first thought h as been given ,

the brain begins to reason w i th the result that in the

, ,

great majori ty of cases it dominate s the heart The tele

,
.

scope arranges i ts own focus and points where it l i sts ,

despite the astronomer The m i nd and the d esire body

.

frustrate the designs of the spir i t by tak i ng control and as ,

they lack the sp i rit s w i sdom both sp i r i t and body suffer

’
, .

Physiologists note that certain areas of the brain are

devote d to part i cular thought act i vit i es and phrenologists
h ave carried this branch of sci e nce sti ll further N ow it .
,

is known that thought breaks down and destroys p erve

tissues This and all other waste of the body is replaced
.
,

by the blood When through the development of the heart

.
,

into a voluntary muscle the circulation of the blood finally

,

passe s under the absolute control of the unifying l i fe spirit

—the Spirit of Love— i t will then b e within the power of
th at spirit to withhold the blood from those areas of the
mind devote d to selfish purposes As a resul t thos e par .
,

ticu lar thought centers will gr adually atrophy .

On the other hand it will be possible for the spirit to

,

increase the blood supply when the mental activities are

altruist i c and thus bu i ld up the areas devoted to altruism
, ,

so that in time the de sire nature will be conquered an d

, ,

the mind emancip ated by Love from its bondage to desire .

It is only by complete emanc i pat i on through Love that , ,

man can rise above the law and become a law unto himsel f .

H aving conquered h i mself he will have conquered all th e

,

World .

The cross stripe s of the heart may be built by certain

-

exercises under occult training but as some of these ex er ,

400 R OS I CR C U IA N C OS M O -
C ON C EP T I ON

cises are d angerous they shoul d be undertake n only under

,

the direct i on of a competent teacher That no reader of .

th i s book may be dece i ved by i mpostors profess i ng ab i l i ty

and w i llingness to SO train aspirants for a consider ation ,

it is emphat i cally repeate d that N o tr u e occu ltis t ev er

b oas ts a d v er tises h is occu l t p ow er s ells Occu lt i n for ma ti on
, ,

or l ess on s a t s o m u ch ea ch or r a c ou rs e ; n or wi l l h e
f o

cons en t th ea tri ca l dis p lay

to a H is w or k i s d on e i n th e
.

m os t u n ob tr us i v e m an n er p ossi b le an d s ol ely for th e pu r

p os e o
i l egi ti m ately h elpi ng oth ers , wi th ou t th ou g h t f
o

As said in the beginning of this chapter all person s ,

earnestly desiring th e h i gher knowledge may rest assured

that if they wi ll but seek they will fin d the way Open for
,

them Chr i st H imself prepare d the way for whosoever

.
“

Wi ll ”
. H e w i ll hel p an d welcome all real seek ers who ar e ,

willing to work for U niversal Brotherhood .

TH E M Y S TERY OF G O LC O T H A .

During the last years much has been said about

”
th e cleans i ng blood The blood of Chr i st has been
.

extolled from the pu l pl t a s the sovereign remedy for sin ;

th e on ly means of re d em ption and salvation .

But if the laws of Reb i rth and Consequence work in such

a way th at evolving bei ngs rea p as they have sown and if ,

the evolutionary impulse i s constantly bringing humani ty

,
—
higher and h i gher ultimately to attain perfection where ,

then is the need for redemption and salvation ? Even if

the need existe d, how can the death of one individual help
the r est ? Would it not be nobler to suffer the consequence s
of one s acts than to h i de b ehind another ? Th ese are some
’

of the objections to the doctrine of vicarious atonement

and rede m pti on by the blood of Chr i st Jesus We wil l try .
4 02 R OSI R U C CIA N CO S M O CO N C E P T I ON
-

ar dl y to hi de behi nd another ; th at each m an s hould be

wil li ng to ta ke th e consequen ce of h i s acts .

Let us cons i d er an an al ogous ca se The wate rs of the .

Great Lakes narrow i nto the N iag ara Ri v er For twenty .

mil es this enormous volume of water flow s rap i dl y toward

the fall s Th e r i ver be d i s fil le d w i th roc ks an d i a pe rson
.
“

who goe s bey ond a certain po int d oes n ot lo se h is l i fe in the

rap i d s abo v e the catar act he wi ll s ur elv do soby the plun ge
,

over th e brin k .

Suppose a man ap pe ared who in p i ty for the v i ctims of

,

the current plac e d a rope abo v e the cataract although he

, ,

knew that the con d iti on s w ere such that i n d o i ng so he ,

hi ms elf coul d not by an y pos s i ble chance e scape d e ath Yet .

gla dl y and of hi s own free w ill he sa cri fice d hi s li fe and

,

placed the r ope thu modi fyin g former con d i ti ons so that
,
s

any othe rwis e h e l l e fi v i c tims who woul d grasp the rope

p
woul d b e sa v e d an d thenceforwar d none nee d b e los t .

What woul d we thi nk of a m an who h ad fall en i n to the

water through hi s own ca relessn es an d wa s M g gli n g s
,

ma dl y to reach the shore if he sho ul d s av : Wh at "S ave

,
“

myself and see k to a v o i d the penalty of m y carelessn e ss by

sh i el di ng my self behi n d the s trength of another who suf ,

f e red through no fault of hi s own an d ga v e up h i s l i fe that

,

su ch as I m i ght l i v e ? N o ne v er " That would not b e

,

l”
“
manl y . I w ill ta ke m y d eserts Would we not all
agree that the man w as a fool ?
N ot all are i n nee d of sal v ati on Chr i t kn ew that there
.
s

i s a very large cla ss who do not r equi r e sa lv ation 111 thi s

way but ju st as sur ely as there are the ni ne ty an d nin e
,
- -

who are well taken care of by the laws of Rebirth and

Conse quence and will reach perf ecti on i n that w ay so there ,
” ”
are the sinne rs who ha v e be come bogged i n matter an d
“ “

cannot escape without a rope Chri st came to sa v e them

.
.
 C H RI S T AN D H I S M I S S I O N
'

40 3

and to bring peace and good will to all by raising them to ,

the necessary point of spir i tual i ty causing a ch ange in ,

their desire bodies wh i ch wi ll make the influence of the

life spirit in the heart more potent .

H is younger brother Sun spirits the Archangels had -

, ,

worked as R ace spirits on the desire bo d ies of man but

-
,

their work had been from wi th ou t It was s imply a re .

fl e cte d spiritual Sun force and came thr ough the Moon
-

as moonlight is reflecte d sunl i ght Christ the Chief Ini .

,

ti ate of the Sun sp i r i ts entere d directly into the dense

-
,

body of the Earth and brought the d i rect Sun force thus -
,

enabli ng H im to i nfluence our desire bod i es from with in .

Man cannot gaze long upon the Sun without becoming

blind because i ts v ibrations are so rapid that they destroy
the retina of the eye But he can look w i thout h armful
.

results upon the Moon the Vibrat i ons from which are much
,

slower ; yet they also are sunl i ght but the higher vibrations ,

have been taken up by the Moon which then reflects th e ,

r esidue to us .

So it is with the spiritual impulse s which help man to

evolve The reason why the Earth wa s thrown off fr om
.

the Sun was be cause our human i ty could not endure the
Sun s tremendous phys i cal and sp i ritual impulse s Even
’
.

after an enormous d i stance had been placed between E arth

and Sun the spir i tual impulse woul d st i ll ha v e been too
,

strong had it not been sent first to th e Moon to be use d by ,

Jeho v ah the Regent of the Moon for man s benefit A

, ,
’
.

number of Archangels ( ordinary Sun sp i r i ts ) were giv en -

Jeho v ah as helpers in reflect ing these S p i r i tual impulses

fr om the Sun upon the human i ty of the Earth in the form ,

of Jeh ov ai sti c or Race religions -

.

The lowest veh i cles of the Archangels i s the d esire body .

our desire body was a d ded i n the Moon P erio d at which ,

404 RO S I CR U C IA N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON

time Jehovah was the highest Initiate Therefore Jehovah

.

i s abl e to deal wi th man s desire bo d y Jeho v ah s lowest

’
.
’

v eh i cle is the human sp i r i t ( see d i agram 14 ) and i ts c oun

terp ar t is the des i re body The Archangels are H is helper s

.

because they are able to manage the sp i ritual Sun forces -

an d the des i re body is their lowest vehicle ; Thus they are

able to work with and prepare humanity for the time when
i t can r ecel v e the spir i tual impulses d i rectly from the Solar
Or b without the inter vention of the Moon
, .

U pon C hrist as the highest Initi ate of h e Sun P eriod

t
, ,

is laid the task of sen d i ng out this impulse The impulse .

which Jehov ah reflected was sent out by C h ri st Who thus ,

prep ared both the Earth and humanity for H is dir ect
ingress .

”
The expression prepared the Earth means that all
, ,

ef olu ti on on a planet is accompanied by the evolution of

f

tha t p lan et i ts elf H ad some obse rver gifte d with spiritual

.

sight watche d the evolution of our Earth from some distant

st ar he would have not i ce d a gradual change taking p l ace
,

in the Earth s desire body

’
.

U nder th e old dispensation the desire bodies of peop l e

in general were impro v ed by means of the law Th i s work .

is still going on in the maj ority of people who are thus ,

preparing themselves for the higher life .

The higher life ( Initiation ) does not commence h ow ,

ever until the work on the vita l body begins The means
,
.

used for bringing that into activity is Lo ve or rather ,

Altruism The former word has been so abused tha t it no

.

l onger conveys the meaning here required .

During the old dispens ation the pa th of Initiation was

not free and open except to the chosen few The H iero
,
.

h n ts of the Mysteries collected certain famil i es about

p a

the Temples setting them apart from all the other peop le
, .
40 6 R C S I C RU CI A N C OS M O -
C O N C E P TI ON

ch arya; Shri Krishn a s ays, Whenever there is dec ay of

Dharma and exaltation of Adharma then ,

I myself come forth for the protection of g oo d for the ,

d estruct i on of ev i l doers for the sake of firmly e stabl i shing

-
,

Dharma I am bornfrom ag e to age

.
”
.

When d eath came Moses face s h on e an d Bud dha s body

’ ’

became alig h t They all reached the stage when the sp i rit
.

—
begins to shine from w i th i n but then they died
Christ Jesus reached that stage on the Mount of Trans
figurat i on I t is of the very highest s i gn i fic ance that
.

H is r eal
w or k took p la ce su b s equ en t to th a t ev en t . He
—
suffered ; was ki l led and r es u r r ecte d .

Being killed is a very difl e r en t th i ng from dying Th e .

blood that had been the veh i cle of the Race — S pir i t must

flo w and b e cleansed of that contaminating influence Love .

of father an d mother exclusive of other fathers and moth

,

ers must g o—otherw i se U niversal Brotherhood and an

,

all embracing Al truistic Love could never bec ome an

-
,

actuality .

TH E C LE AN S I N G B Loon .

When the Savior Christ Jesus was crucified H i s body

was pierced in fiv e places ; i n the five centers where the

curr ents of the v i tal body flow ; and the pressure of the
crown of thorn s caused a flow from the s i xth also ( This .

i s a hint to those who alrea dy know these curr ents A .

full elucidation of this matter cannot be publicly g iven

out at this time )
w
.

When the blood flo ed from these centers the great ,

Sun sp i r i t Chr i st was l i berated from the physical v eh i cle

-
.

of Jesus an d found H i m self i n th e E ar th w i th indi v i dual ,

veh i cles The already exi st i ng planet ary veh i cles H e per
.

meate d with H i s own vehicles and in the twinkling of an ,

 CH RI S T AN D H I S M I S S I O N
-

07

eye diffused H i s own desire body over the p l anet whi ch

, ,

h as enabled H im thenceforth to work upon the Earth and

its humanity from wi th i n .

At that mome nt a tremend ous wave of S piritua l sunlight

flooded the Earth It rent the veil which the Race spirit
.
-

had hung before the Temple to kee p out all but the chosen
few and it made the P ath of I n itiation free thenceforth
, ,

to whomsoever will So far as concerne d the Spiritu al

.

Worlds this wave transforme d th e conditions of E arth

,

like a flash of lightning but the d ense concrete c onditions

, ,

are of course much more slowly afl ected

, ,
.

Like all rapid and h i gh vib rations of light this gre at ,

wave blinded the people by its dazzl i ng brilliance there ,

” “
fore it was said that the Sun was darkened The v ery .

opposite was what actually occurred The Sun was not .

darkened but shone out in glorious sp lendor It w as the

,
.

excess of l ight that blinded the pe ople and only as the ,

entire Earth absorbe d the desire body of the bright Sun

spirit did the vibration return to a more normal rate .

“
The expression the cle ansing blood of Christ Jesus
, ,

means that as the blood flowed on Calvary it bore with it ,

the great Sun Spirit Christ Who by that me ans secured

-
,

adm i ssion to the earth itse l f and since that moment h as

bee n its Re gent H e diff use d H i s own desire body through
.

ou t the planet thereby cleansing it from all the v i le in fl u

,
'
en ce s which ha d grown up under the r egi m e of the Race
’

spirit .

—
U nder the law all sinned ; nay more they could not ,

help it They had not ev olved to where they could do

.

right for Love s sake The d esire nature w as so strong that

’
.

it w as an impossibility for them to rule it altogether there ,

fore their debts eng endered under the law of C onse quence
-

, ,

piled up to monstrous proportions Evolution would h ave .

408 ROS I CR U C I AN C O S M O C O N C EP T I ON
-

been terribly delayed and m any lost to our l ife wave

al together if some help had not been given .

Therefore did Christ come to seek and to save that

which was lost . H e took away the em of the wo rld by
H i s cleansing blood which gave H im entrance to the
,

Earth and its humanity H e purified th e conditions and

.

We owe it to H im that we are able to gather for our desire

bodies purer desire stuff than formerly and H e continues
-

working to help us by making our external environment

,

constantly purer .

That this was and is done at the expense of great suf

f erin g to H i mself no one can doubt who is able to form
,

the least conception of the l i mitations endured by that

Great Spirit in en ter l n g th e hampering conditions of
physical e xistence e v en in the best and purest vehicle pos
,

s ible nor is H i s present limitation as Regent of the Earth

much less painful True H e is also Regent of the Sun
.
, ,

and therefore only partially confined to the Earth yet the ,

limitat ion s set by the crampingly slow vibrations of our

dense planet must be almost unendurab l e .

H ad Christ Jesus simply d i ed it would have been im

,

possible for H im to ha v e done this work but the Christian s ,

have a r is en Sa v ior ; On e Who is ever present to help those

Wh o call u pon H i s N ame H avm g suffered l i ke unto our
.

selves in all things and knowing fully our needs H e is

‘

lenient toward our m istakes and failures so long as we

continue trying to live the good life We must e v er keep .

before our eyes the fact that th e on ly r eal fai lu r e is ceas in g

to tr y
.

U pon the death of the dense body of Ch rist Jesus the ,

other vehicles were returned to t h e original owner Jesus ,

of N a z areth who for some time afterward while function

,

ing in a vital body which he had gathe red temporari ly,

4 10 RO S I CRU C I A N C OS M O C O N C EP T ION
-

May their eff orts be crowned with success speed the

d ay when modern science Shal l be spiritua l i zed and con
duct its investigations of matter from the standpoint of
spi rit for then and not until then will it arriv e at a true
, , ,

knowl edg e of the worl d.

 C H A P TER XVI .

F U TU RE DEVE LO P M E N T AN D I N I T I ATI ON .

T h e S even Days o f Cr eati on .

HE
Rosicrucian speaks of the Earth Period as Mars
Mercury The great creat i ve Day of Manifesta
.

tion is embodied in the names of the days of the

week for our week days have been named after the evol u
,
-

tion ary stages through which the virgin spirits pass in

the i r pilgrimage through matter .

Da y . C orr esp o nd s to th e I s r u l ed b y
S atu r d ay S atu r n P er i od S a tu r n
S u n d ay S u n P er od i T h e S un
M on d ay M oon P e r od i Th e M oon
T u e s d ay i
F rs t h al f o f th e E a r th P e r od i M ars
W e d n e s d ay S econ d h al f of th e E a r th P er o d i . . M e r cu r y
T h u r sd ay J i
u p t er P er od i J i
u p te r

i
F r d ay V e n u s P e r od i V enu s
The Vulcan P eriod is the last Period of our scheme of
evolution The quintessence of all the preceding P eriods
.

is extracted by the recapitulation of spiral after spiral .

N o new work is done unt i l the very last Revolution on the

very last Globe and then only in the Seventh Epoch .

Therefore the Vulcan P eriod may be said to correspond to

th e week which includes all of the seven days
,
.

The claim of astrologers that the days of the week are

ruled by the particular planet for which they are named ,

is well founded The ancients were also fam i liar with thi s
-
.

occult knowledge as is shown in the i r mythologies in

, ,

41 1
 R OS I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

which th e names of the gods are associated with th e days

”
of the week Saturday is pla i nly Saturn s day ; Sund ay
.
“ ’

i s correlated to the Sun an d Mon d ay to the Moon The , .

” “
Latins c all Tuesday Dies Mart i s wh i ch obviously s hows ,

i ts connection with Mars the god of war T he name ,

. .

” ” ” ”
“
Tues d ay i s d erived from T ir sd ag T ir or Tyr “
,
“ “
,

b e i ng the name of the N orse god of war

“
Wednesday .

was Woten sd ay from Woten also a N orse god ; it is

”
, ,

”
called D i es M er cu r i i by the Latins Showing its associ a
“
,

tion w i th Mercury as g 1v en in our list ,

.

”
Thurs d ay o r T h orsd ag is named for Thor the
,
“
,
“
,
”
N orse go d of thunder and is called Dies Jovis by the
“
,
”
Latins after the thunder god s Jove and Jupiter
“
, , .

Friday is named for the N orse god d ess of beauty

"

,
”
QFreya and for similar reasons the Latins call it Dies
‘ “
, ,

Veneris or Day of V enus

,
.

Th ese n am es of P er i ods h ave n oth i ng to d o w i th th e

h
p y s i ca l p lan ets b u t r ef er t
,
o p as t, p f
r es en t or u tu r e in
car na ti on s of th e E ar th ; for , again apply i ng
the H ermetic
”
ax i om As above so below the macrocosm must h ave its
,
“
, ,

incarnat i ons as well as the m i crocosm man ,

.

Occult sc i ence t eaches that there are 7 7 7 incarnations,

but that d oes not mean that the Earth undergoes 77 7
met amorphose s It me ans that evolving life makes
.

7 Revolutions around the

7 G l obes of the
7 World P eriods .

Th i s pilg rimage of Involution and Evol ution 1nclu din g ,

“ ”
the short cut of Initiati on is embodied in the Caduceus , ,

or Staff of Mer cury ( see diagram

“ ”
so called because
this occult symbol ind i cates The Path of Initiation which ,

h as been open to man only s i nce the b eg m n l n g of the

Mercury half of th e Earth Period Some of the less er .
4 14 RO S I CR U C I A N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

mysteries were g i ven to th e earlier Lem u r i an s an d Atlan '

teans but not the Four Great In i tiations }

,

The black serpent on d i agram 1 5 indicates the winding ,

cycli c path of Involution comprising the S aturn, Sun and,

Mood P er i ods an d the Mars half of the Earth P eriod

, ,

d ur i ng which the evol v ing l i fe bu i lt its v ehicles not b e

'

com i ng fully awake and clearly conscious of the outs i de

world unti l the latter part of the Atlantean Epoch .

The white serpent represents the path that the human

race will follow through the Mercury half of the Earth .

Perio d an d the Jup i ter Venus and V ulcan P erio ds dur

, , , ,
’
ing wh i ch pilgrimage man s consciousness will expand into
that of an omniscient Creati v e Intell i gence ,
.

The serp en ti ne path is the path followed by the great

”
“
majority ; but the Staff of Mercury around which the ,

shr p en ts twine shows the

“
stra i ght an d narrow way the
, ,

path of Initiation which enables thos e who walk therein

,

to accomplish in a few short lives that wh i ch it requires

mil lions of years for the majority of mankind to aecom
pl i sh .

It need scarcely be said that no description of the m itia

tory ceremonies can be g i v en as th e first v ow of the Ini ,

ti ate is silence ; bu t e v en i f perm i ssible i t would not be ,

impor ta nt What concerns us in gett i ng a bird s eye view

.
’
-

of the evolution ary path is to ascertain the result s of the

ceremonies .

The whole result of initiation is to gi v e to the spiritually

aspir i ng an opportunity to de v elop the higher faculti es
and powers in a short time and by severe training thereby ,

ga i n i ng the expansion of consc i ousness that all mankind

w i ll surely possess eventually but wh i ch the vast majority ,

choose to acqu i re through the slow process of or d i nary evo

lu tion We may know the states of consciousness and
.
 F U T U R E DE V EL OP M E N T 41 5

th ei r co ncomitant powers att ained by the candid at e as he

passes through successive great Initiations provided we ,

know what those future states and powers will be for h u

m an i ty i n general Some h i nts have been given and more
.

m ay be log i cally adduced by an appl i cat i on of the l aw of

Correspondenc es to gi v e a fa i rly rounded picture of the
,

evolut i on i n S tore for all of us an d the magn i tude of the

,

great steps in In i tiati on To do th i s it may help us to

.

glance back over the steps by which the consciousness of

man has been evolve d through the various P eriods .

We remember that dur i ng the Saturn P erio d the u n con

sci ou sn ess of man was S imilar to that of the dense body ,

when plunged into the deepest trance cond i tion ; this was
succeeded in the Sun period by a dreamless S leep con
, ,
-

sci ou sn ess In the Moon P eriod the first glimmering of

.

waki ng showed i tself in inwar d pictures of outward th i ngs .

The entire co nsciousness cons i sted of such inward r epre

scu tat i ons of external objects colors or sounds At l ast
, ,
.
,

in the latter part of the Atlantean Epoch this picture ,

consciousness ga v e way to the presen t full wa ki ng con -

sc1ou sn ess in wh i ch objects could be observed outs i de

, ,

clearly an d d i stinctly outlin ed in space When this ob j ec .

t i ve consciousness was attained man became aware of an

-

outs i de world an d for the first t i me thoroughly realized

”
the d i fier en ce between self and others H e then rea l
“ “
.

”
i z ed h i s separateness an d thenceforth the I consciousness “
,

Egoism became paramount AS prev i ous to that time

,
.

there h ad been no thoughts nor i deas deal i ng with an out

si de world there had consequently been no memory of
,

events .

The change from the internal picture consciousness to

the object i ve self— consciousness was effect ed by a very S low
-

p r ocess , commensurate w i th i ts m agn i tu d e l asting fro m ,

416 ROS I CRU C I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P TI ON

the existence on Globe C in the third Revolution of th e

Moon P eriod unt i l the latte r part of the Atlantean Epoch
,
.

During that time the evolving life pas se d throug h four

g r ea t S tages of animal li ke development
-
before reach i ng the
human stage These steps of the past correspond to four
.

stages yet to be pa ss ed through and to the fou r i nit i at ions , .

Within these four stages of consciousness p rev i ously

’
passed there are altogether thirteen steps and from man s ,

present state to the last of the Great Initiat i ons there are
also thirteen init i at i ons—the nine degrees of th e lesser
myster i es and the four Great Initiations .

There is a s i milar d ivision among our present animals

which can be traced through Form because as the form , ,

is the ex pr essm n of the l i fe so each step in i ts development ,

m ust necessarily S how a step forward in consciousness .

Cuvier was the first to divide the animal kingdom into

four primary classes but was not so successful in h i s divi
,

sion of these classes into sub classes The embryologist -

.
,

Karl Ernst von Baer also P rofessor Agassiz and other

,

scientists c l assify the an i mal k i ngdom into four primary

,

and thirteen subdivisions as follows ,

1 R A DI A T E S
l —P ol y p s, S e a an em on es -
an d C oral
2 — A cal ep h s, or
.

elly fish J -
.

3 — S tar fish , S e a u r ch n s -
i .

I I M O LLU S K S :
4 —A cep h al a ( oys ter s ,
5 —G a s t er op od a ( sn a ls ) i
—
.

6 C
ep h a l op o d a

R
II I A TI U L A T E SC
—
7 W or m s
—
.

8 C
r u s tacea ( l o ste s b r
9—I n s ects
,
‘

R
I V V E T E B A TE S R
1 0—Fi sh e s
—R
.

ll ep t l es i
1 2—B i r d s
.

—
.

13 M am rn al s
’

.
 ROS I CRU CIAN C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

worl d which we now percei v e through th e ph ysi cal senses .

At present when a th i ng or a color i s thought of the pic

, ,

ture or color presente d by the memory to our inn er con

sc i ou sn ess is but a d i m an d shadowy one compared with

the thing thought of .

As early as the Jupiter P eriod there will be a marked

change i n this respect Then the dream pictures of the
.
-

Moon P eriod w i ll return but they will b e subject to the

,

call of the thinker and not mere repro d uctions of outer

,

objects Thus there w i ll be a combination of the picture s

.

of the Moon P eriod and th e thoughts and ideas consciousl y

develop ed during the Earth P er i od that is it wil l be a , ,

S elf C on s ci ous P i ctu r e C on s ci ous n ess

- -
.

“
When a m an of the Jup i ter P er i od says red or spe aks ,

the name of an obj ect a clear and exact reproduction of

,

the particu l ar S hade of red of which he i s th i nking or of ,

the object to wh i ch he refers will be presente d to his i nner

.

_
,

vis i on and will also be qu i te visible to the hearer T here .

w i ll b e no m i sconception as to what is meant b y the words

S poken . Thoughts and i d eas w i ll be alive and visible ,

therefore hypocrisy and flattery will b e ent i rely eliminated .

Pe ople can be seen exactly as they are There will be .

both good and b ad but the two qual i t i es w i ll not be min

,

gled i n the same person There w i ll be the thoroughly

.

good man and the downright evil man and one of the ,

serious prob lems of that t i me w i ll be how to dea l with

the latter The Mani chees an Order of still higher spir i tu
.
,

ality than the Ros i cruci ans are at present studying that ,

ver y problem An i d ea of the con d i tion anticipated may

.

be gained from a sho rt r é sum é of their l egend ( All .

mystic orders have a legend s ymbolical of their ideals and

aspirat i ons ) .

In the legend of the M anichees there are two kingdoms

-
 F U TU RE DE V E LO P M E N T 4 19

—
that Of
the Light Elves and that of the -
Elve s N ight -
.

The latter attack the former are defeated and must be ,

puni shed But as the Li ght —

.
,
Elves are as thoroughly g oo d
as the N igh t Elves are b ad they cannot inflict e v il upon
-
,

their foes so th ey m us t b e pu n is h ed wi th Good There

,
.

fore a p art of the kingdom of th e Li ght El ves is i ncor -

r ated with that of the N ight El v es and in this way the

p o -

e vil is in time o v ercome H ate which will not submit to .

~

hate must succumb to Love

,
.

The internal p ictures of the Moon P erio d were a cer

’
ta i n expression of man s external en v ironment In the .

Jupiter P eriod the pictures will be expressed from w i thin ;

they will be an outcome of the inner life of the man H e .

wi ll also possess the additional faculty which he cult i v ated ,

i n the Earth P eriod of seeing th i ngs in space outs ide of

,

himself In the Moon P erio d he d i d not see the concrete

.

th i ng but only its soul qualit i es In the Jupiter P eriod

,
-
.

he will see both and will thus ha v e a thorough perception

,

and un derstanding of his surroun d i ngs At a later stage .

in the same P er i od this percept i v e ability will be suc

,

ceed ed by a st i ll higher phase H i s power to form clear .

menta l conceptions of colors objects or tones will enable , ,

him to contact and influence supersensuous be i ngs of v ar i

ous or d ers and to secure the ir obe d i ence employing their ,

forces as he wishes H e will be unable to send out from

.

himself the forces wher ewith to carry out h i s desi gns how ,

ever and will be dependent upon the help of these super

,

physical beings who will then be at h i s service

,

At the close of the Venus P eriod h e will be able to use

his own force to give his pictures life and to set them out
.
'

from himself as objects in space H e will then possess a n .

O bj ecti v e S elf C on s ci ou s
,
-
,
i
C r a t v C on s crou s n ess
e e-
.

V ery little can be said about the high spiritual con

42 0 R
OS I CR C U IA N ( C OS M O -
C O N C E P T ION

wh i ch w i ll be attained at the close of the Vulcan

sci ou sn ess
'

P eriod ; it would be qu i te beyond our present com p r eh en

sion .

S P I RALS W ITH I N S PI RALS .

It must not be suppo sed that these states of conscious

ness commence at the beginn i ng of the P eriods to which
they belong and last unt i l the end There is always the .

Recap i tulation an d therefore there must be the corre

,

spond in g stages of consciousness on an ascend i ng scale .

T h e Saturn Revolution of any Period the stay on Globe ,

A and the first Epoch on any Globe are repet i ti ons of

, ,

the Saturn P eriod states of d evelopment The Sun Revo .

lu tion the stay on Globe B an d the second Epoch on any

, ,

Globe are Recapitul ations of the Sun Period states of de

v é l opm en t and so on all the w ay through
,
H ence it wil l
,
.

be seen that the consciousness which is to be the especia l

and pecul i ar result or product of any Period does not ,

begin to be evol v ed until all the Recapitulations have been

made The waking consciousness of the Earth Period was
.
-

not start ed until the Fourth Revo lution wh en th e l i f e ,

wave had reached the Fourth Globe ( D ) and was in the ,

Fourth or Atlant ean Epoch on t hat Globe .

The Jupiter consciousness will not start in the Jupiter

Period until the F i fth Revolution when the Fifth Globe ,

( )
E has been reached and th e Fifth Epoch co mmences
on that Globe .

Correspondingly the Venus consciousness will not begin

,

until the Sixth Revolution has come to the Si xth Globe

and Epoch and the special Vulcan wor k will be confined
,

to the v ery last Globe and Epoch j ust before the Day of ,

M anifestatio ncloses .

The time required for passing through these respective

 RO S I CRU C I AN C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON -

P er i ods, and will reach i ts highest devel opment in the

E ar th P eriod .

The vit al body was started i n the second Revolution of

the Sun P eri od was reconstructed in the Moon an d Earth
,

Perio ds and will reach perfect i o n in th e Jupiter Pe riod

,
.
,

wh i ch is i ts fourth stage as the Earth P erio d is the fourth

,

stage for th e d ense body .

The d es1r e bo d y was started in the Moon per i od recon ,

structed i n the Earth per i o d wi ll be further modifie d in

,

the Jup i ter P eriod reaching perfection in the V enu s

,

Per i o d .

The min d was started in the Earth Period will be modi.

fied in the Jupiter and Venus P erio ds and att ain to per ,

f ecti on in the Vulc an P eriod .

R eference to d i agram 8 w i ll S how th at the lowest Globe

of the Jupiter P eriod is loca te d in the E ther l c Region It .

would therefore be impossible to use the dens e phys i cal

vehicle there as only a vital body can be used in the
,

Ether i c Region Yet it must not be supposed that after

.

spend i ng the time from the beg i nning of the Sa turn

P er i od to the end of the Earth P eriod in com pleting an d
perfecting this b ody it is then thrown away that m an
,

may funct i on i n a higher vehi cle "

“ ”

N oth i ng i n N a tu re is wasted In the Jupiter Period .

the f orces of the dense body will be superimposed upon

the completed vit al body That vehicle w i ll then possess
.

the powers of the dens e body in addition to its own f acu l

,

ties and will therefore be a much more valuable in stru

,

ment for the ex pr essIO n of the threefold spirit than if

b uilt from its o wn fo rces alone .

Similarly Globe D of the V enus Period is located in

,

th e Desire World ( see diagram hence neither a dense

nor a vital body could be used as an I nstrument of con
 F U TU RE DE V ELOP M E N T 42 3

sciou sn ess, theref ore

the essences of th e perf ected dense
and vit al bodies are incorporated in the completed desire
body the l atter thus becoming a vehicle of transcendent
,

qualities marvelously adaptable and so responsive to the

,

slightest wish of the indwelling spir i t that in our present

limitations it is beyond our utmo st conception
,
.

Yet the efficiency of even this splend i d vehicle will be

transcended when in the Vulcan period its essence to ,

gether with the essences of the den se and vital bodies are ,

added to the mind body which becomes the highest of

,
’
m an s vehicles containing wi thin itself the quintessence
,

of al l that was best in all the vehicles T he vehicle of the .

Venus Period being beyond our present power of con cep

tion how much more so is that which will be at the service
,

of the divine beings of the Vulc an P eriod "

During involution the cre ative H ierarchies assisted m an
to a rouse into activity the threefold spirit the Ego to , ,

build the threefo l d body and to acquire the l ink of mind

, .

N ow however on the seventh day ( to use the lang uage

, ,

of the Bible ) God rests Man must work out his own
, .

salvation . The threefold spirit must complete the working

out of the plan begun by the Gods .

The human spirit which was awakened during I n volu

,

tion in the Moon P eriod will be the most prominent of

,

the three aspects of the spirit in the evo l ution of the

Jupiter P eriod which is the corresponding P eriod on the
,

upward arc of the spiral The life spirit which was

.
,

started into activity in the Sun P eriod will manifest its ,

r i n cl al activity in the corresponding V enu s P eriod and

p p ,

the particular influences of the Divine Spirit wil l be strong

est in the Vulcan P eriod because it was vi vified in the
,

correspond ing Saturn Period .

A l l three aspects of the spirit are ac tive al l th e time

424 R O S I CRU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

during evolution but the principal activity of each aspect

,

will be unfol d ed in those particular P eriods b ecause the ,

work to be done there i s i ts special work .

When the threefold spirit had evolved the threefold body

and gained control of it through the focus of M i nd it ,

commenced to evolve the threefold soul by working from

within H ow much or how little soul a man has depends
.

upon the a mount of work the spirit has done in the bodies .

This has been explained in the chapte r describing pos t

m or tem exper i ences .

As much of the desire bo dy as has been worked upon

by the Ego is transmuted into the emotional soul an d is ,

ultimately assimilated by the human spirit the special ,

vehicle of wh ich is the desire body .

A s much o f the vital body as has been worked upon by

the life spirit becomes the Intellectual soul and it builds
, ,

the life spirit because that aspect of th e threefold Spirit

,

has its counterpart in the vital body .

As much of the dense body as has been worked upon

by the Divine Spirit is called the Conscious soul and is ,

ultimately merged in the D i v i ne Spirit because the dense ,

body is its material emanat i on .

The Co nscious soul grows by action external impacts , ,

and experience .

The Emotional soul grows by the feelings and emotions

generated by act i ons and experiences .

The Intellectual soul as me d iator between the other

,

two grows by the exer cise of memory by which it links

, ,

together past and present experiences and the feelings

” “ “
engendered thereby thus creating sympathy and an
,
”
tipath y which could not exist apart from memory b e
, ,

cause the feelings resulting from experience alone would be

evanescent .
 RO S I CRU CI AN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

r i al i sticday and age there is scarc ely an e ffort made to

conceal the contempt in which the faculty of i magin ati on
is generally held and none feel the effects of this more
,

acutely than in v entors They are usually classed as

.

“
cranks and yet they have been th e chief factors in the
,

subjugation of the Physical World and in making our

social environment what it is today Any improvement in .

spir i tual or phys i cal cond i t i ons must first be imagined as

w e
e poss i b i l i ty before it can become an actual i ty
. .

If the student will turn to diagram 1 th i s fact will b e

come cle ar In the comparison there drawn b etween the
.

funct i ons of the d i fferent human veh i cles and the parts of
a ster eopti con th e mind corresponds to the lens I t is the
, _
.

focusing medium whereby the idea s wrought by the imagi

v n ati on of th e spirit are projected upon the material uni

verse First they are thought forms only but when the
.
-

desire to realize the imagined po ss i bil i ties has set the man
to work in the P hysical World they become what we call ,
“ ”
concrete realities .

At the present time however the mind is not f ocu sed

, ,

in a way that enables it to gi v e a clear an d true picture of

what the S p i rit i mag i nes It is not one pointed It gives
.
-
.

misty and clouded p i ctures H ence the necessity of ex per i

.

ment to show the inadequacies of the first concept i on and

,
,

bring abou t n ew 1m ag 1n 1n g s and i deas until the image

produce d by the spiri t i n mental subs tance has been repro
d u ced in physical substance .

At the best we are able to shape through the mind only

,

such images as h ave to do with Form because the human ,

mind was not st arte d unti l the Earth P er i od and ther e ,

fore i s now in i ts form or m i ner al stage hence i n our

”
,
“
,

operations we are confined to forms to m i nerals We can , .

imagine ways an d means of working with the minera l

 FU T U R E DE V E LOP M E N T 42 7

forms of the three lower kingdoms but can do little or ,

nothing with l i v i ng bo d ies We may indeed graft l i ving .

branch to l i ving tree or l i vi ng part of an i mal or man to

,

other l i v i ng part but i t is not life with wh i ch we are

,

work i ng ; it is form only We are making d i ff erent con d i .

tions b u t the life wh i ch already i nhabited the form con

,
’
tinu es to do so sti ll To create life is beyond man s power
.

until his mind has become al i ve .

In the Jup i ter P er i od the mind will be vivifie d to some

extent and man can then imagine f orms which will liv e
and grow like plants
,
.

“
In the Venus P eriod wh en h i s mind has acquire d Fee l
,
”
ing he can create l i ving growing and feeli n g things
, ,
, ,
.

When he reaches pe rfection at the end of the Vulcan ,

”
Period he will be able to imagi ne into existence crea
,
“

tures that will l i ve grow fee l and th in k , , , .

In the S aturn P eriod the life wave which is now man

started on its evolution The Lords of Mind were then .

human They worke d with man at that P eriod when he

.
,

was mineral They now have nothi ng to do with the lower

.

k i ngdom s but are concerne d sole l y with our hum an

"

d evelopment .

Our present an ima l s started the i r mi nera l ex i sten ce l n

the Sun P eriod at wh i ch t i me the Archangels were human
, ,

therefore th e Ar changels are the rulers and g uides of the

evolut i onof that which is now animal but have nothing to ,

do with plant or mineral .

The present plants had the i r m i ner al existence in the

Moon P eri od The Angels were then human therefore
.
,

they have spec i al concern w i th the l i fe that now inhab i ts

the plants to guide it up to the human Stage but they
,

ha v e no interest in the minerals .

Ou r present human i ty will have to work w i th the new

4 28 ROS I CRU C IAN C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON -

life wave which entered evo l ution in the E arth Period and
,

n ow en s ou ls th e m i n er als We are n ow w orkin g w i th i t

.

by means of the faculty of imaginati on giving it f orm ,

building it into sh i ps, bridges ra i lways houses etc , , ,

.

In the Jup iter P er i od we shall g uide the ev olution of the

p l ant kingdom for that which
,
is at e
pres nt mineral will
then have a plant l i ke existence and we must work w i th it
-

th ere as the Angels are now doing with our plant k i ng d om .

Ou r faculty of imag i nat i on w i ll be so developed that

we shall have the abil i ty not only to create forms by means
,

of it but to endow th ose forms with v i tality

,
.

In the Venus P eri od our present mineral life wav e

shall h ave a d vance d another step and we shall be doing f or ,

the an im al s of that period what the Archangels are now

—
doing for our animals g ivm g them l iving and feel ing
f brm s .

Lastly, i n the V ul can Period it wil l be our pri vfl eg e

'

to give them a germinal mind as th e Lor d s of Mind d i d ,

to us The present mineral s w i ll then have become the

.

hum anity of the Vulcan P er i o d and we shall have passed ,

through stages sim i lar to tho se thro ugh wh i ch the Angels

and Arch angel s are now pass i ng We shall then have .

reached a point in evolution a l i ttle h i gher than that of th e

present Lords of M i nd for remembe r there is never an
, ,

exa ct reproduction anywhere but always progress i ve 1m ,

provement because of the sp i ral

,
.

The Divine Spirit will absorb the human spirit a t th e

cl ose of the J upiter Period ; the l i fe spir i t at the close of
the Venus Period ; and the perfected M i nd embodying ,

all that it has garn ered during its pil g rim age through all
the seven P er i ods will be absorbe d by the D i vine Spirit at
,

the cl ose of the Vulcan P eriod ( There is no con trad ic .

tion of th e forego i ng in the statement ma d e elsewhere that

 C H APTER X V II .

TH E ME TH OD OF A C Q U I RI N G F IRS T -
H AN D K N OW LEDGE .

Th e F i rs t S teps .

time has now come for po i nti ng out the way b y

HE
which each i n d i v i dual may i n vestigate for himself
all the facts with wh i ch we have d ealt thus far in
"

our study AS state d i n the beginning there are no special

.
,
“ ”
gifts bestowed upon any All may know for themsel v es
.

the truth concerning the pilgrimage of the soul the past ,

ev olution and futur e d est i ny of the world without being ,

compelle d to depend upon the ver ac i ty of another There .

is a method whereby th i s valuable faculty m ay be acquired ,

and the earnest stu den t q u ali f y h i mself to investigate those

'

super phys i cal realms ; a method by wh i ch if persistently

-

followed th e powers of a God may be developed

,
.

A simple illustration may ind i cate the first steps The .

very best mechanic is well n i gh helpless Wi thout the tools

-

of his craft I n deed i t is the hall mark of a goo d artisan

.
-

that he is very fasti d ious as to the quality and condition

"

of the tools he uses because he k nows that the work de

,

pends as much upon the i r excellence as upon h i s S kill .

—
The Ego has several instruments a dense body a vital ,

body a desire body, and a mind Thes e are its tools and
, .

upon their qu ality and condition depends h ow much or how

little it can accomplish in its work of gathering experience
in each l ife If the instruments are poor and dull there
.

430
 A C Q U IR I N G F I RS T H AN D K N OWLEDGE
-
43 1

will b e b u t little spiritual growth and the life will be a

~

b arren one so far as the sp i r it i s concerne d

,
.

”
We ge nerally esti mate a successful life by the bank “

a ccount the soc i al pos i ti on atta i ned or the hap pi

~

, ,

ness g from a carefree existe nce and a sheltered

en vi

When is regarded in that way all the princ i pal

things that m ake for permanency are forgotten ; th e indi
vidual is blinded by the evanescent and i llusion ary A .

bank account seems such a very real success the fact i s ,

forgotten that from the moment the Ego leaves the body i t ,

has no equ i ty in gold nor any other earthly treasure It .

may even have to answer for the methods employed in

amas sing that hoard and suff er great pa i n in seeing others
,

spend it It is forgotten that the important soci al posi

.

t i on also disappears when the silver cord is loosed Those .

who once fawned m ay then snee r an d even those who were ,

faithful i n life m i ght S hudder at the thought of an hour

spent with no company b u t that of the dead All that is .

of this life alon e i s vanity Only that is of true value.

wh i ch can be t aken with us across the threshold as the

treasure of the S p i rit
'

The hot hou se plant may look very beautiful as it blooms

-

in its Shelte re d glass house but should the furnace fire ,

go out it would wither and d i e wh i le the plant that has

, ,

grown i n ra i n and sunsh i ne through storm and calm w i ll

, ,

su r vw e the winter and bloom afresh each year From the .

viewpoint of the soul happ i ness and a Sheltere d environ

,

ment are gen erally unfortunate circumstances The pette d .

and fondled lap dog is subj ect to d i se ases of which the

-

homele ss cur wh i ch has to fight for a scr ap from a gar

,

bage can knows nothing The cur s l i fe is h ard but i t

,
.
’
,

gets experience that makes it alert al ive an d resource ful , .

43 2 R O S I CRU C I A N C OS M O -
C O N C E P TION

Its l i fe is rich in events and i t reaps a harvest of ex peri

,

ence while the pampered l ap dog drone s its time away in

,
-

fearful monotony .

The case of a human being is somewhat S imilar It .

may be hard to fight poverty and hunger but from the ,

standpo i nt of the soul i t is i nfini te ly preferable to a li fe of

idle luxury Where wealth is nothing more than the han d
.

ma i d of well th oug h t ou t ph i lanthropy wh i ch helps man in ,

such a way as to r eal ly uplift h i m it may be a very gre at ,

blessi ng an d a means of growth for its possessor but wh en ,

used f or selfish purposes and oppress i on it cannot be

,
,

regarded as other than an unm i tigated curse .

The soul i s here to acqui re exp eri ence through its i n stru
ments Thes e are the tools furn i shed to each at b i rth and
.
,

they are goo d bad or in difier en t according to what we

,

h ave learned through past exper i ence in the buil d ing of

t hem Such as they are we must work w i th them if at all
.
,
.

If we have become arouse d from the usual lethargy an d

are anx i ous to progress th e question naturally arl ses What
, ,

must I do ?
W i thout well kept tools the mechanic can do no effective
-

work ; S im i larly the i nstruments of the Ego must be

,

clean sed an d sharpened ; then we may commence to work

to some purpose AS one works w i th those won derful tools
.

they them selves i mpro ve with proper u se and become more

and more effic i ent to aid in the work The object of this .

work is U n i on wi th th e H ig h er S elf .

There are three ste ps by which this work con quers the
lower nature but they are not completely taken one after
,

the other In a certain sense they g o together so that at

.
,

the present S tage the first receives th e most atten ion the ,

second l ess and th e third least of a l l

,
In time , when the .
 ROS I CRU CI AN C O S M O C ON C E P T ION
-

P aul refers to this future state when he say s : U nti l “

”
Christ be formed i n you an d exhorts his followers as men
, ,

who are running a race to rid themselves of every weight

, .

The fundamental pri nc i ple i n bu i ld i ng the vital body i s

repetition Repeated experiences work on it to create
.

memory The Leaders of human i ty who desired to give

.
,

us unconsc i ous help by certa i n exercises inst i tuted prayer ,

as a means of br i nging pure and lofty thought to work on

”
the vital body and enjo i ned us to pray w i thout ceasing
,
“
.

Scoffers have often asked sneeringly why it should be

thought necessary to always pray bec ause if God is om n is
,

cient H e knows our needs and if H e is not our prayer s ,

will prob ab ly never reach H im ; and if not omniscient ,

H e cannot b e Om nipotent and therefore could not answe r

,

prayer in an y case Many an earnest Christian may also

.

Have thought it wrong to b e continually importuning th e

Throne of Grace .

Such ideas are founded upon a misunderstanding of

facts Truly God is omniscient and require s no reminder
.

of our needs but i f we pray aright we lift ourselves u p to

, ,
‘

H im thus work i ng upon an d pur i fy i ng our vital bodies

'

, .

If we pray aright—but that is the gre at trouble We are .

generally much more concerned about temporal things

than we ar e about s pi r itual upliftment Churches will .

hold special meet i ngs to pray for ra i n "and the chaplains

of oppos i ng armie s or nav i es w i ll even pray before a b attle
that success may follow their arms "
That is prayer to the Race God Who fights the battl es
-
,

of H is people gives them increase of flocks and herds

, ,

fills their granaries and caters to their materi al wants

-

Such prayers are not even purify i ng They are from the .

d esire body which sums up th e S itua ti on th us : N ow Lord

, ,
 A C QUI R I N G F I R S T H A N D -
KN OWLEDGE 43 5

I am k eeping your comm andments to the best of my ability

and I want You to do Your part in return
‘

Christ gave to humanity a prayer that is like H imself , ,

unique and all embracing In it there are seven d i stinct

-
.

and separate praye r s ; one for each of the seven principles

of man—the thr eefold body the threefold spirit and the
,

link of mind Each prayer is peculiarly ad apte d to pro

.

mote the progression of that p an t of composit e man to

whi ch it refers .

The purpose of the prayer rel ating to the three f ol d body

is the spiri tualization of those veh i cles and the e x traction
therefrom of the threefold soul .

The prayers relating to the threefold spirit prepare it to

receive the extract ed essence, the threefold soul .

The prayer for the l i nk of m i nd is to keep it in its

proper rel ation as a tie between the higher and the lower

The third help to be given to humanity will be the

Reli gion of the Father We can ha v e v ery little con cep
.

tion of what that wi ll be sa v e that the i deal will be even

,

higher than Brotherhood and that by it the dense body

will be spirituali ze d .

The Religions of the H oly Spirit the R ace re l igions,

-
,

were for the upl i fting of the human race through a feeling
of kinship limited to a group— family tribe or nat i on ,
.
’

T he purpose of th e Rel i gion of The Son Christ is to , ,

further uplift m ank i nd by form i ng it into a U niversa l

Brotherhood of separ ate i ndiv i duals .

The ideal of the Rel ig i on of The Father will be the

el i mination of all separaten ess me rg ing all into On e so
, ,
”“ ” “
that there will be no I nor Thou but all will be On e ,

i n r ea li ty
. Thi s will not come to pass wh i le we are st i ll
i nh abitants of the physical Earth but in a future state
,
 43 6 ROS I CR C U IAN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON _

wher e we sh all real iz e our unity with al l each having access ,

to all the knowledge garnered by each sep ara te individu al .

Just as the single facet of a di amond has access to all the

light that comes through e ach of th e other facets is one ,
'
with them yet bounded by lines wh i ch giv e it a certain
,

individuality wi th ou t s eparaten ess so will the I ndividua l ,

spirit r etain th e m em ory of i ts par ti cu lar ex p eri en ces ,

while giving to all others th e frui ts of its individua l

existence .

fl
T h ese are the step s an d stages through Which hum anity
.

is unconsciously being led .

In past ages the Race sp i rit reigned alone Man was -

.

c ontent with a patriarchal and paternal government in

which he had no part -

N ow all over the world we see .

signs of the break i ng down of the old system The caste .

system ,
which was the stronghold of England in India ,

is crumbling Instead of being separated into small

.

g roups,
the people are uniting in the demand that the
oppre ssor shall depart and leave them to live in freedom
under a government of by and for the people Russia is ,
.

torn by strife for freedom from a dictatorial autocratic ,

g overn m ent T.urkey has awakened and t aken a long

stride toward liberty H ere in our own land where we
.
,

are supposed to be in the actual enj oyment of such liberty

.

as others are as yet only able to covet or fight for we are

,
‘
, ,

not yet satisfied We are learning that there are other

.

oppressions than tho se of an autocratic monarchy We .

see that we have still industrial freedom to gain We are .

chafing under th e yoke of the trusts and an insane system

of competition We are trending toward co—
. ope ration ,

which is now practice d b y the trusts within their own

con fines for private profit We are desirous of a state of .
 RO S I C RU C I A N C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON-

currents may flow thr ough his body in a certain w ay to

produce certain defini te results That instruction would .

be altogether useless for a Caucasian as he is absolute ly ,

i mperv i ous to those currents because of his way of l i v i ng

, .

If he is to attain res ults at all he must work in harmony ,

with the const ituti on of h i s veh icles That is why th e .

”
“
Mysteries were establ i shed in d ifferent parts of Europe
during the Mi d dle Ages The Alchem i sts w ere deep stu
.

d ents of the h i gher occult S c i ence Th e popular bel ief .

that the object of the i r s tudy and experiment i ng was the

transmutat i on of baser m etals into gol d was becaus e they ,

chose that symbolic way of descr i b i ng the i r true work ,

which was the transmutat i on of the lower nature int o

s pir i t It was thus descr ibed to lull the suspic i ons of the
.

pri ests w i thout stating a falsehood The statement that

,
.

.
th e Ros i crucians were a society devoted to the discovery
and use of the formula for the mak i ng of the P hilosoph “

”
er S Stone
’
w as and is true It is also true that most
.

people have han d led and do often handle th i s wondrous

stone It is comm on but of no avail to an but the in d i
.
'

vi d ual who makes it for himself The formula i s given in .

the esoteric trai ning and a R OSIcr u CI an i s no d iff erent I n

that respect from the occulti st of any other sch ool All
‘

are en g aged i n t h e mak i ng of th i s coveted stone each , ,

however using h i s own methods as there are no two i n d i

, ,

v id u al s alike and consequently really effective work is

al w ays ind i v i d ual in its scope .

All occult schools are d i vis i ble into seven as are the ,

”
Rays of Life , th e virgin S pirits Each School or Order .

belongs to one of the se seven Rays as does each un i t of ,

our humanity Therefore any individual seek i ng to uni te

.

with one of th ese occul t g rou ps the Brothers in wh i ch

'
”
,
“

do not be long to his Ray cannot do so with benefit to

,
 AC Q U I R I N G FI RS T H AN D -
KN OWLEDGE

himse l f The members of these groups are brothers in a

.

more I ntimate sense than are the rest of human ity .

P erhaps if these seven Ray s are compared to the seven

colors of the S pectrum , their relation to one another can
be better understood For instance i f a r ed ray were to
.
,

ally itself with a green ray inharmony would resul t ,

The .

same princ iple applies to spirits E ach must pr ocee d .

With the group to wh i ch it belongs during manifestation ,

yet they are all one As all the colors are contained in
.

the White light but the refractive quality of our atm os

,

p h e re seems to divide it into seven colors so the illusory ,

cond i tions of concrete existence cause the v 1r g1n spir i ts

to s ee m grouped and this a pparent grouping will abi d e
while we are in this state .

The R osicru cI an Order was started particularly for thos e

Whose h i gh degree of intellectual development caused them
to repudiate the heart Intellect i mperiously demands a
.

logical explanation of everything— the world myste ry the ,

questions of life and death The reasons for and the .

m odus op er an di of existence were not explained by the

“
priestly inj u cti on not to seek to know the mysteries of
”
God .

To any man or woman who is blest or otherwise with , ,

such an inquiring mind it is of paramount importance

th at th ey shall rece i v e all the information they crave so ,

that when the head i s stilled the heart may speak Intel , .

lectual knowledge is b u t a means to an end not the end ,

itself Therefore the Ro sicrucian purposes first of al l to

.
, ,

satisfy the aspirant for knowledge that everything in the

universe is reasonable thu s winn i ng over the rebellious
,

intellect When it has ceased to cr iti ci se an d is ready to

.
'

accept provisionally as pr obab ly true statements which

, ,

cannot be immediately verified then and not until then , , ,

440 RO S I CRU C I AN C OS M O C ONC EP T I ON
-

will esoteri c training b eeff ective in develop i ng th e higher

faculties whereby man pas ses from faith to fir st hand .
-

kn owledge Yet even then it will be found that as the

.
, ,

pupil progresses in fir st hand knowledge and becomes able

-

to invest i gate for h imself there are always truths ahead,

of him that he knows to be truths but which he is not yet ,

advanced sufficiently to invest i gate .

The pupil w i ll do well to remember that nothing that is

not logical can exist in the universe and that logic is the
surest guide in all the Worl d s but he must not forget that ,

his faculti es are lim i ted and that m ore than his own pow
ers of logical reasoning may be needed to solve a gi v en
problem although it may ne v ertheless be susceptibl e of
, , ,

full explanation but by lines of reasoning which are b e

,

yond the cap acity of the pupil at that stage of his de

v6 l opm en t Another point that must be borne In mind
.

is that unwavering confidenc e in the teacher is absolutely

necessary .

The foregoing is recommended to the particular con

sideration of all who intend taking th e first steps toward

the higher knowledge If the directions given are fol

.

l owed at all they must be given full credence as an effi

,

caci ou s means to accomplish their purpose To follow .

them in a half hearted manner would be of no ava i l w hat

-

ever U nbelief will kill the fairest flower ever produced

.

by the spirit .

"

Work on the di ff erent bodies of man is carr i ed on syn

ch ron ou sl y On e body cannot be influenced without af
.

f ectin g the others but the principal work may be done on

,

an y one of them .

If strict attention is pa i d t o hygiene and diet the dense ,

body is the one pri nc i pally a ff ected but at the same time ,

there is also an effect on the v ital body and the desire

442 RO S I CRU C IA N C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON -

at length that d egre e of organization develops which is

known as a foetus This becomes larger firmer an d more .
, ,

fully organ i zed up to the time of birth when the state of ,

infancy begins .

The same process of conso l idation which commenced .

with the first visible stage of ex i stence still continues ,

.

The being pass es through the d i fferent stages of infancy ,

child hood youth m an h i od or womanhood old age and

, , , ,

at last comes to the chan ge that is called death .

Each of these stages i s characterized by an i n cr easing

degr ee of h ar d n ess an d s oli di ty
There is a gradual increase in density and firmness of
the bones tendons cartilages ligaments ti ssues mem
, , , , ,

branes the cover i ngs and even the very substance of the
,

stomach li v er lungs and other organs The j oi nts b e

, , ,
.

come rigid and dry They begin to crack and gr ate when .

they are moved because th e synovial fluid which oils and

, ,

softens them is diminished in quantity and r endered too

,

thick and glutinous to serve that purpose .

The heart the brain and the entire muscul ar system

, , ,

spin al cord nerves eyes etc partake of the same con

, , ,
.
,

solidating process growing more and more rigid Millions

, .

upon m i llions of the minute cap i llary vessels which ramify

and S pread like the branches of a tree throughout the en
tire bo dy gradually choke u p and change into solid fibre
‘

, ,

no longer per vm u s to the b l ood .

The larger blood vessels both arteries and veins indu , ,

rate l ose their elasticity grow smaller and becom e in

, , ,

capable of carrying the requ i red amount of blood The .

fluids of the body th i cken and become putrid loaded w i th ,

earthy matter The skin withers an d grows w rinkl e d and

.

d ry .The ha i r falls off for la ck of oil The teeth decay .

and drop out for lack of gelatine The motor nerves begin .
 A C Q U IR I N G F I RS T HAN D-
KN OWLEDGE

to dry up and the movements of the body become awkward

and slow The senses fail the circulation of the blood is
.

retarded ; it stagna tes and congeals in the vessels More .

and more the body loses its former powers Once elastic .
,

healthy al er t pliable active and sensitive 1t becomes

, , , ,

rigi d slow and insens i ble

, ,
Finally it dies of old age
.
,
.

The question now arises What is the cause of this gra d

,

ual ossificat i on of the body bringing r i gidity decrepitude

, , ,

and death ?
Fr om the purely physic al standpoint chemists seem to ,

be unanimous in the opinion that it is principally an i n

crease of phosphate of lime ( bone matter ) carbonate of ,

lime ( common chalk ) and sulphate of li me ( plaster of

,

par i s ) with occasionally a little ma gnesia and an insigni

,

fican t amou nt of othe r earthy matters .

Th e only di ff erence between the body of old age and

that of chil dhood is the greater density toughne ss an d ,

r ig i dity cau se d by the greater proportion of calcareous

, ,

earthy matter entering into the composition of the for

mer The bones of a child are compo sed of three parts of
.

gelatine to one pa rt of earthy matter In old age th i s

‘

proportion 1 s reversed Wh at i s the sou rce of this death

.

deali ng acc um ulation of sol i d matter ?

It seems to be ax i omat i c that the entire body is nour
i she d by the blood and that everything cont ained in the
body of whatever nature has fi rst been in the blood
, ,
.

Analysis shows that the b lood holds earthy substances of

the same kind as the solidifyi ng agents— and mark the -

ar teria l blood contains m ore ear thy m atter than th e v en ous

b l o od .

Th i s i s highly important It shows that in every cycl e

.

the blood deposits ea r thy substances It is therefore the .

common carr i er that chokes up the system B ut its sup .

4 44 R O S I CRU C I A N C O S M O CO N CE P I I ON
-
'‘

ply of earthy matter must be replenish ed otherwise it ,

could not cont i nue to do this Where d oes it renew i ts .

d ea dl y load ? There can be b u t one ans w er to th at ques

—
t i on from the f ood and drink ; there is absolutely no
other source .

The foo d and drink wh ich nourish the body must be ,

at the same ti me the primary S ource of the calcareous

,
.

earthy matter wh i ch is deposited by the blood all over the

system causing decrepitude and final ly death To sus
, .

tain physical life it is necess ary that we eat and drink ,

but as there are many kinds of f ood and drink it b e ,

hooves u s in th e l ight of the above f acts to a scertain if

, , ,

possible what kinds contain the smallest proporti on of

,

destruct i ve matter If we can find such food we can

.

lengthen our lives and from an occult standpo i nt it is

, ,

desirable to live as l ong as possible in each dense b ody ,

parti cularly after a start h as bee n made toward the path .

So many years are required to educate through childh ood ,

and hot youth each body inhabited until the Spirit can
, ,

at l ast obtain some contro l over it that the l onger we can ,

’
retain a bo dy that h as become amenable to the spirit s
promptings the b ette r Therefore it is highly important
, .

that the pup i l partake of such food and drink only as w i ll

depos i t th e least amount of hardening matter and at the
s ame ti m e keep the excretory org ans act i ve .

The skin and the urinary system are the savior s of man
from an e arly grave Were it not that by their means
.
,

most of the earthy matter taken with our food is clim i

nated no one would l i ve ten years
,
.

It ha s been estimate d that ordinary undi stilled spring ,

water conta i ns carbonate and other compounds of l i me to

such an extent that the average quant ity used each d ay by
one pe rson 11] the form of tea cofiee soup etc woul d i n
, , ,
.
,
 R OSI CR CU IAN C OS M O -
C O N C E P T I ON

fo rms on the bo ttom of the teakettle has been left there ‘

by the evaporated water which escap e d from the kettle as

‘

steam If the steam were con dense d we should have dis

.
,

tilled w ater which is an important adjunct in keeping

,

the body young .

There is absolutely no earthy matt er in distilled water ,

nor i n r am water snow nor hail ( except what may be

,

gathered by contact with house tops but coffee tea -

, , ,

or soup made with ordinary water no matter h ow long ,

boiled i s n ot purified of the earthy particles ; on the con

,

tr ar y the longer they are boi l ed the more heavily charged

, ,

with it they become Those suff ering from urinary dis

.

eases S hould never drink any but d i stilled water

It may be said generally of the solid foo d s we take into
our system that fresh vegetables and ripe fruits contain
,

the greatest proportion of nutrit ious matter and the least

of earthy substances .

As we are writing for the aspirant to the higher life

and not for the general public i t may also be said that
.
,

animal food should be entirely a v o i d ed i f po ssible N o ,

.

one who kills can go very far along the path of holiness .

We do even worse than if we actually k i lled for in order ,

to sh i eld ourselves from the personal commission of the

act Of killing and still reap its results we force a fellow
, ,

being through economic necess i ty to devote his entire

, ,

t i me to murder thereby brutalizing him to such an extent

,

that the law w i ll not allow him to act as a juror in cases

of capital crime because his business has so familiarized
,

him w i th the taking of life .

The enl i ghtened know the animals to be their younger

brothers an d that they will be human I n the Jupiter
P er i o d We shall then help them as the Angels who w ere
.
,

human in th e Moon Period are now helping us and for an , ,

 A C Q U I RI N G F I RS T H A N D -
K N OWLE DGE 44 7

—
'

aspirant to h i gh i deals to kill either in person or by

"

pro xy— i s out of the quest ion .

Several very im portant food products from animals ,

such as m i lk cheese and butter may be use d The se are

, ,
.

the results of the pr ocesses of life and require no traged ies

to convert them into foo d M i lk wh i ch i s an important
.
,

foo d for the occul t student contains no earthy matter of

,

any consequence and has an influence upon the body po s

sessed by no other food .

During the Moon P eriod man was fed upon the m i lk

of N ature U n i versal food was absorbed by h i m and the
.

use of milk has a tendency to put h im in touch with the ,

Cosm i c forces and enable him to heal others .

It is popularly supposed that sugar or any saccharine

substance is injurious to the general health and p arti cu ,

l ar ly to the teeth caus i ng the i r decay and the resulting

,

toothache Only under certa i n circumstances is this true

. .

It is harm f ul in certain diseases such as biliousness and ,

dyspepsia or if held long in the mouth as candy but if

, ,

sparingly use d duri ng goo d health and the amount grad

u ally increased as the stomach becomes accustomed to its

use it will be found very nourishing The hea lth of

,
.

negroes becomes greatly improved during the sugar cane -

harvest time n oth wi th stan d in g their increased labor This

, .

i s attributed solely to their fon d ness for the sweet cane

juice The sam e may be said of horses cows and other
.
, ,

animals in tho se local ities which are all fond of the refuse
,

syrup fed to them They grow fat in harvest time the i r

.
,

coats becoming sleek and shining H orses fed on boile d .

carrots for a few weeks will get a coat l i ke s i lk owing to ,

the saccharine juices of that vegetable Sugar is a nutri .

t i ons and benefic i al article of diet and contains no a sh

 448 R OS I CRU C IA N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON
-

Fruits are an ideal d i et They are in fact evolved by

.
.

the trees to i n d uce an i mal an d man to eat them so that ,

the seed may be d i ssem i nate d as flowers enti ce bees for a

,

similar purpose .

Fresh fru i t contains water of the purest and best kind , ,

capable of permeat i ng the system I n a marvelous manner .

Grape ju i ce i s a part i cularly won d erful sol v ent It thins .

and stimulates the bloo d opening the way i nto cap i llaries
,

alrea dy dr i ed an d choke d u p— i f the process has not gone

to o far By a course of unfermented grape juice treat
.
-

ment people with sunken eyes wrinkle d ski ns an d poor

, ,

complex i ons become plump ru dd y an d l i vely The in,

.

crease d permeab i l i ty enables the sp i rit to manifest more

freely and w i th renewed energy T h e followi ng table .
,

wh i ch w i th the excepti on of the last column is taken ,

'
f rom the publications of the U n i ted States Department of
Agriculture w i ll gi ve the asp i rant some i d ea of the amount
,

it is necessary to eat for d i ff erent degrees of acti v i ty also ,

the const i tuents of the vari ous foods named .

Cons i d ering the bo d y from a purely phys i cal standpoint ,

it is what we might call a chem i cal furnace the food be i ng ,

the fuel The more the body is exercised the more fuel
.
,

it requires It would be foolish for a man to change an

.

ordinary d i et wh i ch for years h ad adequately nour i shed

him an d take up a new method without due thought as to
,

wh i ch would be the best for ser vi ng h i s purpose To sim .

ply el i minate meats from the ord i nary diet of meat eaters -

would unquest i onably undermine the health of most per

sons . The only safe way is to experiment and stu dy the
matter out first using d u e d i scr i mination N o fix ed rules
,
.

can be g i ven the m atter of d iet be i ng as indivi dual as any

,

other characteristi c All that can be done is to g i ve the

.

table of foo d valu es and descri be the general influence of

4 50 ROS I CRU C I A N C O S M O C O N C E P T I ON -

ta i ns f or from them w e ob tain the energy required to per

‘

, ,

form our d aily work The number of calor ies necessary .

to sustain the body under varying c onditions i s shown in

the f ol low m g table :
M a n a t v er y h a r d m u s c u l a r w o k 5 0 0 C a 10 c S
0

r r1
M an m od e r a tel y h a r d m u s c u l a r w or k
at 1
50 ‘‘

f
M a n a t m od e r at el y a c ti ve m u s c u l a r w or
‘

k 4 00
M an at m od e r a te l y l i g h t w or k . 05 0
l
i

M a n a t s e d e n ta r y w or k 7
l
00
t
.

i
M a n w th ou t m u s cu l a r ex er c s e i
W om an a t l g h t t o m od e r n m u s cu l ar w or
i
.

k
4 50
45 0 “
T A B L E O F F OO D VAL U E S .

F R UIT S
pp l
.

A es , 28 1 1 6 2
A p pl es , f resh 9 63
" 3 0 3 3
r i c ot s , d ri . 29 4 4 7 0
an a n as 3 48 0 0 8 4
C u cu m b er s 1 81 1 0 7 2
Da t e s , d r ied 1 13 8 1 9 5
F ig s , d ri ed 18 8 4 3 3
G r a p es 58 0 1 0 2
L em on s 62 5 0 7 5
M u s k m e l on s 44 8 0 3 .

63 4 0 6 4
76 0 0 5 4
P er s i m m on s ( e d i l e
R ai si n s , d ried
b
R a s p er r i e s
b pa rt ) .

10
.
66
13
85
“

“
1
1
8
—
0
9

1
8
3
0
1
o
.

S q u ash 5O 44 2 0 7 2
b
S t ra w e rri es 5 85 9 0 9 e
T o ma t oes , c a n n e d 94 0 1 2 2
T om a t oes , f r es h 94 3 0 9 a
W a t e r m e l on s 59A 3 7 5 0 2 4
‘

N UTS
A l m on d s 45 0 0 2 7 “ 5 30 0 2
B ra z i l n u t s 40 c 0 6 2 6 8 6 33 0 7
B u t te r n u t s 86 0 4 0 6 3 8 8 0 3
C h e s t n u t s , d r i ed 24 0 4 5 8 1 5 3
m
0 0

C h e s tn u t s , f r e s h 16 0 0 0 5 2 4 0 5
52 1 1 8 7 5 31 0 3
k
0

H i c or y n u t s 62 0 2 1 4 5 8 25 0 5
P eca n s J 53 0 2 1 4 5 2 33 0 3
Wal n u t s , B l a c k 74 0 1 0 6 7 2 14 0 6
W al n u t s , E n gl i s h 58 0 1 1 0 6 9 26 0 6
GR AI N S .

B r e ad
B r ow n
G r ah a m
 A C Q U I R IN G FI RS T H AN D
-
KN OWLE DG E 45 1

T AB LE OF F OOD VALU E S ( CON T IN U ED)

W h ol e W h ea t
C or n , g reen , s w ee t ,
c a n n ed
C or n , g r e e n , s w eet ( ed i
b le p a rt )
C or n m ea l
F l ou r :
k
B u c w h ea t
G ra h a m
R ye
W h e at ( h igh g r a d e ) .

Wh e a t ( l ow g ra d e ) .

W h ol e W h e a t
M a c a r on i , V e r m i c e l l i , e t c 3 :0 0
k
O a t B r e a f a s t F ood
O y s t er C r a c ers k
R i ce
S od a C r a c e r s k
S ta rch
Wh eat B rea f a s t F ood k .

LE G U M E S

"
b k
B ea ns , a e d , ca n n ed .

B ea n s , d r i ed
B ean s , L i m a , she l l e d
.

B ea n s , S t r i n g
P eas , c a n n e d .

P e as d ri ed
.

P eas , s h el l e d
P ea n u t s
VE G E T A B L E S .

B ee t s

L e tt u ce
O n i on s
P a rs n i s p
P o ta t oes
R h u ar b b ( p i e p la n t ) .

p
S i n ac h
S w eet p
ota t oe s
T u rni s p 4 :0 0
S U G AR S
pl
.

C an d y , a in .

H on e y
p
M a le S y ru p
M o l a s s es
S u ga r , g r a n u l a te d .

M I S C EL L A N E OU S .

C h oc ol a t e
C ocoa n u t s
C oc oa n u t s , r ? “ 11 e d .

C ocoa p o w i e z d
v

M u s h r oom s 1 :2 0
p
T a i oc a
452 ROS I CR U C I A N C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON -

Accordi ng to this table it is evident that choco l ate is

,

the most nutritious food we have ; al so that cocoa in its ,

powdered state is the most d angerous of all foods contain

, ,

ing three times as much ash as most of the others and ten ,

times as much as many It is a powerf u l f ood and also a

.

powerfu l po i son for it chokes the system more quickly

,

than any other substance .

Of course it w i ll require some study at fi rst to se cure

,

the best nour ishment but it pays in h ealth and longevity

,

and secures the free use of the body m aking study and ,
'

application to higher things possible Aft er a while th e .

aspirant will become so familiar with the sub j ec t that he

will n eed to g i ve it no particular attention .

Whil e the foregoing table shows the proportion of chem

ica l substances contained in each article of food named i t ,

must be remembered that n ot all of this is available for

use in the system because there are certain port ions wh ich
,

the body refuses to assi milate .

Of vegetables we digest only about 8 3 % of the proteid s ,

90 % of the fat and 95 % of the carbo hydrates

,
-
.

Of fruits we assimilate about 8 5 % of the proteids 90 % ,

of the fat and 90 % of the carbo hydra tes

,
-
.

The brain is the co ordinat i ng mechanism whereby the

-

movements of the body are controlled and our ideas are

expressed It is built of the same substances as are all
.
_

other part s of the body w i th the addition of ph o sphorus

, ,

which is peculiar to the brain alone .

The logical conclusion is that phosphorus i s the partien

lar element by means of which the Ego is able to express
thought and influ ence the dense phys i cal body It is also .

a fact that the proportion and var i at i on of this substance

is found to correspond to the state and stage of intell igence
of the individual Idiots h ave very little phosphorus
‘ ‘
‘

.
 RO SI C RU C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P T I ON
-

( )
3 This conversion into b on e d estr oys the flexibility
of the vessels muscles an d other parts of the body subj ec t
,

to motion It th i ckens the blood and entirely chokes up

.

the m i nute cap i llar i es so that the c i rculati on of the fluids

,

an d the action of the system gene rally diminishes the ,

term i nat i on of this process be i ng death .

( )
4 This process of consolidation may be retarded and
life prolonged by carefully avoi d i ng the foods that conta i n
much ash 5 by u sm g d i sti lled water f o
,

r internal purposes ;

and by promot i ng e x cretion through the skin by means of

frequent b ath s
The f or eg om g e xp l ains why some religions pre sc ribe
frequent ablutions as a relig i ous exercise because they pro
‘

m ote the health and pur i fy the dense body Fastings were -

al so pr escr ib ed f or the same purpose They give the stom

‘

ach a much needed re st allow the body to elim i nate th e

-
,

efiete matter and thus if n ot to frequent or t0 0 prolonge d

, , ,

promote the health but usually as much and more can be

,

accompl i shed by giving the body proper foods which are

th e best me d icines .

Always the first care of the physician is to ascertain if

there I s proper excret i on that be ing N ature s ch i ef means ,
’

for r i d d i ng the body of the poisons contai n ed in all foo d s .

In concl us i on let the aspirant choose such food as i s

,

most eas i ly d i gested for the more eas i ly the energy in

,

f oo d i s extracted th e longer t i me w i ll the system h av e for

,

recuperation before it becomes necessary to replen i sh the

supply Milk should never be drunk as one may drink a
.

glass of water Taken in that way i t forms in the stomach

.
,

a large cheese ball quite imperv i ous to the action of the

-
,

gastric ju i ces I t should be sipped as we sip tea or coff ee

. ,
,
.

It w i ll then form many small globules in the stomach ,

.

which are eas i ly ass i m i lated P roperly used it is one of .

,
 A C Q U IR I N G F I RS T H AN D KN O WLE DGE
-

th e best possible articles of diet Citrus fruits are power .

ful an ti septics and cerea l s particularly rice are antitoxins

, , ,

of great efficiency .

H aving now e xp lained from the p urely mate rial point

,

of view what is necessary for th e dense body we will con

, ,

sider the subject from the occult side taking into con ,

sideration the e ffect on the two invisible bodies which i n

te r pen etrate the dense body .

The particular stronghold of the d esire body is in the

muscles and the cerebro spinal nervous system as already
-

shown The energy d isplayed by a person when labor ing

.
~

under great excitement or anger is an example of this At .

such times the whole muscular system is tense and no hard

labor is so e xhausting as a fit of temper ” “
It sometimes .

leaves the bo dy prostrated for we eks There can be seen .

the necessity f or improving the d esire body by controll i ng

the temper thus S paring the dense body the suffering r e
,

su l tin g from the ungoverned action of the desire body .

Looking at the matter from an occult standpoint all ,

consciousness in the P hys i cal Wo rld is the result of the ‘

constant war between the desire and the v ital b od i es .

T h e tendency of the vital bo dy is to soften and build .

Its chief e x pression is the blood and the glands al so the ,

sympathetic nervous system , hav i ng obta i ned ingres s into

the stronghold of the desire body ( the muscular an d the
v oluntary nervous sys tems ) when it began to develop the
heart into a voluntary muscle .

The tendency of the desire body is to harden and it in ,

turn h as invaded the realm of the vi tal body ga i ning pos ,

session of the spleen and making the white blood cor

“ ”
p u sc l es,which are not the policemen of the system as
s cience now th i nks but destroyers It uses the blood to
,
.

c arry these tiny destroyers all over the body They pass .
 RO S I C R U CI AN C O S M O C O N C E P TI ON
-

th rough the walls of arteries and veins whenev er annoy

ance i s felt and especial ly in times of gr eat anger Then
, .

the rush of forces in the desire body makes the arteries

and veins swell and opens the way for the passage of the
white corpuscles into the tissues of the body where they ,

form bases for the earthy matter which kills the body .

Given the same amount and kind of food the person of ,

serene an d j ov i al disposition will live longer enj oy better ,

health and be more acti v e than the person who worries or

, ,

loses his temper The latter will make and distribute

.

thr ough his body more destructi v e white corpuscles than

the former Were a scientist to analyze the bodies of these
.

two men he would find that there was consid erably les s
,

earthy matter in the body of the kindly disposed man than -

i m th at of the sco l d .

This destruction is constantly going on and it is n ot

‘

possible to keep all the destroyers out nor is such the ,

intention If the v i tal body had un i nterrupt ed sway i t

.
,

would build an d bu i ld using all the energy for that pu r

,

pose There woul d be no consciousness and thought It

. .

is because the desire body checks and hardens the i nner

parts that consciousness develops .

There was a time in the far far past when we set out,

the concretions as do the mollusks leaving the body soft

, , ,

flexible and boneless but at that time we had only the

,

dull glimme ring consciousn ess the mol lusks now have
'

.
,

Before we could advance it became nece ssary to retain

,

the concretions and it will b e found that the stage of

consciousness of any species is in propo rt i on to the de
v el opm en t of the b eny framework wi th i n The Ego must .

have the solid bones with the sem i fl u i d red marrow in -

,

order to be able to build the red blood corpuscles for its -

e xpression .
 ROS I CR U C IAN C OS M O C O N C E P TI ON -

them to the life of the body We sh ould be compel l ed .

to eat very much less in quantity and also l ess often th an

we now do Ou r laboratories w i ll some t ime supply us
.

with chemical food of a qual i ty far surpassing anything

that we n ow ha ve which shall b e always fresh Fo od
,
.

obta i ne d from the h i gher plants and s till more from the
yet h i gher an imal kingdom is p ositively nauseating be ;
,

cause oi the r ap i di ty of decay This proc ess is cau sed .

by the e fforts made by th e individual particles to escape

from the composite whol e .

The plant king d om is next above the mineral It has .

an organization capable of assimilating the mineral com

pounds of th e Earth Man and animal can assimilate
.

th e plants and thus obtain the chemical compound s n ece s

s ary to susta i n the i r bodies and as the consciou sness of
“
,

the plant k i ngdom is tha t of dreamless sleep it o ffers ,

no resistance It requires but l i ttle energy to assimi l ate

.

the particles thus derived an d having sm all individual ity

‘

of their own the l ife ensouling the particles does not

,

see k to esc ape from our body as soo u as f ood derived from
more highly develope d fo rms therefore th e strength de ,

rived from a diet of fruit and vegetables is more enduring

—

th an th at deri v ed from a meat d iet and the food supply

_ ,

does not require as freque nt replenishing be si d es gi v ing

‘

more s trength in proportion because less energy is r e ,

quired for assimilation .

Food compose d of the bodies of animal s consists of

particles which have been wo rked upon and inte r pene -

tr ate d by an indiv i dual desire body an d ha v e thus been ,

individual i zed to a much grea ter extent than the plant

‘

particles There is an individual cell soul which is per

.
‘
-

meated by the pass i ons and des i res of the ani m al It .

re quires considerable e nergy to overcome it in th e first

 A C QU IR I N G F I RS T H AN D -
KN OWLE DGE 4 59

pl ace so that it may be assimi l ated yet i t never be comes

, ,

so fully incorporated into the polity of the body as do

th e plant constituents whic h have no such strong indi
,

v i dual tendencies The resi i l t is that it is necessary for

.

the fl esh e ater to consume a greater weight of food than

-
,

is require d by the fruitarian ; also he must eat oftener .

Moreover this inward strife of the particle s of flesh cause s

,

greater wear and tear of the body i n general rendering ,

the meat eater l ess active and capable of endu rance than
-

the vegetarian as al l contests between advoc ates of the

,

two methods have demonstrate d .

Therefore when fl esh food derive d f rom the herbivor a

,
-

is such an unstable diet it is evident that if we sho u l d

,

try to use the flesh of carnivorous animals in which the ,

cells are still further individualized we woul d be forced ,

to consume enormous quantities of food Eating would .

occupy the greater part of our time but notwithsta nding ,

that fact we would a l ways be lean and hungry That

, .

such is its eff ect can be se en in the wolf and the vul ture ;
,

their leanness and hunger are proverbial Cannibals eat .

human flesh but only at long intervals and as a luxury

, .

As man doe s not cOn fine himself exclusively to a meat

diet his fl esh is not that of an entirely carnivorous beast
, ,

neverthele ss the hunger of the can niba l has a l so become

the burden of a proverb .

If the flesh of the herbivora were th e essence of what

is good in plants then logic ally the flesh of the carn i v
, , ,

ora should be the quintessence The meat of wolves .

and vulture s would thus be the cr em e d e la crem e and ,

much to be desired This we know is not the ca se but

.
,

qu i te the reverse The nearer we get to the plant king

.

dom the more stre ngth we deri ve from our food If the
, .

reverse were the case the flesh of ca rnivorous animals

,
 R OS ICR U C IA N COS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

would be s ought by other beasts of prey b u t e xamp les ,

”
of dog cat dog are very few throughout n ature
“
.

LIVE AN L LE T LI VE .

The first law of occult science is Thou sh al t not kil l “

,

and that should have the greatest weight with the aspirant
to the higher life We cannot create so much as one
.

particle Of dust therefore what r i ght have we to d estroy

,

—
the very least form All Fo rm is an expressio n of the
On e Li fe th e Li f e of God
‘
.

We have no right to de stroy

.

the Form through w hich the Life is see king e xpe rience ,

and force it to build a new veh i cle .

Ella Wheeler Wilcox with the true compassion of all

,

far ad vanced souls champions this occult m axim in

”

-
, ,

following beautiful words :

I am th e v orce of th e v oi cel ess ;

g
Th r ou h m e th e d ea f sh a l l sp ea k
T il l a d ea f w or l d s ear
’

S h all b e m a d e to h e ar
r g
T h e w on s of th e w or d l ess w ea k .

Th e sam e f or ce f or m e d th e sp a rrow
i
T h at f ash on e d m an , th e n ki g .

Th e G od of th e Wh ol e
G ave a sp ar of s oul k
rr
T o f u ed an d f eath e r e d th n i g .

A n d I am m y b r oth er s k eep er ; ’

i
A n d I w l l fi h t h i s fi h t, g g
A n d sp ea th e w o d k r
b
F or e as t an d rd bi
i
T ll th e w or l d sh all s et th n s r i g igh t .

Sometimes the objection i s made that l i fe is also tak en

when vegetables and fruits are e ate n b u t that statement ,

i s base d upon a complete misunderstandi ng of the facts .

When the fruit is ripe it has accomplished its purpose

, ,

wh i ch i s to act as a womb for the ripening of the see d .

 RO S I CR U C IAN C OS M O C ON C EP TI ON -

H ow much more be autiful it wou l d be for man to pl ay

the role of friend and protector of the weak Who d oes .

not l o v e to Vi sit Centr al Park in N ew York City and pet ,

stroke and fee d the hundreds of s quirrels which ar e run

n i ng ab out secure in the knowledge that they will not be
'

molested ? And who is not glad for th e sake of the ,

squirrels to see the S i gn Dogs found ch asing the sq ui r

, ,
“

rels w i ll be shot Th i s is hard on the dogs but it is

.
,

t be commended as an e v idence of the growth of the senti

.

ment fa v or i ng the prote ct i on of the weak against the

unreasoni ng or merciless strong N othing is said on the .

sign about the squirrels being injur ed by men because ,

that would be u n th ink ab l e S o strong is the i nfluence of

.

the trust th e little ani mals repose in the kindness Of man ‘

that no one would violate it .

’
T H E LORD s P RAY ER .

Returning to our consideration of the spiritual a i ds .

to human progress the Lor d s P ra yer which may be

,
’
,

considered as an abstract algebraical formula for th e up

,

l i f tm e n t and purification of all the veh i cles of man the ,

idea of tak i ng proper care of the dense body is expressed

”
I n the words : Gi ve us th i s d ay our daily bread
“
.

The pr ayer deal i ng with the needs of the vital body

is, Forgi ve us our trespasses as we forgive those who
“
,

t respass agai nst us ”

.

The vital body is the se at of m em Ory In it are st ored .

the sub consci ous records of all the past event s of our
-

life good or ill inclu d ing all injuries inflicted or sus

, ,

taine d and benefits received or bestowed We remember

,
.

that th e recor d of th e l i fe i s tak en from those pictures

I mmediately after le aving th e dense body at death an d ,
 A C QU IRI N G FI RS T H AN D KN OWLE DGE
-
4 63

that all the sufferings of po s t m or tem existence are th e

results of the events these pi ctures portr ay .

If by cont i nual prayer we obta i n forgiveness f or the

, ,

i njur i es we ha v e i nfl icted upon othe r s and i f we make

all the restitution poss i ble purify our vital bod ies by
,

forgiving those who have wronged us and eliminate all ,

il l feel i ng we s ave our selves much p os t m or tem mise ry

-

, ,

bes i des preparing the way for U niversal Brotherhood ,

wh i ch is part i cularly dependent upon the victory of the

v i tal bo d y o v er the d es i re body In the form of memo ry
.
,

the desire bo d y impresses upon the vital body the ide a Of

revenge An even temper amid the various annoyances of
.

da i ly l i fe indicates such a victory therefore the aspirant ,

shoul d culti vate control of the te mper as it includes work ,

on both bod ies The Lord s P rayer inclu des this also
.
’
,

for when we see that we are inj uring others we l ook ,

about and try to find the cause Loss of temper is One .

of the causes and it originates in the desire body .

Most people l eave physical life with the same temper a

ment they bring into it but the aspirant must systematic
,

ally conquer all attempts of the desire body to as sume

maste ry That can be done by concentration upon h igh
.

i deals which strengthens the vital body and is much m ore

,

efficacious than the common prayers of the Church Th e .

occu l t s ci en tis t uses concentration in preference to prayer ,

because the former is accomp l ished by the aid of the mind ,

which is cold and unfeeling wherea s prayer is usu all y ,

dictated by emotion Where it is dictated b y a pur e u n

.

selfish de v otion to high ide als prayer is much higher than

cold concentrat i on It can never be cold but bears upon
.
,

the pinion s of Love the outpour i ngs Of the mystic to the

Deity .

The prayer for the (is su e body is Lead us not int o ,

“
 ROS I CR U CI AN C O S M O C ON C EP T I O N -

temptation .Desire is the great tempter of mankind .

It is the g reat I ncent i v e to all acti on an d in so far as the ,

actions subserve the purposes of the spirit it is good ; but ,

where the desire i s for someth i ng degr ading something ,

th at debases the nature it is indee d meet that we pray

,

not to be led into temptation .

, , ,
—
Love Wealth P ower and Fame l These are the four
great motives of human action Des i re for one or more .

of these is the moti v e for all that man d oes or l eaves n u

d one. The great Leaders Of humani ty ha ve wisely g i ven

them as incentives to action that man may ga i n ex per i
,

e nce and le arn thereby They are nece ssary and the
.
,

asp i rant may s afely continue to use them as motives f or

action but he must transmute them into someth i ng highe r
, .

H e mu st overcome with nobler aspirat i ons the selfish love

which seeks the ownership of another Body and all de ,

sires for wealth power and fame for narr ow and per sona l
,

r easons .

The Love for which he must long is th at onl y Wt h ‘

is of the soul and embraces all be i ngs high and low in , ,

creasing in proportion to the needs of the recipient ;

The Wealth that which cons i sts solely of abundance of
,

opportunities to se rve h i s fellow men ;

T h e Power that alone wh i ch makes for th e upl iftment
,

o f humanity ;

The Fame none save that which increas es his ability

to sprea d the good news that all who suff er m
,

,
ay thus

quickly find sol ace for the heart s grief ’

.

The prayer for the mind i s Deliver us f rom evil ” “

We .

h ave seen that mind is the link between the higher and
the lower natures Animals are permitted to follow d e
. f

s ire without a n y restriction whatever In their case there ‘

.
,
 R O S I CR U C I A N CO S M O C O N C E P T I O N -

The human spirit soars to its counte rpart t h e H oly ,

Sp i r i t ( Jehovah ) say i ng H allowe d be Thy N ame

,
“
.

The l i fe sp i r i t bows before its counterpart Th e S on

, ,
”
( Christ ) say i ng ,
Thy K i ngdom “
Come .

The d i v i ne spiri t kneels before its counterpart The ,

Father w ith the prayer Thy W i ll be dOne

, ,
“
.

Then the highest the divine sp i rit petitions the

, ,

h i ghest aspect of the De i ty the Father for its counte r , ,

”
part the dense body : Give u s th i s d ay our daily bread
,
.

The next highest the l ife S pirit prays to its counter

, ,

p art the Son for its counterpart i n the lower nature

, , ,

the vital b ody : Forgive us our tre spasses as we f orgive

“
'

”
those who trespass against us .

The lowest aspect of the spirit the human spirit next , ,

Off ers its petition to the l owest aspect of Deity for the
“
highest of the threefold bodies the desire body : Lead ,

us not into temptation .

Lastly in unison all three aspects of the threefold

, ,

S pirit in man j o i n i n the mo st important of the prayers ,

the pet i t i on for the m i nd in the words : Deliver us from ,

”
evil.

The introduction Ou r Father Who art in H e ave n

,
“
,

is merely as the address on an envelope The addition .

,
“
For Th i ne is the K ingdom and the P ower and the
”

, ,
”
Glory forever Amen was not given by Christ but is
,
.
, ,

very appropr i ate as the part i ng adoration of the three

fold sp i ri t as it closes its direct address to th e Deity .

D i agram 1 6 illustrate s the forego i ng explanation in a

simple and easi ly remembered manner sh owing the con ,

n ecti on betw een the d i ff erent prayers and the correspond

i ng veh i cles whi ch are s i mi larly colored Th i s diagram

, .

is i nserte d oppos i te the ti tle page .

 A C Q U IR IN G F IRS T H A N D
-
KN O WL EDG E 467

T H E VO W or C E LI B AOY .

Th e sex pervert or se x maniac is a proo f of the cor

-
,
-
,

re ctn ess Of the content i on of occultists that one part O f

th e sex force bu i lds the bra i n

-
H e becomes an idiot .
,

un able to think because of drawing and sending out not ,

only the negat i v e or positi v e part of the sex force ( ac

‘
-

cording to whether male or fem ale ) which is no rmal ly

to be use d through the sex organ for propagation but -
”
,

in add i t i on to that some of the f or e wh i ch should build

,

—
up the brain enabling it to produce thought hence the
,

mental deficie ncy .

On the other hand if the person is given to spiritua l

,
.

th ought the tendency to u se the sex force for propagation

,
-

is slight, and wha te v er part of it is not used in that way

m ay be transmuted into spiritual f or ce .

That is why the initiate at a certain stage of deve l op

,

ment takes the vow of celibacy It is not an easy vow

,
.
,

nor one to be lightly taken by one desirous of Spiritu al

advancement Many people who are not yet r i pe for the
.

higher life have ignorantly bound themselves to a l ife of

asceticism They are as dangerous to the communi ty and
.

to themselves on the one hand as is the imbeci l e se x

man i ac on the other .

At the present stage of human evol ution the se x f unc

tion is the means whereby bod i es are pro v ided through ,

which the spirit can gain experie nce The people who
:

are most prolific and follow the creati v e impulse n u

re servedly ar e the lowest c l asses ; thus it is difficu l t for

incoming entities to find good v ehicles amid en v ironments

enabling them to unfold their faculties i n such a manner
as to permanently benefit themselves and the rest of
h umanity for among the w ealthier class e
,
s who could
f urnish more f avorab l e conditions many h av e f ew or no
4 68 RO S I CRU C IAN COS M O C O N C EP TI ON -

children It is not because they live abstemious sex

.
‘

li ves but for the entirely se lfish reasons tha t they m ay

,
,

have more ease and leisure and indulge in unl i m i ted sex
g r ati fieati on without the bur d en of a family Among the .

less wealthy m i ddle class families are also rest ricted but
-
, ,

i n their case partially for economic re asons that they ,

may gi ve one or two ch i ldren e du catic n al and other ad

v antages that their means would not perm i t them to gi v e

to four or five “

Thu s m an exercises his di v ine prerogati v e of bringing

disorder into nature Incoming Egos must take the oppor

.

tu n iti es off ered them somet i mes under unfavorable circum

stances Other Egos who cannot do that must wa i t till
.
,

favorable envi ronment Off ers Thus do we aff ect one an .

other by our actions and thus are the sins of the father s
'
vi si ted upon the ch i ldren for as the H oly Spirit is the ,

creati v e energy in nature the sex energy is its reflection ,

k
in man and misuse or abuse of that power is the sin that
,
-

is not forgi ven but must be expiate d in impaired e fficienc y

,

of the v eh i cles in order to thoroughly teach us the

‘

sanctity of the creat i ve force .

‘

Aspirants to the h i gher life fill ed with an earnest ,

d esire to l ive a nob le spiritual life often regard the sex ,

fun ction with horror b ec ause of the harvest of m i sery

,

wh i ch human i ty ha s reape d as a result of its abuse They .

are apt to turn in d i sgust from what they regard as im

purity overlooking the faet that it is precisely such peo
,

ple as they who ( having brought their vehicles into good

condition by means of proper sanitary food high and ,

lofty thought and pure and sp i ritual liv es ) are best

.

fitted to generate the dense bodies essenti al to the develop

ment of entities seeking incarnat i on It is common kn owl .

edge among occu l t scientists that to the de triment of the ,

4 70 ROS I CR U C IAN C O S M O C O N C E P T I O N
-

mistakenl y diverged with no possible means of escape

,

until the lesson has been learne d .

Certa i n tribes Of India make the following excellent

d i v i s i on of l i fe
. The first twenty years are spent i n ob .

ta i n i ng an e d ucation ; the years from 2 0 to 4 0 are devoted

to the duty of ra i sing a fam i ly ; an d the remaining t i me
i s devoted to s pi r i tual development without any physical ,

cares to harass or distract the m i n d .

During the first per i od the child i s supported by its

parents ; during th e second period the man In add ition ,

to supporting his own fam i ly cares for h i s parents while

,

they are giving their at tention to h i gher th i ngs ; an d

dur i ng the balan ce Of his l ife h e is in turn supporte d
,

by h i s ch i ldren
“

Th i s seems a very sensible m ethod an d is quit e sati s ,

fa ctory in a country where all fro m the cra d le to the

,

grave fee l the spiritual need to such degree that they

, ,

mistakenly neglect materi al development except as im

p el l e d b
E y the lash of d i rest nee d and where,
the ch i ld re n

cheerfully support their parents secure in the knowle d ge

,

that they will be supported in turn an d thus be enabled

to devote themselves enti rely to the h i gher l i fe afte r hav
'

ing performed thei r duty to the i r country and to humani ty .

In th e We stern World however where no sp i r itual need

, ,

18 at prese nt felt by the a verage man beca u se he i s prop

e rly follow i ng material l ines of development such a mo d e ,

of life would be impossible of real i zat i on .

Spiritual des i re n ev er com es unti l the t i me is r i pe and ,

alw ay s when the particular cond i ti ons obta i n un d er which

we must seek its grat i ficat i on i f at all Whatever d ut i es
,
.

exist wh i ch are apparent res tr i cti ons must be borne If .

the care O f a fam i ly pre v ents the complete consecrat i on

desire d the asp i rant would certai n ly not be just i fie d in
,
 A C Q U IR I N G F I RS T H AN D -
K N OWLEDGE 471

neg l ecting duty and devoting the entire time and energy
to spiritual purposes An effort must be made to gratify
.

su ch asp i rations without i nterfering with duty to fam i ly .

If the desire to live a celibate life comes to a person

who holds m arriage relations w i th another the Obligation s
‘

w
,

of such relat i ons are not to be forgotten It would be .

very wrong by pract i cing celibacy un der such ci rcum

,

stanc es to endea v or to escape from the prop er perform

.
,

ance of duty As to what constitutes duty in regard to

.

co i tion howe ver there is a standard f or aspir ant s to th e

, ,

h i gher life diff erent from that of the ordinary man or

woman .

Most people regard marri age as sanctioning unl imite d

lice n se for the gr at i fication of sexual des i re In the eyes .

of statute law perhaps i t does so but no man made l aw

, ,
-

nor custom has any right to govern this matter Occult .

science te aches that the sex function should n ever be used

-

for sense g r atificati on but for propagation on ly There

-
,
.

fore an asp i rant to the higher life would be justified in

refusing coition with the marriage partner unless the
object were th e begetting of a ch ild an d then only if both
, ,

parties were in perfect health— physi cally morally and ,

—
mentall y as otherwise the un i on would be l i kely to re
sult in the generation of a feeble or degenerate body .

Each person owns h i s or her body and is responsible ,

to the law of Consequence for any misuse resulting from

the weak wille d abandonment o f that body to another
-
.

In the light of the foregoing, and looking at the matte r

from the viewpoint of occult science it is both a duty ,

and a privilege ( to be exercised with thanks f or the

“

opportu nity ) for all person s who are healthy and of sound
mind to provide vehicles for as many entities as is con
sistent with their health and abil ity to care for the same .
 R OS ICRU C IAN COS M O -
C ON C EP TI O N

And as previous ly stated most particul arly are a spirants

, ,

to the higher life under Obligation in this respect on ac ,

count Oi the purification wh i ch their purer lives have

wrought in their bodie s because of which they are better
,

qualified than ordinary hum anity to g en er ate pure vehicl es .

Thus they enable high class entities to find suitab le

-

vehicles and help humanity to adv ance by aff or d ing these

waiting Egos opportun ities to incarnate and exercise their
influence at an e arlier period than woul d otherwise b e
possibl e .

If the sex force is used in the way indicated coition

-
,

wi ll take place but few times in a l ife and practic ally the ,

entire sex force may b e used for sp i ritu al purposes It

-
.

is not the u se b u t the abuse that causes all the trouble

,
'

and interferes w i th the spiritua l life so there is no need ,

f dr anyone to abandon the highe r l i fe becau se he or sh e

c annot be celibate It is not necessary to be strictly cel i
.

bate wh i le going through th e lesser Init i ations The vow .

of absolute cel i bacy appl i es to the gre ater Initiations onl y ,

and even then a single act of fecund ati on may sometime s

be necessary as an act of sacrifice as Was the case in pro ,

v i d in
g a body for Chr i st .

It may also be sai d that it is worse to suffer from a

burning des i re to be constantly thinking v i v i dly of the
,

grat i ficat ion of sense th an to live the marr ied life in

,

mo deration Christ taught that unchas te though ts are

.

as bad as and even worse than unchaste acts b ecause

, ,

thoughts may be repe ated in defini tely whereas there is at ,

least some lim i t to acts .

Th e asp i rant to the higher life can be successful onl y

in proporti on to the extent of the subjugation of the lowe r
nature but should beware of the other extreme
, .
4 74 RO S I CR U C I AN C O S M O C ON C EP T IO N -

medi ums do to this d ay In most people these sense .

cent ers are I nactive but true de velopment will set them
,

sp i nni n g clockwise as expla i ned els ewhere Tha t is the

, .

d i fficult feature in the developmen t of positive cl ai r v oy

ance .

The deve l opment of mediumsh i p is much e asier; be

c ause it i s merely a revival of the mirror like function -

possesse d by man in the far pas t by whi ch the outside ,

world w as inv oluntarily reflected in him and wh i ch func ,

tion was afterward ret ained by inbreeding With present .

day mediums this p ower is interm i ttent which expla i ns ,

”
why they can sometimes see and at other times for no
\

apparent reason fa i l utterly ,

Occasionally the strong .
,

desi re of the cli ent enables them to get into touch w i th

the informat i on he is seeking on which occa si ons they ,

see correctly but they are not always honest

,
~
.
Office rent .

and other expenses must be pa i d so when the power ,

( over which they have no conscious control ) fails them ,

some resort to fraud and utter any absurdity that occurs

to the i r m i nds i n order to satisfy the i r client and get his
‘

money thus casting discredit upon W

,
h at they really do
se e at other times
’

The asp i rant to tru e spiritu al sight and insight must

’

first of all g iv e proof of u n sel fish n ess because the trained ,

“
clairvoyant has no Off days H e is not in the least .

mirror like depe n dent upon the reflections which may

-
,

happen to com e his way H e is able to reach out at any .

,

time and in any d i recti on and read the thoughts and ,

plans of others provided he part i cularly turns his atten

,

—
tion that way not otherwise .

The great danger to soc i ety wh i ch would re sult from

the i n d i scr i m inate use of this power i f possessed by an n u
worthy in d i vi d ual can be eas i ly u nderstood H e would
, .
4 76 ROS I CRU C IAN COS M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

be abl e to read the m os t secret thought Therefore th e .

i n i tiate i s bound by the most solemn v s never to use

th i s power to ser v e his indi v idual intere t i n the slightest

s

d egree nor to save himself a pa n g

,
H e may feed five thou
.

sand others if he will but he must not turn a stone into

,

bread to appease his own hunger H e m ay heal oth efs of

.

palsy and lepro sy but by the Law of the U niv erse h e is

, ,

forbi d d en to stan eh his own mortal wounds Because he .

is bound by h i s v ow of absolute u n sel fish n ess it is ever ,

true of the Init i ate that although he saves others himsel f ,

he cannot save .

S O the trained clairvoyant who rea l ly has something to

give Will never hang out a S i gn Offer i ng to exercise h is
gifts for a f ee but w i ll give and give freely where he eon
,

siders it cons i stent w i th the ripe destiny generated under

the l aw Of consequence by the person to be help ed .

Trained clairvoyance is the kind used for investigating

occult fac ts and it is the only kind that is of any use for
,

that purpose Therefore the aspirant must feel not a wish

.
,

to grati fy an idle curiosity but a holy and unselfish desire

,

to help humanity U ntil such a desire exists no progres s

.
,

can be ma d e in the attainment of pos i tive clairvoyance .

In the ages th at h ave passe d since the Lemurian Epoch

“

humanity has been gradually building the cerebro sp i nal -

nervous System which is under the control of the will In

,
.

th e latter part Of the Atlantean Epoch this was so f ar ,

'
'

evolved that it became possible for the Ego to take full pos
session of the dense body That was the t ime ( previously
.

descr i bed ) when the point in the vital body came into cor
respondence with th e point at the root of the nose in the
d ense bo d y and the indwell i ng S pir i t bec ame awake in the
P hys i cal World but so far as the greater part of human ity
,

was concerned lost consciousness of th e inner Worl d s

,
.
4 78 RO S I CR U C IA N CO S M O C ON C E P Tl O N -

root of the nos e where T he S i lent Watcher the h i ghest ,

sp i ri t has its seat

,
.

These currents do not usually take one Of the two paths

indicat ed i n the d i agram to the ent i re exclus i on of the
other but generally one path is traveled by the greater
,

volum e of th e sex currents according to th e temperament

-

of the aspirant In one who i s seek i ng enl i ghtenment

.

along purely i ntellectual l i nes the current tra v els part i en

l ar ly o v er the sp i nal cord an d only a small part goes o v er
the path through the heart In the mysti c who feels .

rather than knows the currents find their way upwards

,

through the heart .

Both are de v eloping abnormally and each must some ,

t ime take u p the de v elopment he has neglected so as to ,

become fully rounded Therefore the Rosicruc i ans aim

.

to g i v e a teaching that w i ll sat i sfy both classes although ,

the i r m ain efforts are expende d in reach i ng the in tell ec

tu al ly minded for the i r nee d is the greatest
,
.

This current of itself however ev en th ou gh it assumes

.

, ,

the proportions of a N i agara an d flows unt i l the crack of

doom will be useless But st i ll as i t is not only a n eces
,
.
,

sary accompan i ment but a pre requ i s ite to self consc i ous
,
- -

work in the inner World it must be cultivated to some ,

extent before the real esoter i c tra i n i ng can begin It wil l .

thus be s een that a moral l i fe de v oted to spiritual thought

m ust be li v ed by the asp i rant for a certain l ength of t i me
before it is poss i ble to commence th e work that will gi v e
him fir st hand knowledge of the super phys i cal realms an d
- -

enable him to become in the truest sense a helpe r of

, ,

humanity .

When the candidate has li v ed such a life for a t ime suf

ficien t to establ i sh the current of spiritual f or ce and i s ,

found worthy and qualified to receive esoter i c instructi on ,

 A C Q U IR I N G FI RS T H AND K N OWLE DG E
-

he is ta ught certa i n exercises to s et the p i tu itary body in ,

v i brat i on This v i brat i on causes the pituitary body to im

.

p i nge upon and sl i ghtly deflect the nea rest line of force
( See diagram This i n t u rn imp i nges,
upon the line ,
r

n etx to i t a n d so the process cont i n ues until the force of

'

the v i bration has been spent It i s sim i lar to th e way in .

wh i ch the str i k i ng of one note on a p i ano w i ll produce a

number of overtones by sett i ng up a vibrat i on in the other
,
'

strings which are at pr oper in ter v al s of p i tch .

When by the i ncreased vibration of the p i tu i tary body ,

the l ines of force have been deflected sufficiently to re ach

the p i neal gland th e object h as been accompl i shed the gap
, ,

between these two organs has been br i d ged This is the .

bri d ge between the World of Sense and the World of De

sire From the time it is bu i lt man becomes cla i rvoyant
.
,

and able to direct h i s gaze where he will Solid objects are .

seen both ins i d e and out To him space and so l idity as

.
,

hindrances to observati on have ceased to ex i st ,

.

H e is not yet a tr ain ed cla i r v oyan t but he is a cl air voy ,

ant at wi ll a voluntary clairvoyant H i s is a very different

, .

f acu l ty f rom that possessed by the medium who i s usually ,

an involuntary cla i rvoyant and can see only what comes ;

or wh o has at best very l i ttle m ore than th e purely nega
, ,

tive faculty But the person in whom th i s bridge is once

.

bu i lt is always in sure touch with the inner Worlds the ,

connect i on being made and broken at his will By degrees .

,

the observer learns to control the v i brat ion of the p i tu itary

body in a manner enabling h i m to get in touch w i th any of
the regions of the inner Worlds wh i ch h e desire s to visit
-
.

The faculty is completely under the control of his w i ll It .

is not necessary for h i m to go into a trance or do anything

abnormal to ra i se his consciousness to the Desire World
, .

H e simply wi l ls to see and s ees , .

 R OS I R U C C IA N COS M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

As was explained in the earlier part of this work the '

neophyte must learn to see in the Des i re World or rather , ,

he must learn how to understand what h e sees th ere I n .

the P hysica l World objects are dense solid and do not

~

, ,

change in the twinklin g of an eye In the Desire World .

they change in the most erratic manner Th i s is a source .

of endless confusion to the negat i v e i n voluntary cl ai r voy

ant and even to the neoph yte who enters un d er the gu i d
,

ance of a teacher but the teaching soon brings the pupil

,

to a point where the Form may change as often as it wil l ;

he can perceive th e Lif e that causes the change and knows
’

it for what i t is despite all poss i ble and puzzling changes

, .

There is also another and most 1m portan t distinction to

“

b e made Th e power which enables one to per cei v e the

.

ob jects in a world is n ot ident i cal with the power of en ter

i n g th at world and fu n cti on i n g there The voluntary clai r .

voyant though he may have rece i ved some training and is

, ,

able to distinguish the true from the false in the Desire

World is in pract i cally the same relat i on to it as a prisoner
,

behind a barred w i ndow is to the outs id e world—h e can

’

see it but cannot function therein Ther efore esoteric

,
.

training not only op ens up the inner vision of the asp i rant ,

but at the proper time further exercises are given to fur

nish h im w i th a vehicle in which he can function in the
inner Worlds in a perf ectly self conscious manner -
.

H ow TH E I NN ER V E H I C LE I s B U I LT .

In ordinary l ife most peopl e l ive to eat t hey drink , ,

gratify the se x passion in an unrestrained manner an d lose

-
,

their tempers on th e sl i ghtest provocat i on Though out .

w ar d ly these people may b e very

” “
respectable they are , ,

nearly every day of th ei r lives caus i ng almost utter con

~

f usion in their organizat i on The entire period of sleep .

 RO S I CR U C IAN COS M O -
C ON C E P TI ON

of the vital body comprising the first and second eth er s to

,
’

perform the purely an i mal f unctions ( they are the only

Ones active during sleep ) the pupil taking with him a ,

v ehicle capable of perception because of its connection ,

wi th the sense centers of the dense body ; and also capable

v

- -

of memory It possessed these capabilitie s because it was

.

com posed of the th i rd and fourth eth ers which are the ,

mediums of sen se perception and memory -

.

This is in fact that part of the vital body which the

, ,

aspirant retains from life to l if e and immorta liz es as the ,

Intellectual Soul .

Sin ce Christ came and took away the sin of th e world “

,

( not of the i n d i v idual ) purifying the desire b ody of our

planet the con nection between all human den se and v i tal
,

b od i es has b e en l oosened to such an extent that by train ,

ing they are capable of separation as above describ ed

,
.

Therefore Initiat ion is open to all .

The finer part of the desire bo dy which constitutes the ,

Emotiona l Sou l is capable of separati on in most people

,

( in fact it possessed
, that capab i l i ty even before Chr i st
came ) and thus when by concentrat ion an d the use of the ,

proper formula the fin er parts of the vehicles have been

,

segr egated for use during sleep or at any other time the
“
, ,

lower part s of the desire and v i tal bodies are still left to
carry on the proces ses of restoration in the dense vehicle ,

the mere animal part .

That part of the vital body which goes out is highly or

g a n i z ed as we have seen
,
It i s an exact counterpart
. of the
dense body The desire body and the m i nd not b eing or
.
,

n i z ed are of use only be ause they are connected with

g a ,
c

the h i ghly organized dense body Wh en separated from .

it they are but poor instruments theref ore b e f ore m an ,

 A CQU IR I N G F I RS T H AN D -
K N O WL E DG E

can withdraw f rom the dense body the sense centers of t h e ,

-

desire bo dy must be awakened .

In ordinary life the Ego is ins i d e its bodie s and its force
i s directed ou twar d All man s wil l and energy are bent
.
’

upon the task of subduing the outside world At no time .

is he able to get away from the impressions of his outsid e

en v i ronment and thus be free to work on himsel f in his
waking hours , During sleep when such an opportunity ,

i s afforded because of the dense bo dy ha v ing l ost con

,

sol ou sn ess of the world the Ego is ou tsi d e his bodies

, If .

man is to work on his vehicles at all it must be when the ,

outs ide worl d is shut out as in sleep but yet the spirit stil l ,

remains within and in full control of the faculties as it is ,

in the waking state N ot until such a state can be attained

.

will it be pos sible for the spirit to work inwardly and prop
“

erly sensitize its vehicles .

Concentration is such a state When in it the senses .

,

are sti ll ed and a person is outwardly in the same condition

as in the deepest sleep yet the spirit remains within and
,

fully conscious Most people have e x perienced this state

.
,

at least in some degree when they have become interested

,

to absorption in a b ook At such times they l ive in the

.

scenes depicted by the author and are l ost to their en v iron

ment When spoken to they are oblivious to the sound
.
, ,

so to all el se transpiring around them yet they are fully ,

awake to all they are read i ng to the invisible world created,

by the auth or liv 1ng there and feel i ng the heart beats of
,
-

all the different characters in the story They ar e n ot .

indepen dent but are bound in the life which some one has
,

created for them in the book .

The aspirant to the higher life cultivates the faculty of

b ecoming absorbed at wi l l in any subj ect he chooses or ,

rather not a sub j ect usually but a v ery simple object which
, ,
48 4 ROS I CR U C IA N C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON -

he i magines Thus wh en the proper condition or point of

.

absorpt ion has been reache d where his senses are absolutely
still he concentrates h i s thought upon the d i fferent sense
,

centers of the desire body an d th ey s tar t to r ev olve

At first their motion is slow and hard to bring about ,

but by d egrees the sense centers of the desire body will

-

make places for themselves within the dense and vital

bodies which learn to accommodate themselves to this new
,

activ ity Then some d ay when the proper life has

.
,

de v eloped the requ i s i te clea v age between the h igher and

lower parts of the vital bo d y there is a supreme effort of ,

the will a sp i ral mo tion in many d i rection s takes place ,

and t h e asp i rant stands ou tsi d e h is d ens e b ody H e looks .

at it as at another person The d oor of h i s prison house

.
-

has been opened H e is free to come and go as much at

.
,

l iberty in the inner worlds as in the P hys i cal Worl d func ,

tion i n g at will in the inner or outer World a helper of

“

, ,

all desiring his services in any of them

”

Before the aspirant learns to voluntarily leave the body ,

h e may have worked in the des i re body dur i ng sleep for ,

in some people the d es i re bo d y becomes organ i zed before

the separation can be brought about in the v i tal body U n .

der those conditions it is i mpossible to bring back these

subj e ctive exper i ences to waking consciousness but gen ,

er al ly in such cases it will be noticed as the first sign of ,

d e v elopment that all confused dreams will cease

, Then .
_ ,

after a while the dreams will become more vi v i d and per

, ~

f ectly logical The aspirant wi ll d ream of being in places

.

and with people ( whether known to h i m in waking hours

or not matters little ) con d ucti ng himself in as reasonable
,

a way as if he we re i n the wak i ng state If the place of .

wh i ch he dreams is accessible to h i m in waking hours he ,

may sometimes get proof of the real i ty of his dream if he

 ROS I CRU C IAN CO S M O C ON C EP TI ON -

C ON C E N TRAT I ON .

The first thing to pract i ce is fix ing one s thoughts up on ’

some 1deal an d holding them there wi th ou t le tti ng th em

s werv e It is an exc eedingly ha rd task but to some extent
.
, ,

at least it must be accomplishe d before it i s poss i ble to

,

m ake any further progress Thought is the power we use .

in making images pictures thought forms according to

, ,
-
,

idea s from with i n It is our pr i nc i pal power an d we must

.
,

learn to h av e absolute con trol of it so that what we pro ,

d uce is not w i ld illu sion i n d uce d by outside cond i t i ons but ,

true imag i nat i on generated by the spi rit from within ( see
diagram
Sceptics wi l l s ay that it is al l imagination but as said ,

before if the inventor h ad not been able to imagi ne the

,
'
tele phone etc we woul d not to d ay possess those things
,
.
, .

H i s imagin i ngs were not general ly correct or true at first ‘

,

otherwise the inventions would have worked successfully

from the begi nn i ng w i thout th e many failu r es and ap
,

r en tly useless experiments that have nearly always pre

p a

ceded the product i on of the pract i cal and serv i ceable in

strument or ma ch i ne N either is the imaginat i on Of the
.

budding occult scientist correct at first The only way to .

make it true i s b y uninterrupted pract i ce day after day , ,

exercising the will to keep the thought focussed upon one

subj ect Ob j ect or i dea exclusi v e of all else Though t i s a
, , , .

great power which we ha v e been accustomed to waste It .

has been allowed to flow on aimlessly as water flows over a ,

precipice before it is made to turn th e wheel .

The rays of the Sun diff used over the entire surface of ,

the Earth produce only a moderate warmth but if even a

, ,

few Of them are concentra ted by means O f a glass they are

— ,

capable of producing fire at th e focus i ng po i nt -

.
 A C Q U I R I N G F I RS T H A N D -
KN O WL EDGE 48 7

T ho ught force is the most powerf u l means of ob ta ining

-

know l edge If it is concentrated upon a sub j ect it will

.
,

b urn its way through any obstacle and so l ve the problem

~
.

If the req uisite amount of thought force i s brought t o bear -

,

there is nothing that is beyond the power of human com

prehension S O long as we scatter it thought force is of
.
,
-

little use to us but as soon as we are prepared to take the

,

trouble necessary to harness it al l knowledge is ours ,

.

We often hear people exclaim petulantly Oh I cannot ,

“
,

think of a hundred things at once " when really that is

”

ex actly what they have been doing and what has caused ,

the very trouble Of which they complain People are con .

stan tl y thinking of a hund r ed things other than the one

they have in hand Every success has been accomplished
.

by persistent concentration upon the desired end .

This is something th e aspirant to the higher l ife must

positively l earn to do There is no other way At first he
. .

wi ll fin d himsel f thinking Of everyt hing under the sun i n

stead of the idea l upon which h e has decided to concen
tr ate bu t he must not let that discourage him In time
, .

he will find it easier to still his senses and hold his

thoughts steady Persistence persis ten ce and always
.
, ,

PER SI ST E N C E will win at l ast Without that how .

,

ever no resu lts can be e x pected It is of no use to perform

,
.

the e x ercises for two or three mornings or weeks and then

neglect them for as l ong To be effective they must be
.

done faith ful l y every morning without f ai l .

Any sub j ect may be selected accordin g to th e tempera

,

ment and mental persu as1on Of the asp1r ant so l ong as ,

it is pure and men tally upl i fting in its tendency Christ .

wil l do for some ; others who love flowers particularly are

, ,

most easily helped by tak i ng one as the sub j ect Of coneen

tr ation Th e Ob j ec t matters l ittle but whatever it is we
.
,
 48 8 R OS I CR C U I AN C OS M O -
C ON C E P T I ON

must imagine i t true to l ife in all details If it is Christ .

,

we must 1magine a real Christ with mobile features life , ,

in H i s eyes an d an ex pr esson that is not stony an d dead

, .

We must build a living ideal not a statu e If it is a , .

flower we must in imagination take the seed and ha v ing

, , ,

\
buried it in the ground fi x our mind upon it stead i ly
,
‘

P resently we shall see it burst shooting fort h its roots , ,

which penetrate the Earth in a spiral manner From the .

main branches of the roots we watch the myriads of minute

rootlets as they branch out and ramify in all directions
,
.

Then the stem b egm s to shoot upward bursting through ,

the surface of the earth and coming forth as a tiny green

stal k It grows ; presently there is an Off set a t iny twig
.
-

shoots out from the main stem It grows ; another Off set .
-

and a b r an ch app ear s ; from the branches l i ttle stalks

'

w it h buds at th e end shoot out ; presently there are a num

ber of lea v es Then comes a bud at the top ; it grows
"

larger unt i l it begins to burst and the red leaves of the

rose show beneath the green It unfolds in the air emit .
,

ting an exqui s i te perfume which we sense perfectly as it

"

is wafted to us on th e balmy sum mer br eeze which gently

s aw s the beaut i ful creat i on before the mi nd s eye
’
y .

”
Only when we i m agi ne in such clear and complete out
“

l i nes as the se, d o we enter into the sp i r i t Of c oncentration .

There must be n o sha do wy faint resemblance ,

Those wh o h a v e tra v eled in India have told Of fakirs

s how i n g them a seed which was planted and grew before
,

the eyes of the astonished witness b ear m g fruit wh i ch the ,

tra v eler taste d That was d one by concentration so intense

.

that the p i cture was v i si ble not only to the fakir h i mself
, ,

but also to th e spectators A case i s recorded where the . .

members of a committee of sc i entists all saw the wonde rful

th ings done before th ei r eyes und er conditions wh ere ,
 RO S I CR U C I AN COS M O C ON C E P T I O N -

flood the soul with a glori ous light Yet someth i ng th at .

is uninterest i ng an d does not of itself sugge st anything

m arvelous i s better for practice
,
Try to find ou t all .

—
about s ay a match , or a common table
,
.

When th e image of the tab le has been clearly formed

in the min d th i nk wh at k i n d O f wood it is and whence
,

i t came
-

Go back to the time when as a tiny seed the

.
, ,

tree from which the wood was ou t first fell into the forest
so i l Watch it grow from year to year covered by the
.
,

snows of win ter and warmed by the summer Sun stead il y ,

growing upwar d— its roots meanwhile const antly spread

ing under the ground First it is a ten d er sapling sway
.
,

ing i n the breeze ; then as a young tree it gradually ,

,

stretches higher and higher toward the air an d the sun

“

shine As the years pass its girth becomes greater and

.
,

gfi
'
e ate r unti l
,
at last one day the logger comes with his ,

axe and saw gleaming as they reflect the rays of the winter
Sun Ou r tree is felled and shorn of its branches leav
.
,

ing b ut the trunk ; that is cut into logs which are hauled ,

over the fro ze n roads to the river bank there to await the -
,

springt ime when the melting snow swells the streams .

A g re at raft of the logs is made the pl e ces Of our tree ,

being among them We know e v ery l ittle peculiarity

.

about t he m and would r ecogni ze them instantly among

thousand s so clearly have we marked them in our mind
,
.

We follow the raft down the stream noting the passing , ‘

landscape and becoming familiar with the men who have

the care of the raft and who sleep upon little huts built
,

upon their floating charge At last we see it arrive at .

.

a sawmill and disbanded On e by one the logs are grasped

.

by prongs on an endless cha i n and hauled out of the water

“

H ere comes one of our logs th e w i dest part Of which will

‘

be made into the top of our table I t is h aul ed out of .

 A C Q U I R I N G F I RS T H AN D -
KN OWLEDGE 491

the water to the lo g deck and rolled about by men w

-
ith
p e a v
. 1es We hear the hung ry whine of the great circular

saws as th ey r evol ve so fast th at they appear as mere blurs

before our ey es Ou r log i s placed upon a car n age wh i ch
.

i s propelled toward one of them and in a moment those

’

teeth of steel are tearing their way through its bo dy and

divi d ing i t into boards and planks Some of the woo d .

is selected to form part Of a building but the best Of it ,

is t aken to a furniture f actory and put into a kiln wher e ,

it is dried by steam so that it will not shrink after it has

been made into furniture Then it is taken out and put
.

through a great planing machine with many sharp knives ,

which m akes it smooth N ext it is sawn Off into di ff erent

.
.

l engths and glued together to form table tops The legs -

.

are turned from thicker pieces and set into the fr ame
which supports the top ; then the who l e article is smoothe d
again with sandpaper varnished and polished thus com
, ,

p l eti n g the table in every respect It is next sent out .

,

with other furniture to the store where we bought it

, ,
'

an d we f ol l ow it as it is carted from that place to our

home and left in ou r dining room -

.

Thus by meditation we have b ecome conversant with

, ,

the v arious branches of industry necessary to convert a

forest tree into a piece Of furniture We have seen all .

the machines and the men and noted the pecul iarities of
,

the various places We h ave even foll owed the l ife process
.

whereby that tree h as grown from a tiny seed an d have ,

learned that b ack of seemingly very commonpl ace th ings

there is a great and absorbingl y interesting history A .

pin ; the match with which we light the gas ; the gas
itse l f ; and the room i n which that gas is burned—al l ,

h ave interesting histories we ll worth l e arning

,
.
492 ROS ICR U C IAN COS M O CONCEP TION
-

OB S ERVAT I ON .

One of the most important aids to th e aspirant in h i s

eff orts is observation Most peopl e go through life b l ind
.

folded Of them i t is l i terally tru e that they have eyes

.
“
,

and see not ; have ears and hear not U pon the,
.

part of the maj or i ty of humanity there is a depl orab l e

lack Of observat i on
Most people are to some extent excusable for this b e
, , ,

cause their s i ght i s not normal U rban l i fe has caused .

untold d amage to th e eyes In th e co untry the child .

learns to use the muscles of the eye to the full extent ,

relaxing or contracting them as requ i red to see Objects

\

at consi derable d i st ances i n the Open or close at h an d ,

i n and about the house

' But the city bred ch i ld sees
.
-

practi cally ev eryth ing close at hand an d the mu scles of its

eyes are se l dom used to observe obj ects at any great
distance therefore that faculty i s to a great e x tent lost
, ,

resulti ng i n a prev alence of near sightedness and othe r -

eye tr oubles .

It is very Important to one aspiring to the higher l if e

that he be able to see all th i ngs about h i m in clear
“

defini te outl i ne s an d i n full detail T O one suff ering

,
.

from defective s i ght the u se Of glasses is l i ke ope n i ng up

,

a new world Inste ad of th e former m i stiness everything

.
,

is seen clearly and definitely If the con d i t i on of the .

sight requ i re s the use of two foci one shoul d not be con
“

tent with having two p airs Of g las ses one for near an d ,
‘

one for far seeing, thus necess i tating frequent changes .

N ot only are the ch anges wear i some bu t one i s very apt ,

to forget on e pair when l eavin g h om e The two f oci can

'
'
.
'

be had i n one pa i r of b i focal glasses and such shoul d be

-

worn to facilitate Observation of the m i nutest details

, .
 A CQ UI R I N G R
F I S T HA N D -
KN OWLEDGE

tha t the p aras ite and its hos t are emanations fr om one
and the same group spi ri t for the h i gher we ascend in
’

the i n v i s i ble realms the fewer the separate and di sti nct
,

forms and the more complete ly the One Li fe pr ed om i

,

nates i mpressing upon the i nv esti gator the su preme f act

,

—
th at there i s but the On e Li fe th e U nivers al L ife of
God i n Whom it is an actual fact that we li ve and
,
“
,
”
move and have our b eing
,
M ineral plant ani mal and
.
, , ,

— —
m an all wi thout exception are mani fes tations of God
, ,

an d this fact fu rni shes the true ba s i s of b r otherhoo d— a

b r otherhoo d wh i ch includes everythin g from the atom to

th e S un beca u se all ar e eman ations from God Con cep
“

.
,

tions Of brotherhood base d upon any other foundation ,

such as class distinctions Race affin ity s i milari ty of oc en

-
,
-
,

p a ti on etc
,
fall far
. short
,
of thi s true b a s i s as the occult ,

sci enti st cl early realiz es when he se es the U n iversal Life

flowin g in a ll that e xi sts .

ADORATIO N .

Wh en height h as been reache d by Con mm pla ti on

thi s ,

an d the aspirant h as reali zed that he i s in truth beholdi ng

God in the Li fe that permeates all th in gs there rem ai ns ,

sti ll to be taken the h i ghest step Adoration whereby he , ,

'

uni te s hi m sel f w i th the Sour ce Of al l th in gs reachi ng by ,

that act the h i gh est goal poss i ble of attainment by man

until the ti me when the permanent uni on takes place at
the end of the great Day of Man i festa tion .

It is the w ri ter s Op i ni on that ne i ther the heights O f

’

Contemplati on nor the fin al step of Adoration can be

,

attaine d wi thout the a i d of a teacher The asp i ran t need .

never fear howev er that for want of a teacher he w i ll

, ,

be delayed in taking the se steps ; nor n eed b e be concern ed

about loo king for a te ach er All that is necess ary f or him
.
 RO S I CR U C IA N C OS M O C O N C E P T I O N
-

to do is to start to improve himself and to earnestly and , ,

er sis ten tly cont inue therein In that way h e wi l l purify

f p .

his vehicles They will commence to sh i ne in the inner

.

Worlds an d cannot fail to attract the attention of the

,

teachers who are always watching for just such cases and
,

are more than eager an d glad to help those who because ,

of the i r earnest eff orts to pur i fy themselve s h ave wo n the ,

right to receive help H uman i ty is sorely i n need Of

.

helpers wh o are able to work from the inner Worlds ,

”
there f ore seek and ye shall find but let us not ima gine
“
,

that by gOI n g about from one pro fe ssed teacher to an

l

”
other we are seek i ng
,
See king in that sense Of th e
.
“
,

word wi ll avail nothing in this d ark world We our

,
.

selves must k i ndl e the light— the light which invariably

rad i ates from the vehicles of the earnest asp i rant That .

is the star wh i ch w il l lead us to th e teacher or rather the ,

teacher to us .

The time required to br i ng results from the pe rform

ance of the exerc i ses var i es with each indiv i dual an d i s
dependent upon his application his st age in evoluti on and ,

his record in the book Of dest i ny ; therefore no general

tim e can be set Some who are almost ready Obtain re
.
, ,

su l ts in a few days or weeks ; others have to work months ,

years an d even their W

,
hole life without visi bl e results ,

yet the results will be there an d the aspir ant who fa i th ,

fully persists will some day, in this or a future life b e ,

h old h i s patience and faithfulness rewarded and th e i n n er

World s open to his gaze find i ng himsel f a citizen Of,

r ealms where the opportunit i es a re immeasurably greater

than in the P hysical World only .

—
From that time awake Or asl eep through what men -

cal l l ife and through what men call death—h i s consciou s

,
 C H APTER X V III .

TH E C O N S T I T UT I O N E ART H V OLC AN I C
‘

OF TH E : AN D

E R U P TI ON S .

VE N among occu l t scient i sts it is counted among

the most d ifficult problems to investigate the mys
ter i ou s construction of the Earth Every occult .

scientist knows how much eas i er it i s to thoroughly and

accurately i nvestigate the Des i re World and the Region
of Concrete T h ought and bring back the results into the
P hy ical World than to invest i gate comp letely the secret s
s
.

of our physical planet because to do that fully one must

,
-

have passe d through the nine lesse r Myster ies and th e fi rst
O f th e Gre at Init i ations .

M odern scientists know very l i ttle about this matter .

S o far as seism i c phenomena are concerned they very ,

frequently change their theories , because they are constant

ly d i scover i ng reasons why their prev i ous hypotheses were
untenable They have w i th all their usual splendid care
.
, ,

investi gated the very outs i de shell but only to an in sign ifi

,

cant depth As for volcani c erupti ons they try to under

.
,

stan d them as the y try to understan d everyth i ng else i n ,

a purely mechanical way depict i ng the center Of the E arth

,

as a fiery furnace and conclud i ng that the eruptions are

caused by the accidental admission of water and in other
s i m i lar ways .

In a ce rtain sense, their theories have some foundation

;
,

b u t in thi s case they are as always neglecting the spiritua l

, ,

498
 C O N S TI T U T I ON OF T H E E A RTH 4 99

e wh ich to the occultist appear to be the true ones

cau s s .

To :h i m the world is far from being dead

,
On the
“
.

contrary its e very nook and crevice is permeate d by spir i t

, ,

which is the leaven that causes chang es in and upon the

planet .

The diff erent kinds of qua rtz the metals the di sposition , ,

—
o f the various strata all ha v e a much higher significance
than the materialistic investigator has ever been able to
gra sp To the occult scient i st the way in which these
.
,

materia l s are arranged is f ull of meaning On this sub .

j ec,
t as on e v ery other occu l t science stands
,
in the same
relation to modern science a s physiology doe s to anatomy .

Anatomy states with minute detail the exact position of

every bone muscle l igament nerve etc the i r rel ati v e
, , , ,
.
,

position s to one another and S O forth but does not give ,

any clue to the use of any one of th e different pa rts O f

which the body is compose d Physiol ogy on the other .
,

h and not only sta tes the position and structure of every
,

part of the body but a l so tells their use in the body

, .

T O know the d i fferent strata of the Earth and th e rela

tive positions of the planets in the sky withou t ha v ing
also a knowledge Of their use and meaning in the lif e and
purpose of the Cosmos is as use less as to know merely
,

the positio n s of bones nerves etc without understanding

, ,
.
,

al so the i r use in the functional economy of the body .

T H E N U M B ER OF T H E B E AS T .

To th e trained clairvoyant sight of the Initiate of the ,

various deg rees O f the Myste ries the Earth appears built ,

in strata something like an onion one l ayer or stratum

, ,

outsi d e another There are nine such strat a and the cen
.

tral core making ten in all These strata are revealed

,
.

to the Initiate gra dually On e stratum become s accessi

.
 RO S I CR U C I AN CO S M O C ON C E P TI O N
-

b l e to him at each Initiation so that at the end of th e ,

nine l esser Initiations he is m as ter of all the l ayers but -

,

has not yet access to the se crets of th e co re .

In ancient parlance these nine steps are call ed t h e

”
lesser Mysteries They t ake the neophyte consciously
.

through all that rel ate s to his past evol ution through the ,

activiti es of involunta r y existence S O that he i s able to ,

understand th e manner and meaning of th e work he then

performed unconsciousl y H e is Sh own h ow the pres ent
.

ninefold constitution ( th e threefold body the threefold ,

soul and the three fold spirit ) w as brought into existence ;

,

how the great creative H ier archies worke d on the virg in

spirit awakening in it the Ego helping it to form t h e
, ,

body ; and also the work he himself has done to extract ,

from the threefold body as much Of the threefold soul

‘
as he n ow posse sses One S tep at a time is he l ed through
.

the n i ne steps of the lesse r mysteries the nine strata ,

.

This number nine is the root number of our pr esent -

stage of e v olut i on It bears a significance in our system

.

that n o other number does It is the numbe r of Adam .

,

the l ife which commenced i ts evolution as Man which ,

reached th e human stage during the E arth P eriod In .

the H ebrew as in the Greek there are no numerals but

, , ,
” “
e ach letter has a numerical value In H ebrew Adam .

” ” ” “
i s called
“
ADM The value of A is 1 ; O f D 4 ;
.
“
,
“
an d O f M 40 If we add these fi g ures we ge t
, .
,

—the number of Adam, of humanity .

If w e turn from the Book Of Genesis which de al s W ith ,

the creation of ni an in th e hoary pas t to th e Book of

‘

Revelation which de al s w ith his f uture attainment we

, ,

find that the number of th e be ast which hinders is 66 6

“

Ad d ing these figures and furthe r

—we h ave again the n umb er of humanity, wh ich is itsel f
, ,
 5 02 RO S ICR U C IAN COS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

which the body is built up to its p resent efficiency and

there are in the body nine pe rforations—two eyes two _ ,

nostri l s two ears On e m outh and the two lower or ifiCes

, , , .

When th e advancing man h as p assed through the n i ne

\ les ser Initiations gaining the reby entrance to all the
,

l ayers of the Earth entranc e into the core is yet to be ,

won Th at is opened to him by the first of the four Grea t

.

Initiations in which he learns to know th e myste ry of

,

the mind that part Of his being begun on Earth When

,
.

he is ready for the first Great In i t i ation he has developed

his mind to the degree al l men are destined to attain to
at the end O f the Earth P eriod In that Initiat i on he is .

given the key to the n ext stage and all work done by him ,

after that will be such as humanity in genera l will do in

‘

the Jupiter P eriod and d oe s not concern us at present

,
.

After h i s first Great Initiation h e is an Adept The ,

.

second th i rd and fourth Init i ati ons pertain to th e stages

,

of development to be arr i ved at by ord i nary humanity

in the Jupiter Venus and Vul can Periods
, ,
.

Th ese thirteen Initiations are symbolicall y represented

in th e C h ri st and H i s twe l ve Apost l es Juda s I scariot is .

the traitorous prope nsities of the lowe r nature of the

neophyte The beloved John is the Venus Initiation and
.
,

Christ H imself symbolizes the Divine Initiate of the

Vulcan P eriod .

In diff erent schools of occult science the rites of In i

tiati on vary also their statement of the numbe r of In i t i a
,

t i ons but that is merely a matter O f cl ass i fic ation It will

,
,

be Obse r v ed that such vag ue descripti ons as can be given

become more vague as one procee ds higher and higher .

Whe re s ev en or m ore degrees are spoken of almost nothing ,

i s sai d c f th e sixth Initiation an d nothing whateve r O f

That is because of another division—
,

th e oh es beyon d
‘

7
.
 CON S TI T U T ION OF TH E E A RTH 503

the S i x ste ps Of Preparation an d the f our I nitiations ,

wh ich bring the cand idate to the end Of th e Earth P eriod ,

to Adeptship Then there must always be th ree more

.
,

if the philosophy of the school or society go es so far The .

writer however knows Of none but the Rosicruci ans who

, ,

have anything to say of the three P eriods wh i ch precede d

the Earth Period, save the bare statement that there were .

such P eriods Th ey are not brought very definite l y into

.

re l ationship with our present phas e Of existence how ,

ever Likewise other occu l t teachings simply state that

.
,

there will be th ree more schemes of evolution but no ,

particulars are given Of course under those circum

.
,

stances the three l ast Initiations are not mentioned

, .

Diagram 1 8 wi ll gi ve an idea of the arrangement of the

Earth s strata the centra l core bei ng omitte d to indicate
’
,

more clearly the lemniscate formation of the currents in

the ninth stratum In the diagram the str at a are rep r e
.

sente d as be ing of equa l th ickne ss though in reality some ,

are much thinner than oth ers Beginning at the outside .

,

they appear in the fol l owing order :

( )
1 The Minera l Earth : Th i s is the stony crust Of

the Earth with which Geology deals as far as it is able

,

to penetrate .

( )
2 The F l uid Stratum : The matter of this stratum
is more fluid than that of the outside crust yet i t is not ,

watery but rather more l ike a thick paste It has the

,
.

quality of expansion l ike that of an e x ceedingly explosive

,

gas and is kept in place onl y by the enormous pressure

,

O f the outer crust Were that removed the whole of the

.
,

fluid stratum would disappear in space with a tremendous

explosion These correspond to the Chemic al and Etheric
.

Regi ons Of the Phys i cal Worl d .

( )
3 V apor Stratum : I n the first and second strat a
50 4 R O S I CR U C IA N COS M O C ON C EP TI ON
-

th ere is re all y no conscious l ife B ut in this stratum .

there is an ever fl owing and pul satin g life as in the

-
,

Desire Worl d surroun di ng and inter penetrating our -

Earth .

( )
4 Wate r Stra tum : In th is stratum are the germin al

possibi lities of all that exists upon the surface O f th e

Earth H ere are the archetypal force s which are back
.

of the group spirits ; also the archetypal force s of the

m in erals for th is is the di rect physical expression of the
,

Region of Concrete T hought .

( )
5 Seed Stratum : Mate r i al scientist s h ave been
b a ffl ed in their efforts to discover the origin of life ho vi ,
r

the first l iving things came forth from prev i ously dead
matte r .

In yeality according to th e occult explanation of evo

,
”
l u ti on t h e question Should be how the
“
, dead things
o riginated T h e Life was th er e pr evi ous to th e d ead
.

F or m s It bui l t its bodies from the attenuated vaporous

.
,

substance long before it condensed into the Earth s solid ’

cru st On ly wh en th e life h ad left th e for ms cou l d th ey

.

cry s ta lli z e an d b ecom e h ar d an d d ead .

Coal is but crystallized plant bodies ; coral is al so th e

crystallization of an i mal forms The l ife leaves the for ms .

and the f or m s die Life neve r came into a form to awaken

.

it to life Life departed from the forms and the forms

.

” “
died Thus did dead things come to be
.

In this fifth stratum is the primordial fount of l if e

from which came the impetus th at built all the forms on
Earth It c orresponds to the Region of Abstract Th ought
. .

( )
6 Fi ery Stratum : Strange as it may seem this ,

s tratum is posse ssed Of sensation

“
P leasure and pain
‘

.
,

sympathy and antipathy have here their effect on the

E arth It is generally supposed th at under no possible
.
 ROS ICR U C IAN COS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

rate vital bodies so the feel i ng of the Earth is par ticularl y

, _

active in this si xth s tratum, which corresponds to th e

World Of Life Spirit To understand the pleas ure felt
.

whe n mining operation s are disintegrating the hard rock ,

and the pain when deposits g ath er we must remember ,

that the Earth is the den se body of a Great Sp i rit and ,

to furnish us with an environment i n which we could

live and gather experience it had to crystallize this body ,
-

into its present soli d condition .

As evolution proceeds however and man learns th e les

, ,

sons pe rt aining to this acme of concretion then Earth ,

w i ll become softer and its S pirit more an d more l i berated .

This is what P aul meant when he spoke of the whole

creati on groa ni ng and travailing, waiting for the day of
l iib er ation .

( )
7 Refracting Stratum : This part of the Earth
corresponds to the World of Divine Spirit There are
,
.
,
“
in occult science what are known as The Seven U n
”
s peakable Secrets For tho se who are not acquainted
.

with these secrets or hav e not at least an inkl ing of their

,

import the properties of this stratum must seem partien

,

l arly absurd and grotesque In it all th e forces which .

” “
are known to us as the Laws of N ature exist as moral ,

or rather i mmoral force s In the beginning of the con .

scious c ar e er of man they were much worse than at

p resent But
. it appears that as humanity progres ses in
morals these force s improve correspondingly ; also t ha t
,

any lapse in morals has a tendency to unleash these

N atur e force s and causes them to create ha v oc upon the
-

Earth ; wh ile th e striving for higher i deals makes them

,

less inim i cal to m an .

The forces i n th i s stratum ar e thus at any time an , ,

e x act reflection of the ex i stin g moral status of m ankind .

 C ON S TI T U T ION OF T H E E ART H 507

From the occul t point of view the hand of God which ,

smites a S odom or a Gomorrah is not a foolish super

d

s ti ti on for as surely as th ere i s ind i vidual responsibility to

'

the law Of Consequence which br i ngs to each person the

just results of h i s d eeds whether for good or evil so is ,

there also communi ty and nat i onal responsibility which ,

bri ngs upon groups of men corresponding results for their

collective acts N ature forces are the general agents Of
.
-

such retributive j usti ce causing fl oods or earthquakes

, , ,

or the b en eficen t formation of oil or coal for various

groups according to the i r deserts
,
.

( )
8 Atomistic Stra t m This is the name given by the
’

u :

Rosicrucians to the eighth layer of the Earth wh i ch is ,

the expression of the Worl d of Vi rgin Spirit s It seems .

to hav e the property of multi plying many f o l d the th i ngs

in it ; this applies however, only to tho se things which
,

have been definitely formed An unshapen piece of wood

.
,

or an unhewn stone has no existence there but upon any ,

thing which has been shaped or has l ife and form ( such ,

as a flower or a picture ) this stratum has the effect Of

,

multipl ication to an astonish ing degree .

( )
9 Material Expres sion O f the Earth spirit : There -

are here l emniscate currents which are intimately con ,

n ected with the brain heart and se x organs of the hu man

, ,
-

race It corresp onds to the World Of God

. .

( )
1 0 Cente r of Being of the Earth spirit : N othing -

more can be said about this at present except that it is the

‘

u ltimate seed ground Of all that is in and on Earth and

-
,

c orresponds to the Absolute .

From th e S ixth or fiery stra tum to the surf ace Of the

Earth are a number of shafts i n different places The .

”
outer ends of these are called v olcan i c craters When “
.

the N ature forces in the seve nth stratum ar e u nl eash ed SO

-
.
5 08 ROS I CRU C IA N COS M O C ON C E P TI ON -

'

that they can express themselves through a v ol can ic out

burst they set the ( s i xth ) fiery stratum in motion and th e
,

agi tat ion spreads outward to the mouth O f the crater T h e .

bulk Of the mate rial is taken from the substance of th e

'

secon d S tr atu m f or that is the denser counterpart of the

,

S i xth stratum as th e v i ta l bo d y the second veh i cle of man

,
-

is the d enser counterpart of the life Sp i r i t the sixth prin ,

c i pl e
. This fl u id ic stratum with its e xpansive and h i ghly
,

explosive qual i ty i nsur i ng an unlimite d supply of material

,

at the point of eruption The contact with the outer

.

atmo sphere harden s that part of it which is not blown

’

away into S pace thus form i ng the lav a and dust unt i l as
, , ,

the blood from a wound congeals and stanches the flow ,

so the lava finally seals the aperture from the inner parts
Of t h e Earth .

AS might be gathered fro m th e fact that it is th e r e

fiected i mmorality and anti spir i tual tendenc i es of man
-

kind which arouse the N ature forces in the seventh -

stratum to destructive activity it i s generally pr ofl ig ate ,

and degenerate peoples who succumb to these catastroph es .

They together with Others who se destiny self generated

, ,
-

under the law Of Consequence for various reasons i nvolves , ,

a vio l ent d eath are gathered from many land s by th e

,

superhum an forces to the point where the erupt i on is to

,

occur To the thoughtful the volcan i c outbursts O f Ve

.
,
'

su v 1u s for instance w i ll aff ord corroboration Of this stat e

, ,

ment .

A list of th ese outbu rsts during the last ye ars

shows that the i r frequency has been increasing with the
growth of materialism In the last si xty year s espec i ally
.
, ,

i n the rat i o that mater i al i st i c science has grown arrogant

i n i ts absolute an d sweeping denial of everyth i ng sp i r i tual ,

have the erupt io ns i ncreased i n frequency Wh i le there .

5 10 RO S I CR U C I AN CO S M O C O N C E P T I O N -

were but six eruptions i n the first years after Chris t ,

the last five have taken place w i thin 5 1 years , as w i ll be

S hown .

The first eruption during the Chr i stian Era was that
Which destroyed the cities of H erculaneum and Po mpeii ,

i n which the elder P liny perished A D 1 7 9 The Other ,

. .

‘
eruptions fo ll owed in A D 2 0 3 47 2 5 1 2 65 2 98 2 1 0 3 6
. .
, , , , , ,

1 1 5 8, 1 5 0 0 , 1 631, i 78 7, 1 7 94, 1 8 2 2, 18 55, 18 72, 1 8 8 5

18 91, 190 6 .

In th e first thousand years there were si x eruptions ; in

,

the second thousand there have been twelve the last fiv e ,

occurring in a period of 5 1 years as b efore stated ,

.

Of the en tir e n u m b er O f 18 eruptions the first nine oc

‘ ,
”
curred in th e sol cal led dark ages that is to say the 1 60 0
“
, ,

yea rs during which the Western World was dominated by

what are commonly term ed t h e heathen or by the “
,

Roman Church The remainder ha v e t aken place in the

.

last three hundred years during which the advent an d r ise

,
/

of Modern Science with its materializ i ng tendencies has

, ,

dri v en almost the last vestige of spirituality to the w all ,

particu l arly in the l a st half Of the 1 9th Century The re .

fore the erupti ons for that period comprise nearl y one
-
‘

third Of the to tal num ber that ha v e taken place in our Era
To counteract th i s d em or al iz in g fi n fl u en ce a great dea l ,

O f occult i nf ormation has been given out during that time

by th e Elder Brothers Of Wisdom who are ever werking ,

for the benefit of human i ty It i s thought that by g i ving

.

out this knowl edge and educating the f ew wh o wi ll sti ll

receive it it may b e possible to stem the tide of material
,

ism which otherw i se may b r in g ab ou t very serious cons o

, ,

u en ces to its advocates who having so long denied the

q ,

existence of the spiritual m ay be unable to find their bal

,

ance when they discover that though stil l living they h ave
, ,
 C ON S TI TUT ION OF T H E E AR TH 5 11

b een deprived of dense body Such persons may meet

th e .

a fate too sad to contemplate with equanimity One of the .

”
c auses of the dread white plague is th i s materialism
“
,

not tr aceable to th e present incarnation perhaps but the ,

r esult Of previous materialistic bel i efs and affirmations .

We have spoken of the demise of the elder Pliny at th e ,

time of the destruction of Pompeii It is interesting to .

follow the fat e of such a scientist not so much for the

“

sake of that particular individual as for the l i ght it throws

upon the manner in which the memory of N ature is read
by the occult scientist how the impressions are made upon
,

it and the eff ect Of past trai ts upon present tendencies

,
.

When a man dies his dense body d i sintegrates but the

, ,

sum to tal of its forces can b e f ound in the seventh or r e

fl ecting stra tum of the Earth which may be said to con
,

stitu te a reservoir in which as f orces past f orms are stored

, ,
.

If knowing the time of the death of a man we search

, ,

this reservoir it is possib l e tO fin d h is form there N ot

,
‘

only is it stored in the seventh stratum but the eighth or ,

atomistic stratum mul tiplies it, so that any one type may
be reproduced and modified by others Thus it is used .

over and over again in the f ormation of other bodies The .

brain tendencies of such a man as Pliny the elder may

-

have been reproduced a thousand years afterwards and ,

h ave been partly the cau se of the present crop of mate

r ial i stic scientis ts
.

There is s till much f or modern material scientists to

,

l earn and to unl earn Though they fight to the last ditch
.

”
what they sneeringly term the illusionary ideas Of th e
“

o ccult scientist they are being compelled to acknowl ed ge

,

their truth and accept them one by one an d it i s only a ,

matter o f time when they w ill ha v e b een compelled to ac

c ept th em al l
.
 R OS I CR U C I AN C O S M O C O N C E P T I O N
-

Mesmer who was sent by the El d er Brothers w as worse

, ,

than r i d i cule d but when mater i al i sts h ad change d the

,

name of the force d i scovere d by h i m call i ng i t hyp h o ,

“

” ” “
ti sm instead of mesmer i sm it at once became sci en “
,

tific .

Twenty years ago Madame Blavatsky, a fa ithfu l pup i l

of Eastern Masters said that the Earth h ad a th i rd move
,

ment in a dd i tion to the two produci ng day and n i ght an d

,

the seasons She po i nte d out that the incl i nation of the
.

Earth s ax i s is caused by a movement wh i ch in due t i me

’
, ,

brings th e north pole to where the equator i s now and st i ll

later to the place now o ccupied by the south pole Th i s
, .
,

she said was known to the ancient Egypt i ans the famous
, ,
,

plan i sphere at Den d er a showing that they had records Of

three such revolut i ons These statements i n common Wi th .
,
’
th e whole of her unexcelled work The Secret Doctr i ne ,
“
,

were hooted at .

A few years ago an astronomer Mr G E Sutcli ff e of

, ,
. . .
,

Bombay d i sco v ered and mathemat i cally demonstrate d that

,

Laplace had ma d e a m i stake in his calculat ions The d i s .

'

covery and rect i ficat i on of th i s error confirmed by mathe

m ati cal demonstrat i on the existence of the thir d motio n O f

the E arth as clai m ed by Madame Blavatsky It al so af
,
.

forded an explanat i on of the theretofore puzzl ing fact that

trop i cal plants an d fo ss i ls are foun d in the polar reg ions ,

as such a movement would necessarily produce i n due ,

-

time trop i cal and glacial periods on all parts Of th e Ea rth

, ,

corresponding to its changed pos i tion i n relation to the

Sun Mr Sutcliffe sent his letter and demonstration s to
. . .

N a tu r e but that j ournal refused to publi sh them and

, ,

when the author made publ i c the discovery by means of a

pamphlet he drew upon h i mself an appalling storm of
,

vitupe ration H owever he is an avowed and a deep stu

.
,
 ROS I CR U C IAN
'

514 COsM O CON C E PTION

-

tor h ad discovered such a planet in 1 8 92 Th ere h ad been

'

.
,

no mistake about it yet he waited fourteen ye ars before he

,

announced h i s discovery " On e need not be concerned

about that howe v er The main po i nt is that the planet is
,
.

there and that Mr S inn ett s boo k s aid S O ten years before
,
.
’

Prof essor Barnard s claim to prior discovery Probably

’
.
,

prev ious to 1 90 6 the announcement Of the newly discovered

planet m i ght have tended to disarrange some popularly
accepted theory "
There are many such theories The Copernican theory .

is not altogether c orrect and there are many f acts that

, , ‘

cannot be accounted for by the lauded N eb ul ar theory .

alone Tycho Brahe the famous Danish astronomer r e

.
, ,

fused to accept the Copernican theory H e had a very good .

rea so n for remaining true to the P tolemaic theory because ,

as he said by it the movements Of the pl anets figured out

,

correctly wh i le with the Copern i can theory it is n eces

, ,

sary to use a table of corrections The P tolema i c system .

is co rr ect from the standpoint of the Desire World and it ,

has poi nts that are needed in the P hysical World .

By many the statements made in the forego i ng pages

will be considered fantastic Be it S O Time will bring to
. .

all a knowledge of the facts herein set forth This book .

is only for the few who having f reed their minds f rom the
,

shackles of orthodox science and religi on are ready to ,

ac cept th is unti l they have proven it wrong .

 C H A P TER XIX .

C H RI S TI AN R O S E N KR E U Z AN D TH E ORDE R OF TH E R OS Y
C R OS S .

AN Ycenturies have rolled by s i nce the b i rth as ,

Christian Rosen kreuz of the i n d i vidual whom we

,

n —
know a d honor by that name the Founder of
the Most H oly Order Of T he Rosicruc i ans .

Though by many outsiders his existence is regarded as

a myth it is nevertheless true that his birth marked the
,

beginning Of a new epoch in the spiritual life of the west

ern World That particular Ego has also been in contin
.

nous incarnation ever since in one or another Of the Eu

,

r opean countries ta k i ng a new bo d y as h i s successive v e

,

h icl es outl i ved their usefulness o r circumstances rendered

,

it expedient that he change the scene of his acti v it i es .

Moreover he is incarnate today —

,
an Initiate of h i gh d e
,

gree an active and p otent factor i n all affairs Of the West

“
although unknown to the world .

As are all such ind i viduals he is a representative of the

,

Central Conclave of the Elder Brothers of humanity H i s .

mission was and is to show the spiritual S ignificance of

a l l scientific discoveries thus counteract i ng as far as pos
,

sible the deadening influence of materialistic science ,

which for reasons prev i ously gi v en the Elder Brothers

, ,

dread more than any other man i festation of human

activity .

To this end he labored with the A l chemists cen turies

5 15
 R OS I CR U C IA N CO S M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

before the advent Of modern scienc e H e through an in ,

term ediary inspired the now muti lated works of Bacon

,
-
.

Jacob Boehme and others received through h i m the in

spiration wh i ch mak es their works so sp i r i tually illumin at
ing In the works of the i mmortal Goethe and the master
.

p ieces O f Wagner the same influence meets us All n u .

daunted sp i rits who refuse to be fettered by either orthodo x

sc i ence or orthodox rel i gion who fling away the husks and
,

penetrate to the spir i tual kernel regardles s O f vil i ficati on

or Of flattery d raw the i r i nsp i rat i on fro m the same foun
,

tain as did and does the great spir i t which anima ted Chri s
tian Rosenkreuz .

H i s very n ame i s an embodiment of the manner and the

means by wh i ch the present day man i s transformed into
-

th e Divine Superman This symbol

.
,

Ch ri stian R osen Kreu z

"
Th e ] Ch r istian R os e C r oss ,

shows the end and aim of human evolution ; the road to be

traveled and the means whereby that en d i s gained T h e
, .

black cross the twini ng green stem of the plant the thorns
, , ,

h
t e bl ood r-
ed roses — i n these is hidden the solution of the
—
World Mystery Man s past evoluti on present con stitu
’
,

tion and part i cularly the secret of h i s future development

,
.

It h i d es from the profane but re v eals to the In i t iate the

,

more clearly how he is to labo r day by day to make for

himself that choicest Of all gems the P hilosopher s Stone ,
’

—more prec i ous than th e Kohinoor nay than th e sum o f ,

all earthly wealth " It reminds h im how mankind in i ts ,

ignorance is h ourly w asti ng the actual concrete material

,

that might be used in the formatio n of th i s priceless

tr easure .
 ROS I CR U C I A N C OS M O C ON C E P TI ON
-

same time how thoroughly m i sleading none can guess save ,

those who know the secret but e v en th e eaves d ropping

,

traitor who had l i stened and overheard the word s spoken

among the brethren could not have profited thereby The
, .

\ language in which esoter i c truths are couched is always

such that even though o v erheard and repeat ed by the unin
,

i tiated the secret st i ll remains hi d den from all but those

,

who alrea d y know .

T O those who are ent i tled to the knowledge m any a

'

,
”
mystery will re v eal i tself between the lines in this work
“
,

suggested but not spoken for to reveal them s ave from l i p

, ,

to ear to worthy persons and under proper circumstances ,

would be a grie v ous breach Of faith not to be contemplated

,
.

On the oth er han d the way to qual i fy to be entrusted

,

wi th Such knowledge is shown clearly an d plainly To .

none wh o will l i ve the life descr ibed in the f or egoing pages ,

w i ll the secret remain a secret long .

That this work may be the means of guiding some thirst

ing souls into the presence of the Divine Teachers is the
fervent prayer with which the author send s it forth into
the world It does not quote au th or i ti es but it has aim ed
.
,

on every page to appeal to the reason of the student that ,

having satisfied th e h ead it may reach the heart and help

,

him Onward on the path Of attainment in an all round ,

-
,

balanced Safe and sane development of his spiritual pow

,

er s S O that h i s fai th may be swa l lowed up in kn owledg e

,

d ed i cated to th e s er v i ce of H u m an i ty .

H old fast that which i s Good

“
.
TH E MIS SI ON OF T H E R O SICR U CIA N FE LLOW
S H IP .

G o d i s L i g h t—i f w e w a l k i
i n th e l g h t , as H e i s i n th e li g h t,
we h av e F el l ow s h p w th on e a n oth er — 1 s t
i i oh n 1 : 5 7
. J .

The Rosicruc i an Fellowsh i p i s not a sect or religious

organization It is a School of Thought It d Oe s not a i m
. .

at proselyting but rather to make the Chr i sti an Teach i ngs

,

a l i ving factor i n the land by encourag i ng people to remain

wi th thei r churches wh i le giv i ng them explanations wh i ch
time has obscured T O such as ha ve already seve red the i r
.

connect i ons with the church i t off ers a temporary anchorage

unt i l they be come arouse d anew to a deeper understan di ng
O f the up l ifting power and the beauty O f the Christi an
,

teach i ng .

There was a ti me even as late as Greece when R eligion

, , ,

Ar t and S ci en ce were taught unitedly in the Mystery

temples B ut it was necessary to the better develo pment
.

of each that they S hould se parate for a t i me .

R eli gi on held sole sway in the S O called dark ages -

“
.

D uring that t i me it bound both Sci ence and Art h and and
foot Then came the period of the Rena i ssance and Ar t
.

came to the fore in all i ts branches Rel i gi on was strong .

as yet ,
however and Art was only too Often prosti tuted
,

in th e se rvice of Rel i gion Last came the wave of m odern

.

S ci en ce and with masterful b and it has subjugated the

‘

Religion that once dominated it Science has freed Art .

from its bondage and both are follow i ng undesirable l i nes

,

in some of their branches on the same pri nc i ple that a

,

519
5 20 R OS I CR U C I A N COS M O C ON C E P T ION
-

boy just out of school is more ungovernable than at any

other ti me .

It was a detriment to the worl d when Re ligion shackled

Science I gn oranc e and S up ers titi on caused untold w oe
.
,

nevertheless man cher ished a l ofty spiritua l idea then ; he

hoped for a higher and better l i fe It is infinitely mor e .

disastrous that Science is killing Rel i gion for n ow even ,

H ope the only gift of the gods left in P andora s box

’
, ,

may vanish before M ater ialis m an d Agn os ti cis m

f
.

Such a state cannot continue Reaction must set in I f

. .

it does not Anarchy will rend the Cosmos To avert a

, .

calamity R eligi on S ci en ce and Ar t must reunite i n a

,

h i gher expression of the Good the T ru e and the B eau tifu l

,

than Obtained before the separation .

Coming events cast their Sha d ows before and when the ,

Gre at Leaders of humanity saw the ten d ency towar d s ultra

materialism whi ch i s now rampant in the Weste rn Worl d ,

they took certain steps to counteract and transmute it at

the auspicious time Th ey did not w i sh to kill the bud d ing
.

Science as th e l atter has strangled Religion , for they saw

the u ltimate good which will result when an advanced
Science has again become th e co worker of Re l igion -

A S p i ritual Relig i on however cannot blend w i th a ma

, ,

ter ial i stic Sc i ence an y more than Oil can m i x with water .

Therefore steps were taken to sp i r i tual i ze Sc ience an d make

R el i gion sc i entific .

In the thirt eenth century a high spiritual teacher ha v

‘

—
i ng the symbolical name Christ i an Rosenkreuz Christian
—
Rose : Cross appeared in Europe to commence that work .

H e founded the mysterious Order of Ros i cruc i ans with

th e Object of throwing occult light upon the misunderstoo d
'

Christian Re l igion an d to ex pl ain th e m v stery of Life and

 52 9 ROS I CRU CIAN C OS M O C ON C EP T I ON
-

monthly to headquarters The term of probation is at .

least a ye ar an d has for its purp ose to test th e earnestness

and persistenc e of the aspirant and to giv e h i m th e opp or '

tu n i ty to p ur ify h i m s elf b efor e taki n g u p th e m or e d i r ect

,

m eth ods of tr ai ni n g i n ci den t to dis cip l es h ip The report .

is also designed to be a help to the aspi rant in the per

\

f orm an ce of the exercises It is human n ature to want to

.

make as good a Showing as possible and the aspirant w i ll

thus try to do better knowing that h i s work is be i ng
,

inspected .

Th i rd Dis cip les who have completed the term of proba

, ,

tion been accepte d by th e Elder Brothers an d gi v en i ndi

,

vidual instruction Tuition is free . .

T h e Rosicruc i an Fellowsh i p has no o fficers except a

r

General Secretary who i s merely a ch an ne l for the d issem i

,

n ation of the teaching .

Anyone m ay enroll as a stud ent of Rosicruc i an Chri s

ti an i ty by writing to the General S ecr etar yf wh o w i ll fur
n i sh the nece ssary facil i t ies for stu dy or wherever poss i ble , ,
l
,

students m ay b and together and form a l ocal Fellow sh i p

center a l oc al school selecting one of their numbe r a s
, ,

l ocal secretary to correspond w i th the General Secretary .

There are no ch arters in i tiat i on fees dues or othe r

, ,

financial aspects inc i dent t o organ i zations The expens es .

incidental to th e promulgation O f Rosicrucian Chri sti an i ty

.

are borne by volunt ary subscriptions which may be sent ,

to Gener al Secretary Rosicrucian Fellowship P 0 Bo x , . .

1 8 0 2 Se attle Was h
, ,
.
 IN DE X

A W o r d to th e W i s e— T h e a ttit d e of a l i t tl u ch i l d i n ea h “
e s rc

f o t uth —5 ; s cep ti ci sm a d c e d u li ty
r r n e su s t h e op e n m i d — 6
r v r
; n

n ow w e s ee th ou g h a g l as s d a k l y —8
r r .

I n tr od u cti on —B u d d h th e Ligh t of a A si a ; b u t C h is t th e r
”—
“
Li g h t of th e W o l d E s oteri c Ch i sti an i ty th e comi g W o l d
r r n r

R el igi on th e s tru g g l e b etw een h a d a n d th e h e t— 1 7 ; c om m n

-
e ar o

g oun d on w h ich th ey ay
r m m e e t— 1 8 ; B i d d l e of li f e an d Dea th
m ay b e o e s l d b y a
v l l n o s p e ci a,
l gi f t s— 1 9 ; c o s t o f fi s t h n d r -
a

k now l e d g e n ot g ol d—ce tain p a cti ces op en th e w ay—K ow l ed g e

r r n

d ete m in e s th e a l u e of te tim on y ; ig n o
r v s ce h a s o cl i m t ran
con n a o

si d era ti on —2 0 ; h ow t o a ttai n to k n ow l e d g e—2 1 ; th e tru th sh al l “

”—
m ak e you f ree 23 .

C H AP T E R I .

TH E VISIBLE I N V ISIB LE W
AN D TH EO R LDS — Wh y som e Worl d s ar e
i n i sib l e to us — 2 4 ; th e m i s ta k e of s cep ti ci sm a n d c r e d u l i ty i llu s
v

t r ate d—2 5 ; w h y v a ri e d ac cou n ts of th e i n i s ib l e W or l d s a r e v al v

u ab l e—2 6 ; th e r e as on f or oc cu l t i n estig ati on s—p h y si ca l m a n i v

f estati on s of i n v i sib l e cau s es—f ros t fi ow e s a n d i ce cr y s tal s 2 7 ;

-
r -

i ll u strati on of th e com p a r ati e r eal i ty of th e i sibl e an d i n i sib l e

v v v

—
Wor ds 2 8 ; Th e C h em i ca l R eg i on —w h y th er e
‘

l a r e s e v en W or l d s
a l l F or m s com p os e d of th e s am e ch e m cal i su b stan ce— 3 0 ; th e
li f e d et er m in es th e kin g d om —th e f or ce s acti e v i n d e cayi n g f or m s
—3 1 ; f eeling n ot m er ely esp on se to im p a ct— 3 2 ; th e p u r p ose of
r

th e P h y si cal Worl d an d th e m i s tak e of u n d er v al u i n g i t—33 ; Th e

E th eri c R eg i ow — c om p a r i s on of m e th ods of m a t er i a l a n d occu l t
s cien c e—3 4 ; C h em i ca l E th er an d a ssi m i l a ti on — 3 5 ; Li f e E th er
a d p o
n r p a g a ti o n — Li g h t E th er i ts a cti on i n w ar m an d c ol d
,

b oo
l d e d a n i m a l s — 36 ; t h e s ou r ce o f co l o r — R efl e cti ng E th er an d
th e m em or y of — 37
n a tu r e p sy ch om etr y
— 38
i —3 9 ;
.

—
_

T h e Des i r e Wo d d esir e
r l m a tter th e b a si s of act on no t
fi n er h
p y s i c al m atte r—n ot i n er t b ut l i in g—4 0 ;
v i
cl a r v oya n ce u se

l ess w th ou t tr ai ini n g—4 1 ; th e tw in f or ces an d th e tw in f e el in g s

—4 2 ;
,

“
A li e i s b oth m ur d er a n d s ui ci d e i n th e Desire Worl d ”

523
 5 24 IND E X

43 ; C i —
h r st a n d th e d e a d d og se n s e p er cep t on d st n ct f om f eel
i i i r -

i i g—
i n g —44 ; th e tw n f e el n s 4 5 ; I llus t r at on of th e op erat on of
i i
h
t e t w i n f o ces
r a n f
d e el i n g s— 46 ; T h e ca u se of r em or s e— 47 Th e
Wor ld of Th oug h t—i ts tw o m ain d iv i si on s— 4 8 ; ar ch etyp es of
f or m v ital i ty a n d d e si r e—5 0 ; th e r egi on of a r ch etyp al F or ce s ,

f ocu s—e x p l an ati ons of d i a g r a m 1 an d 2—5 1 ;

,
“ ”
th e cr u x or

\
d i a g r a m 1 sh ow i n g th e com p a r a ti e r e ali ty of th e m a teri al a n dv "

s p i r itu a l W or ld s—5 2 ; i l l u st r a ti on o f s an d a n d s p on g e t o sh ow th e

r el a ti on of t h e s ev en W or ld s on e to an oth er—5 3 ; d i a g r am 2
,
th e ,

S ev en W or l d s—5 4 ; T h e s cop e of th e Worl d of Li f e S pi ri t a n d

of th e Wor l d of Di v i n e S p i r i t— 5 5 .

C H A P TE R II .

T H E F OU R K
I N GDOM s — com p a ri n g m an in eral to th e
t o th e m ,

p l a n t — 6
5 ; a n d t o t h e a n i m a l i n r e g ra d t o f a c u l ti e s — th e n ece ssi ty
of sep a r a t e v eh i cl e s f or e ach Wor l d —5 7 ch em i ca l e th er i n th e

m i n er al—d i fi er en ce I n com p os iti on of th e i ta l bodi es of pl ant

v

a n imal a n d m an —
,

5 8 th e v i tal b od y l ar g er th a n t h e d en s e b od y
5 9 ; of opp osi te sex t o th e d e n s e b od y ; th e r e as on f or th e p eri od
i ca l fl ow a n d tears i n w om en—6 0 ; th e p oin ts of th e v it al b od y -

a n d th e p ri ck l
y p a i n w h e n a h a n d g oe s t o s l e e p
— 6 1 ; t h e e ff ect

o f h yp n os i s a n aes th e ti c s a n d m a t e i al i z a ti on on th e
,
r i ta l b od y v

6 2 ; t e i ta fl u i d t e p e e
h v l h ,
s l n a n d p a ra l y s i s— th e r e a s o n f or c on

t a g i on — r6 3 ; w h y p ain i s f e l t i n a n am p u t at e d l i m b —6 4 ; th e E ar th
f e e l s p l e a s u e a n d p ai n —65 ; th e di ff e r e n ce i n cons tr u c ti on of a n i
r

m al a n d h u m an d e sir e b od i e s— 6 6 ; th e f orm of th e d esire b od y

th e s en se ce n ter s di fi e r é n t i n i n ol u n ta r y an d tra ine d cl air v oya n ts
v

— 67 a n e a s y m e th o d o f d is t i n g u i s h i n g o n e f o m h
t e ot er r h — th e
d e si e b od y a n d th e li e — 68 ; c
g

r v r e n t s d i e ct e d i n w a r d s i n cold
u rr r

b l ood e d b u t ou tw ard s i n w a m b l ood e d a n im al s d i fi e en ce b e

,
'

r - -
r

— ”—
t w e en E g o an d a g ou p S p i i t r -
6 9 ; li e r an d
r vl i v er “
th ou g h t
in d u cti on a d d o e tic i
n m s a n m a l s — 7 0 ; w h y a n im als of th e s a m e
S p eci es a r e al ik e b u t ea ch m a n a sp ecies—7 1 ; th e g r ou p sp i r i t
,

g u i d e s i t s s p e ci e s f om w i
r th o u t — 7 2 ; t h e v eh i cl es of th e E o com
g
a r e d to th e s n ai l a n d i t s h ou se—d i a g r a m 3 sh ow i n g t h e v eh i cl es
p ,

of th e f ou r ki g o n d m s — 7 3 ; d i a g ram 4 s h owi n g con s ci ous n ess of 4

kin g d om s—7 4 ; th e d es cent of th e sp iri t an d con sci ou sn es s—7 5 ;
,

th e d en se b o d y m a s m t p n os
’
er f ec t v e ic e
h l — 7 6 ; wh y a nim al s a r e
cla i r o
v y a n t— 77 il lustr ati on of di fi er ence b etw een g r oup spi rit
 IN DE X
I

52 6

a th ou h t g kn ock m a n d own ?— 1 2 5 ; m an a n
a app ren tice of th e
cr e a t v e i h i er a r ch es— m u s c, m a th em a t cs a n d
i i i th e s em i ci r cu l ar
-

c a n al s i n th e e ar — 1 26 t h e sp r i i t al cau se of
u w h at s eem s h er e di ty
;
-
127 wh y w e c a n n ot g et a b etter b od y on earth th a n w e b u i l t

i n h eav en —1 2 8 ; T h e T h i r d H ea v en an d th e p a n or a m a of a n ew

\ i —1 2 9 ;
l fe w h ere in an d w h y i t d ff ers i f r om a f ter d eath P an o
r am a —1 3 0 ; th e b l essin g of p a n i — 1 3 1 ; th e n ecess ity R eb i rth
f or
132 ; P r e p ar a t ion s f or a n ew bir th — 1 3 3 ; Th e R ecor d in g A n g el s
—E p ig en esi s— 1 3 5 ; th e E g o s l erty of ’
ib ch oi ce — r ip e
”
“
cau sa

ti on -
1 36 ; w h a t cau s es f er t l a t on of th e ov u m —i iz i ’
1 3 7 ; th e E g o s
w or k on n ew d
o y — 1 3 8 ; B r th of th e De ns e B od y— 1 3 9 ; B i r th o f
b i
th e vi t a l B od y— 1 4 1; B r t h o f t h e d e s r ei od y— h
t e m n d — 14 2 ; i b i
th e b l oo d a n d th e th ym u s g l a n d a s a fi e cti n g n d v d u a l ty 1 43 ; i i i i —
a s ou ce of r ob sessi on — 1 4 4 ; s F a u st on th e b l ood
’
t em p e r G oeth e
1 45 .

CH AP T E R I V .

REB IR TH AN D T H E LAW or CON S E Q U E N CE —Th ree th eories of lif e

—1 4 8 ; w h y m a t eriali sm a n d th eol ogy con flict w ith n atu re—14 9 ; “

th e p l an of s al ati on i n a d e qu ate 1 5 1 ; R e bir th h ar m on i z es w i th

v

—
.
,

ev o u ti o
l n 1 5 2 ; i t s e th i c a l n ec e s s i ty
— 1 5 3 ; t h e w a y o f e m a n c i p a

ti on —1 5 4 ; G en iu s a n d h er e d i ty—1 5 5 ; Th e l aw of A ttra cti on

1 5 6 ; d ea th d oes n ot p a y a ll—1 5 7 ; R e bi r th n ot tr an sm ig r ati on
158 ; O l i e r W v H o l m es
. o n e m a n i
c p a ti o n — 1 5 9 ; C osm i c L aw g ov
er n i n g f r e qu en cy o f i n c arn a ti on— 1 6 0 ; th e s t ars th e cl ock of ,

d esti n y— 1 6 1 ; i m p os sibi l i ty of es cap i n g rip e caus a ti on i l l u str ate d

—1 6 2 ; wh er e ign o a n ce i s bli ss—1 64 ; Wi n e th e leth a l d ri nk a s
r , ,

w h y C h r i s t s fi r st m i ra cl e w a s ch an gi n g
’
a f ac tor i n E v olu ti on
—
,

w ter to
a w i n e l 1 69 ; C h r is t f or b a d e th e tea ch i n g of r e bi r th tem

p o r a r il y
— 1 7 0 ; a w el l au th e n ti cate d s tor y of a r em em b er e d p as t

l i f e—1 7 2 .

C H A P TE R V .

T H E R ELAT I O N or M A N T o G OD—C on f u s i on of ter m s a source of

m i s u n d er sta n d i n g —1 7 7 ; d ia g r am gi v in g d efinite terms —1 7 8 ;
P l an etary G e ii 1 8 2n —
C H A P T E R VI .

TH E S CH E M E o r E VOL U TI ON God a c om p osi te B ei n g—1 8 3 ; I n

-

l
v o ut o i n E v o l u
‘

ti o n a n d E p ig en e si s— 1 85 ; f or m th e n e g a ti v e p ol e
— —
,

of S pi it r 1 8 6 ; h o w t h e s ta t es o f m a tt e r ar e crea t
‘

ed 1 8 8 ; s t ep s
 I N DE X

i i
n e v ol u t on of i
con sc ou sn es s —1 8 9 ; im p or tan ce of
th e h av in g th is
k n ow l e d g e—1 91 ; di a g r a m 7 , th e S a tu r n P e i od —1 9 3 r .

C H A P TER VI I .

T H E P AT H E VOLU TION — 1 94 ; R ev ol u t on s
or i an d C osm i c N igh ts
1 95 ; d a i g i
r a m 8 , s h ow n g h ow th e l f e w a v e i -
tr av el s f r om gl ob e
to g b
l o e d ur in g th e 7 P er i od s—1 9 7 .

CH AP T E R VI I I .

TH E WOR K or E VOLU T I ON —Ari a d n e ’

s th r e a d—2 0 1 racti cal th e p
v a l u e of k n ow i n g th e W or l d M ys t ery—Q OQ ; a tm os p h er i c con di t i on s
-

of th e S a tur n P er i od — 2 0 4 ; h ow S at u r n d es tr oy e d h i s ch il d r en

2 0 6 ; T h e Lor d s of th e F l a m e th e d i vi n e sp i ri t an d d en se b od y of
,

th e Vi rg i n S p i r i ts— 2 0 7 ; R ecap i tu l a ti on —2 0 8 ; Th e S un P er i od
2 0 9 ; cl i m a ti c c on d i ti on s—r econ str u cti on of d en s e b od y a c qu i si
t i on o f v i ta l b o yd — 2 1 0 ; T h e Lor d s of Wi s d om a n d th e Ch er u b i m
—2 11 ; th e lif e spiri t— 2 12 ; cl im atic con di ti on of th e M oon P e
r i od —2 1 3 ; th e L or d s of I n di v i d u a li ty a n d th e d e sire b od y—2 1 4
;
th e S er ap h i m a n d t e u h h m a n s —
pi ri t 2 1 5 ; l os i n g A ll con s ci ou sn e ss
-

t o g ai n S f o
e l -
c n s ci ou s n es s— Q I G ; m in era l p l a n t an d a n i m al s ta g e s
,

o f c on s ci o u s n e s s— 2 1 7; w h y p l a n e t s a r e d i ff e r e n ti a te d — 2 1 8 ; ori gi n
of h on ey m oon t r i p s a n d t h e m i g r a ti on s o f bi r d s—2 1 9 ; T h e l i f e

Cy cl e—2 2 1 ; 1 2 C reati v e H ierarch ies—2 2 2 .

C H AP T E R IX .

S TR AGGLER S AN D N EW COM ER S — 2 2 3 ; A d a p ta
bility th e b on e an d

si n ew of p r og r es s—
I

2 2 4 ; li s t of cl a ss es a t th e b e gi n nin g of th e
M oon P eri od —2 2 6 ; M o on e x i s te n ce a n d t h e gi l l cl ef ts of t h e
- -
em

b yor — 22 8; t h e m ea n i n g o f s a l i
at o n — v2 29 d i a g r am 1 0
’
th e
d i fi er en t cl as ses at th e b egi n ni n g of th e E arth P er i od—2 3 0
,

CH A P T E R X .

T H E E AR T H P ER IOD —W o rlds d en se r ical—2 3 3 ;

th an th e ph ys
g en e si s o f t e 4 e e s
h e l m n t — a fi f th l
e e m e t
n — 2 3 4 ; a d i vi si on i n
m d i r b d i s— 2 3 5 ; g as tr i c j ui ce s th e su b con s ci ou s ch e m i s tr y
—
so e e s e o e

of t eh E g o — 23 7 th e b l oo d m a n i pu l at e d b E
y g o 2 39 ; T h e L o r d s
 IN DE X

o f F orm , th e A ng el o an d th e vi tal od y 2 4 0 ; v ol un ta ry an d i n b —
v ol u n t ar i
y cl a r y
v o an ts —2 4 1 ; th e Ar ch an g els an d th e d e
s i re od y b
— 24 2 ; B est P er i od s be tw een R e l ti ons—2 4 3 ; vo u why th er e m u st
b e C osmi c N igh t s . R es t P e i od s an d De at h—2 44 ;
r r
th e p esen t n ew
l u ti e n —2 4 5 .

H —C h d ’
G EN E SI S or ou r: S OL AR S r e a os an d th e r ai so n etr e o f

p l a n e t s —2 4 6 ; ch a os th e b a si
s of C osm os an d e x i s t s n ow as t h e

b as i s of p ro r ess g9
24 ; h a —
os a n d G a s— C
S h ak es p e ar e an d B a co n
25 1 ; Ch a os Cosm os Geni u s an d E p igen es is—2 5 2 ; Th e S e en v

S p i ri t s be f or e th e Th r on e—2 5 3 ; Th e S e en C ol ors —th e F our

, ,

Ki n gd oms—d i a g ram — 2 54 ; th e sh ape of th e bo d y an d cons ci ous

n ess — 255 ; M a n s p a st p r
'
ese n t a n d f u t u r e f or m d i a gr am 1 2 —2 56 ;
t h e e ol u ti on of a sun—2 5 8 ; t h e M art i a n ca n al s —
,

v 259 .

C H AP T ER XI I .

EV OLU T I ON TH E E A R TH — Th e P ola r i a n E p oc h —o ur first

e a r t hl y bod y—2 6 1 ; t h e thi r d e y e an or ga n of f eel in g—pe rf ecti on
of se ns e or gan s —262 .

Th e H yp er b o r ea n E p o ch —t h e E a rt h w a s t h r ow n ofi f r om th e
S un —
2 63 ; C
r y s tal l i z a ti on al w ays sta r ts at th e p e
o l —2 64 ; th e
M oon , t h e E ig h th sp h er e —2 64 ; c fi ect s o f . t h e S un an d M oo n f orces
on m an —26 3
in di i d u al—2 66 ; sep
.

Th e Le m ur ia n E poch —Th e bi r th of th e v

a ra t i on i n t o sex e
s 2 6 7 ; M ar s — a n d r ed w ar m b l oo d— 2 6 8 sex f or ce

th e b ui l d er of b r ai n an d la r y nx — 2 6 9 ; t h e ra ces a n d t h eir l ea d e rs

—2 7 0 ; t h e Lor ds of V en u s M er cu r y — 2 7 1 ; th e
an d fir s t I ni ti ates
K i n gs b y gr a ce of
th e G od— 2 7 2 ; M e r cur y t h e li be ra t or—2 7 3 ;
an ci e n t Lem ur ia —2 75 ; bui l di ng th e e y c 2 76 ; n ei th e r bi r th n or
b

d ea th A d am kn ew hi s w if e —t h e l an g ua g e of Le m ur i a
2 7 8 ; e d u ca ti on f o boys an d f or gir l s
r in Le m ur i a— 2 7 9 , wh a t
w er e th e i ni ti a t i on s i n Le m ur i a ? —2 8 0 ; L em u ri an p e r ce v ed i th e
i n ne r qua li t i es of . i
t h n gs ra t h er t h an th e ou tw a r d s h ap e —28 1 ;
I n n oc en ce n ot vir t u e, v i rtu e p red i ca t es kn ow l ed g e an d ch oi ce

T h e F all —th e An gels an d p r opa ga tion—p lan eta r y li n es of f o c e r

an d p ai nl es s p ar t u r t i oni —2 83 ; W il l Im a gi n a ti on an d se f o ce
,
x r

m pa r is on of A ng e ls l ov e a n d h um an l o e—2 8 5 ; L u ci f er
’
2 84 ; co v
 530 I NDE X

i r
a v a r c e v e s u s al tr ui sm —3 11 ; A b r ah a m th e cl o g an d f etter of th e
J ew s— 3 12 ; w h y th ey w er e ex i l e d an d wh y J esu s w as b or n a J ew
h ow th ey w er e “
l os t ”
an d th e m e th od of th e ir s alv ati on

3 14 ; w h y th e l ess on i s p a r t i cul a rl
y a p p l cai bl e t o th e W est .

C H A P T E R XIV .

O C C U LT A N A L Y S I S OF G E N E S I S —G e n es is sh ow s p er i od s ,
r ev ol u

i
t o s etc
n i n b oa d r tl i n e —ou 3 1 7 ; v ow e l s i n th e H e b r ew l a n g u a g e
—
.
, ,

Kin g J a m es B ibl e—tr an sl ator s i n com p e ten t an d r est icted

’
r

Lu th er s B ib l e i n G e r m an y a n d oth er p r otesta n t cou n t i es—f an at

’
r

i cal f ol l y— 3 1 8 ; th e B ib l e n ot w r i tten to b e a n op en b ook—P a ul

a s s e r ti n g a e g ll o r i c a l m e a n i
'

n g
— 3 1 9 ; t h e f u l l t r u t h h i d d en f r om
i
m u l t tu d e b y C h i s t a n rd P a u l — th e G r eek S ep tu a gi n t t h e p r i n cip al
B leib a t t h e ti m e o f C h i s t a n dr 2 8 0 y e a r s b e f o r e— t h e T a l m u d — th e
M a sor e ti c tex t 3 2 0 — C

Th e tw o r ea d i n gs o f th e op en i n g s en ten ce of G en e sis—tr u th i s
many s e i-
d d — th e oc cu l t a l u e of w ri ti n g w i th ou t v ow e l s a n d d i v i
v

i
s o n s o f w o d s — r3 2 2 ; th e com p l em en t a y e ff ect of u si n g b oth r

r ea d i n g s of t h e op e i g n n s e t
n e n ce — 3 22 ; th e sci en ti fi c d em on s tr a
ti on of th e t u th of th e n e b u l ar th eor y a pr oof of G od s a cti i ty
’
r v

i n f or m i n g a n d p e se rv i n g th e u n i er s e— 3 2 3 ; th e d u al e n er gy
r v

3 24 ; th e se v en C eativ e r H r a r h s —
ie c ie 3 2 5 ; w h y th e C h er u bim an d
i
S e r aph m a e r n o t m e n ti o n e d — t h e E l oh i m es t— 3 2 6 ; G en esi s l ik e
r

an a g e l b a i ca
r l f o m u l a f
r o r c e a ti on — d es crip ti on of t h e S atu r n
r

P er i od — 3 27 o f th e S u n r —
P e i od h ow i t i s s ci en ti fi cal ly p os sibl e
to h a e l i g h t b e f or e th e c r ea ti on of th e S u n a n d M oon—th e M oon
v

p e ri o d — t h e a t m os
‘

p h e r e o f fi e f o g
— r3 2 8 -
.

Th e E a r th p er i od— r ecap i tu l a ti on s—3 2 9 ; T h e P ola ri an E p och

th e m in e al r s ta g e — s p ir a l s wi th in sp i r a ls — T h e H yp er b orea n
E p oc h — h
t e p l a n t s t a g e — th e s ep a r a ti on f r om t h e S u n— 4 330
; th e
c a s ti n g off th e M oon— 3 31 ; T h e L em u r i a n E p ochr c r ea ti on of

fi sh es ,
r ep t il es an d bir d s— a g r eem en t wi th i
sc e n ce —it w a s F OR M ;
c r e at e d — im p o ta t w o d
” “ ’
n ot
“
L IF E th a t w as n ep h e sh an r n r

T h e A t lan tea n E p och — m am m al s a n d m an ar e cr ea te d m a l e an d ,

—
f e m a l e—w h y th e h er m a p h r od te a n d a s ex u a l s tag es a r e n ot m en
i
ti on e d — a sy l la b l e sh owi n g th a t m an h as b ee n on ea r th
p r e v ou s i
to th is r e s e nt ti m e—3 3 2 ; Th e A r y a n E p oc h — th e i
E l oh m r e s t a n d
‘

p
t h e w or k of m an c om m e n ce s .

Th e so ca ll e d
-
d is cr ep an ci es b etw een th e first an d s e con d c rea
 I N DE X

ti on -
s tori e s— E l oh i m a nd J eh ov a h—3 3 3 ; J eh ov ah a n d h i s mi ssi on
in i —A n g el s an d
ev ol u t on Ar ch a n g el s— M i ch a el t h e r a ce s p i ri t of
— th e o ri g i n a l S e m i tes —
,

th e J ew s w h y J eh o ah
“ ”
v ch oose 3 3 4 ; th e
tru th a b ou t E gyp t ; w i l d ern e s
“ ” ”
“
th e r ed se a a n d th e an d
“
s

t h e p
“
r o m i s e d l a n w-
h e r e t h e l
“
os t ”
tr i b es a r e — 3 3 5 ; h ow
man h a s co e on ea th b ot fir t a d
m r h s n l a st — 336 .

I n v ol u ti on — e ol u ti on a n d ep ig en e si s
v -
3 3 7 ; m a n a c e at or ; n ot r

an i m i t a t o r — C a s p a r W o l f a n d e p ig e n e s i s— 338 ; H a e c k el a n d
ep ig e n es i s — t h e n ece ss i t y f o r e i
p g e n es i s— 3 3 9 ; d eg e n e ra ti on a n d
i ts ca u se th e — mi s si n g li n k
“ ”—
34 1 ; f os si l s—th e s t on es an d
fl ow ers of th e p a st—h or n b l en d e f el d sp ar a n d m i ca—3 4 3 ; em b y
,
r

ol og y a k ey to a kn ow l e g e o d f h
t e p t a s — th e s e con d s to y o f th e r

c r ea ti on of m a n — 3 44 ; th e w or d “
n e h e sh
p
”
i n a n ot h er d es s r

345 ; w h y i t w as n ec es sa ry t o gi e tw o cr ea ti on s t or i e s s o s e em
v

i n g l y d i ff er en t—th e d i ff e r en ti ati on of t h e se es—8 4 6 x

s t or y a n d c om m on sen s e —
.

Th e r ib
“ ”
34 7 w h y J eh ov ah b l ew
i n to A d am s n ostri s n o su d d en p ocesses i n n atu r e—3 4 8 ; th e
’
l — r

s ou l i n t e b ood h l — 3 49 ; ori g i n of n a ti on s— th e R a ce s p i it ; p a r

tri oti s m a n d n o s t a l a —
gi 3 5 0 ; r e ason f or s u n am es an d th e a ffix r

” — —
“
son C h r i s t a s e m a n c i p a t or p r i o r i ty o f t h e i n d i v i d u a l to
t r ib e a n d n a t i o n — 3 5 1 ; s u b or d i n a tion of th e i n d i vi d u al t o r a ce or
f am ily—3 5 2 ; e n d og am y a n d i ts e ff ect on c ons ci ou s n e s s—m a r ryi n g
i n th e l
c a
“
n
”
t e g yp i e
h s s — w h y t he V ik i n g s m i e d b l ood — 3 5 3 ; x

en d og a m y th e c au s e o f s e c on d sigh t
“ ” -
w h y t h e sons o f G od
d i d w r on g to m a r ry th e d a u gh t e r s of m e n— en d og a m y p r oh ibi te d
a n d e og a m y en f o c e d b y l aw
x r —3 5 4 ; th e e ff ect of i n ter trib al a n d -

i n te r n ati o a l n m a r i g
a r es — 355
W h y h ybri d s can n ot p r op a g ate—W h y th e R ace G od l ik e th e
.

G r oup s p i ri t a r e j eal ou s a n d v i sit th e si n s of th e f a th er s on

”
-
“

h
t e c h i l d e n — r 3 5 7 t h e n e cess i t y f o r s e l fi sh n e s s— 3 5 8 ; i n te n a r

t i o n a l m a r r i a g e s a s a f a c t o r i n e v
o l u t i o n — th e f ou r c a u s e s of m a n s ’

r e s e n t d i s b eli ef i n th e e i s te n c e of sp i ri tu al w o l d s— 35 9 ; C h r i s t
x r
p
s u p er c e d i n g th e r a ce s p i r i t — t h e
“
F a l l ; t h e b ac kb on e o f p p ar
o u l
C is ti ty
h r a n i — 360 ; d i v i si o n o f t h e s e x f or ce — t h e L u ci f er s a s s
“
er

ok e t o th e w om an a n d rf ot t o m a n or b ot h
”
p e n ts w h y t h e y S p
s ol v in g a d i l em m a— 36 1 ; t h e u n c on s ci ou s an d c on sciou s c r ea ti v e

a c t th e t ee o
,
r f n w d e —
k o e g 3 6 2 ; eati n g of t ee of li f e w ou l d h av e
l r

b een a g e ater cal am i ty—3 6 4 ; th e cos t of th e b r ain sp ee ch a n d

r ,

- —
f ree w il l th e a b oli ti on o f se x — 3 64 .
 I N DE X “

C H A P TE R X V
C H RI S T AN D H IS M I S S IO N —E s oter ic Ch r istiani ty ; th e f uture
Wor l d igion—th e e olu tion of
r el r el igi on — a w r on g c on c l u si on

3 6 7 ; th e su r v i a l of t h e fi ttes t a n d th e l aw of s a cr i fic e—
v

v 3 68 ;
m u si c as a b uil d er a n d d e s t oyer— fin d i n g th e k eyn ote—3 6 9 ; th e
r

origi n of a l tr u i sm a n d th e c au s e of i ts g r ow th —3 7 0 ; f ear an d

a a i c e a s e d u ca tor s i n l o e—3 7 1 ; f aith a s a f a ctor i n l i f e —

v r v sac

r ific e of b u ll ock s com p a r e d to th e C h r i s ti a n l i f e— 3 72 ; v i cari ou s

a to n em en t as a su b s ti tu te f or R e bi r th a n d th e l a w of C on se
n —
q u e ce 3 7 3 ; J e s u s C i t th e only be g ott e 3 7 4 ; Jeh ov a h ;
h r s n —
C h r i s t a n d th e F a t h er ; w h o — 3 76 ; th e v eh i cl e s o f s om e of th e

c r e a ti e hi e a r ch i es— 3 7 7
v r .

T h e im m a cu l a te con ce p ti on — 3 7 8 ; a m i sta k en i d ea—th e E s

sen e s ; t h e P h a r i s e es a n d th e S a d d u ce e s—Wh y th e C h ri s t n eed ed

t e bo y
h d o f J e s u s — 3 7 9 ; wh y J eh ov ah ca n b e on l y th e G od of
.

n a ti ons —3 8 0 t h e e fi ec t of e s oter i c t rai n i n g— 3 8 1 C h r i s t Je s u s

; ;
-

uh i q u e am on g G od s a n d m en—w h y h e i s th e on l y effi caci ou s m e

d i a tor—3 8 2 ; m or e r ea son s w h y C h ri s t ap pear ed a s a m an a n d

n to a s d i i n
v e — A l l p r e vi o u s r e l i g i o n s b a s e d o n L a w — Ch ri stianity
a b o
r g a t e s L a w e x a l t s L o v
e — A l l p e i ous r el i g i on s p oi n t t o
r v
“
on e
;
” —
w h o i s to com e 3 8 3 ; a b o g ati on of n a ti on al sep ar a ti on f or
r

th e U n i e s a l B ot
v r r h e r h oo d — 3 8 4 ; C h i s ti an i ty al on e w ai ts f or
r

C h ri s t to co e m A G A I N — 3 8 6 ; th e C h u r ch ow n e d b y s ta te or p a r ty
“

— i sit t o a s tate ch u r ch i n E u r op e —
v a m i n i st er d ecor ated wi th

o d er s b y th e ki n g
r —h i s p rayer f or ar m y an d n av y
T .

W y h C h r i st ca m e to b r i n g a s ow r d — 387 th e m ean i n g of th e
wo s
r h i p o f t h e t h r e e W i s e m e n — t h e s t a r o f B e th l e h e m — 38 9 ; th e

m i ssi on of C h r i s t—th e s p i i tu al f or ce o f th e su n—i ts eb b a n d

r

fl ow — th e b l a z i n g s t ar i n t h e h o l y n ig h t— 3 90 ; m or e ab ou t th e
s w or d C h r i st b r ou g h t— w h y i t i s h a d f or th e t r u e C h ri sti an i ty to
r

f o g e ah ea d—3 9 1 ; th e sw or d a n d th e w i n e cup ; th e p erv erte d

r -

c r os s a d c n o m m u n i o n —cu p —th ei r m i s u s e as w ea p on s o f d esol ati on

W h y C h ri s ti a n ity h a s b een th e bl ood i est r elig i on on e a r th —3 92 ;

r .

i
d or ce o
v f h e a d f r o m h e a r t— 3 9 3 ; th e u s e an d a bu s e of th e m i n d
h
t e w a r b e t w e e n th e h ig h e r a n d t h e l o w e r n a tur e — m i n d b oun d u p
i n d esire—3 94 ; th e f e ar of G od v s th e d esi r e of th e fl esh —3 95 ;
—
.

th e m e a n i n g o f t h e c r
o ss s
-
t r i p es
‘

o n t h e h e a r t a p u zz l e t o th e

s c i e n ti s t s — 3 96 ; th e eff ect of th e h ear t b ecom i n g a v ol u n tar y

—
mus cl e th e t o s r n g h o l d s o f h
t e p S i ri t i n t h e b o d —
y 3 9 7 h ow th e
 5 34 ‘
IN DE X

p os iti on ,
e tc .
,
as m easu res of a su cce ss f u l li f e—4 31 ; th e l ap d og
-

an d th e h om el ess cu r —4 3 2 ;
p th e ki g
ow er
n i of
n a f r
s p ea
o eig n

t on g u e—th e u n i on w i th th e h ol y s pi ri t—sp eakin g wi th ton gu es n o

m a ud li n n on s en s e ; b u t s en s ibl e con er sati on—C oun t S t G erm ai n v .

a n d f or eig n t on gu es—4 3 3 ; th e eas on f or p r ayi n g—n o se l fi sh

r

p yr a e r s — 4 3 4 ; t h e L o r d s r
p y a e r —’
t h e R e l igi o n of th e H ol y p it ;
S i r

th e R el igi on of th e S on a n d th e R el igi on of th e F ath er— 4 35 ; th e

p er s en t s tr i f e f o r e m a n ci p a ti on i n a l l c o u n tri es — 4 3 6 ; wh y H i n d u
m eth od s a r e u n su itab l e to th e w e stern as p ir ant— 4 3 7 th e Al ch em
i s ts an d occu l t sci en ce—th e R osicru ci an s a n d th e p h il osoph er s ’

s ton e

i ni n g i s i n d i i d ual—sep tenary d ivis i on of occult s ch ool s

.

A l l tra v

4 3 8 ; th e p ar ti c u l ar r ea son f or th e R osi cru cia n m eth od of d ev el op

m en t—43 9 l og i c th e s u es t g ui d e —th e p l a ce of f aith —
r 44 0 ; e fi ect
of t r a i n i n g o n t h e d i ff e r e n t e h i clves — 44 1
T h e S ci en ce of N u tri tion —th e em b y o—th e f oetu s—c hi l d h ood
.

a rk e d b y d i ff e ren t s t a g e s of con s oli d a ti on—

,

a g e a n d d e a th m 44 2 ;
th e b l ood as a c a r r i e of b oth l i f e a n d d e ath —4 4 3 ; cal careou s m at
r

te r
,
i n t e h f o o d — e x c r e t i o n a s a s av i o r — 4 44 ; w ater ; th e w or s t
m a n — H a r v ey s d e fin i ti on of h e al th a n d d is e ase—di s
_

’
e n em y of

till e d w at e r m a n s g r
’
ea t e s t b o o n — 4 4 5 ; w h y fl e sh f ood i s to b e -

a oi d e d
v — 4 4 6 ; th e eth i cal cr im e of f or cin g m en to b u tch er m ilk-

a s a f ood —s u g ar—4 4 7 f r u it s a n d v e g eta b l e s .

T h e f ol ly of takin g up a e g e teri a n d iet i n a h ap h a z ar d w ay

v

4 48 ; ap p ea r a n ce n o t a n i n d e t o xh e a l t h — th e ch e m i str y of f ood
4 4 9 ; th e am oun t of f ood r e quir e d —ta b l e of f ood v al u es—4 5 0 ;

p h o sp h ori c a ci d as a b r a i n f oo d —
-
4 5 3 ; th e gi st of th e a r g u m en t

why so e m r e l i g i on s p r e s c r ib e w as h i n g a s a r e l i g i ou s e x e r ci s e— w h y
f a sti n gs a r e b en e fici a l at t i e m s— 4 5 4 ; tem p er as a d e str oy er of th e
b od y—th e m is si on of th e wh ite bl ood cor p u scl e s— e en tem p era
'

-
v

m en t as a a ctor f i n h e a l th — th e com p a r a ti e e ff e ct of th e en d o
v

k
s el eto n a n d t h e e x os k el e t o n a s f a c t o r s i n c o n s c i o u s n e ss — 45 6
T h e L ate of as s i m i l ati ow —
.

mi w h y p l an t f ood stays a l on g
’

i
t me n i t h e b o d —
y wh y m eat di et r e qu i r es m ore m e al s a n d g r ea ter
-

qu a n ti ti es th an th e eg et ria v a n di e t — 45 8 ; th e g r ea te s t arg u m en t
45 9 ; g r e e d th e c a u s e o f c r u e l ty
— s p o r t t h e w o r s t o u tr a g e — 4 61 ;

p r ot e c t i o n gi v e n t o w o r t h l ess a n i m als — th e Lor d s p ray er h a s a

’

b earin g up on each of th e 7 eh icl es of m an—4 6 2 v .

T h e u nu s e d sex f orce a s a f ac tor i n sp i ri tu a l gr ow th

-
th e p r oli fi c
-

n
e e ar t i o n a m o n g t h e l o w e r c l a s s e s — 4 6 7 ; r e str i c ti on a m on g th e
g
 IND E X 535

—th e rp etu a tin g th e race—d uty i n r eg ar d

'

hi g h ef cl ass d u ty of p e

t o ot ers
h — 4 6 8; a g o o d d iv i s i o n o f l i f e — th e ti m e f or sp i r i tu al a d
v a n ce m e n t — 4 7 0 ; m ar r i a g e d o e s n o t gi v e u n l i m i te d l i ce n s e— th e
on l y l e gi ti m a te us e of th e s ex f or ce—a b an d on m en t of i n d i v i d u al
.

r ig h ts a d t
n h e l a w o f C o n se q u e n c e— 4 7 1 ; th e p i tu itary b od y a n d
h
t e p e i n a l g l a n d — 4 73 ; th e s e n s e cen ter s of th e d e si r e b od y a n d
h
t e r o t a ti o n o f t h e e a rt h — c om p a r i s on o f m ed i um s a n d t r ai n ed

c l ai rvoy an ts — l
u n s e fis h n es s a p r e r e q u i si te — d a n g e r t o t h e c om m u

n ity i n a b u s e of p ow er—4 74 ; h ow t o k n o w th e t r ain e d cl ai r oy an t

—4 75 ; th e bui l din g of trans m u ted se cu rren ts—h ow th ey w ork
v

x-

th e b ri d g e to th e u n s een w orl d s—4 7 6 .

f r r a n n —
N eces sity o t i i g th e d i fi er en ce b e tw een s eei n g th e i nn er
wo l s a
r d n d f u n c ti o n i n g i n t h e m — a n e w
v e h i c l e— h ow i t i s b ui l t
—4 8 0 ; th e s i m il arity b etw een th e st a tes o f con cen tr a ti on an d sl eep
a n d th e d i fi er en c e—to b e l os t in a b ook —a c q u i i n g th e f a cu l ty o f r

becom in g l ost ; i n d ep en d ently at w ill—4 8 3 ; m em or y of ex p erien ces

,

i n th e d esir e w or ld—c on f u s e d a n d l ogi ca l d r eam s— a m ea n s of

v e i f yi n g s u pp ose d ex p eri e n c es —4 8 4 ; f a ci l i ty f or tr a el i n th e d e
r v

si e b o y
r d — th e e x e r ci s es f or ev ol v i n g th e h igh er sen se s—th e tim e
to p r cti ce 4 8 5
a —
C on cen tra ti on : I m a gin a ti on a n d I l l u si on —4 8 6 ; i m a gin ati on th e
.

b asi s of all ou r i m p r ov em en ts—th e eff ect of f ocu s sin g th e th ou gh t

—obj ects f or con cen tr ati on—4 8 7 d escrip ti on an d ex am p l e of con
ce t a t o
n r i n — I n d ian f a ki r s ’
tricks a n d con cen tr ati on—4 8 8 ; th e
“

v a cu u m a n d i ts e fi e ct—M e d it a ti on d efin e d a n d d es cr ib e d —e am l e x
p
of ex erci se—ob s er a ti on a s a f a ctor i n d ev el op m en t —4 8 9
v d ef e cti v e
sigh t as a h n r n —
i d a ce 492 ; draw in g con clu sion s f rom obs erv ation s
—cons tr u cti v e an d d estru cti v e cri ti ci sm an d th eir efi ects—w h y w e
sh ou l d l ook f or th e g ood i n e er y th i n g—4 9 3 ; C on tem p l a ti on ;
v

d efin i ti on a n d d escrip ti on—4 94 ; A d ora ti on —p ersis ten ce—4 96 .

C H A P TE R X V I I I .

TH E CON S TIT U TION or TH E V OLCAN I C E RU P TION S

E AR T H AN D

Th e di fi ere t t
n s ra t a a n d I ni ti i o
a t n — com p ar i n g occu l t a n d m od e r n

s ci e n ce m e t h o d s— 4 9 8 ; th e n u m b er 9 i n m i cr oc osm a n d m a cr ocosm
—4 99 ; M i n eral stra tu m —V ap or str a tu m —5 0 3 ; S eed str atum —th e
q uestion h ow di d li f e origin a te ? sh oul d b e h ow di d i nanim a te
“ ” “

o bj cts o g
e r i i n a t e Z ”—‘
5 0 4; F i e y st tu
r r a m — R ef ractin g stra tu m
50 ; A
6 tom i s ti c s tr a —
tum M ateri al ex pressi on of th e E arth s pi ri t
536 IND E X

C enter of bein g—5 0 7 ; V ol ca nic cr ate s—I m m or ality a s a f actor

r

5 08 ; 1i st of er u p ti on s of V esu v i u s—n i n e eru p ti ons i n t h e 1 6 00

rk a g es —
,

e a r s o f d a n i n e i n th e 3 00 y ea r s of m o d er n scie n ce m a
y
te r i al i s m — fi V e i n t h e l a s t 5 1 y e a r s—5 1 0 ; th e el d er P l i n y a n d h i s
e flzect on m o e n ti
'
d r m es — 5 1 1 ; occul t t ea ch i n g s of th e p as t as v eri
fied b y m d
o e r n s i
c e n c e— 5 12
.

CH A PTE R XIX .

CH RIS T IAN ROS E N KREU Z OR DER or R os i cRU C IAN s —T h e

'

AN D T H E

h
f ou n d er o f t e o r d e r —5 1 5 ; th e si g n i fi ca n ce of th e n a m e—5 1 6 ; th e
sym b olis m of th e R osy C ross ; t h e p hi l osop h er s ston e—
’
517 .
 N E G A T IV E PO S lT I

OR B E LO W .

T h e w or l d , th e m a n an d th e a t om ar e ov e rn ed b y th e s am e
g
l aw . O u r d en se ea r t h is n ow i n i ts 4 T H s ta ge of con s ol i d a t on i .

Th e m in d , th e d es i re b od y an d th e v i t a l b od y ar e l es s s ol id th a n
ou r 4TH i
v e h cl e , th e d e n se b od y I n th e atom ic w ei g h t of th e
.

ch em ca l i el e m en t s th e r e is a si m i l ar ar r an g em en t Th e 4 T H .

gro up m ar ks th e a c m e of d e n si ty .
 B OOK S ON T H IS S U BJE CT

T h e R osi cr u ci an C os m o Ma x H eindel 5 44 -
con cepti on . .

pp 1 2 mo with 2 5 d i agrams an d i llustrat i ons some

. .
, ,

i n four colors ; handso me symbol i ca l cover design ( red ,

black an d gold ) E dge s gold o v er red B i nd i ng

. .

extra strong an d d urable ; i ssued w i thout profit to

"

author Postage 1 5 0

TH E R O SICRU CIA N C H RI ST IA N ITY SERIE S .

The pr i ce of these lectures is 5 c ents each plus 1 cent

postage for each copy .

No 1 T H E R I DDLE O F LI F E AN D D E ATH P resent

“
. . .

i ng a soluti on wh i ch i s both sc i ent i fic an d rel igious .

”
No 2. WH E RE ARE T H E D E AD ?
.
“

No 3. S P I R I T U A L S I G H T A N D TH E S P I R I T U A L
.

W OR LDS Showing that we ha v e a latent s i xth

.
“

”
sense and what it opens up to us when cult i v ated
,
‘

No 4. S LEE P D R E AM S T R A N C E H Y P N OT I S M M E DI
.
, ,

U M S H I P AN D I N S AN I T Y .

No . D E A T H A N D LI FE I N P U RGATORY
“
Descr ib .

i ng the metho d of d eath an d purgation also how im ,

mutable l aw an d not an aveng ing De i ty transmutes

the ev i l acts of l i fe to everlast i ng g ood .

No 6 LI F E A N D A C T IVI T Y I N H E AVE N Show i ng

“
. . .

how the H uman Sp i r i t assi m i lates the Goo d of i ts

“

past l i fe an d creates i ts env ironment for a future r e

b i rth also how i t prepares a new body
, .

”
No 7. B I RTH A F OU RF O LD EVE N T
.
“
Descr i bing the .

antenatal preparations for birth and the sp i r i tual

’

changes wh i ch inaugurate the per i od of excess i v e

p hys i cal growth i n the 7 th year the cause of puberty , «

at 1 4 an d matur i ty at 2 1 Th i s knowle d ge i s ab so
~
.

l u tel y essent i al to th e r i gh t care of a ch i l d .

T H E S C I E N C E O F N U T RI T I ON H E A LT H A N D
“
No 8. .
,
”
P R OT R A C TED YOU T H Show i ng th e mater i al cause of
.

e arly death and the obviou s prophylact i c .

No 9 T H E A S T R ON OM I C AL A LLE GOR IE S OF T H E
“
. .

B I B LE .
No . 10; A S T ROLOGY ; I T S S C OP E AN D LIM I
Show i ng the sp i ri tual s i d e of astrology how i t enables ,

those who stu d y it to he lp them sel v es and others .

No 11. .S P I RI TU AL S I GH T A N D I N S I GH T Its cul .

'
tu r e con tr ol and leg i t i mate use g i v i ng a defin i te and
, ,

safe metho d of atta i nment .

”
N o 12 P ARS I F AL Wagner s famous Mystic Music
“ ’
. . .

Drama a mine of insp i ra ti on to s pi r i tual effort

, .

N o 13 T H E A N GEL S A s F A C T OR S I N EVO LU T I ON
“
. . .

Showi ng just what part the Angels Archangels , ,

Cherub i m Seraph im etc play in the Drama of Li fe

, ,
.
,
.

”
N o 14 LU C I FE R T E M P TE R OR B E N E F A C T OR P Show
“
. .
,

i ng the or i gin and the m i ss i on of pai n an d sor r ow .

N o 15 T H E M Y S T E R Y O F G O LG O T H A A N D T H E
“
. .

”
C LE AN S I N G B LOOD A rat i onal explanat i on wh i ch .

sat i sfies hea d an d heart al i ke .

T H E S T A R O F B E T H LE H E M ; A M Y S T I C
“
N o 16
. .

FA C T .

N o 17
. T H E M Y S T E R Y O F T H E H O LY G R A I L The .

way to atta i nment .

T H E LO R D S P R A Y ER Show i ng the esoteric ’

N O 18
“
. . .

s i d e an d how i t appl i es to the se v en fol d const i tut i on

,
-

of man .

N o 20
. .FE LLOW S H I P A N D TH E C O M I N G R A C E .

Show i ng why the B i ble conta i ns both th e Jew i sh and

the Ch ri st i an R el ig iou s an d Wh y b oth comb i ne d are ,

pecul i arly a d apted to the sp i r i tual n ee d s of the West

ern Wor l d an d why Je sus was born a Jew
‘

R O SICR U CIA N FE LLOWS H I P ,

P 0 Bo x 18 0 2 Seattl e Wash
. .
,
.

and for sale by

T H E I N DEPE N DE N T B O OK C O3 ,

1 8 2 6 E V an Buren S t Ch i cago
-
. .
,
.

Who also carry the follow ing b ookS °

H i nts to Young Stu d ents of Oe

cult i sm L W Rogers . . 25 . P ostage 3 c . .

The Way Of In i t i at ion Ru d olf .

P ostage 1 0 0
Rays of Truth Bess i e Leo . P ostage 1 0 c
S eph ar i el on Astrology P ostage 1 0 0 .

Planetary Influe nces Bess i e Leo 4 5 Postage .

3C . . .